|
|
| (6 intermediate revisions by the same user not shown) |
| Line 3: |
Line 3: |
| | issue date = 07/23/1985 | | | issue date = 07/23/1985 |
| | title = Forwards Owners Data Rept for Inservice Insp & Vols 1 & 2 of 1984 Inservice Exam of Selected Class 1 & 2 Components & Sys of Salem Generating Station,Unit 2, as 90-day Inservice Insp Rept of Second Refueling | | | title = Forwards Owners Data Rept for Inservice Insp & Vols 1 & 2 of 1984 Inservice Exam of Selected Class 1 & 2 Components & Sys of Salem Generating Station,Unit 2, as 90-day Inservice Insp Rept of Second Refueling |
| | author name = MCNEILL C A | | | author name = Mcneill C |
| | author affiliation = PUBLIC SERVICE ELECTRIC & GAS CO. OF NEW JERSEY | | | author affiliation = PUBLIC SERVICE ELECTRIC & GAS CO. OF NEW JERSEY |
| | addressee name = MURLEY T E | | | addressee name = Murley T |
| | addressee affiliation = NRC OFFICE OF INSPECTION & ENFORCEMENT (IE REGION I) | | | addressee affiliation = NRC OFFICE OF INSPECTION & ENFORCEMENT (IE REGION I) |
| | docket = 05000311 | | | docket = 05000311 |
| Line 17: |
Line 17: |
|
| |
|
| =Text= | | =Text= |
| {{#Wiki_filter:Public Service Electric and Gas Company Corbin A. McNeill, Jr. Vice President | | {{#Wiki_filter:}} |
| -Public Service Electric and Gas Company P.O. Box236, Han cocks Bridge, NJ 08038 609 339-4800 Nuclear July 23, 1985 Dr. Thomas E. Murley, Regional Administrator U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission Region 1 631 Park Ave King of Prussia, PA 19406
| |
| | |
| ==Dear Dr. Murley:==
| |
| NINETY DAY REPORT INSERVICE INSPECTION SALEM GENERATING STATION UNIT NO. 2 DOCKET NO. 50-311 SECOND REFUELING (OCTOBER 4, 1985 -APRIL 18, 1985) This report is being submitted in accordance with Article IWA-6220 (b), Section XI of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. It consists of Form NIS-1, "Owners Data Report for Inservice Inspection", and Volumes 1 and 2 of the "1984 Inservice Examination of Selected Components at the Salem Generating Station, Unit No. 2," prepared by Southwest Research Institute.
| |
| If you have any questions, we would be pleased to discuss them with you. Attachments Sincerely, ---------------------8508160355 850723 PDR. ADOCK 05000311 G PDR C Mr. G. Dolan, Assistant Director New Jersey Department of Labor and Industry P
| |
| * o . box 1 5 0 3 , Labor and Industry Building Trenton, N.J. 08625 Mr. Donald c. Fischer (w/o attachment)
| |
| Licensing Project Manager Mr. Thomas J. Kenny (w/o attachment)
| |
| Senior Resident Inspector
| |
| !905 JUL 25 PM i: 3i' I -I
| |
| * i _,. .,--/l" FORM NIS-1 OWNER' DATA REPORT FOR. INSERVICE4'NSPECTIONS AS REQUIRED BY THE PROVISIONS OF THE ASME CODE RULES 1. Owner: Public Service Electric & Gas Co., 80 Park Plaza Newark, 07101 2. Plant: Salem Generating Station P.O. Box E, Hancock's Bridge, N.J. 08038 3. Plant Unit '2 4. Owner's Certificate of Authorization (if required)
| |
| N/A. 5. Commercial Service Date 10/13/81.
| |
| : 6. National Board Number forUnit N/A. 7. Examination Dates: 10/4/84 through 4/18/85. 8. *This examination report is for the second conducted in the first inspection period which ended 13, 1985. The first inspection is from October 13, 1981, to Ocotober 13, 1991. 9. Components Inspected.
| |
| MANUFACTURER STATION OR COMPONENTS OR MANUFACTURER OR INSTALLER PROVINCE NATIONAL APPURTENANCE OR INSTALLER SER. NO. NUMBER BOARD NO. #2 Reactor Combustion
| |
| -67201 Head -Vessel Engineering 67101 vessel N/A 20765 #21 Steam Westinghouse 1201 N/A 68-43 Generator Tampa Div. P.O. Box 19218 Tampa, FL 33616 #22 Steam Generator II II 1202 N/A 68-44 #23 Steam Generator II II 1004 N/A 68-11 #24 Steam Generator II II 1204 N/A 68-52 Page 1 of 28.
| |
| | |
| -, FORM NIS-1 OWNER'S DATA REPORT -FOR INSERVICE INSPECTIONS AS REQUIRED BY THE PROVISIONS OF THE ASME CODE RULES 1. owner: Public Service Electric & Gas Co., 80 Park Plaza Newark, N.J. 07101 2. Plant: Salem Generating Station P.O. Box E, Hancock's Bridge, N.J. 08038 3. Plant Unit 2 4. Owner's Certificate of Authorization (if required)
| |
| N/A. 5. Commercial Service Date 10/13/81.
| |
| : 6. National Board Number for Unit N/A. 7. Examination Dates: October 4, 1984, through April-18, l985 9. Components Inspected (cont'd).
| |
| COMPONENTS OR MANUFACTURER APPURTENANCE OR INSTALLER
| |
| #2 Pressur-Delta Southern MANUFACTURER OR INSTALLER SER. NO. 1211 izer Chemical Volume & Control _Piping System Containment Spray Piping System Mains team Piping Sys. Pressurizer Relief Piping Sys. Reactor Coolant Piping Sys. United Engineers
| |
| & Constructors (UE&C) 30 South 17th St., Phila. PA 19101 UE&C UE&C UE&C UE&C N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A Page 2 of 28 STATION OR PROVINCE NUMBER N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A NATIONAL BOARD NO. 68-48 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A
| |
| ' ( FORM NIS-1 OWNER' DATA REPORT FOR AS REQUIRED BY THE PROVISIONS OF THE ASME CODE RULES 1. owner: Public Service Electric & Gas Co., 80 Park Plaza Newark, N.J. 07101 2. Plant: Salem Generating Station P.O. Box E, Hancock's Bridge, N.J. 08038 3. Plant Unit 2 4. Owner's Certificate of Authoriza.tion (if required)
| |
| N/A. 5. Commercial Service Date 10/13/81.
| |
| : 6. National Board Number for Unit N/A. 7. Examination Dates: October 4, 1984, through April 18, 1985 . 9. Components Inspected* (cont'd).
| |
| MANUFACTURER STATION OR COMPONENTS OR MANUFACTURER OR INSTALLER PROVINCE APPURTENANCE OR INSTALLER SER. NO. NUMBER Residual Heat UE&C N/A N/A Removal Piping Sys. Steam Gen. UE.&C N/A N/A Feed Piping system Safety UE&C N/A N/A Injection Piping Sys. Page.3 of 28 NATIONAL BOARD NO. N/A N/A :N/A
| |
| : 1. FORM NIS-1 OWNER '-DATA REPORT b,OR AS REQUIRED BY THE PROVISIONS OF THE ASME CODE RULES 1. Owner: Public Service Electric & Gas Co., 80 Park Plaza Newark, N.J. 07101 2. Plant: Salem Generating Station P.O. Box E, . Hancock's Bridge, N.J. 08038 3. Plant Unit 2 4. Owner's Certificate of Authorization (if required)
| |
| N/A. 5. Commercial Service Date 10/13/81.
| |
| : 6. National Board Number for Unit N/A. *7. Examination Dates: October 14, 1984 through April 18, 1985 10. Abstracts of Examinations:
| |
| This report also contains augmented examinations required by Salem Technical Specifications and Regulatory Guides, Circulars, and bulletins issued by the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission.
| |
| Examinations were conducted by PSE&G as well as companies under contract to PSE&G. The following is a brief summary with further details found in the attached report and on file at the Salem Generating Station. Since nearly all inservice examination requirements can be found in Salem's Technical Specifications, this summary lists these requirements first arranged according to Tech. Spec. paragraph number followed by applicable NRC circulars and bulletins.
| |
| | |
| ===1.0 Technical===
| |
| | |
| Specification 4.0.5 -ASME XI The examinations conducted during this outage* completed the required number of examinations for the first inspection period of the first inspection interval as shown in the 10 year long term inspection plan. Page 4 of 28
| |
| | |
| -----------. ( FORM NIS-1 OWNER--DATA REPORT FOR AS REQUIRED BY THE PROVISIONS OF THE ASME CODE RULES 1. owner: Public Service Electric & Gas Co., 80 Park Plaza Newark, N.J. 07101 2. Plant: Salem Generating Station P.O. Box E, Hancock's Bridge, N.J. 08038 3. Plant Unit 2 4. Owner's Certificate of Authorization (if required)
| |
| N/A. 5. Commercial Service Data 10/13/81.
| |
| : 6. National Board Number for Unit N/A. 7. Examination Dates: October 4, 1984, through April 18, 1985 10. Examination Summary (Cont'd) 1.1 Southwest Research Institute (SwRI) -conducted thirty (30) ultrasonic, two (2) liquid penetrant, and three (3) visual examinations.
| |
| The examinations were conducted on selected welds on the Reactor Coolant, Residual Heat Removai, Safety Injection, Main Steam, Chemical and Volume Control, Feed Water, and Pressurizer Relief Systems. As a result of these examinations two (2)* nonconformarices
| |
| .. were reportd by SwRI: During the VT Examination of the bolting on valve 22RH4 a "1/8 ding" was noted on stud #14. The indication was evaluated by PSE&G as being caused by slight mechanical impact and found acceptable as is. Note: The 1/8" indication was not observed during the UT examination, revealing the depth to be insignificant.
| |
| Page 5 of 28
| |
| -----------
| |
| -* ' FORM NIS-1 OWNER-DATA b'OR INSERVIC.SPECTIONS AS REQUIRED BY THE PROVISIONS OF THE ASME CODE RULES 1. Owner: Public Service Electric & Gas Co., 80 Park Plaza Newark, N.J. 07101 2. Plant: Salem Generating Station P.O. Box E, Hancock's Bridge, N.J. 08038 3. Plant Unit 2 4. Owner's Certificate of Authorization
| |
| {if required)
| |
| N/A. 5. Commercial Service Data 10/13/81.
| |
| : 6. National Board Number for Unit N/A. 7. Exarnination Dates: October 4, 1984, through April 18, 1985 10. Examination summary {Cont'd) The other nonconformance reported by SwRI was on #24 Reactor Coolant Pump Flywheel.
| |
| An in-place examination of. Reactor Coolant Pump {RCP) flywheels, as specified in U.S. NRC Regulatory Guide 1.14, C, was performed on RCP flywheel Nos. 23 and 24. During the UT examination f the top surface of flywheel No. 24, one indication was observed and reported to PSE&G. The indication was as an having no throughwall depth and no areas with a 100-percent loss of backwall.
| |
| No reportable indications were observed RCP flywheel No. 23. 1.2 Visual Examinations of Supports 1.2.1 Catalytic, Inc. -Quality Control Group conducted visual examinations on {195) Nuclear Class I, {288) Nuclear Class II and {417) Nuclear Class III supports.
| |
| Page 6 of 28
| |
| ------------FORM NIS-1 OWNER-DATA REPORT FOR INSERVIC.SPECTIONS AS REQUIRED BY THE PROVISIONS OF THE ASME CODE RULES 1. Owner: Public Service Electric & Gas Co., 80 Park Plaza Newark, N.J. 07101 2. Plant: Salem Generating Station P.O. Box E, Hancock's Bridge, N.J. 08038 3. Plant Unit 2 4. Owner's Certificate of Authorization (if required)
| |
| N/A. 5. Commercial Service Data 10/13/81.
| |
| : 6. National Board Number for Unit N/A. 7. Examination Dates: October 4, 1984, through April 18, 1985 10. Examination Summary (Cont'd) Several discrepancies were found, i.e. wrong spring settings, rust, loose bolts, etc. Of those discrepancies that rendered the support inoperable (wrong spring settings), a deficiency report was generated and subsequently the spring settings were corrected.
| |
| NOTE: Work orders were written to correct-all other discrpancies not rendering the support inoperable.
| |
| All discrepancies have been corrected at this time. 1.3 Safety/Relief Valves 1. 3 .1 PSE&G Salem Maintenance Department conducted forty-four (44) Safety/Relief Valve Lift set tests, including all main steam safeties and various system relief valves. Several failures were noted -the valves either lifted high, low or leaked Page 7 of 28 FORM NIS-1 OWNER'.ATA REPORT FOR INSERVICE-SPECTIONS AS REQUIRED BY THE PROVISIONS OF THE ASME CODE RULES 1. owner: Public Service Electric & Gas Co., 80 Park Plaza Newark, N.J. 07101 2.
| |
| Salem Generating Station P.O. Box E, Hancock's Bridge, N.J. 08038 3. Plant Unit 2 4. owner's Certificate of Authorization (if required}
| |
| N/A. 5. Commercial Service Data 10/13/81.
| |
| : 6. National Board Number for Unit N/A. 7. Examination Dates: October 4, 1984, through April 18, 1985 10. Examination Sufilmary (Cont'd} 1. 3. 2 through. Deficiency reports were written on all valves that failed, and all were reset to their proper limits. As a further precaution all valves that failed will be tested again next outage in addition to the regular ASME Section XI sample. In addition to the safety/relief tests performed at Salem, the pressurizer relief valves (2PR3, 4 & 5) were sent to Laboratories (Huntsville, for testing. Two valves failed the "as received" test, one 13 pounds high, the other 3 pounds high. After the "as received" test all three (3) valves exhibited leakage. All valves were refurbished and tested satisfactorily.
| |
| I I . I FORM NIS-1 OWNEta DATA REPORT FOR AS REQUIRED BY THE PROVISIONS OF THE ASME CODE RULES 1. Owner: Public Service Electric & Gas Co., 80 Park Plaza Newark, N.J. 07101 2. Plant: Salem Generating Station P.O. Box E,. Hancock's Bridge, N.J. 08038 3. Plant Unit 2 4. Owner's Certificate of Authorization (if required)
| |
| N/A. 5. Commercial Service Data 10/13/81.
| |
| : 6. National Board Number for Unit N/A. 7. Examination Dates: October 4, 1984, through April 18, 1985 10. Examination Summary (Cont'd) 1.4 Service Pressure Leak Exams 1. 4. 1 As required by ASME Seeton XI, service pressure leak exams were performed by the Salem ISI Group with assistance from the PSE&G Maintenance Department and the Catalytic QC Group on the following systems: Reactor Coolant, Containment Spray, Residual Heat Removal, Safety Injection, Reactor Coolant Sample, Waste Drain Liquid, Chemical and Volume Control (Operations), Pressurizer Relief Piping, Spent Fuel Cooling, Service Water, Fire Protection, Component Cooling, Auxiliary Feed, Demineralized Water (Restricted), Steam Generator Blowdown, and Chemical and Volume Control (water recovery).
| |
| Page 9 of 28
| |
| * 1 FORM NIS-1 OWNER-DATA REPORT FOR INSERVIC-NSPECTIONS AS REQUIRED BY THE PROVISIONS OF THE ASME CODE RULES 1. Owner: Public Service Electric & Gas Co., 80 Park Plaza Newark, N.J. 07101 2. Plant: Salem Generating Station P.O. Box E, Hancock's Bridge, N.J. 08038 3. Plant Unit 2 4. Owner's Certificate of Authorization (if required)
| |
| N/A. 5. Commercial Service Data 10/13/81.
| |
| : 6. National Board Number for Unit N/A. 7. Examination Dates: October 4, 1984, through April 18, 1985 10. Examination Summary (Cont'd) The previously listed systems did not exhibit any excessive leakage. Of the leaks noted on the examinations, work orders were written to the Maintenance Department.
| |
| All leaks have been corrected at this time. 2.0 Technical Specification 4.4.6.0 -Stearn Tube eddy current inspection.
| |
| 2.1 Eddy current examinations-were conducted on 21 through 24 Stearn Generators this outage. The examinations were by Westinghouse Electric Corporation and coordinated by the Salem ISI group. 2.2 The following is a description of the eddy current Inspection on Unit 2's refueling outage. 2.2.1 A 100% eddy current Inspection was performed on #24 Stearn Generator, due to a previously identified primary to Page 10 of 28
| |
| ---------------
| |
| FORM NIS-1 DATA REPORT FOR INSERVICttNSPECTIONS AS REQUIRED BY THE PROVISIONS OF THE ASME CODE RULES 1. Owner: Public Service Electric & Gas Co., 80 Park Plaza Newark, N.J. 07101 2.
| |
| Salem Generating Station P.O. Box E, Hancock's Bridge, N.J. 08038 3. Plant Unit 2 4. Owner's Certificate of Authorization (if required)
| |
| N/A. 5. Commercial Service Data 10/13/81.
| |
| : 6. National Board Number for Unit N/A. 7. Examination DaEes: October 4, 1984, through April 18, 1985 10. Examination Summary (Cont'd) 2.2.2 secondary side leak. A helium leik inspection was performed to identify the location of the leaking tube (row 44 and column 33), which was confirmed by the Eddy Current examination.
| |
| Eddy current inspection of all periphery tubes including a random sample in. Stearn Generators 21 through 23 was performed.
| |
| These examinations were conducted due to the results of visual"exarninations of the steam* generator secondary side that identified lose debris and a previously identified lpss of coolant accident requiring actuation of safeguards (Ref: Tech. Spec.
| |
| Page 11 of 28 i
| |
| * 1
| |
| * FORM NIS-1 OWNER-DATA REPORT FOR INSERVIC.NSPECTIONS AS REQUIRED BY THE PROVISIONS OF THE ASME CODE RULES 1. Owner: Public Service* Electric & Gas Co., 80 Park Plaza Newark, N.J. 07101 2. Plant: Salem Generating Station P.O. Box E, Hancock's Bridge, N.J. 08038 3. Plant Unit 2 4. Owner's Certificate of Authorization (if required)
| |
| N/A. 5. Commercial Service Data 10/13/81 * . 6. National Board Number for Unit N/A. 7. Examination Dates: October 4, 1984, through April 18, 1985 10. Examination Summary (Cont'd) The results of the examinations are as follows: Tubes Probed #21 #22 #23 Hot/Cold Hot/Cold Hot/Cold Through U-Bend 23 23 23 Through Full Length 404 406 405 % of Indication Generator
| |
| #21 #22 #23 T.S. Classification
| |
| < 20% Imperfections 0 3 3 > 20-39% Degraded 3 .1 3 > 40% Defective
| |
| *l *4. 0 #24 Hot/Cold 187 3201 #24 9 4 1
| |
| * The >40% indications were caused by mechanical damage on Row 1 tubes caused by impingement of a tube 1ane blocking device. Page 12 of 28 FORM NIS-1 DATA REPORT FOR INSERVIC[ljNSPECTIONS AS REQUIRED BY THE PROVISIONS OF THE RULES 1. Owner: Public Service Electric & Gas Co.,. 80 Park Plaza Newark, N.J. 07101 2. Plant: Salem Generating Station P.O. Box E, Hancock's Bridge, N.J. 08038 3. Plant Unit 2 4. Owner's Certificate of Authorization (if required)
| |
| N/A. 5. Commercial.
| |
| Service Data 10/13/81.
| |
| : 6. National Board Number for Unit N/A. 7. Examination Dates: October 4, 1984, through April 18, 1985 10. Examination Summary (Cont'd) From the results, the following tubes were plugged: Generator
| |
| #21 #22 #23 1 4 0 #24 1 NOTE: In the Steam Generator's 21-24, the first five (5) and the last five (5) tubes in row 1 were mechanically plugged because of a generic wearing problem on the tubes, due to the vibration of the tube lane blocking device. At this time, the total number of tubes plugged in Salem Unit 2 Steam Generators are: Generator
| |
| # 21 #22 #24 Total No. of tubes plugged 10 12 **12. 11 ** One (1) tube identified in Steam Generator 23 with a 38% indication was plugged on a preventative maintenance justification.
| |
| Page 13 of 28 FORM NIS-1 REPORT FOR AS REQUIRED BY THE PROVISIONS Of THE ASME RULES 1. Owner: Public Service Electric & Gas 80 Park Plaza Newark, N.J. 07101 2. Plant: Salem Generating Station P.O. Box E, Hancock's Bridge, N.J. 08038 3. Plant Unit 2 4. Owner's Certificate of Authorization (if required)
| |
| N/A. 5. Commercial Service Data 10/13/81.
| |
| : 6. National Board Number for Unit N/A. 7. Examination Dates: October 4, 1984, through April 18, 1985 10. Examination Summary (Cont'd) 3.0 Technical Specification 4.4.11.l Reactor Coolant Pump Flywheel Examination
| |
| | |
| ===3.1 Summary===
| |
| Southwest Research Institute (SwRI) performed in-place examinations of 23 and 24 reactor coolant pump (RCP) flywheels as specified in u.s. NRC Reg. Guide 1.14 Article c. During the UT examination of the top surf ace of flywheel No. 24, one indication was observed and reported to PSE&G. The indication was resolved as an acceptable lamination having no throughwall depth and no area with a 100 percent loss of back wall. No reportable indications were observed on RCP flywheel.No.
| |
| : 23. 4.0 Technical Specification 4.4.11.2 Ultrasonic Examination of 21 Steam Generator Channel Head Cladding Page 14 of 28 FORM NIS-1 DATA REPORT FOR AS REQUIRED BY THE PROVISIONS OF THE ASME CODE RULES 1. Owner: Public Service Electric & Gas Co., 80 Park Plaza Newark, N.J. 07101 2
| |
| * Plant: Salem Generating Station P.O. Box E, . Hancock's Bridge, N.J. 08038 3. Plant Unit 2 4. Owner's Certificate of Authorization (if required)
| |
| N/A. 5. Commercial Service Data 10/13/81.
| |
| : 6. National Board Number for Unit N/A. 7. Examination Dates: October 4, 1984, through April 18, 1985 10. Examination Summary (Cont'd) 4.1 Summary Westinghouse Electric Corporation along with Nuclear Energy Services, conducted an Ultrasonic Examination on No. 21 Steam Generator Cladding.
| |
| The results of the examination compared to initial baseline and the first Inservice Inspection data indicated no change in the cladding crack being monitored.
| |
| -5.0 Technical Specification 4.6.l.2d, Containment Type "B" (Penetrations) and Type "t" (Valves) Leak Rate Testing. 5.1 Summary PSE&G Research Corp. under the field supervision of the Salem ISI group, conducted seventy (70) Type "B" tests and one hundred seventeen (117) type "C" tests. Page 15 of 28
| |
| " FORM NIS-1 OWNER'ttoATA REPORT FOR AS REQUIRED BY THE PROVISIONS OF THE ASME RULES 1. Owner: Public Service Electric & Gas Co., 80 Park Plaza Newark, N.J. 07101 2. Plant: Salem Generating Station P.O. Box E, Hancock's Bridge, N.J. 08038 3. Plant Unit 2 4. Owner's Certificate of Authorization (if required)
| |
| N/A. 5. Commercial Service Data 10/13/81.
| |
| : 6. National Board Number for Unit.N/A.
| |
| : 7. Examination Dates: October 4, 1984, throµgh April 18, 1985 10. Examination Summary (Cont'd) The results of these tests revealed several type "C" valve exceeding leak rate acceptance criteria, which were reworked to an acceptable condition, and one unique failure on an Electrical Penetration.
| |
| Disassembly of Electical Penetration
| |
| #2-3 revealed a cracked on the The bushing was replaced and tested A total as found leakage rate of 45,756 SCCM was measured through all containment penetrations.
| |
| 'After corrective maintenance, a .total as left leakage rate of 20,682 SCCM was measured through all valves individually (type C tests) and mechanical penetrations with . . resilient seals (type B tests). 6.0 Technical Specificaton 4.6.l.3b 100 1 and 130' Airlock Leak Rate Tests 6.1 Summary The PSE&G Research Corporation under the supervision of the Salem ISI Group performed Page 16 of 28 II FORM NIS-1 OWNER--DATA REPORT FOR INSERVIC41tNSPECTIONS AS REQUIRED BY THE PROVISIONS OF THE ASME CODE RULES 1. Owner: Public Service Electric & Gas Co., 80 Park Plaza Newark, N.J. 07101 Plant: Salem Generating Station P.O. Box E, Hancock's Bridge, N.J. 08038 3. Plant Unit 2 4. Owner's Certificate of Authorization (if required)
| |
| N/A. 5. Commercial Service Data 10/13/81.
| |
| : 6. National Board Number for Unit N/A. 7. Examination Dates: October 4, 1984, through April 18, 1985 10. Examination Summary (Cont'd) leak rate tests on the 100' and 130' personnel airlocks.
| |
| At this time the total leakage through the airlocks is 2,843 SCCM * . 7.0 Technical Specification 4.6.2.ld.l Containment Spray Flow Nozzle.Verification*
| |
| Test. 7.1 Summary The Salem ISI group performed the containment spray flow nozzle test utilizing the air flow method. The results of the test indicated all nozzles were unobstructed.
| |
| | |
| ===8.0 Technical===
| |
| | |
| Specification 4.7.9.(a) "Visual Inspection of and Mechanical Snubbers" 8.1 Summary Catalytic, Inc. QC Department with assistance from the Salem ISI Group visual examinations ort all mechanical snubbers.
| |
| No discrepancies were found that would effect Page 17 of 28 ..
| |
| ,. FORM NIS-1 OWNER-DATA REPORT FOR IN.SERVIC41tNSPECTIONS AS REQUIRED BY THE PROVISIONS OF THE ASME CODE RULES 1. Owner: Public Service Electric & Gas Co., 80 Park Plaza Newark, N.J. 07101 2. Plant: Salem Generating Station P.O. Box E, . Hancock's Bridge, N.J. 08038 3. Plant Unit 2 4. Owner's Certificate of Authorization (if required)
| |
| N/A. 5. Commercial Service Data 10/13/81.
| |
| : 6. National Board Number for Unit N/A. 7. Examination Dates: October 4, 1984, through April 18, 1985 10. Examination Summary (Cont'd) operability.
| |
| However, several minor indications were found such as minbr rust and attachment ends having washers missing. Work orders were issued, and deficient conditions were corrected.
| |
| The PSE&G ISI Group conducted .visual examinations on all hydraulic snubbers.
| |
| Several discrepancies were noted such as union leaks and a resevoir line hanger was not secured. These discrepancies were corrected by Catalytic, Inc. under the direction of the PSE&G Nuclear Construction Support Group. 9.0 Technical Specification 4.7.9 (c) "Functional Testing of Selected Hydraulic and Snubbers" 9.1 Summary -Hydraulic Snubbers Technical Specification
| |
| | |
| ====4.7.9 requires====
| |
| functional testing on 10% of the.total number Page 18 of 28 ._.,: I .'*I I *:I
| |
| ,, . FORM NIS-1 DATA REPORT FOR INSERVIC1"NSPECTIONS AS REQUIRED BY THE PROVISIONS OF THE ASME CODE RULES 1. Owner: Public Service Electric & Gas Co., 80 Park Plaza Newark, N.J. 07101 2. Plant: Salem Generating Station P.O. Box E, Hancock's Bridge, N.J. 08038 3. Plant Unit 2 4. Owner's Certificate of Authorization (if required)
| |
| N/A. 5. Commercial Service Data 10/13/81.
| |
| : 6. National Board Number for Unit N/A. 7. Examination Dates: October 4, 1984, through April 18, 1985 10. Examination Summary (Cont'd) of installed hydraulic snubbers, during each plant refueling outage. In addition, all snubbers which failed their previous functional test shall also be functionally tested. Accordingly seventeen (17) snubbers were tested.(see below): One (1) 200 kip main steam isolation valve (MSIV) hydraulic snubber. Sixteen (16) 1000 kip steam generator (s/g) hydraulic snubber. NOTE: 100% of the 1000 kip snubbers (sixteen, [16 each]) failed their previous functional test. Hydraulic snubber in-place functional testing was performed by Babcock and Wilcox, using an in-place hydraulic snubber testing machine developed by API (Asrnundsson-Potter Incorporated), formerly the Leen Company. Page 19 of 28 FORM NIS-1 OWNER--DATA REPORT FOR AS REQUIRED BY THE PROVISIONS OF THE RULES 1. Owner: Public Service Electric & Gas Co., 80 Park Plaza Newark, N.J. 07101 2. Plant: Salem Generating Station P.O. Box E, Hancock's Bridge, N.J. 08038 3. Plant Unit 2 4. Owner's Certificate of Authorization (if required)
| |
| N/A. 5. Commercial Service Data 10/13/81.
| |
| : 6. National Board Number for Unit N/A. 7. Examination Dates: October 4, 1984, through April 18, 1985 10. Examination Summary (Cont'd) The results of these tests the following:
| |
| One (1) 200 kip 1MSIV) snubber found acceptable
| |
| .* Eleven (11) 1000 kip (S/G) snubber found acceptable.
| |
| Five (5) 1000 kip (S/G) snubbers failed, due to snubbers exceeding the tension bleed rate requirements.
| |
| One (1) 1000 kip (S/G) snubber passed the functional test, but during testing was observed to be leaking hydrauic fluid from the valve block crossover.
| |
| The five failed snubbers and one snubber that was observed leaking hydraulic fluid were sent the Wyle Laboratories, Huntsville, Alabama for evaluation, refurbishment and retest. Page 20 of 28 FORM NIS-1 OWNE1tl DATA REPORT FOR INSERVIC..-rNSPECTIONS AS REQUIRED BY THE PROVISIONS OF THE RULES 1. Owner: Public Service Electric & Gas Co., 80 Park Plaza Newark, N.J. 07101 2. Plant: Salem Generating Station P.O. Box E, Hancock's Bridge, N.J. 08038 3. .Plant Unit 2 4. Owner's Certificate of Authorization (if required)
| |
| N/A. 5. Commercial Service Data 10/13/81.
| |
| : 6. National Board Number for Unit N/A. 7. Examination Dates: October 4, 1984, through April 18, 1985 10. Examination Summary (Cont'd) 9.2 Mechanical Snubbers Technical
| |
| | |
| ====4.7.9 requires====
| |
| functioncil testing on 10% of the total number of installed mechanical snubbers, during each Plant Refueling Outage. In addition, for each type of snubber that does not meet the acceptance criteria an additional 10% of that type of snubber shall be functionally tested. Wyle Laboratories was brought on site.with their mobile snubber testing trailer to perform the tests. The first (10%) sample included eleven (11) snubbers of which one (1) PSA-1/4 failed. Due to this failure, an additional 10% were selected for the testing. The second (10%) sample, a total of eight: (8) snubbers, were tested of which two (2) ( [l] PSA-1/2 and [l] PSA-3) failed. At this time, it was decided to test the remaining.
| |
| population of mechanical snubbers based on prior failure rates on small bore PSA mechanical snubbers.
| |
| Page 21 of 28 FORM NIS-1 OWNER'9DATA REPORT FOR AS REQUIRED BY THE PROVISIONS OF THE ASME ,RULES 1. Owner: Public Service Electric & Gas Co., 80 Park Plaza Newark, N.J. 07101 2. Plant: Salem Generating Station P.O. Box E, Hancock's
| |
| : Bridge, 08038 3. Plant Unit 2 4. Owner's Certificate of Authorization (if required)
| |
| N/A. 5. Commercial Service Data 10/13/81.
| |
| : 6. National Board Number for Unit N/A. 7. Examination Dates: October 4, 1984, through April 18, 1985 10. Examination Summary (Cont'd) Below is a summary of the results of the 100% functional testing of U.ni t 2' s mechanical snubbers:
| |
| Snubbers tested = 69 (100%) Snubbers failed = 9 , Model #'s of failures:
| |
| PSA 1/4 = 6 PSA 1/2 = 1 PSA 1 -0 PSA 3 = 2 PSA 10 = o** All failed snubbers were sent to Wyle Laborat6ries to Huntsville, Alabama for disassembling, evaluation, repair and retest. As of this date, PSE&G has not received back the evaluation (failure mechanism) on that were rejected.
| |
| PSE&G Engineering also performed a safety evaluation on failed snubbers, and it was concluded that the attached Page 22 of 28 FORM NIS-1 DATA REPORT FOR AS REQUIRED BY THE PROVISIONS OF THE RULES 1. Owner: Public Service Electric & Gas Co., 80 Park Plaza Newark, N.J. 07101 2. Plant: Salem Generating Station P.O. Box E, Hancock's Bridge, N.J. 08038 3. Plant Unit 2 4. Owner's Certificate of Authorization (if required)
| |
| N/A. 5. Commercial Service Data 10/13/81.
| |
| : 6. National Board Number for Unit N/A. 7. Examination Dates: October 4, 1984, through April 18, 1985 10. Examination Summary (Cont'd) piping and components were not impaired due to inoperability of the NOTE: PSE&G Engineering is also looking into deleting all small bore PSA mechanical snubbers (PSA-1/4 and l/2's) and upgrading to a larger capacity mechanical snubbers.
| |
| 10.0 NRC Circular 76-06 and NRC Bulletin 79-17 commitment to examine and/or flush stainless steel lines containing stagnant borated water. 10.1 Summary As part of the ISI program, SwRI performed ultrasonic examinations on ten (10) piping welds covered by this circular.
| |
| Quarterly chemistry samples were taken by the PSE&G Chemistry Department and the results transmitted to the Salem ISI Group as required by Maintenance Procedure Ml7G. Page 23 of 28
| |
| \ , '* FORM NIS-1 OWNER e DATA REPORT FOR INSERVIC.SPECTIONS AS REQUIRED BY THE PROVISIONS OF THE ASME CODE RULES 1. Owner: Public Service Electric & Gas Co., 80 Park Plaza Newark, N.J. 07101 2. Plant: Salem Generating Station P.O. Box E, .
| |
| Bridge, N.J. 08038 3. Plant Unit 2 4. Owner's Certificate of Authorization (if required)
| |
| N/A. 5. Commercial Service Data 10/13/81.
| |
| : 6. National Board Number for Unit N/A. 7. Examination Dates: October 4, 1984, through April 18, 1985 10. Examination Summary (Cont'd) There were no adverse findings in the examinations or tests conducted to the reporting requirement of this circular.
| |
| 11.0 NuReg 0578 -TMI Lessons Learned -ll.l Summary Perform Service Pressure Leak Exams on systems outside Containment, and take Corrective Actions necessary to reduce
| |
| * leakage as low as possible on systems likely to contain Radioactive liquids in the event of an incident.
| |
| The Salem ISI Group along with the members of Catalytic QC Group and the PSE&G Maintenance Department performed Pressure Leak Exams on the Safety Injection, Chemical Volume and Control, Residual Heat Removal and Containment Spray Systems. Page 24 of 28 I It. .. FORM NIS-1 OWNE-DATA REPORT FOR INSERVI&NSPECTIONS AS REQUIRED BY THE PROVISIONS OF THE ASME CODE RULES 1. Owner: Public Service Electric & Gas Co., 80 Park Plaza Newark, N.J. 07101 2. Plant: Salem Generating Station P.O. Box E, -Hancock's Bridge, N.J. 08038 3. Plant Unit i 4. Owner's Certificate of Authorization (if required)
| |
| N/A. 5. Commercial Service Data 10/13/81.
| |
| : 6. National Board Number for Unit N/A. 7 .-Examination Dates: October 4, 1984, through April 18, 1985 10. -Examination Summary (Cont'd) In addition, PSE&G Research Corp. under the direction of the Salem ISI Group conducted the Waste Gas System Integrated Leak Rate rest in accordance with Maintenance Procedure Mlle. There-were no adverse findings in the examinations or tests conducted relative to this bulletin.
| |
| 12.0 NRC Bulletin 79-13 Steam Generator Feedwater Nozzle Cracking, Follow-up_
| |
| 12.1 Summary Magnaflux Quality Services under the direction of the Salem ISI Group performed Radiography on all four Steam Generator Nozzle to Piping Welds. The radiographs were for any cracking, and were compared to radiographs taken previously.
| |
| The results of the examination were satisfactory.
| |
| Page 25 of 28
| |
| .. , ,
| |
| * FORM NIS-1 OWNER-DATA REPORT FOR INSERVIc&sPECTIONS AS REQUIRED BY THE PROVISIONS OF THE ASME CODE RULES 1. Owner: Public Service Electric & Gas Co., 80 Park Plaza Newark, N.J. 07101 2. Plant: Salem Generating Station P.O. Box E, . Hancock's Bridge, N.J. 08038 3. Plant Unit 2 4. Owner's Certificate of Authorization (if required)
| |
| N/A. 5. Commercial Service Data 10/13/81.
| |
| : 6. N,ational Board Number for Unit N/A. 7. Examination Dates: October 4, 1984, through April 18,-1985 10. Examination Summary (Cont'd) 13.0 NRC Bulletin 82-02 -Degradation of Threaded Fasteners in the Reactor Coolant Pressure Boundary.
| |
| 13.l Summary Due to this bulletin, all steam generator primary manway closure bolts were examined in accordance with the following:
| |
| Prior to performing the visual and magnetic particle examinations, the bolts were modified by Catalytic, Inc. by milling the bolt head top surface for ultrasonic bolt torque measurement.
| |
| These bolts were visually .examined (Cataltyic, QC) with no recordable indications, and then magnetic particle examined (Magnaflux Quality Services), which showed a repeatable indication on the bolt shank on 90% of all bolts. This indication was determined to be due to the vise used in the milling process described above. An acceptable liquid penetrant examination Page 26 of 28 :*.*:.
| |
| FORM NIS-1 OWNE-DATA REPORT FOR INSERVIC-NSPECTIONS AS REQUIRED BY THE: PROVISIONS OF THE ASME CODE RULES 1. Owner: Public Service 8lectric & Gas Co., 80 Park Plaza Newark, N.J. 07101 2. Plant: Salem Generating Station P.O. Box E, Hancock's Bridge, N.J. 08038 3. Plant Unit 2 4. Owner's Certificate of Authorization (if required)
| |
| N/A. 5. Commercial Service Data 10/13/81.
| |
| : 6. National Board Number for Unit N/A. 7. Examination Dates: October 4, 1984, through April 18, 1985 10. Examination Summary (Cont'd) (Catalytic, QC) was performed which showed these indications had no significant depth. Three (3) bolts showed a linear indication on the bolt shank circumferentially due to bolt handling (Reference*:
| |
| DR# MT-84-128).
| |
| These bolts (23-H-15, 24-H-l, and 24-H-8) scraped and replaced by new bolts. No other reportable indications were observed during the examinations.
| |
| The reactor codlant pump main flange bolts were also visually examined in place by the PSE&G Maintenance Department and the ISI Group. No discrepancies were noted. Page 27 of 28 I
| |
| * I . ! *. i I 1** " .. -.. -FORM NIS-1 OWNER.DATA REPORT FOR INSERVIC.NSPECTIONS I " It, '"l 1. AS REQUIRED BY E PROVISIONS OF THE ASME DE RULES 1. 2. 3
| |
| * 4. 5.' 6. 7. Owner: Public Service Electric & Gas Co., 80 Park Pfaza Newark, N.J. 07101 Flant: Salem Generating Station P.O. Box E, Hancock's
| |
| : Bridge, 08038 Plant Unit 2 Owner's Certificate of Authorization (if required)
| |
| N/A. Commercial Service Date 10/13/81.
| |
| National Board Number for Unit N/A. Examination Dates: October 4, 1984, through . April. 18, 1985. We certify that the statements made up in this report are correct and the examinations and corrective measures taken conform to the rules of the ASME Code, Section XI. Date LJ;. 'if', 19 85 Signed PSE&G -Owner (/ Certificate of Authorization No. (if applicable)
| |
| N/A Expiration Date CERTIFICATE OF INSERVICE INSPECTION I, *the undersigned, holding a val id comni:lss ion issued by the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors and/or the State or Province of New Jersey and employed by Lumberman's Mutual Casualty Company, . Long Grove, Illinois, have inspected the components described in this Owner's Data Report during the period 10/4/84 to 4/18/85 and state that to the best of my knowledge and belief the Owner has performed examinations and taken corrective measures described in this Owners' Data Report in accordance with the requirements of the ASME Code, Section XI. . By signing this 6ertificate neither the Inspector nor his employer makes any warranty, or implied, concerning the and corrective measures described in this Owner's Data Report. Furthermore, neither the Inspector nor his employer shall be liable in any manner for any personal injury or property damage or a loss of any kin(l arising from or connected with this inspecti6n.
| |
| Date Commissions Page 28 of 28 National Board, State, Province and No.
| |
| VOLUME I FINAL REPORT WITH APPENDICES
| |
| -. SwRI Project 7255 Prepared for Public Service Electric and Gas .Company 80 Park Place O. Box 570 Newark, New Jersey 07101
| |
| * March 1985 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SAN ANTONIO HOUSTON.
| |
| ** < *i . **
| |
| * Procedure No./Rev.
| |
| Dev. 4 .SwRI -NDT-600-3 I 61 Dev. 15 SwRI-NDT-600-6/22 . Dev. 8 SwRI-NDT-600-15/57
| |
| *Dev. 10 SwRI-NDT:..600"".'26/5 Dev. 1 SwRI-NDT-600-30/16.
| |
| Devs. 7*& 8 Dev. 1 Dev *. 1 .SwRI-NDT-600-37/5 Dev. 5 Dev. 14 SwRI-NDT-900-1/50 APPENDIX D SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NONDESTRUCTIVE TESTING*PROCEDURES Table of Contents Title Liquid .Penetrant Examination Color Contrast*
| |
| Method . Manual Ultrasonic.Examination of Pressure*
| |
| Piping Welds Manual Ultrasonic Examination of Reactor Coolant Pump Flywheels Manual Ultrasonic Examination of Pressure Vessel Welds Manual Ult.rasonic Examination of Thin Wall Vessel* Welds Manual Ultrasonic Examination of Welds in Heat Exchangers Manual Ultrasonic Examination of Pressure Vessel Welds Greater than 0.4 and Less Than 2.5 Inches in* Thickness*
| |
| Manual Ultrasonic Examination of Studs and Bolts Greater Than One Inch to Less Than Two Inches in Manual Ultrasonic Examination of Hexagonal Nuts Manual Ultrasonic Examination of Thin Wall*Piping Welds Visual Examination of Nuclear Reactor Components by Direct or Remote Viewing D-i
| |
| * . _i I._,. :yt::Y SIT!: PROCEDURE DEV1A TlON PS1 CJ Salem, O'nit 2 ISi :I PROC!CURE/REVISION NO._ Z00-1/56 OEYIATION NO. OEVIATION PAGE NO.: OATEREQUESTm:
| |
| EXAMINATION PeillOO: < <:::'\ 4 1 1 3 l October 1984 1984/85
| |
| "'\,. 1 Sa:TIONISJ AffEC, EQ: PRCC!CURE?AGSSJ:
| |
| s* 3 OF: 8 . . . All liquid penetrant to be perfonied in accordance with this procedure. . . CEVIATION:
| |
| It iS nlQU9lnd tiw uie sita'<<in below in me aaow be clftimma f1'arn as toilowa 1119 uac:: -_ ....
| |
| grapaeea. sl'laGI l'ft8¥ be u..a if fi Change *the foutth paragraph under 5. 2 to read as follows: brated and Equipment used to measure surface temperature shall have been and shall display a valid calibration tag as required by !his change is necessaJ;Y-to reflec'C the aewer temperature requirements.
| |
| SwAI F<JRM n:-
| |
| --------------------------------------------
| |
| -** L 1ide SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTlTUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERA TING PROCEDURE LIQUID PENETRANT EXAMINATION COLOR CONTRAST METHOD e;:e:r:cnvtTY ANO APPROVAL.
| |
| SwRI-NDT-200-1 Revision 56 June 1982 Page 1 of 8-Rt!'lision
| |
| -56 of this i::iroc:adura became effec::ivo on 6 /21 / 82 Other revisions of the baa d6cument may be_ @ffec:jve e.t1ncurrentfy.
| |
| SA. Approvals wrmen Bv . * ,, .
| |
| 0He Teennical Ar1iew Manager of a.A. ( The following information may be used for c:onvenienc:a.
| |
| Co letion of this i::iomon is not mandatory.
| |
| Oaviation Na. Cate Ettec:ive
| |
| ?rocedurf!I Seaion(s)
| |
| Affected Notes:
| |
| QA-o.QA-0
| |
| ' .-. SOUTHWESTRESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE
| |
| ,--' SwRI-NDT-200-1 Revision 56 June 1982 .Page 2 of 8 ...... , ,*_,,,....
| |
| *--..... , ... ,,_...,., ,:, .... ' .. LIQUID PEN:E'nWrr.
| |
| EXAMINATION COLOR CONTRAST METHOD ' ' ,*I ' i i ' ' . . . l. SwRI-NDT.;;200-1 PURPOSE ,.. .. '** * .... : ..... ;:-..... . '* .. . ' -... ;* This procedure provides the technica1.:1nformation required to ensure proper liquid penetrant examination of nonporqus austenitic or carbon steel),mat'erials in accordance
| |
| *'with the applicable "ASME ''Boiler and Pressure Vessel. Codes. '*: . .:-* * * ., ... * ' . 3. 4. SCOPE AND APPLICATION
| |
| .. *-. .. ---......
| |
| (1) The *:color contrast method 01: ''liquid penetrant examiiiadon shall be 'employea as' specified in this' :p*rocedure for detection" of surfac'e discontinuities in austenitic or carbon steel material * -., *-t* (2) Components and welds to be examined are specified in the applicable SwRI Examination Plan * . £ .. : APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS (1) ASME Boiler.and Pressure Vessel Code, Section XI, 1974 *Edition, with Addenda through Summer 1975, "Rules for Inservice of Nuclear Power .Plant Components" * ;,* ' * .::*; -.:.... : ..
| |
| _!
| |
| --* ::*-,.r. *. (2) -ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section *1974 Edition with Addenda through Summer 197 5, "Nondestructive Examination" . . . " 1: J . ;, . (3) *swRI Nuclear Quality Assurance Program Manual (NQAPM) .. !' 3.1 Applicable Examination.Record
| |
| .::*,. SwRI-NDTR Form *No.:::11-n, revision dated 1-3-79 RESPONSIBIL'ITY:.
| |
| i***
| |
| .. -,-;:. ( 1) The DireC't'C1r of the Dep*a*rtmeilt**
| |
| of:* Engineering.
| |
| Services,_
| |
| Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division, shall'be responsible for the preparation, review' approval, and contr,ol 'of this procedure.
| |
| (2) The Project. Manager shall be responsible for the implementation of this procedure in accordance with the NQAPM specified in the applicable SwRI Project .Plan. *-(3) The examiner shall be responsible for implementing the requirements of this procedure. , SwRI Form QA 3"2 * ** * ***
| |
| I I ** .... '**. * -* 'i ";. . r '. I SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-200-1 Revision 56 i June 1982 'NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 3 of .8 .. ; **i_ ... _,' (4) The Manager of the Support ana Administration Section, Quality Assurance Systems and.Engineering Division, shall be responsible for storage of records genera:t-ed in accordance with this procedure.
| |
| : 5. PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT 5 *. 1 *.* .*c:: ,
| |
| !
| |
| performing shall be:
| |
| in accordance with SwRI NQAP 11-1, "Special Process Control." . . ** 5.2 Material/Equipment Certification The penetrant materials .qsed shall be certified*
| |
| sulfur content and total haiogens in accordance ASTM D-129-64 and AS.nt *D-808-63.
| |
| The residual amount of or halogens shall not exceed 1% by weight * : ! .. ' ' ... '-* Certified reports for all surface contact materials to be used for penetrant examinations, giving batch numbers and analysis results, shall be obtained from the supplier.
| |
| Copies of* the certified repcfrts *shall be retained with the examination records. \ Equipment used to measure surface
| |
| *shall: have been . calibrated and certified in accordance with the applicable revision of SwRI Nuclear ?rojects Operating Procedure llI-PM-104.:r" k=. * <.:-,y : 5.3 Materials and Equipment
| |
| _1 * * *,. . ' ' The following materials and equipment shall be used for examinations performed in accordance with this
| |
| ... ::.;_-
| |
| :..cc SwRI Form QA 3-2 'I ............
| |
| _,,,,,_ ... (1) Pre*cleaner
| |
| -
| |
| Type SKC.'.9S _
| |
| -; .. t ..if (2) Penetrant
| |
| -Spotcheck Type SKL-HF SKL-HF /S (3) (4) Penetrant Remove1-"_
| |
| -.
| |
| Type_ S1'C.-;-S*
| |
| *:; ,D_eveloper
| |
| -Spotcheck>>
| |
| fype SKD-S -(5) Quicktemp SX-666 .. :. " :'* :.*. l i i i --------------
| |
| ; . SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE
| |
| | |
| ===5.4 Safety===
| |
| Precautions SwRI-NDT-200-1 Revision 56 June 1982 Page 4 of 8 Safety precautions in accordance with instructions furnished with each manufacturer's penetrant material shall be observed.
| |
| Highly volatile solvents shall be used cautiously since the vapors may be toxic and the liquids may irritate the skin. Extreme care should be exercised in_ handling highly flammable solvents * . . _6. EXAMINATION METHOD 6.1 Surface Condition Unless otherwise specified by the customer, all penetrant tions shall be *performed on components in the final surface condition. surface to be examined shall be free from scale, slag, dirt, grease, weld spatter, oil, paint, or any.other extraneous matter that would obscure surface openings or otherwise interfere with the examination.
| |
| CAUTION Blasting with shot or dull sand may peen discontinuities on the surface and shall not be used. NOTE Where surface conditions are not in accordance with Paragraph 6.1 and tion is not feasible, SwRI will conduct the examination only at the request of the customer.
| |
| The specific surface condition and its probable effect on the examination shall be noted on the SwRI Liquid Penetrant
| |
| _Examination Record. 6.2 Preexamination Cleaning The surface to be examined and adjacent areas within 1 inch shall be thoroughly washed with precleaner in such a manner that foreign material and contaminants are remo*red.
| |
| The examination surface shall then be wiped dry with a lint-free cloth or absorbent paper, allowing a minimum of 5 minutes for complete evaporation.
| |
| SwRI Form QA 3-2 ** **
| |
| * **** SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE .-NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE
| |
| | |
| ===6.3 Temperature===
| |
| | |
| Readings SwRI-NDT-200-1 Revision 56 June 1982 Page 5 of 8 * .. ,, After preexamination cleaning and before application of penetrant, the examination*
| |
| surface temperature shall be measured and recorded on the SwRI Liquid Penetrant Examination Record. The serial number of the thermometer used, shall be recorded on the SwRI Liquid Penetrant ExaminaHon Record. ' 6.4 Application of Penetrant The penetrant shall be applied by brushing or by spraying, shall evenly cover all of the surface being examined, and shall be taken from a pressurized container to ensure its purity. follows: The allowable minimum and maximum penetrant dwell times shall. be as C t T t (OF) omponen empera ure 60-70 . 71-90 91-100 101-125 Dwell Time (Minutes) 20-30 10-30 10-20 10-15 When examinations are to be performed on components whose tempera-... , ture is below 60°F or above 125°F, this procedure shall be qualified in accordance with the requirements of Section V, Article 6, Subarticle T-680. The penetrant shall not be allowed to dry. If drying occurs, the penetrant shall be removed and the application process repe*ated.
| |
| | |
| ===6.5 Removal===
| |
| of Excess Penetrant Initially, the excess penetrant shall be removed by wiping the sur-, face with clean, dry, lint-free cloths or a.bsorbent paper until most traces of excess penetrant have been removed. l A clean, dry, lint-free cloth or absorbent paper shall then be moistened with penetrant remover, and the surface shall be wiped lightly until all remaining traces of excess penetrant have been removed. Extreme care shall . be employed to avoid the use of an excessive amount of remover in order to preclude the removal of penetrant from discontinuities.
| |
| The surface shall not be flushed or receive direct application of remover prior to the application of the developer.
| |
| SwRI Form QA 3-2 i' I .i *; . SOUTHWEST RES*EARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE
| |
| | |
| ===6.6 Drying===
| |
| SwRI-NDT-200-1 Revision 56 June 1982 Page 6 of 8 The surface shall be completely dry prior to application of the developer.
| |
| Drying time shall be a minimum of 5 minutes to a maximum of 30 minutes after the excess penetrant has been removed. 6.7 Application of Developer*
| |
| The wet developer shall be applied by spraying from a pressurized
| |
| * , . container.
| |
| *;'--* . ,, .. '! After sufficient agitation of the pressurized container to ensure that the particles in suspension are dispersed, a smooth, uniform layer of the suspended powder shall be sprayed onto the surface. The developer shall be used sparingly.
| |
| The proper developer ness will dry to a thin, translucent layer. If the coating is too thick, it may mask indications.
| |
| Final interpretation of indications shall be made a of 7 minutes to a maximum of 30 minutes after the developer has been applied
| |
| * 7. EXAMINATION . 7.1 .Examination Areas Components, parts, and methods of examination shall be as specified in ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section XI, Tables IWB-2600 and IWC-2600.
| |
| The e-x;amination area for circumferential and longitudinal welds shall be the weld and adjacent base material for a distance of lt to either side of the weld fusion line. The examination area for branch connections shall include the weld and base material for a distance of lt from the weld fusion line on the main run pipe and at least 2 inches of the base material along the branch run. The examination area for support attachments shall include the weld and base material of the main run pipe for a distance of lt from the weld fusion line, and the base material of the support attachment for a distance of two times the support thickness from the weld fusion line. '**SwRI Form QA 3*2 -.*. ' * *
| |
| * * ** SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE
| |
| ...NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE SwRI-NDT-200-1 Revision 56 June 1982 Page 7 of 8 If the base material thickness is less than 1/2 inch, the tion area shall include the weld and adjacent base material for a distance of 1/2 inch on each side of the weld fusion line. Examinations shall be performed by placing the eye within 24 lnches of the surface to be examined and at an angle not less than 30 degrees to the surface to be examined.
| |
| In, addition to general lighting, additional tion of the examination area shall be provided at right and oblique angles to expose indications.
| |
| The illumination shall be adequate to ensure no loss of sensitivity.
| |
| If the examination area is sufficiently large to preclude complete examination within the prescribed times, the surface shall be examined in suitable increments.
| |
| | |
| ===7.2 Postexamination===
| |
| | |
| Cleaning The developer and penetrant shall be removed by wiping the surface thoroughly with cloths saturated with a suitable solvent. Spraying directly on the examination areas with pressurized containers shall be allowed for examination cleaning.
| |
| The surface shall then be wiped dry with clean, lint-free cloths or absorbent paper. 7.3 Reexamination Indications which are believed to be nonrelevant shall be reexamined to verify whether or not actual defects are present. Surface conditioning may precede the reexamination.
| |
| Nonrelevant indications and broad areas of tation which. would mask indications are unacceptable.
| |
| : 8. RECORDING.CRITERIA
| |
| | |
| ===8.1 Welds===
| |
| and Base Material Indications shall be recorded in accordance with the techniques outlined in the applicable revision of SwRI Nuclear Projects Operating cedure IX-FE-116.
| |
| The following indications shall be tecorded on the SwRI Liquid Penetrant Examination Record and reported to the customer:
| |
| SwRI Form QA 3-2
| |
| | |
| *.
| |
| I ' . i -i"l..,...
| |
| .... ...
| |
| .*
| |
| ! i ' ........ .._ ............ . i I ;*...,*\.
| |
| SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE (1) Any cracks and linear indications SwRI-NDT-200-1 Revision 56 June 1982 Page 8 of 8 (2) Rounded indications with dimensions greater than 1/16 inch (3) Four or more rounded indications in a line separated by 1/16 inch or less, edge to edge (4) Ten or more rounded indications in any 6 square inches of surface, with the major dimensions of this area not to exceed 6 inches and with the area taken in the most unfavorable location relative to the indications being evaluated (5) When conditions limit the area of examination, the limitations shall be recorded.
| |
| EVALUATION
| |
| * Evaluation of reportable indications shall be the responsibility of the -customer, or the customer's representative, in accordance with Section XI, Article IWA-3000, of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. The applicable
| |
| ** year and Addenda of the Code shall be as specified in Paragraph 3.(1) of this _procedure.
| |
| : 10. RECORDS The customer shall receive-copies of documents generated in accordance with this procedure in the examination report. Documents generated in accordance with this procedure shall be stored and retained as a portion of the examination report. The examination report shall be stored by the Manager of the Support and Administration Section, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division, in the Data Storage Facility for the period specified by the contractual agreement with the customer. . *i __ ,.... ... , ** 1: .... ...-.. h SwRI Form QA 3-2 *
| |
| * **** *** _.:.;
| |
| PROCEDURE DEV1A TlON Salem Uni!: 2 ISi 3 600-3/61 . C'EVIA TlCN NC. CA T5 REQUESTm:
| |
| EXAMINATION 15 ,-Sa:TICNCSJ AFFEC* ED: _:==:;:::=i
| |
| _C'EVIATICN PAGi NC.: l 3 1 November 1984 PACca:iURE PAGSSJ: 1984/85 i .. !4 a o 3, s, 6 & a
| |
| * 3 5' 6' 19' 2 0 & 2 7 Manual ultrasonic exam1nad.aus ta be performed in. accordance nth this procedure shall be affected by this deviation.
| |
| i I f. !-; It tnar tN snciwrt i.aw in tne aaaw be dll'Mmll tram aa tcllawa luse
| |
| -.odiDD!msn...n-.o.u..aif11*
| |
| ¥1: ; It.em Change 3.1: Revisicn.
| |
| Date fo7: SwRI-NDTR For.n 17-19 is Change S
| |
| * 4 ( 4) to read as f al.laws : ( 4) 'Iha nominal angle-beam.
| |
| shear-wave searc:h unit: fTequency for examfnat:icn of austen.itic piping shall be as follows: Nominal Freguensz 2.2.S MEz 1.5 MRz 1.5 MEz 1.5 MEz Change S
| |
| * 4 (b) to read as follows : (b) Angle-Beam Namin.al Product:iou Material Thiclcn.ess l.O" or less 0.4" to 2.0" 0
| |
| * 7S " to 4
| |
| * 0 '' 2.0" ca S.O" Search Unit: Si.ze l/4" Round, l/ 4" lC l/4" 3/8" Round, 3/S'' x 3/8" . l/2" Rcund, l/2" x l/2" 3/4" Round, l/2" lC l" Nominal Search Unit Size l/4" x l/4", l/4" Rou:id 3/ 8" x 3/ 8", 3/ 8" Round l/2" x l/2", l/2" Round l/2" x l", 3/4" ROuna \ ' ' -I 'Ihese changes are necessary ta clarify ehe conect: calihrat:ion verification
| |
| \ . and recalibrat:iou methods an.d ta verify the pnsence of the calibration re.flec:ors. -t -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------!-----. j SwPU FORM .. f 1 f
| |
| .. Add 6.3.l to read as follows:
| |
| Oeviacion l5 Page 2 of 3 Verification of Reflectors at Sc.annins Soeed The e%aminer shall verify cha presence of the calibration reflector at scanning speed. NOT! -* It is nae necessary to assure that this confirms the signal amplitude ac l00% of reference tevel, but merely to demcnstrace that the signal from the calibration reflectors are readily observable at scanning speed. The f oliowing statement shall be documented on the SwlU c.alibration Record Sheec and initialed: "Ca.libration t"aflectors tiave been veri£iecl.
| |
| at sc.ann_ing spe!!d." 6. Change 6.4.l to read as follows: Sweep Range and DAC Curve Verification Sweep range calibration shall be verified on the appropriate reference block; and DAC curve *calibration, if applicable, shall be verified on the appropriate calibration block: (l) Prior to a series of examinations (2) With any substitution of the same type and length of search unit cable (3) With any substitution utilizing the same type of power source; e.g., a change* of batteries (4) At least every 4 hours during the examination (5) At the completion of a series of examinations (6) Whenever the validity of the calibration is in doubt Change (l) of 6.4.3 to read as follows: (l) Search unit wedge or transducer
| |
| .... ** *
| |
| * _*1
| |
| * SwR.I-NDT-600-3/61 Deviation 15 Page 3 of 3 Indications greater than 50% of the reference level attributable to etry shall be recorded only once, even if the amplitude of the indication tuates above and below the required recording amplitude along the weld. These indications shall be investigated by a Level II or a Level III examiner to determine the shape, identity, and location of the reflector.
| |
| If indications, which have been recorded as geometry, have been gated and found to be nongeometric reflectors, the entire weld shall be reexam-* ined, recording all nongeometric reflectors and other reflectors not previously recorded at least once *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-3 Revision 61 -R: ,
| |
| * NUCLEAR PROJECTS August 1983 , I* ,, " . OPERATING PROCEDURE
| |
| .,---Page 1 of 28 TI tie HANUAL ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION OF PRESSURE PIPING WELDS EFFECTIVITY ANO APPROVAi..
| |
| Clevision 61 of this procedure became effective on 11 Aug=*.]'983
| |
| * *other revisions of the base document may be effective concurrently.
| |
| l SA Approvals QLL Written Bv Cate Technical Review Date 8/8/!d3 //;, //J! i-A ' '5
| |
| * Manager of 0.A. Cate ii"t"'o;J
| |
| .. Data (1/f/L,. -.J (_Lg£H fJruJv 1/Ji /u '} !;11 #J/,t ' f' / r The following information may be used for convenience.
| |
| of this portion is not mandatory.
| |
| Deviation No. Date Effective Procedure Section(sl Affected Notes: s .. Rt Form QA-1.0A*O SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-3 Revision 61 August 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 2 of 28 MANUAL ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION OF PRESSURE PIPING WELDS SwRI-NDT-600-3
| |
| : 1. PURPOSE This procedure provides the technical information and detailed steps necessary to ensure a complete and accurate manual ultrasonic examination of pressure piping welds, and the adjacent base material, in accordance with the applicable ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes. 2. SCOPE AND APPLICATION Pressure piping welds and the adjacent base material in the nominal ness range of greater than 0.4 to 5.0 inches shall be examined in accordance with this procedure.
| |
| Manual, contact, pulse-echo, shear-wave angle-beam, and longitudinal-wave straight-beam ultrasonic techniques shall be utilized for the examination of clad or unclad piping welds and adjacent base material.
| |
| * Welds to be examined shall be circumferential and longitudinal pipe welds and butt and fillet welds of support attachments and branch pipe connections as specified in the applicable SwRI Examination Plan. 3. APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS (1) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section XI, 1974 Edition, with Addenda through Summer 1975, "Rules for Inservice Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components" (2) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section V, 19_74 Edition, with Addenda through Summer 1975, "Nondestructive Examination," with the exception of the following: (a)
| |
| * SwRI Form QA 3*2 Subparagraph T-533.l(a) of Article 5, Section V, requires the basic calibration block for production material thickness (t) up to and including 1 inch to be 3/4 inch or t. Paragraph 5.3 of this procedure requires the basic calibration block to be either t, no more than 25% less than t, or closer in thickness to the production material than the 3/4-inch alternate ness allowed by Article 5 for production material thicknesses up to and including 1 inch. This exception will assure a more accurate calibration than the Article 5 basic calibration block design allowed by Code. * * *
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-3 Revision 61 .August 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE
| |
| ..-Page 3 of 28 (b) Subparagraph T-535.l(d) of Article 5 states that transfer (attenuation compensation) be accomplished between the tion material and basic calibration block and a correction made for the difference.
| |
| Paragraph 7.5.1 of this procedure describes the method used to conduct attenuation measurements.
| |
| These attenuation measurements shall be recorded and ered during analysis and evaluation of indications.
| |
| No attempt shall be made by the examiner to compensate for observed differences before or during the examinations.
| |
| (3) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, 1974 Edition with Addenda through Summer* 1975 "Welding and Brazing Qualifications**
| |
| (4) SwRI Nuclear Quality Assurance Program Manual (NQAPM) 3.1 Calibration and Examination Records SwRI-NDTR Form No. 4. RESPONSIBILITY 17-18 17-19 17-25 17-48 17-49 Revision Date 7-31-75 3-14-79 3-14-79 5-9-77 5-9-77 (l) The Director of the Department of Engineering Services, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division, shall be responsible for the preparation, review, approval, and control of this procedure.
| |
| (2) The Project Manager shall be responsible for the implementation of this procedure in accordance with the NQAPM specified in the cable SwRI Project Plan. (3) The examiner shall be responsible for implementing the requirements of this procedure.
| |
| (4) The Manager of the Support and Administration Section, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division, shall be responsible storage of records generated in accordance with this procedure
| |
| * SwRI Form QA 3-2 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PR.OJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE
| |
| : 5. PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT
| |
| | |
| ===5.1 Personnel===
| |
| | |
| Certification SwRI-NDT-600-3 Revision 61 August 1983 Page 4 of 28 Personnel performing examinations shall be certified in dance with SwRI NQAP 11-1, "Special Process Control." 5.2 Reference Block Reference blocks used for screen distance calibration and cation shall be of the same material as the production material; i.e., stainless steel or carbon steel, and shall be one of the following:
| |
| (1) SwRI Half-Round, (2) AWS Type DC, or (3) IIW. 5.3 Basic Calibration Block for Circumferential, Longitudinal, Support Attachment, and Branch Pipe Connection Welds Side-drilled basic calibration hole reflectors, in accordance with Section V of the ASME. Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, shall be placed in a block manufactured from material of the same or equivalent grouping as the production material as identified in Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. P-numbers P-1, P-3, P-4, and P-5 shall be considered equivalent for the purposes of this examination.
| |
| The calibration material shall be determined by the production piping material to which the search unit is applied. The basic calibration block thickness shall be determined by the thickness of the production piping material to which the search unit is applied and Article 5, Section V. When a basic calibration block of the same thickness as the production piping material is not available and where the production piping material*
| |
| thickness is 1 inch or less, the basic calibration block ness shall be no more than 25% thinner than the production material thickness or shall be closer to the production material thickness than the 3/4-inch thick alternate calibration block allowed by Article 5. Approved drawings of basic calibration blocks to be used in cordance with this procedure are in the applicable SwRI Examination Plan. Flat basic calibration blocks or blocks of essentially the same curvature as the.part to be examined may be used when contact surface tures are greater than 20 inches in diameter. . SwRI Form QA 3-2 ** * *
| |
| *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE
| |
| *swRI-NDT-600-3 Revision 61 August 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 5 of 28 A single curved basic calibration block may be used to establish distance amplitude correction (DAC) curves for examinations on contact surfaces in the range of curvature from 0.9 to 1.5 times the basic calibration block diameter, when contact surface curvature is 20 inches in diameter or less. The curvature of the main run pipe shall be used to establish the requirements for the basic calibration block curvature for the examination of support attachment and branch pipe connection welds. 5.4 Search Units SwRI Form QA 3-2 (1) The search unit size shall be selected according to the following: (a) Straight-Beam Nominal Production Material Thickness 2.0" or less 1.0" to 3.0" 2.0" to 4.0" 3.0" to 5.0" (b) Angle-Beam Nominal Search Unit Size 1/4" Round 3/8" Round 1/2" Round 3/4" or l" Round The search unit size for carbon steel shall be selected according to the following:
| |
| Nominal Production Material Thickness 1.0" or less o. 4" to 2. o** 0.75" to 4.0" 2.0" to 5.0" Nominal Search Unit Size 1/4" x 1/4" Round 3/8" x 3/8", 3/8" Round 1/2" x 1/2", 1/2" Round 1/2" x l", 3/4" Round (2) The exit point of the sound beam and the actual refracted beam angle of shear-wave search units shall be determined on an IIW block. The exit point shall be marked on the search unit wedge. (3) The numinal search unit frequency for the examination of carbon steel piping shall be 2.25 MHz
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-3 Revision 61 *August 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE
| |
| ,-Page 6 of 28 (4) The nominal angle-beam shear-wave search unit size and quency for examination of austenitic piping shall be as follows: Nominal Freguency Search Unit Size 1.5 MHz 3/8" Round, 3/8" x 3/8" (5) The nominal straight-beam longitudinal-wave search unit frequency for austenitic piping shall be 1.5 MHz or 2.25 MHz. (6) The longitudinal-wave search unit frequency for tion measurements shall be 2.25 MHz to simulate a 1.5 MHz shear mode, and a 5.0 MHz to simulate a 2.25 MHz shear mode. (7) (8) For examination of circumferential piping welds, search unit wedges shall be fabricated to produce 45° +/-2° and 60° +/-2° refracted shear-waves.
| |
| For examination of longitudinal piping welds, support attachment welds, or branch pipe connection welds to piping, search unit wedges shall be fabricated to produce 45° +/-2° refracted shear waves. 5.5 Ultrasonic Instrument The examiner shall use a Sonic FTS Mark I ultrasonic instrument which shall be aligned and shall display an alignment calibration tag as required by NQAP 10-1. 5 .6 -SwRI Form QA 3-2 Couplant ( 1)
| |
| * USP-grade glycerine or deionized-water (with or without wetting agent) shall be used when performing ult-rasonic calibrations and examinations in accordance with this procedure.
| |
| * *
| |
| -* * *-SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-3 Revision 61 August 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 7 of 28 (2) All couplants
| |
| 'other than deionized water shall be fied for sulfur content and total halogens in accordance with ASTM D-129-64 and ASTM D-808-63.
| |
| The residual amount of total sulfur or halogens shall not exceed 1% by weight. Deionized water, when used, shall be supplied by the customer.
| |
| (3) Couplant materials used for examinations shall be the same as those used for the calibration
| |
| *. 6. CALIBRATION METHOD The complete ultrasonic calibration shall be performed prior to the nation. NOTES The REJECT control shall be maintained in the 0 position during calibration and examination
| |
| * The nominal piping production material thickness shall be used' to determine the correct calibration block and search units for the examination of piping nents which may be thicker than the nominal pipe size and welded to the pipe. The Level II examiner shall ensure that complete coverage of the* thicker piping component is obtained.
| |
| Additional calibration vee-path positions and larger screen sizes may be required to assure this coverage.
| |
| The additional tion vee-path positions and larger screen size shall be used for the tion from the thicker component and the nominal pipe side of the weld. All spaces on the SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record shall be filled in. The FREQ MHz control shall be turned to 1 when a 1.5 MHz search unit is used, 2 with a 2.25 MHz search unit, and 5 with a 5.0 MHz search unit. 6.1 Calibration for Circumferential Butt Welds 6 .1.1 Straight-Beam Distance Calibration The screen distance chosen shall be the shortest applicable size to include at least l/4t beyond the thickest production material to which the search unit is applied. SwRI Form QA 3-2 I I ** I I, SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-3 Revision 61 August 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE
| |
| ,-Page 8 of 28 Observing back reflections from the applicable reference block, adjust the MAT'L CAL, RANGE, and DELAY controls to obtain the required linear sound path distance displayed the screen baseline.
| |
| 6.1.2 Angle-Beam Distance Calibration The screen distance chosen shall be the shortest applicable size to include at least 1/8 vee-path past the anticipated examination range. Observing radius echoes from the applicable reference block, adjust the MAT'L CAL, RANGE, and DELAY controls .to obtain the required linear sound path distance displayed along the screen baseline.
| |
| When the same instrument is used for both 45° and 60° tions, the screen distance calibration shall be conducted in the following manner: 6.1.3 (1) The screen distance size shall be determined by the angle-beam search unit requiring the longer examination range. (2) Position the 45° +/-2° search unit on the appropriate ence block and record all reference block entries as quired on the appropriate SwRI Sonic Instrument tion Record. (3) Position the 60° +/-2° search unit on the appropriate ence block and, without changing the MAT'L CAL, RANGE, or DELAY controls, record all reference block entries as required on the appropriate SwRI Sonic Instrument bration Record. (4) No attempt shall be made to compensate for any delay ference observed between 45° +/-2° and 60° +/-2° screen tance calibrations.
| |
| Straight-Beam Distance Amplitude Correction Distance-amplitude correction shall be conducted by utilizing responses from the basic calibration holes. SwRI Form QA 3*2 * * *
| |
| * .*.*' *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI..,.NDT-600-3 Revision 61 August 1983 6.1.3.1 6.1.3.2 SwRI Form QA 3-2 ' NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 9 of 28 Production Material 1 Inch or Less in Thickness (1) Position the straight beam search unit to obtain a maximum response from the l/2T hole. (2) Adjust the instrument gain controls to obtain a primary reference response at an amplitude of 50% +/-5% of full screen height (FSH). (3) Draw a straight horizontal line on the instrument screen at the primary reference amplitude to extend a distance equal to the nominal thickness of the production DJ,aterial.
| |
| (4) Signal amplitudes for indications recorded shall be enced as a percentage of this line. Production Material Greater Than 1 Inch in Thickness (1) Position the straight-beam search unit to obtain a maximum response from the calibration hole selected from the following, which produces the highest amplitude:
| |
| Hole l/4T l/2T (if present) 3/4T (2) Adjust the instrument gain controls to obtain a primary reference response at 50% +/-5% of FSH and mark this tude on the screen. The gain controls shall riot be adjusted once the primary reference response has been established.
| |
| (3) Position the search unit to obtain maximum response from the remaining calibration holes and mark each amplitude on the screen. (4) Join these points with a smooth curved line which shall extend l/4t beyond the last qualified calibration point
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-3 Revision 61 August 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 10 of 28 6.1.4 Angle-Beam Distance Amplitude Correction If a curved block is used, distance amplitude correction (DAC) curves for the examination of circumferential welds shall be constructed by utilizing the responses from.the holes oriented perpendicularly to the axis of the basic calibration block. 6.1.4.1 Unclad Material 1 Inch or Less in Thickness 45° and 60° DAC (1) Position the 45° +/-2° search unit to obtain a maximum response from the hole and vee-path position selected from the following, which produces the highest amplitude:
| |
| (2) Hole Vee-Path Positions l/2T 2/8, 6/8,* 10/8 Adjust the instrument gain controls to obtain a primary reference response at 75% +/-5% of FSH and mark this tude on the screen. The gain controls shall not be adjusted once the primary reference response has been established.
| |
| (3) Position the search unit to obtain maximum response from the remaining vee-path positions and mark each amplitude on the screen. (4) Join these points with a smooth curved line which shall not extend more than 1/8 vee-path beyond the last fied calibration point. (5) Repeat steps (1) through (4) using a 60° +/-2° search unit. NOTE If the configuration of the weld is such that a combination of a 45° +/-2° full vee-path examination and a 60° +/-2° 6/8 vee-path examination covers the entire weld volume from the side of the weld being examined, it will not be necessary to record indications detected beyond the 6/8 vee-path with 60° +/-2° tion. L __ SwRIFo= QA 3*2 * * *
| |
| *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-3 Revision 61 August 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 11 of 28 EXCEPTIONS If the configuration of the weld is such that the 60° +/-2° search unit sound beam is not directed into the weld root on the straight pass, a 14/8 vee-path calibration shall be accomplished with a 45° +/-2° search unit. Indicati.ons detected in the calibrated area shall be recorded.
| |
| If the configuration of the weld is such that a 45° +/-2° 14/8 vee-path tion and a 60° +/-2° 10/8 vee-path examination fail to cover the entire weld volume, a 14/8 vee-path calibration shall be accomplished with both a 45° +/-2° and a 60° +/-2° search unit and indications detected in the calibrated area shall be recorded.
| |
| * 6.1.4 .* 2 SwRI Form QA 3-2 Unclad Material Greater Than 1 Inch But Not Over 3 Inches in Thickness 45° and 60° DAC ( 1) Position the 45° +/-2° search unit to obtain a maximum response from the hole and the vee-path position selected from the following, which produces the highest amplitude:
| |
| Hole l/4T 3/4T 45° Vee-Path Positions 7/8, 9/8 3/8, 5/8 (2) Adjust the instrument gain controls to obtain a primary reference response at 75% +/-5% of FSH and mark this tude on the screen. The gain controls shall not be adjusted once the primary reference response has been established.
| |
| (3) Position the search unit to obtain maximum response from the remaining vee-path positions and mark each amplitude on the screen. (4) Join these points with a smooth curved line which shall not extend more than 1/8 vee-path beyond the last qualified calibration point *
| |
| .. SOUTHWEST.RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-3 Revision 61 August 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 12 of 28 (5) Repeat steps (1) through (4) with a 60° +/-2° search unit utilizing the following vee-path positions:
| |
| Hole l/4T 3/4T .EXCEPTIONS 60° Vee-Path Positions 7/8 3/8, 5/8 If the configuration of the weld is such that the 45° +/-2° full vee-path tion fails to cover the entire weld volume, a 9/8 vee-path calibration shall be accomplished with the 60° +/-2° search unit. If the configuration of the weld is such that the 60° +/-2° search unit sound beam is not directed into the weld root, a 13/8 vee-path calibration shall be accomplished with a 45° +/-2° search unit. 6.1.4.3 SwRI Form QA 3-2 Unclad Material Greater Than 3 Inches But Not Over 5 Inches in Thickness 45° artd 60° DAC (1) Position the 45° +/-2° search unit to obtain a maximum response from the hole and the vee-path position selected from the following, which produces the highest amplitude:
| |
| Hole l/4T 3/4T 45° Vee-Path Positions 7/8 3/8, 5/8 (2) Adjust the instrument gain controls to obtain the primary reference response at 75% +/-5% of FSH and mark this amplitude on the screen. The gain controls shall not be adjusted once the primary reference response has been established.
| |
| (3) Position the search unit to obtain maximum response from the remaining vee-path positions and mark each amplitude on the screen. -* *
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-3 Revision 61 August 1983 6.1.4.4 SwRI Form QA 3-2 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE (4) (5) Page 13 of 28 Join these points with a smooth curved line which shall not extend more than 1/8 vee-path beyond the last fied calibration point. Repeat steps (1) through (4) with a 60° +/-2° search.unit utilizing the following vee-path positions:
| |
| Hole l/4T 3/4T 60° Vee-Path Positions 1/8 3/8, 5/8 Clad Material Greater Than 0.4 Inch But Not Over 5 Inches in Thickness (Examined From Unclad Side) 45° and 60° DAC (1) Position the 45° +/-2° search unit to obtain a maximum response from the hole and the vee-path position selected from the following, which produces the highest amplitude_:
| |
| Hole l/4T l/2T 3/4T 45° Vee-Path Positions 1/8 2/8 3/8 (2) Adjust the instrument gain controls to obtain a primary reference response at 75% +/-5% of FSH and mark this amplitude on the screen. The gain controls shall not be adjusted once the primary.reference response has been established.
| |
| (3) Position the search unit to obtain maximum response from the remaining vee-path positions and mark each amplitude on the screen. (4) Join these points with a smooth curved line shall extend 1/8 vee-path beyond the last qualified calibration point
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-3 Revision 61 August 1983 6.2 6.2.1 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE (5) Page 14. of 28 Repeat steps (1) through (4) with a 60° +/-2° search unit utilizing the following vee-path positions:
| |
| Hole l/4T l/2T 3/4T 60° Vee-Path Positions 1/8 2/8 3/8 Calibration for Support Attachment, Branch Pipe Connection, and Longitudinal Seam Welds Straight-Beam Distance Calibration The screen distance chosen shall be the shortest applicable size that includes at least 1/4t beyond the* thickest production material to which the search unit is applied. Observing back reflections from the applicable reference block, adjust the MAT'L CAL, RANGE, and DELAY controls to obtain the required linear sound path distance displayed along the screen baseline.
| |
| 6.2.2 Angle-Beam Distance Calibration The screen distance chosen shall be the shortest applicable size to include at least 1/8 vee-path past the anticipated examination range. Observing back reflections from the applicable reference block, adjust the MAT'L CAL, RANGE, and DELAY controls to obtain the required linear sound path distance displayed along the screen baseline.
| |
| 6.2.3 Straight-Beam Distance Amplitude Correction Distance amplitude correction shall be conducted by utilizing responses from the basic calibration holes. 6.2.3.1 SwRI Form QA 3-2 Production Material 1 Inch or Less in Thickness (1) Position the straight-beam search unit to obtain a response from the l/2T hole.* (2) Adjust instrument gain controls to obtain the primary reference response at an amplitude of 50% +/-5% FSH. *. ' * *
| |
| * *. -* SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-3 Revision 61 August 1983 6.2.3.2 6.2.4 -NUCl,,EAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE
| |
| ,.... (3) (4) Page 15 of 28 Draw a straight horizontal line on the instrument.
| |
| screen at the primary reference amplitude to extend a distance equal to the nominal thickness of the production material.
| |
| Signal amplitudes for indications recorded shall be enced as a percentage of this line. Production Material Greater Than 1 Inch in Thickness (1) Position the straight-beam search unit to obtain a maximum response from the calibration hole selected from the following, which produces the highest amplitude:
| |
| (2) Hole l/4T l/2T (if present) 3/4T Adjust the instrument gain controls to obtain a primary ri!f erence response at 50% +/-5% of FSH and mark this amplitude on the ,screen. The gain controls shall not be adjusted once the primary reference response has been established.
| |
| (3) Position the search unit to obtain maximum response from the remaining calibration holes and mark each amplitude on the screen. (4) Join these points with a smooth curved line which shall extend l/4T beyond the last qualified calibration point. Angle-Beam Distance Amplitude Correction If a curved block is utilized, DAC curves shall be constructed by utilizing the responses from the basic calibration holes oriented axially with the basic calibration block
| |
| * SwRI Form QA 3-2 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-3 Revision 61 August 1983 6.2.4.1 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 16 of 28 Unclad Material 1 Inch or Less in Thickness 45° DAC (1) Position the 45° +/-2° search unit to obtain a maximum response from the hole and vee-path position selected from the following, which produces the highest amplitude:
| |
| Hole Vee-Path Positions l/2T 2/8, 6/8, 10/8, 14/8 (2) Adjust the instrument gain controls to obtain the primary reference response at 75% +/-5% of FSH and mark this amplitude on the screen. The gain controls shall not be adjusted once the primary reference response.has been established.
| |
| (3) Position the search unit to obtain maximum response from the remaining vee-path positions and mark amplitude . on the* screen. (4) Join these points with a smooth curved line which shall not extend more than 1/8 vee-path beyond the last fied calibration point. EXCEPTION If the configuration of the weld is such that coverage of the entire weld volume is attained with a 10/8 vee-path calibration, a 14/8 calibration is not required.
| |
| 6.2.4.2 SwRI Form QA 3-2 Unclad Material Greater Than 1 Inch But Not Over 3 Inches in Thickness 45° DAC (1) Position the 45° +/-2° search unit to obtain a maximum response from the hole and the vee-path position selected from the following, which produces the highest amplitude:
| |
| Hole l/4T 3/4T Vee-Path Positions 7/8, 9/8 3/8, 5/8, 11/8 * * *
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-3 Revision 61 August 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE (2) (3) ( 4) Page 17 of 28 Adjust the instrument gain controls to obtain a primary reference response at 75% +/-5% of FSH and mark this tude on the screen. The gain controls shali not be adjusted once the primary reference response has been established.
| |
| * Position the search unit to obtain maximum response from the remaining vee-path positions and mark each amplitude on the screen. Join these points with a smooth curved line which shall not extend more than 1/8 vee-path beyond the last fied calibration point. EXCEPTION If the configuration of the weld is such that coverage of the entire weld volume is attained with a 9/8 vee-path calibration an 11/8 calibration is not required
| |
| * 6.2.4.3 s*wRI Form QA 3-2 Unclad Material Greater Than 3 Inches But Not Over 5 Inches in Thickness 45° DAC (1) Position the 45° +/-2° search unit to obtain a maximum response *from the hole and the vee-path position selected.
| |
| from the following, which produces the highest amplitude:
| |
| Hole 1/4T 3/4T Vee-Path Positions 7/8, 9/8 3/8' 5/8 (2) Adjust the instrument gain controls to obtain a primary reference response at 75% +/-5% FSH and mark this amplitude on the screen. The gain controls shall not be adjusted once the primary reference response has been established.
| |
| (3) Position the search unit to obtain maximum response from the remaining vee-path positions and mark each amplitude on the screen
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-3 Revision 61 August 1983 6.2.4.4 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE
| |
| .-Page 18 of 28 (4) Join these points with a smooth curved line which shall not extend more than 1/8 vee-path beyond the last fied calibration point. Clad Material Greater Than 0.4 Inch But Not Over 5 Inches .in Thickness (Examined From Unclad Side) 45° DAC (1) Position the 45° +/-2° search unit to obtain a maximum response from the hole and vee-path position selected from the following, which produces the highest amplitude:
| |
| Hole l/4T l/2T 3/4T Vee-Path Positions 1/8 2/8 3/8 (2) Adjust the instrument gain controls to obtain a primary reference response at 75% +/-5% of FSH and mark this ampli-* tude on the screen. The gain controls shall not be adjusted once the primary reference response has been
| |
| * established.
| |
| (3) Position the search unit to obtain maximum response from the remaining vee-path positions and mark each amplitude on the screen. (4) Join these points with a smooth curved line which shall extend 1/8 vee-path beyond t_he last qualified calibration point. 6.3 *Secondary DAC Calibrations Each point on the DAC curve shall appear .at a minimum of 20% of FSH or a secondary DAC curve shall be constructed as follows: (1) Secondary DAC curves shall contain at least 2 points. SwRI Form QA 3-2 ** *
| |
| * *..... ..
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-3 Revision 61 August 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 19 of 28 (2) The DAC point at 20% of FSH or greater and adjacent to a DAC point that falls below 20% of FSH shall be brought to the primary reference level by manipulating the gain controls.
| |
| This point shall be marked on the instrument screen. The adjacent point(s), previously at less than 20% of FSH, shall be marked on the screen and connected with a smooth curved line. The gain setting for this secondary DAC curve shall be recorded on the appropriate SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record. EXCEPTIONS When the first DAC point is the only point above 20% of FSH, the next highest point shall be brought to the primary reference level. This point shall be marked on the instrument screen. The other points previously at less than 20% of FSH shall be marked on the screen. All points shall be connected with a smooth curved line. The gain setting for this secondary DAC curve shall be recorded on the appropriate SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record. When the 60° +/-2° calibration consists of only a 2/8, 6/8, 10/8 vee-path and no indications are to be recorded past the 6/8 vee-path, it shali' not be necessary to construct a secondary DAC.
| |
| * 6.4 Calibration Verification
| |
| | |
| ====6.4.1 Sweep====
| |
| Range and DAC Curve Verification Sweep range calibration shall be verified on the appropriate reference block-and DAC curve calibration, if applicable, shall be verified on the appropriate basic calibration block: SwRI Form QA 3-2 (1) At the start of a series of examinations (2) With any substitution of search unit wedge (3) With any substitution of search unit cable (4) With any substitution utilizing the same type of power source; e.g., a change from one direct current to another direct current source SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-3 Revision 61 August 1983 6.4.2 6.4.3 bration: SwRI Form QA 3-2 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 20 of 28 (5) At least every 4 hours during the examination (6) At the finish of a series of examinations (7) Whenever the validity of the calibration is in doubt Calibration Changes (1) Perform the following if any point on the DAC curve has decreased more than 20% or 2 dB in amplitude, or any point on the sweep line has moved more than 5% of full screen width: (a) Void all examinations referring to the calibration in question and performed after the last valid calibration verification. (b) Conduct a new calibration. (c) Reexamine the areas for which examinations have been voided. (2) Perform the following if any point on the DAC curve has increased in amplitude more than 20% or 2 dB: (a) Correct the calibration. (b) Reexamine all indications recorded since the last valid calibration verification. (c) Enter proper values on a new SwRI Examination Record. Recali bra ti on Substitution of any of the following shall be cause for recali-(1) Search unit transducer (2) Couplant (3) Ultrasonic instrument
| |
| * * *
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-3 Revision 61 August 1983 NU-CLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE (4) (5) Page 21 of 28 Examination personnel Change in type of power source; e.g., a change from alternating to direct current 7. EXAMINATION
| |
| | |
| ===7.1 Examination===
| |
| | |
| Areas 7 .1.1 Circumferential and Longitudinal Butt Welds in Piping Circumferential and longitudinal butt welds with a nominal ness of greater than 0.4 inch to 5.0 inches shall be examined from the outside surface of the pipe. Base material shall be examined for a distance of lt from the fusion line on each side of the weld. Longitudinal welds shall be examined along the entire length of the weld during the preservice examination.
| |
| Longitudinai welds shall be examined for 12 inches from the fusion line of the intersecting circumferential weld during inservice examinations.
| |
| 7.1.2 Butt and Fillet Welds of Support Attachments and Branch Pipe Connections Butt and fillet welds of support attachments and branch pipe connections in pressure piping greater than 0.4 inch up to a maximum of 5.0 inches nominal thickness shall be examined from the outside surface of the pipe. Base material shall be examined for a distance-of lt from the* fusion line on the pipe side of the weld._ 7.2 Surface Condition The contact surfaces shall .. be free from weld spatter, roughness, or other conditions which interfere with free movement of the search unit or impair the transmission of ultrasound.
| |
| | |
| ===7.3 Indication===
| |
| | |
| Length Zero Reference (Lo) Location Areas to be examined in accordance with this procedure shall have an Lo marked in accordance with the applicable revision of SwRI Nuclear Projects Operating Procedure IX-FE-103
| |
| * SwRI Form QA 3-2 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-3 Revision 61 August 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 22 of 28 7.4 Scanning 'When practicable, scanning shall be performed at a minimum gain setting of 2 times the reference level sensitivity.
| |
| Instrument gain setting for scanning shall be determined on the basic calibration block as follows for each primary reference level utilized:
| |
| 7.4.1 (1) With the instrument at the primary reference level, late the search unit on the basic calibration block to obtain a signal of 40% of FSH from a calibration reflector (machined notch). (2) Add 6 d.B of gain by utilizing the 6 dB switch (if present), the fine gain confrol, or a combination of the fine and coarse gain controls; choose the method which yields a signal response closest to 80% FSH. (3) The signal response chosen shall be within +/-2 dB of 80% FSH. This amplitude and method shall be on the SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record and shall be used during the valid calibration period*for all scanning at 2 times the reference level sensitivity.
| |
| Scanning Scanning overlap shall be a minimum of 10% of the search unit piezoelectric element dimension perpendicular to the direction of scan. ning performed in a direction perpendicular to the weld shall be adequate to examine the weld and lt of base material from the fusion line of the weld. The search unit IOOvement*
| |
| rate for scanning shall not exceed 6 inches per second. 7.5 Lamination Scan, Attenuation, and Thickness Measurements
| |
| | |
| ====7.5.1 Longitudinal====
| |
| | |
| Attenuation Measurements A straight-beam search unit as described for attenuation ments (Paragraph 5.4) shall be placed on the appropriate basic calibration block. Obtain a backwall reflection, setting this signal between 50% and 90% of FSH. Record the signal amplitude and gain settings on the priate, SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record. Adjust the instrument gain controls to display the next backwall reflection at the same amplitude at which the preceding backwall reflection was recorded.
| |
| Record the signal amplitude, instrument gain settings, and the dB difference required to obtain the adjacent backwall reflections at an equal amplitude.
| |
| SwRI Form QA 3-2 * * *
| |
| *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-3 Revision 61 August 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 23 of 28 Place the straight-beam search unit on the examination surface and determine the dB difference required to obtain signals of equal height from two adjacent backwall reflections.
| |
| Record this dB difference on the ate SwRI Examination Record. The search unit for attenuation measurements shall be placed adjacent to Lo on the base material away from the heat-affected zone (HAZ). If attenuation measurements cannot be taken adjacent to Lo, the location of the measurements shall be recorded on the appropriate SwRI tion Record. Measurements shall be taken at least at the following locations:
| |
| (1). Two positions for Circumferential and longitudinal welds, one on each side of the weld (2) One position adjacent to Lo on the main run pipe base material for support attachment and branch connection welds NOTES Attenuation measurements shall not be conducted for longitudinal, support attachment, or branch connection welds if measurements have been conducted in the.applicable piping base material.
| |
| No attempt shall be made to take attenuation measurements on clad piping. 7.5.2 Base Material Lamination Scan A lamination scan using straight-beam longitudinal-wave shall be performed before the angle-beam examination.
| |
| This examination shall cover as much as practical of the area through which the angle-beam is later to be passed. Screen distance calibration for this examination shall be conducted in accordance with Paragraph 6.1.1 for circumferential welds and Paragraph 6.2.1 for support attachment, branch connection, or longitudinal welds. Scanning sensitivity shall be as required to maintain the first back reflection at an amplitude of between 50% and 90% of FSH. Intermediate echoes having an amplitude equal to or greater than 50% of the initial back reflection and accompanied by a 50% loss of back ref tion shall be recorded
| |
| * SwRI Form QA 3-2 /
| |
| SOUTHWEST RESEARCH.
| |
| INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-3 Revision 61 August 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 24 of 28 To record an intermediate indication, a back reflection signal shall be obtained from an indication-free area* and the instrument gain control adjusted until this signal is at 75% +/-5% of FSH. Record the intermediate cation when its amplitude is equal to 50% of the initial back reflection and accompanied by a 50% loss of back reflection.
| |
| If total loss of back relection accompanies the intermediate echo, the area of total loss of back reflection shall be recorded on the appropriate SwRI Examination Record. 7.5.3 Thickness Measurements In conjunction with the lamination scan, thickness measurements shall be taken at a minimum of three points adjacent to Lo for longitudinal and circumferential carbon steel welds (on the centerline of the weld and at one point in the base material on each side of the weld). Thickness measurements shall be taken at. a minimum of two points adjacent to Lo for support attachment and branch pipe connection carbon steel welds (one on the base material of the main run pipe, and one on .the branch connection or support attachment).
| |
| If these measurements cannot be taken adjacent to Lo, the location of the ments shall be recorded on the appropriate SwRI Examination Record. Screen distance calibration for this examination*
| |
| shall be ducted in accordance with Paragraph 6.1.1 for circumferential welds and graph 6.2.1 for support attachment, branch pipe connection, and longitudinal welds. Measurements shall be taken by placing the straight-beam search tinit in the appropriate position on the examination surface and observing the position of the back wall reflection on the instrument screen. These measurements shall be recorded on the appropriate SwRI Examination Record. 7.6 7.6.1 Examination of Circumferential and Longitudinal Butt Welds in Piping Angle-Beam Examination for Indications Parallel with the Weld Angle beam examinations for circumferential welds shall be ducted as required using 45° +/-2° and 60° +/-2° refracted shear-waves from each side* of the weld. For this examination, the sound-beam shall be dir.ected perpendicularly into the weld to detect indications parallel with the weld. Calibration for these examinations shall be in accordance with Paragraphs*
| |
| 6.1.2 and 6.1.4. Angle beam examinations for longitudinal welds shall be plished using a 45° +/-2° refracted shear wave from each side of the weld. For this examination, the sound-beam shall be directed perpendicularly into the weld to detect indications parallel with the weld. Calibration for this nation shall be in accordance with Paragraphs 6.2.2 and 6.2.4. SwRI Form QA 3-2 * * *
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE 7.6.2 Straight-Beam Weld Examinations SwR.I-NDT-600-3 Revision 61 August 1983 Page 25 of 28 A 45° +/-2° and 60° +/-2° angle-beam examination shall be conducted from both sides of the circumferential weld. Any areas of the weld not ing complete coverage from both sides shall be examined from one side of the weld, if possible, with a 45° +/-2° and 60° +/-2° shear wave and a straight.:..beam applied to the surface of the weld crown in.the affected areas. Calibration foT the straight-beam search unit shall be in accordance with Paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6 .1.3. A 45° +/-2° angle-beam examination shall be conducted as required to assure complete coverage from both sides of the longitudinal weld. Any areas .of the weld not receiving complete coverage from both sides shall be examined from one side of the weld, if possible, with a 45° +/-2° shear wave and a longitudinal-wave applied to the surface of the weld crown in the affected areas. Calibration for the longitudinal-wave search unit shall be in dance with Paragraphs 6.2.1 and 6.2.3. 7.6.3 Angle-Beam Examination for Indications Perpendicular to the Weld An angle-beam examination shall be conducted on each weld using a 45° +/-2° shear wave.* This examination shall be conducted by placing the search unit on the weld with the sound beam directed into and parallel with the weld to detect indications perpendicular to the weld. The search unit shall then be turned 180° and the scan repeated.
| |
| Calibration for these examinations shalt be in accordance with Paragraphs 6.1.2 and 6.1.4 for circumferential welds, and Paragraphs 6.2.2 and 6.2.4 for longitudinal welds. For austenitic materials, the search unit shall then be placed on the base metal with the search unit wedge touching the edge of the weld crown and the sound beam directed tangentially into the weld at a 45° +/-10° angle. The entire length of the weld shall be scanned with the search unit beam directed in this manner on each accessible side of the circumferential or longitudinal weld, and on the main run pipe side of branch connection butt welds. The search unit shall then be turned 90° and the scans repeated.
| |
| Calibration for these examinations shall be in accordance with Paragraphs 6.1.2 and 6.1.4 for circumferential welds, and Paragraphs 6.2.2 and 6.2.4 for tudinal welds and branch pipe connection welds. -Geometric root ripple echoes occurring at the same metal path distance as flaws adjacent to the weld root are to be expected.
| |
| A flaw must be distinguished from root ripple by the greater echo amplitude of a flaw compared to the amplitude of the root ripple at the same location.
| |
| A flaw indication adjacent to the weld root tends to mask out several facets of the root ripple and travels along the baseline through the root ripple package
| |
| * SwAI Form QA 3-2 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-3 Revision 61 August 1983 7.6.4 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 26 of 28 Angle-Beam Examination for Indications in Austenitic Base Material Perpendicular to the Weld An angle-beam examination shall be conducted on lt of base rial adjacent to each circumferential or longitudinal weld, and on the main run pipe side of branch connection butt welds using a 45° +/-2° shear wave. This examination shall be conducted by placing the search unit on the base material with the sound beam directed parallel to the weld to detect indications dicular to the weld. The base material within lt of the weld shall be scanned with the search unit directed in this manner, once in a clockwise direction and once in a counterclockwise direction.
| |
| Calibration for these examinations shall be in accordance with Paragraphs 6.1.2 and *6.1.4 for circumferential welds, and Paragraphs 6.2.2 and 6.2.4 for longitudinal welds and branch pipe connection welds. 7.7 Examination of Butt and Fillet Welds of Branch Pipe Connections and Support Attachments NOTES Examinations from main run pipe side of clad piping, as specified in this dure, shall be conducted only on welds of "set in" type branch connections.
| |
| Examinations from main run pipe side of clad piping shall not be conducted on welded-on pipe supports or lugs. 7.7.1 Angle-Beam Examination for Indications Parallel with the Weld An angle-beam examination shall be accomplished using a 45° +/-2° refracted shear-wave from the main run pipe side of the weld. For this tion the sound beam shall be directed perpendicularly into the weld to detect indications parallel with the weld. Calibration for these examinations shall be in accordance with Paragraphs 6.2.2 and 6.2.4. 7.7.2 Angle-Beam Examination for Indications Perpendicular to the Weld An angle-beam examination shall be conducted on each weld using a 45° +/-2° shear-wave.
| |
| This examination shall be conducted by placing the search unit on the weld with the sound beam directed inco and parallel with the weld to detect indications perpendicular to the weld. The entire length of the weld shall be scanned with the search unit beam directed in this manner. The search unit shall then be turned 180° and the scan repeated.
| |
| Calibration for these examinations shall be in accordance with Paragraphs 6.2.2 and 6.2.4. SwRI Form QA 3-2 * * *
| |
| *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE SwRI-NDT-600-3 Revision 61 August 1983 Page 27 of 28 For austenitic of branch pipe connection butt welds, the angle-beam examination for indications perpendicular-to the weld shall be the same as the examination described in Paragraphs 7.6.3 and 7.6.4. 7.7.3 Straight-Beam Examination of Welds A straight-beam examination shall be performed on the surface of the weld crown when Calibration for the straight-beam examination shall be in accordance_
| |
| with Paragraphs 6.2.1 and 6.2.3. 7.8 Postexamination Cleaning Arrangements shall be made with the customer-for postexamination removal of couplant materials.
| |
| : 8. RECORDING CRITERIA Indications shall be recorded in accordance with the techniques outlined in the applicable revision of SwRI Nuclear Projects Operating Procedure IX-FE-117.
| |
| Indications beyond the 6/8 vee-path position shall not be recorded while conducting 60° examinations calibrated in accordance with Paragraph 6.1.4.l when complete coverage of the weld volume is obtained with the 45° search unit and the 60° search unit sound beam is directed into the weld root on the straight pass. Ultrasonic rerlectors producing a response 50% or greater of the reference level shall be recorded on the appropriate SwRI Examination Record. Indications 100% or greater of the reference level shall be investigated by a Level II or a Level III examiner to the extent necessary to determine the shape, identity, and location of the reflector.
| |
| Additionally all ultrasonic reflectors (regardless of signal amplitude),_
| |
| not readily attributable to geometry by the examiner shall be recorded on the appropriate SwRI Ultrasonic Examination Record and investigated by a Level II or a Level III examiner to the extent necessary to determine the shape, tity, and location of the reflector.
| |
| Examples of non-geometric reflectors (which may occur at any amplitude) are those which are slightly removed from the weld root and/or chamfer, mask the root indications, are transverse to the weld, or have linear dimensions with side branches
| |
| * SwAI Form QA 3-2 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE SwRI-NDT-600-3 Revision 61 August 1983 Page 28 of 28 Indications investigated and found to be other than geometrical in nature, regardless of the amplitude, shall be reported to the customer for evaluation.
| |
| Scanning limitations shall be recorded.
| |
| 9
| |
| * EVALUATION Evaluation of reportable indications shall be the responsibility of the customer, or the customer's representative, and shall be conducted in ance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section XI, Article IWA-3000.
| |
| The applicable year and Addenda of the c'ode shall be as specified in Section 3 of this procedure.
| |
| : 10. RECORDS The customer shall receive copies of documents generated in accordance with this procedure in the examination report. Documents generated in accordance.with this procedure shall be retained as a portion of the examination report. The examination report shall be stored by the Manager of the Support and Administration Section, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division, in the Data Storage Facility for the period specified by the contractual agreement with the customer.
| |
| SwRI Form QA 3-2 * * *
| |
| * *
| |
| * PROCEDURE DEVIATION Page 1 of 2 Procedure SwRl-NDT-600-6 The fellowing uaminaticn areas-ant affected by this deviaticn:
| |
| Revision 22 I Deviation 8 Manual ul::-uC?Uc examinacio:s ta b* perio-r::ed at Sale: !.:i. acc:n*dancs wi:.'l shall be aihc:ad by cis devia.cioa..
| |
| The following shall be devisted frcm as indicaud:
| |
| !ca: C:a:lga i: l'uagrapb 3.l:
| |
| dac:a fer
| |
| :'or:: li-19 !..s 12-l-a.3.
| |
| Add paragraph 6 .2 .* l. l to read u fo llov1: Verification of Calibration Reflectors gs Scanning Soeed The e:tamia.er shall verify the presence of the calibration reflector at scanning speed. It is nae to aaaure that Chia check couiir.:ss the sigual aJ!ll)litude at 100% of reference level, but merely cc that the signal from the calibration reflectors are readily observable as scanning s-peed. The following statement shall be documented on the Sw&I Sonic InstTUment C*libration and initialed: "Calibratiou reflectors have beeu verified at scanning s-peed." Flaticnale for d9¥ia'Cion: . lhese cli:mges are aecss.sar:r co provide che examiner :Jic :.'le sa:e :-e*l'ised da:a :Or.:1 used *.Jith ocher examinad.om during Cis !SI, cc verl.fy :!:e decect.allil.:.;:
| |
| of C.e callbrai:;!.Qu te.flec::on i.:ider proc:ad.ura.l scamli:.g c:=nd.!r:i.o"CS and co assure j chat Che sound beam strikes the flywheel bore at the optimum cransducer skew. i Manager ot a.A.: . /
| |
| --/r--... .,. SwRI FORM Ocmr. .
| |
| ..
| |
| * Tecnnicu Review:
| |
| _, .c1 .. -. i q gS"" VerCCIUpproval Given1 0 Yes j I I Oate: /.i-}........_
| |
| i .** :)-.. ?' .;--I I Cata: Data:
| |
| Clang9 i:::e i:!li=d of 7. 4 cc as follo<:.:s:
| |
| Sw.R.I-NDT-600-6/22 DeViaticn 8 Page 2 cf Z A 45 deg':'ee shear-wave oe f':'Om c!la appropriate su:fac2(s) so :hat it: sc:ikes ac :he Uic2rsec:icn of cha bon anci fa:r surface c.angenc c.o :.":e bot"e. !he shall be couduc:ed in a and ci!=ec:!cn
| |
| * * * *
| |
| * RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-6 Revision 22 NUCLEAR PROJECTS February 1982 -. OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 1 of 10 .. TI tie .-MANUAL ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION OF REACTOR COOLANT PUMP FLiWHEELS EFFECTIVlTY AND APPROVAL Revision 22 of this procedure .became effective on 3/3/82 . Other revisions of the base document may be effective concurrently.
| |
| SA Approvals c::< Written By Date Technical Review Date 1l d/f.., '/ .. -* Manager of Q.A. Date . Oat U/_.4 __
| |
| * 0 / . I -The following information may be used for convenience.
| |
| Completion of this portion is not mandatory.
| |
| Deviation No. Date Effective Procedure Section(s)
| |
| Affected Notes:
| |
| * SwRI Form QA-40A*O
| |
| .SOUTHWEST R.ESEARCH INSTITUTE
| |
| : 1. PURPOSE l'IOCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE MANUAL ULTRASONIC EX.AMINATION OF REACTOR COOLANT PUMP FLYWHEELS SwRI-NDT-600-6 SwRI-NDT-600-6 Revision 22 February 1982 Page 2 of 10 The purpose of this procedure is to provide the technical information and detailed steps required to ensure proper ultrasonic examination of reactor coolant pump motor flywheels in accordance with the applicable documents stated herein. 2. SCOPE AND APPLICATION (1) ( 2) Reactor coolant pump motor flywheels in the thickness range of 3 to 9 inches shall be examined utilizing shear-wave angle-beam and longitudinal-wave straight-beam, manual, contact, echo ultrasonic techniques.
| |
| Reactor coolant pump motor flywheels to be examined shall be as specified in the applicable SwRI Examination Plan. (3) Techniques to be applied in accordance with this procedure meet or exceed the requirements of NRC Regulatory Guide 1.14, sion 1. 3. APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS The following documents, as applicable, form a part of this procedure:
| |
| (1) NRC Regulatory Guide 1.14, Revision 1, dated August 1975, "Reactor Coolant Pump Flywheel Integrity" (2) SwRI Nuclear Quality Assurance Program Manual
| |
| | |
| ===3.1 Applicable===
| |
| | |
| Calibration and Examination Records SwRI Form QA 3-2 SwRI NDTR Form No. 17-19 17-25 17-23 17-24 Revision Date a lt+ 79 3-14-79 7-31-75 7-31-75 * *
| |
| *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE
| |
| 'NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE
| |
| : 4. RESPONSIBILITY SwRI -NDT-600-6 Revision 22 February 1982 Page 3 of 10 (1) The Director of the Department of Engineering Services, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division, shall be responsible for the preparation, review, approval, and control of this procedure.
| |
| (2) The Project Manager shall be responsible for the implementation .of this procedure in accordance with the NQAPM specified in the cable SwRI Project Plan. (3) The examiner shall be responsible for implementing the requirements of this procedure.
| |
| (4) The Manager of the Support and Administration Section, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division, .shall be responsible for storage of records generated in accordance with this procedure.
| |
| 5
| |
| * PERSONNEL
| |
| &'ID EQUIPMENT ultrasonic examinations shall be .certified in "Special Process Control." The reference blocks used for screen distance calibration and cation. shall be of the same material as the production material, carbon steel, and shall be one of the following:
| |
| (1) SwRI Half-Round, (2) AWS Type DC, or (3) IIW.
| |
| * 5.3 Basic Calibration Block The basic calibration block thickness shall be within +/-1 inch of the actual flywheel thickness.
| |
| Side-drilled basic calibration reflectors shall be placed in a block of .the same or equivalent P-grouping as the flywheel to be examined.
| |
| P-numbers P-1, P-3, P-4, and P-5 shall be considered to be lent for the purposes of this examination:
| |
| The diameter of the basic tion reflectors shall be determined by the actual thickness of the flywheel and Article 5, Figure T-533(a) of Section V of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 5.4 Search Units (1) SwRI Form QA 3*2 The size of search units shall be selected from the following table:
| |
| SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-6 Revision 22 February 1982 l'ttJCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 4 of 10 Search Unit Type Straight-Beam Angle""."Beam Search Unit Size l" round, or 1-1/8" round 1/2" x l", l" x l", or l" round (2) The exit point of the sound beam and the actual refracted beam angle of shear-wave units shall be on an IIW reference block. The exit point of the sound beam shall be marked on the search unit wedge. (3) Search uriit wedges shall be fabricated to produce 45° +/-2° refracted shear-waves as demonstrated on the IIW block. Other arigles, as required, may be used to augment the examinations.
| |
| (4) The nominal search unit frequency shall be 2.25 MHz. 5.5 Ultrasonic Instrument The examiner shall use a Sonic FTS Mark I ultrasonic*
| |
| instrument.
| |
| Each instrument shall be aligned and shall display an alignment calibration tag as required by NQAP 10-1.
| |
| * Couplant (1) USP-grade glycerine or deionized water (with or without wetting agent) shall be used when performing ultrasonic calibrations and examinations in accordance with this procedure.
| |
| (2) Couplant materials used for examinations shall be the same as used for the calibration.
| |
| (3) USP-grade glycerine shall be certified for sulfur content and total halogens in accordance with ASTM D-129-64 and ASTI1 D-808-63.
| |
| The residual amount of total sulfur or halogens shall not exceed 1% by weight. Deionized water, when used, shall be supplied by the customer.
| |
| : 6. CALIBRATION
| |
| | |
| ===6.1 Calibration===
| |
| | |
| Method 6.1.1 Initial Calibration The complete ultrasonic examination system calibration shall be performed prior to the examination.
| |
| SwRI Form QA 3*2 * * *
| |
| * ".. -* SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-6 Revision 22 February 1982 6.1.2 ..-NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE NOTES The "FREQ MHZ" control shall be turned to "2" when a 2.25 MHz search unit is used. The "REJECT" control shall be.maintained in the "O" position during calibration and examination.
| |
| Straight-Beam Distance Calibration Page 5 of 10 The screen distance calibration chosen shall be the shortest applicable size that includes at least l/4t past the nominal production material thickness.
| |
| Observing back reflections from the applicable reference block, adjtist the "}fAT'L CAL," "RA..ril'GE," and "DELAY" controls to obtain the required linear sound path distance displayed along the screen baseline.
| |
| 6.1.3 Angle-Beam Distance Calibration The screen distance calibra.tion chosen shall be the shortest applicable size to include at least 1/8 vee-path past the anticipated ination range. Observing the radius echoes from the applicable reference block, adjust the "MAT'L CAL," "RANGE," and "DELAY" controls to obtain the required linear sound path distance displayed along the screen baseline.
| |
| 6.1.4 Angle-Beam Distance Amplitude Correction Distance amplitude correction (DAC) curves shall be established by obtaining the maximum response from the basic calibration holes. SwRI Form QA 3-2 (1) Position the 45° +/-2° search unit to obtain maximum response from.the hole and vee-path position producing the highest response from the following:
| |
| Holes l/4T l/2T 3/4T Vee-Path Positions 1/8 2/8 3/8 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-6 Revision 22 February 1982 6.2 6.2.1 NtJCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 6 of 10 (2) Adjust instrument gain controls to obtain the primary ence response at 75% +/-5% of full screen height (FSH) and mark this amplitude on the screen. The gain controls shall not be adjusted once the primary reference response has been established.
| |
| (3) Position the search unit to obtain maximum response from the other vee-path positions and mark each amplitude on the screen. (4) Join these points with a smooth curved line extended to include the examination range. Calibration Verification Frequency of Instrument Calibration Verification Sweep range calibration shall be verified on the appropriate reference block, and DAC curve calibration (if applicable) shall be verified on the appropriate basic calibration block: 6.2.2 SwRI Form QA 3*2 (1) At the start of a series of examinations With any substitution of search unit cable With any substitution of power source At least every 4 hours during the examination At the finish of a series of examinations Whenever the validity of the calibration is in doubt Calibration Changes (1) Perform the following if any point on the DAC curve has decreased more than 20% or 2 dB in amplitude, or any point on the sweep line has moved more than 5% of full screen width: (a) Void all examinations referring to the calibration in question and performed after the last valid tion verification. (b) Conduct a new calibration. (c) Reexamine the areas for which examinations have been voided. * *
| |
| *
| |
| * SOUT*HWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-6 Revision 22 February 1982 -NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 7 of 10 (2) Perform the following if any point on the DAC curve has increased in amplitude more than 20% or 2 dB: (a) Correct the calibration. (b) Reexamine all indications recorded since the last valid calibration verification. (c) Enter. proper values on a new SwRI Flywheel Ultrasonic Examination Record. Recalibration Substitution of any of the following shall b.e cause for recalibration:
| |
| (1) Search unit (wedge/transducer)
| |
| (2) Couplant (3) (4) 7. EXAMINATION Ultrasonic instrument Examination personnel
| |
| / NOTES The transfer method shall not be used. Examination data shall be recorded on the appropriate SwRI Examination Record. 7.1 Examination Areas A lamination scan shall assure 100% coverage of the flywheel or such a portion that is accessible.
| |
| A 45° +/-2° examination shall assure 100% coverage of the bore area or such a portion that is accessible.
| |
| Determination of accessibility for examination will depend on each particular flywheel installation.
| |
| If the flywheel assembly is composed of two or more bolted. sections, the examination shall be conducted from both outer surfaces, if accessible.
| |
| | |
| ===7.2 Surface===
| |
| Condition The contact surfaces must be free from roughness or other conditions which interfere with free movement of the search unit _or impair the transmission of ultrasound.
| |
| SwRI Form QA 3-2 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-6 Revision 22 February 1982 NOCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 8 of 10 7.3 Scanning Parameters When practicable, scanning shall be performed at a minimum gain setting of 2 times the reference level sensitivity.
| |
| The search unit movement rate for scanning shall not exceed 6 inches per second. Instrument gain setting for scanning shall be determined on a basic calibration block as follows for each primary reference level utilized:
| |
| (1) With the instrument at the primary reference level manipulate the search unit on the basic calibration block to obtain a signal from a basic calibration reflector (side-drilled hole) of 40% FSH. . (2) Add 6 dB of gain by utilizing the fine gain control only. (3) Observe the signal amplitude.
| |
| Add 6 dB of gain by utilizing a combination of both fine and coarse gain controls.
| |
| Observe the signal amplitude. Add 6 dB of gain by utilizing the 6 dB switch, if present. Observe the signal amplitude.
| |
| (5) Choose the method above which yields a signal response closest to 80% FSH. (6) The method chosen shall be used for all scanning at 2 times the reference sensitivity.
| |
| Instrument gain settings for scanning shall be recorded on the SwRI Flywheel Ultrasonic Examination Record. The examiner shall ensure that the signal response of the method chosen is within %2 dB of 80% FSH and record this amplitude and method on the SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record. 7.4 Scanning Before the shear-wave examination, a lamination scan using tudinal wave shall be performed, covering 100% of the flywheel or such a portion that is accessible.
| |
| Screen distance calibration for this examination shall be conducted in accordance with Paragraph
| |
| | |
| ====6.1.2. Scanning====
| |
| sensitivity shall be as required to maintain the first back reflection at an amplitude of between 50% and 90% of FSH. SwRI Fonn QA 3-2 * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE SwRI-NDT-600-6 Revision.
| |
| 22 February 1982 Page 9 of 10 To record an intermediate indication, the first back reflection shall be obtained from an indication free area and the instrument gain control adjusted until this signal is at 75% +/-5% of FSH. The intermediate indication shall be recorded when its amplitude is equal to 50% of the initial back reflection and accompanied by a 50% loss of back reflection.
| |
| If total loss of back reflection accompanies the inte_rmediate echo, the area of total loss of back reflection shall be recorded on the* appropriate SwRI Flywheel Straight Beam Lamination Record. tj e e,.;-...,.,< ,J A 45° +/-2° shear-wave will be applied from the appropriate sur--g, face(sfSo that it strikes at the intersection of the bore and the far surface fil" tangent to the bore. JHfji< d'' Scanning overlap shall be a minimum of 10% of the search unit piezoelectric element dimension perpendicular to the direction of scan. ning performed in a direction tangential to the flywheel bore shall be such that as much as practicable of the bore shall be examined.
| |
| | |
| ===7.5 Postexamination===
| |
| | |
| Cleaning Arrangements .shall be made with the*. customer for postexamination removal of couplant materials.
| |
| : 8. RECORDING CRITERIA reflectors producing a response 50% or greater of the reference level shall be recorded.
| |
| A Wo and a Lo shall be established, and their locations shall be described on the appropriate SwRI Flywheel Ultrasonic Examination Record. Indications recorded shall be referenced to the established Wo and Lo locations. "L" and "W" measurements shall be recorded in inches and common fractions to the nearest 1/16 inch. Indications producing a response 100% or greater of the reference level shall be investigated by a Level II or a Level III examiner to the extent necessary to determine the shape, identity, and location of the reflector
| |
| *. Indications 100% or greater of the reference level investigated and found to be other than geometrical in nature shall be reported to the customer for evaluation.
| |
| Scanning limitations shall be recorded.
| |
| SwRI Form QA 3-2 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NIJCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE
| |
| : 9.
| |
| * EVALUATION SwRI-NDT-600-6 Revision 22 February 1982 Page 10 of 10 Evaluation of reportable indications shall be the responsibility of the customer, or the customer's representative, and shall be conducted in ance with NRC Regulatory Guide 1.14, Revision 1, as specified in Paragraph 3(1) of this procedure.
| |
| : 10. RECORDS The customer shall receive copies of documents generated in accordance with this procedure in the examination report. Documents generated in accordance with this procedure shall be stored and retained as a portion of the examination report. The examination report shall be stored by the Manager of the Support and Administration Section, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division, in the Data Storage Facility for the period specified by the contractual agreement with the.customer.
| |
| SwRI Form QA 3*2 * **
| |
| * * :* Sl'T!: Salem, Unit 2 PROCEDURE OEV1A TlON PSI C ISi XI PROCWURE/RE'llSION NO. 600-15/57 CE'llATION NO. CE'llATION PAGc NO.: . CATi REQUESTm:
| |
| EXAMINATION P9110C:
| |
| __ __ ..1. ____
| |
| ______________________
| |
| --1 S;cT'!ONISJ AF!=£C'1"m:
| |
| PROC:CUREPAGSSJ:
| |
| * 3,5 and 6 EXAMINATION AREAISJ Al=t=a:TEl:
| |
| 2, 5 and 13 OF: 18 Examination to be performed in accordance with this procedure at Salem, Unit 2 z 1-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------;
| |
| 2 CE'llATION:
| |
| It is rwQU-.ci um me snawn b9law in die 100¥e ptOC8GUIWl'9Vilian ti* devimtld tram as fOllows luse uac:: ; "' won1in1J proCIOl9d.
| |
| ilddilianat snwra 1118'1 be u..a if ,.._-,i: .
| |
| change in Paragraph 3.1: Revision date for SwRI-NDTR Form 17-19 is 12-1-83. ,1 ffi
| |
| <:I '\'> Change Paragraph 5.7 to read as follows: Thermometer The thermometer to be used to measure the calibration block and component temperatures shall be calibrated and certified and shall display a valid tion tag as required by NQAP 10-1. ':1' < , j\i... Add Paragraph 6.2.8.3 to read as follows:* .
| |
| Verification of Calibration Reflectors at Scanning Speed = ;.:.l *'*1 The examiner shall verify the presence of the calibration reflector at ==== $1 j scanning speed. Q I ...
| |
| :$ *--> = --.... ... "" .... a 5 It is not necessary to assure that this check confirms the signal amplitude at 100% of reference level, but merely to demonstrate that the signal from the calibration reflectors are readily observable at scanning speed. The following statement shall be documented on the SwRI Calibration Record Sheet and initialed: "Calibration reflectors have been verified at scanning sueed."
| |
| TION: Reaan cnanqe is nmrv sna wnn rt is immalld ta acccmcniln tu. 1cdiUcnm stillftl if n11C9SU1V1:
| |
| This change is necessary to verify the presence of the calibration reflectors under procedural scanning conditions, to reflect the newer temperature requirements and to change to the same revision of data form to be used in other examinations.
| |
| during this ISI. SwAI FOFIM Fi-'-'
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RSSCARCH INSTITi.JI: . N.UCLSAR PROJECTS . OPe;ATING
| |
| ?liOCElURS MANUAL ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION OF PRESSURE VESSEL WELDS e:r:envrre ANC AP?9'0VA&.
| |
| SwRI-NDT-600-15 Revision 57 September 1983 Page 1 of 18 Rftisicn 51 at uns CCll'nll atfac::iN an 5 October 1983 oui .. :"ftisians al ttie i:a.*dcc:umMI:
| |
| rnav c. tifl!ll::iw cancUrremiv.
| |
| ,,_ _____ Oftiaticn Ne. S..C::cn(sa Athc:2d I 1"1Ct!ni='
| |
| i;..,w.,..
| |
| 1/zo/83 g_ I
| |
| "" I I SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE MANUAL ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION OF PRESSURE VESSEL WELDS SwRI-NDT-600-15
| |
| : 1. PURPOSE SwRI-NDT-600-15 Revision 57 September 1983 Page 2 of 18 This procedure provides the information and detailed steps necessary to ensure a complete and accurate manual ultrasonic examination of Class 1 and 2 ferritic vessel welds and adjacent base material in accordance with the applicable ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes. 2. SCOPE AND.APPLICATION This procedure has been prepared for the manual, contact, pulse-echo, shear-wave angle-beam and longitudinal-wave straight-beam, ultrasonic nation of pressure vessel welds and adjacent base material.
| |
| Class 1 and 2 ferritic pressure vessel welds and adjacent base material with 2.5 to 12.0 inches nominal *wall thickness shall be examined.
| |
| Welds to be examined shall be as specified in the applicable SwRI Examination.Plan.
| |
| : 3. APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS (1) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section XI, 1974 Edition,_
| |
| wi_th Addenda through Summer 1975, "Rules for Inservice Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components" (2) SwRI Nuclear Quality Program Manual (NQAPM) 3.1 Applicable Calibration and Examination Records SwRI NDTR Form No. 17-17 17-18 17-19 17-25 36 17-37 4. RESPONSIBILITY Revision Date 3-15-79 7-31-75 3-14-79 3-14-79 9-22-76 (1) The Director of the Department of Engineering Services, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division, shall be responsible for the preparation, review, approval, and control of this procedure.
| |
| SwAI Form QA 3-2 * *
| |
| * **
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE SwRI-NDT-600-15 Revision 57 September 1983 Page 3 of 18 (2) The Project Manager shall be responsible for the implementation of this procedure in accordance with the NQAPM specified in the cable SwRI Project Plan. (3) The examiner shall be responsible for implementing the requirements of this procedure.
| |
| (4) The Manager of the Support and Administration Section, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division, shall be responsible for storage of records generated in accordance with this procedure.
| |
| : 5. PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT
| |
| | |
| ===5.1 Personnel===
| |
| | |
| Personnel performing examinations shall be certified in dance with SwRI NQAP 11-1, "Special Process Control." 5.2 Reference Block Reference blocks used screen distance calibration and verification shall be of the same basic material as the production material, carbon steel, and shall be one of the following:
| |
| (1) SwRI Half-Round, (2) AWS Type DC, or (3) IIW. 5.3 Basic Block Where the component material is clad, the basic calibration block shall be clad to the component clad nominal thickness of +/-1/8 inch. Deposition of clad shall be by the automatic method used on the component.
| |
| Where the automatic method is impractical, deposition of clad shall be by the manual method used to cover the circumferential welds of the component.
| |
| Side-drilled basic calibration hole reflectors in accordance with Figure I-3131 of Section XI, Appendix I, of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code shall be placed in a block manufactured from one of the following:
| |
| (1) the component nozzle dropout; (2) the component prolongation; or (3) when it is not possible to fabricate the block from material taken from the ponent, it may be fabricated from a material of. a specification included in the applicable examination volumes of the component.
| |
| The acoustic velocity and attenuation of such a block shall be demonstrated to fall within the range of straight-beam longitudinal-wave velocity and attenuation found in the unclad component.
| |
| The basic calibration block thickness shall be determined by the average thickness of the weld. The requirements for basic calibration block curvature limits, heat treatment, surface condition, and scribe lines shall be in accordance with Appendix I
| |
| * SwR I Form QA 3-2
| |
| *souTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE SwRI-NDT-600-15 Revision 57 September 1983 Page 4 of 18 Notches 2%T deep shall be machined in the basic calibration block surface, in accordance with Appendix I of Section XI. A flat basic calibration block or block of essentially the same curvature as the examination contact surface shall be used for the examination of welds with a contact surface curvature greater than 20 inches in diameter.
| |
| A single curved basic calibration block may be used to establish distance amplitude correction (DAC) curves for examinations on contact surfaces in the range of curvature from 0.9 to l.5 times the basic calibration block d*iameter, when contact surface curvature is 20 inches in diameter or less. Approved drawings of the basic calibration blocks are contained in the applicable SwRI Examination Plan. 5.4 Search Units The size of search units shall be selected from the following table: (l) Straight-Beam Average Weld Thickness 2.5" to 3.0" 2.5" to 4 *. 0" 3.0" to 7 .O" 5.o" to 12.0" (2) Angle-Beam Average *weld Thickness 2.5" to 4.0" 2.5" to 7.0" 5.0" to 12.0" Nominal Search Unit Size 3/8" Round l/2" Round 3/4" Round or 1" Round l" Round or 1-1/8" Round Nominal Search Unit Size 1/2" x 1/2", 1/2" Round 1/2" x l", 3/4" Round l" x l", 1" Round, 1-1/8" Round The exit point of the sound beam and the actual refracted beam angle of shear-wave search units shall be determined on an IIW block. The exit point of the sound beam shall be marked on the search unit wedge. SwRI Form QA 3-2 * * *
| |
| * I, I I * * --SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-15 Revision 57 September 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 5 of 18 Search unit wedges shall be fabricated to produce 45° +/-2° and 60° +/-2° refracted shear-waves.
| |
| A search unit producing 0° straight-beam longitudinal-waves shall also be used. The nominal search unit frequency shall be 2.25 MHz. 5.5 Ultrasonic Instrument The examiner shall use a Sonic FTS Ma.rk I ultrasonic instrument.
| |
| Each instrument shall be aligned and shall display a valid alignment tion tag as required by NQAP 10-1. 5.6 Couplant (1) (2) USP-grade glycerine or deionized water (with or without wetting agent) shall be used when performing ultrasonic calibrations and examinations in accordance with this procedure.
| |
| USP-grade glycerine shall be certified for sulfur content and total halogens in accordance with ASTM D-129-64 and ASTM D-808-63.
| |
| The residual *amount of total sulfur or halogens shall not exceed 1% by weight. Deionized water, wheri used, shall be supplied by the customer.
| |
| (3) Couplant materials used for examinations shall be the same as used for the calibration.
| |
| * 5.7 Thermometer Quicktemp thermometer Model 5X-666, calibrated and certified in accordance with the applicable revision of SwRI Nuclear Projects Operating Procedure shall be used to measure basic calibration block and component surface temperature.
| |
| : 6. CALIBRATION METHOD 6.1 Instrument Linearity The ultrasonic instrument shall be verified at the beginning of each day for amplitude linearity and amplitude control linearity in accordance with Paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.2. Data required shall be recorded on the SwRI Instrument Linearity Verification Record and the sheet number shall be referenced on the applicable SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record
| |
| * SwRI Form QA 3-2
| |
| **{,; SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-15 Revision 57 September 1983 ID 6.1.1 6.1.2 SwRI Form QA 3-2 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 6 of 18 Amplitude Linearity (1) Position a shear-wave search unit on a calibration block to obtain indications from the l/2T and 3/4T holes. (2) Adjust the search unit position to give a 2:1 ratio between the two indications, with the larger indication (l/2T hole) set at 80% of full screen height (FSH) and the smaller indication (3/4T hole) set at 40% of FSH. (3) Without moving the search unit, set the larger indication to 100% of FSH and record the position of the smaller cation, estimated to the nearest 1% of FSH. (4) Successively set the larger indication from 100% to 20% of FSH in 10% increments (or 2 dB steps if a fine control is not available);
| |
| observe and record the smaller indication estimated to the nearest 1% of FSH at each setting. The reading must be 50% of the larger amplitude within 5% of FSH. Amplitude Control Linearity (1) Position a shear-wave search unit on a basic calibration block to obtain maximum amplitude from the l/2T hole. (2) Without moving the search unit, set the indication to the required percent of FSH and increase or decrease the dB as specified below. The estimated signal shall be recorded to the nearest 1% of FSH and shall fall within the limits of the following table: -Indication Indication Set at % of dB Control Limits, % of Full Screen Full Screen 80% -6dB 32 to 48% 80% -12dB 16 to 24% 40% +6dB 64 to 96% 20% +12dB 64 to 96% *Minus denotes decrease in amplitude; plus denotes increase.
| |
| .,. * * *
| |
| * * ** SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-15 Revision 57 September 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 7 *of 18 6.2 Calibration The ultrasonic calibration shall be completed prior to the examination.
| |
| NOTES The REJECT control shall be maintained in the 0 position during calibration and examination.
| |
| The FREQ MHz control shall be turned to 2. All spaces on the SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record shall be filled in. The type and length of the search unit cable shall be recorded on the SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record. The centerline of the search unit shall be at least 1-1/2 inches from the nearest side of the block. Rotating the beam into the corner formed by the hole and the side of the block may produce a higher amplitude at a longer beam path. TJlis beam path shall not be used for calibration.
| |
| When the examination is to be performed from the outside surface of a clad vessel, the calibration shall be accomplished from the unclad surface of the basic calibration block. When the examination is to be performed from the inside surface of a clad vessel, the calibration shall be accomplished from the clad surface of the basic calibration block. 6.2.1 Temperature Requirements The temperature of the.basic calibration block during calibration*
| |
| and verifications shall be within 25aF of the component temperature.
| |
| The temperature of the basic calibration block shall be recorded on the SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record, for the initial calibration and each verification.
| |
| The surface temperature of the component to be examined shall be taken prior to performing an examination.
| |
| The temperature shall be recorded on the applicable SwRI Examination Record. 6.2.2 SwRI Form QA 3-2 Straight-Beam Distance Calibration (1) Select shortest screen distance size that includes at least l/4t beyond the nominal production material thickness
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-15 Revision 57 September 1983 6.2.3 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 8 of 18 (2) Position the unit on the appropriate reference block, observe back reflections, and set up a linear sound* path distance along the screen baseline.
| |
| Angle-Beam Distance Calibration The screen distance chosen shall be the shortest applicable size to include at"least 1/8 vee-path beyond the anticipated examination range. Observing radius echoes from the applicable reference block, set up the required linear sound path distance along the screen baseline.
| |
| When the same instrument is used for both 45° and 60° tions, the screen distance calibration shall be conducted as follows: 6.2.4 SwRI Fonn QA 3-2 (1) The screen distance size shall be determined by the angle-beam search unit requiring the longer examination range. (2) Position the 45° search unit on the appropriate reference block. Observe and record all verification block entries as required on the appropriate SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record. (3) Position the 60° search unit on the appropriate reference block. Without changing the calibrated screen distance, observe and record all verification block entries as required on the appropriate SwRI Sonic Instrument bration Record. (4) No attempt shall be made to compensate for any delay difference observed between 45° and 60° screen distance calibrations.
| |
| This difference shall be considered when resolving indications.
| |
| Straight-Beam Distance Amplitude Correction for Material 2.5 to 12.0 Inches in Thickness (1) Position straight-beam search unit on the basic calibration block to obtain maximum response from the calibration hole selected from the following, which produces the highest amplitude:
| |
| * * *
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-15 Revision 57 September 1983 6.2.5 SwRI Form QA 3-2 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Hole l/4T l/2T (if present) 3/4T Page 9 of 18 (2) Adjust the instrument gain controls to obtain the primary reference response at 80% +/-5% of FSH and mark.this amplitude on the screen. The gain controls shall not be adjusted once the primary reference response has been established.
| |
| (3) . Position the search unit to obtain maximum response from the other calibration holes, mark and join all amplitude points with a smooth curved line which shall extend 1/8 vee-path beyond the last qualified calibration point. Angle-Beam Distance Amplitude Correction from the Clad Side or on Nonclad Blocks (t)* Position the 45° +/-2° search unit on the basic calibration block to obtain maximum response from the calibration hole selected from the following, which produces the highest amplitude:
| |
| Hole l/4T l/2T 3/4T 45° Vee-Path Positions 1/8 2/8 3/8, 5/8 (2) Obtain a primary reference response at 80% +/-5% of FSH and mark this amplitude on the screen. The gain control shall not be adjusted once the primary reference response has been established.
| |
| (3) Obtain maximum response from the remaining vee-path 'positions, mark on screen, and join all amplitude points with a smooth, curved line. * (4) With the instrument set at the primary reference level, position the 45° search unit for maximum
| |
| -. SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-15 Revision 57 September 1983 6.2.6 SwAI Form QA 3-2 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 10 of 18 amplitude from the square notch on the opposite surface. Mark the signal amplitude with an x. The indication from the square notch must be considered when evaluating reflectors at the opposite surface. (5) Repeat steps (1) through (4) using a 60° search unit. Angle-Beam Distance Amplitude Correction from the Unclad Side of Clad Blocks (1) Position the 45° search unit on the basic calibration block to obtain maximum response from the calibration hole selected from the following, which produces the highest amplitude:
| |
| (2) Hole l/4T l/2T 3/4T 45° Vee-Path Positions 1/8 2/8 3/8 Obtain a primary reference response at 80% +/-5% of FSH and mark this amplitude on the screen. The gain controls shall not be adjusted once the primary reference response has been established.
| |
| (3) Obtain maximum response from the other vee-path positions and mark on screen. (4) Position the 45° search unit on the clad side of the block. Determine the dB difference between the 3/8 and 5/8 vee-path.
| |
| Mark the locatipn of the 5/8 vee-path on the baseline of the instrument.
| |
| (5) Position the 45° search unit on the unclad side of the block. Adjust the instrument gain controls to the primary reference level established in step (2) and obtain the maximum response from the 3/8 vee-path.
| |
| (6) Decrease the signal from the 3/8 vee-path by the dB ence determined in step (4). Mark the amplitude of this signal at the location of the 5/8 vee-path determined in step (4). Join the marks on the instrument screen to construct the DAC curve. * * *
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-15 Revision 57 September 1983 ID 6.2.7 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 11 of 18 (7) With the instrument gain set at the primary reference level, obtain maximum amplitude from the square notch on the opposite surface. Mark the signal amplitude with an x. The indication from the square notch must be considered when evaluating reflectors at the opposite surface. (8) Repeat steps (1) through (7) using a 60° search unit. Beam Spread and Beam Angle Determination Angle-beam search units used for examinations shall be measured for beam spread and beam angle after the initial calibration, or with substitution of the ultrasonic instrument, search unit transducer, or wedge as follows: SwRI Form QA 3-2 (1) Calibrate the instrument on the basic calibration block as described in Paragraphs 6.2.3 and 6.2.5 or 6.2.6. (2) With the instrument at the primary reference level tivity, position the search unit for maximum amplitude from the l/4T hole (W max). Measure and record the distance from the incident point of the search unit to the scribe line above the l/4T hole. (3) Repeat step (2) recording the distance to the scribe line for both the 1/2T and 3/4T maximum amplitudes.
| |
| (4) Increase the instrument gain 2 times the primary reference level sensitivity (6 dB) so the curve marked on the instrument screen represents the 50% DAC curve. (5) Position the search unit for maximum amplitude from the 1/4T hole. Move the search unit toward the hole until the indication equals the 50% DAC line. Measure and record the distance from the incident point of the search unit to the scribe line above the 1I4 T hole (W 1) *. -(6) Move the search unit away from the hole until the cation equals the 50% DAC line. Measure and record the distance from the incident point of the search unit to the _ l/ 4T scribe line (W 2). (7) Repeat steps (5) and (6), recording the measurements for the l/2T and 3/4T holes
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-15 57 September 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 12 of 18 (8) Plot these points on a 1:1 or 2:1 scale drawing of the basic calibration block thickness or on the graph on the back of the SwRI Beam Spread Record.
| |
| When plotting Ws on a graph or scale drawing, place the points at the appropriate depth (l/4T, l/2T, or 3/4T). (9) Draw a separate line to each of the W max points from the incident point of the search unit. (10) The angle to each of the points shall be measured using a protractor.
| |
| The beam angle shall be established by mining the average of the three W max angles measured * . This angle shall be recorded on the SwRI Beam Spread Record and considered during resolution of indications.
| |
| (11) Connect the three w 1 points extending the line to the search unit drawn at the top of the graph. Repeat this operation for the w 2 points. If the three W1 or W2 points do not form a straight line, then a line representing the average of the three points shall be drawn and extended until they cross (the three points must be along the same beam path on the block drawing to complete.this task). (12) Measure the angle between the w 1 line and the W2 line. This is the angle of beam spread. Sweep Range and DAC Curve Verification Sweep range calibration shall be verified on the appropriate reference block, and DAC curve calibration (if applicable) shall be verified on the appropriate basic calibration block: SwRI Form QA 3-2 (l) At the start of a series of examinations (2) With any substitution of the same type and length of search unit cable (3) With any substitution utilizing the same type of power source; e.g., a change from one dire.ct current to another direct current source (4) At least every 4 hours during the examination
| |
| * *
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-15 Revision 57 September 1983 tion: NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 13 of 18 (5) At the finish of a series of examinations (6) Whenever the validity of the calibration is in doubt 6.2.8.l Calibration Changes (1) Perform the following if any point on the DAC curve has changed by more than 20% or 2dB in amplitude
| |
| * (2) . (a) Void all examinations referring to the calibration in question and performed after the last valid calibration verification. (b) Perform and record a new calibration. (c) Reexamine the areas for which examinations have been voided. Perform .the following if any point on the DAC curve has moved on the sweep line more than 5% of the sweep division reading: (a) Correct the sweep range and record the change on the SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record. (b) If any indications have been recorded with this calibration, the SwRI Examination Record shall be voided, a new calibration performed, and the areas for which examinations have been voided reexamined.
| |
| 6.2.8.2 Recalibration Substitution of any of the following shall be cause for recalibra-(1) *.Search unit transducer or wedge*. (2) unit cable type or length (3) Ultrasonic instrument (4) Examination personnel (5) Couplant (6) Change in type of power source; e.g., a change from alternating to direct current SwRI Form QA 3-2 /'
| |
| SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-15 Revision 57 September 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 14 of 18 7
| |
| * EXAMINATION
| |
| | |
| ===7.1 Surface===
| |
| Condition The contact surfaces must be free from weld spatter, roughness, or other conditions which interfere with free movement of the search unit or impair the transmission of ultrasound.
| |
| | |
| ===7.2 Transfer===
| |
| The transfer method shall not be used. 7.3 Scanning When practicable, scanning shall be performed at a minimum gain setting of 2 times the reference level sensitivity.
| |
| Instrument gain setting for scanning shall be determined on the basic calibration block as follows for each primary reference level utilized:
| |
| (1) With the instrument at the primary reference level, position the search unit on the basic calibration block to obtain a signal of 40% of FSH from a calibration reflector (side-drilled hole). (2) Add 6 dB of gain by utilizing the 6 dB switch (if present), the fine gain control or a combination of the fine and coarse gain controls and choose the method which yields a signal response closest to 80% FSH. (3) The signal response chosen shall be within +/-2 dB of 80% FSH. Titis amplitude and method shall be recorded on the SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record and shall be used during the valid calibration period for all scanning at two times the reference level sensitivity.
| |
| Scanning overlap shall be a minimum of 10% of the search unit piezoelectric element dimension perpendicular to the directoin of the scan. The search unit movement rate shall not exceed 6 inches per second. SwRI Form QA 3-2 * * *
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NlJCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE
| |
| | |
| ===7.4 Examination===
| |
| | |
| Areas SwRI-NDT-600-15 Revision 57 September 1983 Page 15 of 18 Longitudinal and circumferential butt welds and nozzle-to-vessel butt welds in ferritic pressure vessels with 2.5 to 12.0 inches nominal thickness shall be examined.
| |
| Manual ultrasonic examination of pressure vessel welds and cent base material shall be performed from the inside or outside surface of the vessel. Examination area shall be the weld and adjacent base material for a distance of lt from the fusion line on each side of the weld for longitudinal and circumferential butt welds, and the weld and lt of base material on the vssel side.of the weld for nozzle-to-vessel butt welds. In cases where the weld crown 1S on the inside surface, the lt distance shall be based upon lt from the fusion line of the weld crown. A detailed scale drawing shall be obtained to determine the exact weld configuration of spherical vessel head circumferential and meridional welds. In cases where the weld crown is on the inside surface and the examination is to be performed from the outside surface, the examiner shall determine the lt examination area based upon the lt distance on the ins*ide surface. 7.4.1 Base Material Lamination Scan A lamination scan using straight-beam shall be performed before the angle-beam examination.
| |
| This examination shall cover as much of the area as practical through which the angle-beam is later to be passed. Screen tance calibration for this examination shall be conducted in accordance with Paragraph
| |
| | |
| ====6.2.2. Scanning====
| |
| sensitivity shall be as required to maintain the first back reflection at an amplitude of 80% of FSH. Intermediate echoes having *an amplitude equal to or greater than the remaining back reflection shall be recorded.
| |
| To record an intermediate indication, obtain a back reflection signal from an indication-free area and adjust the instrument gain control until this signal is at 80% +/-5% of FSH. Record the intermediate indication when its amplitude is equal to the remaining back reflection.
| |
| If total loss of back reflection accompanies the intermediate echo, the area of total loss of back reflection shall be recorded on the priate SwRI Examination Record
| |
| * SwRI Form QA 3-2 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH .INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-15 Revision 57 September 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 16 of 18 7.4.2 Thickness Measurements Thickness measurements shall be taken on the centerline of the weld and at one point in the base material on each side of the weld for cumferential and longitudinal welds, and on the centerline of the an4 at one point in the base material on the vessel side adjacent to the weld for . nozzle-to-vessel welds. Screen distance calibration for these examinations shall be conducted in accordance with Paragraph
| |
| | |
| ====6.2.2. Measurements====
| |
| | |
| shall be recorded on the appropriate SwRI examination record. 7.4.3 Angle-Beam Examination for Indications Parallel with the Weld Angle-beam examinations shall be accomplished using 45° and 60° refracted shear-waves from both sides of the weld for circumferential and longitudinal welds, and from the vessel side of the weld for nozzle-to-vessel welds.
| |
| * This examination shall be performed by directing the sound beam perpendicularly into the weld to detect indications parallel with the weld * ., Calibration for these examinations shall be in accordance with Paragraphs 6.2.3 and 6.2.5 (or 7.4.4 Straight-Beam Examination of Welds A straight-beam examination shall be applied, when possible, to the surface of the weld crown and lt of base material on each side of the weld for circumferential and longitudinal welds and, .when possible, to the surface of the weld crown and lt of base material on the vessel side of the weld for nozzle-to-vessel welds. Calibration for the straight-beam examination shali be in accordance with Paragraphs 6.2.2 and 6.2.4. 7.4.5 Angle-Beam Examination for Indications Perpendicular to the Weld Angle-beam examination shall be conducted using a 45° and 60° shear-wave search unit. This examination shall be conducted by placing the search unit on the weld with the sound beam directed into and parallel with the weld to detect indications perpendicular to the weld. The length of the weld and lt of base material on each side of the weld for circumferential and longitudinal welds, and lt of base material on the vessel side of the weld for nozzle-to*vessel welds shall be scanned with the search unit sound beam directed in this manner. The search unit shall then be turned 180° and the scan repeated.
| |
| Calibration for these examinations shall be in accordance with Paragraphs 6.2.3 and 6.2.5 (or 6.2.6). SwRI Form OA 3-2 ** * *
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NU.CLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE
| |
| | |
| ===7.5 Postexamination===
| |
| | |
| Cleaning SwRI-NDT-600-15 Revision 57 September 1983 Page 17 of 18 Arrangements shail be made with the customer for postexainination removal of couplant materials.
| |
| ' 8. RECORDING CRITERIA Indications shall be recorded utilizing the techniques outlined in the applicable revision of SwRI Nuclear Projects Operating Procedure IX-FE-119.
| |
| Ultrasonic reflectors producing a response 50% or greater of the reference level and planar surface reflectors equal to or exceeding the response from the square notch shall be recorded on the appropriate SwRI Examination Record. Indications producing a response 50% or greater of the reference level and planar surface reflectors equal to or exceeding the response from the square notch shall be investigated by a Level II or a Level III examiner to the extent necessary to determine the shape, identity, and location of the reflector.
| |
| Indications 50% or greater of the reference level and planar surface reflectors equal to or exceeding the response from the square notch gated and found to be.other than geometrical in nature shall be reported to the customer for evaluation.
| |
| When an examination is performed from the unclad side of a clad vessel and the calibration is as specified in Paragraph 6.2.5, indications observed past the 4/8 vee-path shall not be recorded.
| |
| Scanning limitations shall be recorded.
| |
| : 9. EVALUATION Evaluation of reportable indications shall be the responsibility of the customer, or the customer's representative, and shall be conducted in dance with the applicable ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section XI, IWA-3000.
| |
| : 10. RECORDS The customer shall receive copies of documents generated in accordance with this procedure in the examination report
| |
| * SwRI Form QA 3-2 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE-NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE SwRI-NDT-600-15 Revision 57 September 1983 Page 18 of 18 Documents generated in accordance with this procedure shall be retained as a portion of the examination report. The examination report shall be stored by the Manager of the Support and Administration Section, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division, in the Data Storage Facility for the period specified by the contractual agreement with the customer.
| |
| SwRI Form QA 3-2 * * *
| |
| * * ** PROCEDURE DEVIATION L** SITE: Salem, Unit 2 PSI w ISi I PROCEDURE/REVISION NO. -600-26/5 DEVIATION NO. ,----DEVIATION PAGE NO.: DATE REQUESTED:
| |
| EXAMINATION PERICO: SECTIONISI AFFECTED:
| |
| PROCEDURE PAGEISI: 6 9 OF: 13 f'..... EXAMINATION AREAi Si AFFECTED: Examination to be performed in accordance with this procedure at Salem, Unit 2. :::: z : OEVIATION:
| |
| It is requested ttm the paragraphlsl shown below in the above procedure/revision be deviated from as follows (use exact praposad, additional may be uSact if necessary I: ffi" !Ado Paragraph fr. 6. 4 to read as follows: c Verification of Calibration Reflectors at Scanning Speed The examiner shall verify the presence of the calibration reflector scanning speed. NOTE It is not necessary to assure that this check confirms the signal amplitude at 100% of.reference level, but merely to demonstrate that the signal from the calibration reflectors are readily observable at scanning speed. The following statement shall be documented on the SwRI Calibration Record Sheet and initialed: "Calibration reflectors have been verified at scanning speed." :r ..:USTIFICA TION: Reason change is necessary ano what it is intended to accompiish
| |
| !use additional sheets if necessary I: ::: (.)":JO change is necessary to verify the presence of the calibration reflectors nder procedural scanning conditions.
| |
| Q ... ::: SwRI FORM Fc-4-4
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-26 NUCLEAR PROJECTS Revision 5 November 1984
| |
| * OPERATlNG PROCEDURE Page 1 of 13 -Title --MANUAL ULTMSONIC EXAMINATION OF THIN WALL VESSEL WELDS EFFECTIVITY AND APPROVAL Revision 5 of this procedure became effective on Nov 9' 1984 . Other revisions of the base document may be effective concurrently.
| |
| Approvals.
| |
| Written By &:\ Date Technical Review Date . I
| |
| :?
| |
| 1'iif
| |
| * Manage*of'1A. Date /;/L Date
| |
| ... ?A111<1 H 1 tftQ1 The following information mav be used for convenience.
| |
| Jpletion of this portion is not mandatory.
| |
| Deviation No. Date Effective
| |
| -Procedure Section(s)
| |
| Affected Notes: .. ** I SwFll Form QA-4.0A*O SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-26 Revision 5 November 1984 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 2 of 13 MANUAL ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION OF THIN WALL VESSEL WELDS SwRI-NDT-600-26
| |
| : 1. PURPOSE This procedure provides the technical information and detailed steps sary to ensure a complete and accurate manual ultrasonic examination of thin *wall pressure vessel welds and adjacent base material, in accordance with the applicable ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes. 2. SCOPE AND APPLICATION Pressure vessel welds in the thickness range from 0.1 to 0.4 inch, adjacent base material, heat-affected zone (HAZ), vessel support attachments, and to-shell welds shall be examined as specified in the applicable SwRI Examination Plan. Manual, contact, pulse-echo shear-wave angle-beam and longitudinal-wave straight-beam ultrasonic techniques shall be utilized in accordance with this procedure.
| |
| : 3. APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS (1) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section XI, 1974 :Edition with Addenda through Summer 1975, "Rules for Inservice Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components" (2) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section V, 1974 Edition with Addenda through Summer 1975, "Nondestructive Examination," with the exception of the following:
| |
| SwAI Form QA 3*2 (a) Subparagraph Article 5, Section V, requires the basic calibration block for production material thicknesses (t) up to and including 1 inch to be 3/4-inch or t. Paragraph 5.3 of this procedure requires the basic calibration block to be either t, no more than 25% less than t, or closer in thickness to t than the 3/4-inch alternate thickness allowed by Article 5 for t up to and including 1 inch. 'Illis exception will assure a more accurate calibration than the 3/4-inch basic calibration block design allowed by Code. * *
| |
| * **
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-26 Revision 5 November 1984 fC) ,
| |
| 1 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 3 of 13 . ,,..,Ill'[(, J All --u.w I if/ / .; ,,.-4. (b) Subparagraph T-535.l(d), Article 5, Section V, states that transfer (attenuation) be accomplished between the production material and basic calibration block and a correction be made for the difference.
| |
| No attempt shall be made by the examiner to conduct attenuation as stated in Paragraph 7.3. (3) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, 1974 Edition with Addenda through Summer 1975, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications" (4) SwRI-Nuclear Quality Assurance Program Manual (NQAPM) 3.1 Applicable Calibration and Examination Records SwRI-NDTR Form No. 17-18 17-19 17-25 17-110 RESPONSIBILITY Revision Date 7-31-75 12-1-83 3-14-79 3-3-82 (1) The Director of the Department of Engineering Services, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division, shall be responsible for the preparation, review, approval, and control of this procedure.
| |
| (2) The Project Manager shall be responsible for the implementation of. this procedure in accordance with the NQAPM specified in the cable SwRI Project Plan. (3) The examiner shall be responsible for implementing the requirements of this procedure.
| |
| (4) The Manager of the Support and Administration
| |
| : Section, ance Systems and Engineering Division, shall be responsible for age of records generated in accordance with this procedure.
| |
| 5
| |
| * PERSONNEL A..""ID EQUIPMENT
| |
| | |
| ===5.1 Personnel===
| |
| | |
| Certification Personnel performing ultrasonic examinations shall be certified in accordance with SwRI NQAP 11-1, "Special Process Control." SwRI Form QA 3-2 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE
| |
| | |
| ===5.2 Reference===
| |
| | |
| Block SwRI-NDT-600-26 Revision 5 November 1984 Page 4 of 13 *. Reference blocks used for screen distance.calibration and cation shall De of the same material as the production material; i.e., stainless steel or carbon steel, and shall be one of the following:
| |
| (1) SwRI Half-Round, (2) AWS Type DC, or (3) IIW. 5.3 Basic Calibration Block The bask calibration block shall be fabricated from material of the *same or equivalent P-number grouping as the production material, as fied in Section IX of the ASME Code. P-numbers P-1, P-3, P-4, and P-5 shall be considered equivalent for the purpose of this examination.
| |
| Calibration reflectors shall be notches machined on the outside and inside surfaces of the basic calibration block. The notches shall.be in accordance with approved drawings of the basic calibration block contained in the applicable SwRI Examination Plan.
| |
| * The basic calibration block thickness shall be determined by the t of the production inaterial to which the search unit is applied and Article 5,
| |
| * Section v. When a basic calibration block of the same thickness as t is not available, the basic calibration block thickness shall be no more than 25% thin-ner than t or shall be closer .to t than the 3/4-inch thick alternate basic bration block allowed by Article 5, Section v. A single curved basic calibration block may be used to establish sensitivity calibration for the examination of welds in the curvature range from 0.9 to 1.5 times the basic calibration block diameter, when the contact surface curvature is 20 inches in diameter or less. On contact surface curvatures greater than 20 inches in diameter a flat basic calibration block or block of essentially the same curvature as the examination contact surface may be used to establish sensitivity calibration.
| |
| | |
| ===5.4 Search===
| |
| Units SwRI Form QA 3-2 (1) Search units shall be selected according to the following: (a) Straight-Beam (Longitudinal-Wave)
| |
| Nominal Production Material Thickness 0.1" to 0.4** Nominal Search Unit Size 1/4" x 1/4" Aerotech Gamma MSWS (Diamond) 1/4" Round Dual Element *
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-26 Revision 5 November 1984 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 5 of 13 (i) A 0° longitudinal-wave search unit shall be used. A delay line shoe shall be attached if a 1/4" x 1/4" Gamma MSWS search unit is used. (3) The nominal longitudinal-wave search unit frequency shall be S.O MHz when using an Aerotech 1/4" x 1/4" Gamma MSWS. The frequency shall be 2.25 or 5.0 MHz when a 1/4".round dual element search unit is used. (b) Angle-Beam (Shear-Wave)
| |
| Nominal Production Material Thickness Q. l" t,o o.4" 0.2" to Q.4" Nominal Search Unit Size 1/4" x 1/4", 1/4" Round 3/8" x 3/8",. 3/8" Round (4) Search unit wedges shall be fabricated as required to produce a 45° +/-2° refracted shear-wave.
| |
| Other angles may be used to supplement the examination
| |
| * (5) The exit point of the sound beam and the*actual refracted beam angle of shear-wave search units shall be determined on an IIW reference block. The exit point shall be marked on the search unit wedge. (6) The nominal shear-wave search unit frequency for carbon steel shall be 2.25 MHz. (7) The nominal shear-wave search unit frequency for tion of austenitic material shall be as follows: Nominal Frequency 2.25 MHz 1.5 MHz Search Unit Size 1/4" Round, 1/4" x 1/4" 3/8" Round, 3/8" x 3/8" 5.5 Ultrasonic Instrument The examiner shall use .a Sonic FTS Mark I ultrasonic instrument which shall be aligned and shall display a valid alignment calibration tag as . . required by NQAP 10-1. 5.6 Couplant ( 1) SwRI Form QA 3-2 USP-grade glycerine or deionized water (with or Without ting agent) shall be used when performing ultrasonic brations and examinations in accordance with this procedure
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-26 Revision 5 November 1984 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 6 of 13 . (2) USP-grade glycerine shall be certified for sulfur content and total halogens in accordance with ASTM D-129-64 and ASTM D-808-63.
| |
| The residual amount of total sulfur or gens shall not exceed 1% by weight. Deionized water, when used, shall be supplied by the customer.
| |
| (3) Couplant materials used for examinations shall be the same as used for the calibration.
| |
| : 6. CALIBRATION METHOD The ultrasonic examination shall be completed prior to the examination.
| |
| The REJECT control shall be maintained in the 0 position during tion and examination.
| |
| The FREQ MHz control shall be turned to 1 when a 1.5 MHz search unit is used, to 2 with a 2.5 MHz search unit, and to 5 with a 5.0 MHz search unit. All information blocks on the SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record shall be filled in. 6.1 Straight-Beam Distance Calibration (1) The screen distance chosen shall be the shortest applicable size to include at least l/4t beyond the nominal production material.
| |
| (2) Attach a delay line shoe if a 1/4" x 1/4" Gamma MSWS search . unit is used. (3) Position the search unit on an appropriate reference block, observe the back reflections, and set up a linear sound path distance along the instrument screen baseline.
| |
| 6.2 Angle-Beam Distance Calibration SwAI Form QA3-2 (1) Select the shortest screen distance size that includes at least 1/8 vee path beyond the anticipated examination range. (2) Position the shear-wave search unit on an appropriate ence block, observe the radius echoes, and set up a linear sound path distance along the screen baseline.
| |
| * * *
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-26 Revision 5 November 1984 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 7 of 13
| |
| * 6.3 Straight-Beam Distance Amplitude Correction (DAC) A DAC curve shall not be constructed with this procedure.
| |
| 6.4 Angle-Beam Distance Amplitude Correction NOTE When examining circumferential welds utilizing a curved block, DAC curves shall be constructed from notches perpendicular to the axis of the basic calibration block. DAC curves shall be constructed from the axial notches for the ing examinations utilizing curved basic calibration blocks; (1) Position the angle-beam search unit on the basic tion block to obtain maximum response from the vee-path position selected from the following, which produces the highest amplitude:
| |
| (2) Vee-Path Positions 4/8, 12/8 Set the primary reference response to 75% +/-5% of full screen height (FSH) and mark this amplitude on the screen. The gain controls shall not be adjusted once the primary ence response has beeµ established.
| |
| (3) Obtain maximum response from the remaining vee-path tions; mark and join all amplitude points with a smooth curved line which shall not extend more than 1/8 vee path beyond the last qualified calibration point. EXCEPTION If the configuration of the weld is such that the full vee-path examination fails to cover the entire weld volume, a 16/8 vee-path calibration shall be accomplished.
| |
| | |
| ===6.5 Secondary===
| |
| | |
| DAC Calibrations If all points on the DAC curve do not appear at 20% FSH or greater, a secondary DAC curve shall be constructed as follows: (1) All secondarj' DAC curves shall contain at least 2 points
| |
| * SwRI Form QA 3-2 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-26 Revision 5 November 1984 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 8 of 13 (2) The DAC point at 20% of FSH or greater, adjacent to a DAC point that falls below 20% of FSH, shall be brought to the primary reference level and marked on the instrument screen. The adjacent point(s), previously at less than 20% of FSH, shall be marked on the screen and all points connected with a smooth curved line. The gain setting for this secondary DAC curve shall be recorded on the appropriate SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record. EXCEPTION When the first DAC point is the only point above 20% of FSH, the next highest point shall be brought to the primary reference level and marked on the ment screen. The other points previously at less than 20% of FSH shall be marked on the screen and all points connected with a smooth curved line. 6.6 Calibration Verification Sweep Range and DAC Curve Veri'f ication Sweep range and DAC curve calibration shall be verified on the appropriate reference and basic calibration block when any of the following occur: SwRI Form QA 3-2 (1) Prior to a series of examinations (2) With any substitution of the search unit cable (3.) With any substitution utilizing the same type of power source; e.g., a change of batteries (4) At least every 4 hours during the examination (5) At the completion of a series of examinations (6) Whenever the validity of the calibration is in doubt Calibration Changes (1) Perform the following if any point on the DAC curve has decreased more than 20% or 2 dB in amplitude, or any point on the DAC has moved on the sweep line more than 5% of full screen width: ... * * *
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-26 Revision 5 November 1984 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 9 of 13 * (a) Void all examinations ref erring to the calibration in question and performed after the last valid calibration. (b) Conduct a new calibration. (c) Reexamine the areas for which examinations have been voided. (2) Perform the following if any point on the DAC curve has increased in amplitude more than 20% or 2 dB: (a) Correct the calibration. (b) Reexamine all indications recorded since the last valid calibration verification. (c) Enter proper values on a new SwRI Examination Record. Recalibration Substitution of any of the following shall be cause for recalibration:
| |
| (1) Search unit wedge or transducer (2) Couplant (3) Ultrasonic instrument*
| |
| (4) Examination personnel (5) Change in type of power source; e.g., a change from direct to alternating current 7. EXAMINATION
| |
| | |
| ===7.1 Examination===
| |
| | |
| Areas Ultrasonic examination of pressure vessel welds and adjacent vessel base material 0.1-to 0.4-inch nominal thickness shall be performed from the outside surface of the vessel
| |
| * SwRI Form QA 3-2 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-26 Revision 5 November 1984 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE*
| |
| Page 10 of 13 Base material adjacent to welds shall be examined for a minimum distance of 1.0 inch from the fusion line on each side of the weld on nal and circumferential butt welds and for a minimum: distance of 1.0 inch from the fusion line on the vessel side of the weld for nozzle-to-shell and support attachment welds. 7.2 Surface Condition The contact surfaces shall be free from weld spatter, roughness, or other conditions which interfere with free movement of the search unit or impair the transmission of ultrasound.
| |
| | |
| ===7.3 Transfer===
| |
| No attempt*shall be made.to determine*differences in the acoustic properties between the basic calibration block and the production material, which would result in an instrument gain change. 7.4 Scanning When practicable, scanning shall be performed at a minimum gain setting of 2 times the reference level sensitivity.
| |
| Instrument gain setting for scanning shall be determined on the basic calibration block as follows for each primary reference level utilized:
| |
| (1) With the instrument at the primary reference level, late the search unit on the basic calibration block to obtain a signal of 40% of FSH from a calibration reflector (machined notch). (2) Add 6 dB gain by utilizing the 6 dB switch* (if present), the fine gain control, or a combination of the fine and coarse gain controls and choose any method that yields a signal response within +/-2 dB of 80% FSH. (3) This amplitude and method shall be recorded on the SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record and shall be used during the valid calibration period for all scanning at 2 times the reference level sensitivity.
| |
| Scanning overlap shall be a minimum of 10% of the search unit piezoelectric element perpendicular to the direction of the scan. The search unit movement rate shall not exceed 6 inches per second
| |
| * SwRI Form QA 3-2 * * *
| |
| *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI.-NDT-600-26 Revision 5 November 1984 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 11 of 13 *. 7.5 ' Base Material Lamination Scan Prior to the shear wave examination, a longitudinal-wave tion scan shall be performed which shall cover the entire area through which 'the angle-beam is to be passed. This examination shall be conducted as follows: 7.6 (1) The screen distance calibration shall* be conducted in dance with Paragraph 6.1. (2) Scanning sensitivity shall be as required to maintain back reflection at an amplitude of between 50%.and 90% of FSH. (3) To record an intermediate indication, a back reflection nal shall be obtained from an indication-free area and set at an amplitude of 75% +/-5% of FSH; record the intermediate indication when its amplitude is equal to 50% of the initial back reflection and accompanied by a 50% loss of back tion. Areas of total loss of back reflection accompanying the intermediate echo shall also be recorded.
| |
| Thickness Measurements Thickness measurements shall be taken at a minimum of three points on longitudinal and circumferential butt welds (on the centerline of the weld and at one point in the base material on each side of the weld) and at a minimum of two points on nozzle-to-shell and support attachment welds (one point on the vessel side of the weld and.one on the nozzle or support attachment side of the weld). *Screen distance calibration for this examination shall be conducted in accordance with Paragraph
| |
| | |
| ===6.1. Measurements===
| |
| | |
| shall be taken by placing the 0°. search unit *on the examination surface and recording the position of the back wall reflection observed on the instrument screen. 7.7 Longitudinal and Circumferential Butt Welds in Vessels 7.7.1 Angle-Beam Examination for Indications Parallel with the Weld Angle-beam examination for indications parallel with the weld shall be accomplished using a 45° refracted shear wave from both sides of the weld. Calibration for these examinations shall be in accordance with graphs 6.2 and 6.4. Other angles may be used as referenced in Paragraph 5.4. When an examination cannot be accomplished from both sides of the weld, a 45° refracted shear-wave examination shall be accomplished from one side of the weld
| |
| * SwRI Form QA 3-2 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-26 Revision 5 November 1984 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 12 of 13 7.7.2 Angle-Beam Examination for !ndications Perpendicular to the Weld . An angle beam examination shall be conducted on the weld and the base material on both sides of the weld using the 45° shear-wave unit. This examination shall be conducted by placing the search unit on the surface.of the weld and base material with the sound beam directed in an axial orientation with respect to the weld to detect indications perpendicular to the weld. The entire length of the weld and the adjacent base material shall be scanned with the search unit directed in this manner. The search unit shall then be turned 180° and the scan** repeated.
| |
| Scanning coverage for this examination shall extend a minimum of l*inch from the weld fusion line. Calibration for this examination shall be in accordance with Paragraphs 6.2 and 6.4. 7.8 Butt and Fillet Welds of Support Attachments and Nozzle-to-Shell Welds 7.8.1 Angle Beam Examination for Indications Parallel with the Weld Angle beam examination for indications parallel with the weld shall be accomplished using a 45° refracted shear wave from the vessel side of the weld. The sound beam shall be directed perpendicularly into the for *this examination.
| |
| Calibration for these examinations shall be in accordance with Paragraphs 6.2 and 6.4. Other angles may be used as referenced in graph 5.4. 7.8.2 Angle-Beam Examination for Indications Perpendicular to the Weld An angle-beam examination sh,a.11 be conducted on the weld and on the base material on the vessel side using the 45° shear-wave unit. This nation shall be conducted by placing the search unit on the surf ace of the weld and base material with the sound beam directed in an axial orientation with respect to the weld to detect indications perpendicular to the weld. The entire length of the weld and the adjacent base material shall be scanned with the search unit directed in this manner. The search unit shall then be turned 180° and the scan repeated.
| |
| Scanning coverage for this examination shall extend a minimum of 1 inch from the weld fusion line. Calibration for this examination shall be in accordance with Paragraphs 6.2 and 6.4. 7.9 Postexamination Cleaning Arrangements shall be made with the customer for postexamination removal of couplant materials.
| |
| SwRI Form QA 3-2 * *
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE
| |
| : 8. RECORDING CRITERIA SwRI-NDT-600-26 Revision 5 November 1984 Page 13 of 13 Indications shall be recorded in accordance with the techniques outlined in the applicable revision of SwRI Nuclear Projects Operating Procedure"IX-FE-117.
| |
| Ultrasonic reflectors producing a response 50% or greater of the reference level shall be recorded on the appropriate SwRI Examination Record. Indications 20% or greater of the reference level and suspected by the examiner to*be other than geometrical in nature shall be recorded and gated by a Level II or a Level III examiner to determine the shape, identity," and location of the reflector.
| |
| Indications 100% or greater of the reference level shall be by a Level II or a Level III examiner to determine the shape, identity, and location of the reflector.
| |
| Indications 20% or greater of the reference level investigated and found to be other than geometrical in nature shall be reported to the customer for evaluation
| |
| * Scanning limitations shall be recorded.
| |
| 9
| |
| * EVALUATION Evaluation of reportable indications shall be the responsibility of the. customer and shall be conducted in accordance with the applicable ASME Boiler* and Pressure Vessel Code, Section XI,. Article
| |
| : 10. RECORDS Documents generated in accordance with this procedure shall be stored as specified in the SwRI Project Plan. The customer shall receive copies of these documents in the Examination Report, unless specified otherwise in the SwRI
| |
| * Project Plan
| |
| * SwAI Form QA 3-2 I, I * *
| |
| * PROCEDURE DEVIATlON I * . 7 s1Te: Psi 0 PRoci:ouRc/Rev1s10N No. Salem, Unit 2 ISi 600-30/16 DEVIATION NO. DEVIATION PAGE NO.: DATEREQUESTCD:
| |
| EXAMINATION PSRIOO:
| |
| '""-SECTIONISI AFFECTID:
| |
| PROCEDURE PAGEiSI: OF:
| |
| 3, 6 and 7 3, 6 and 19 ....... EXAMINATION AREAISI AFFECTED:
| |
| 0 Manual ultrasonic examination of pressure-retaining welds in heat exchangers
| |
| .......
| |
| u 'I'-. "" = .
| |
| _req_u_es_i_ed_th_a_t ttl ...... e-pa_rag_ra
| |
| ... p-hl_s_I sh-own--bel_ow_i_n_th_e_a_bov_e
| |
| ..
| |
| 'o_n_b_e_d_l!IYl_.a_ted_fro_m_as_f_ol-lo_ws_lu_s_e-ex_a_c::
| |
| __ --1 :i propoud, additional sheea mav be uSed if necessary I: -..
| |
| change in paragraph 3.1: Revision date for SwRI-NDTR Form 17-19 is 12-1-83. Delete the fourth note under NOTES in Paragraph
| |
| : 6. Q Change 7. 6. 3 to read as follows: * * . .. = ... c:i < z < :E < Angle-Beam Examination for Indications Perpendicular to the Weld Angle-beam examinations shall be on each weld using a 45° :t?o shear.
| |
| This examination.shall be conducted by placing the search unit on the weld
| |
| * with the sound beam_ directed into and parallel with the weld to detect indications , perpendicular to the weld. The entire length of the weld shall be scanned with l('" the search unit beam directed in this manner. The search unit shall then be c ... """ < Q turned 180° and the scan repeated.
| |
| Calibration for these examinations shall be in 1===;::::;*accordance with Paragraphs 6.1.2 and 6.1.4 for circumferential welds, and graphs 6 .* 2.2 and 6.2.4 for longitudinal, branch connection and support attachment 3 ... s "" = ... < u ... ,... 1 Change7.7.2 to read as follows: Angle-Beam Examination for Indications Parallel with.the Weld . An angle beam examination shall be accomplished using 45° refracted shear waves from the HE side of the weld. For this examination the sound beam shall be directed perpendicula_rly into the weld to detect indications which are parallel with the weld. Calibration for these examinations shall be in accordance with Paragraphs 6.2.2 and 6.2.4. Reason c:nange is necessarv ana wnat it is intenaec to aci:ompiisn (use aaaitiona1 sheets if necessaryl:
| |
| is necessary to provide the examiner with a revised form of the sheet, and clarify the procedure requirements for the calibration utilized
| |
| * Swrll FOrlM FE-4-4-*
| |
| -*
| |
| * PROCEDURE DEVIATION
| |
| __:; Page 1 of l Procedure I Revision I Deviation SwRl-NDT-600-30 16 8 The following examination areas are affected by this deviation:
| |
| Manual ultrasonic examination of heat exchanger welds The following paragraphs shall be deviated from as indicated:
| |
| Add the following under the second paragraph of Section 8 (Recording Criteria)
| |
| : Indications greater than 50% of the reference level attributable to geometry shall be recorded only once, even if the amplitude of the indication f luctua:as above and below the required recording amplitude along the weld. These indications shall be investigated by a Level II or a Level III examiner to determine the shape, identity, and location of the reflector.
| |
| If indications that have been recorded as geometry have been investigated and found to be nongeometric reflectors, the entire weld shall be reexamined and all nongeometric reflectors and other reflectors not previously*
| |
| recorded at least once shall be recorded.
| |
| Rationale for deviation:
| |
| This deviation permits the examiner to use newer recording methods which are now being used in all inservice inspections.
| |
| The-recording criteria has not been affected by this deviation.
| |
| ).PPROVALS
| |
| -Written by: '\1 *\ n Date: Technical
| |
| / -_/ *1 /./j,,_ .. J',::._ I Date: 13 .)c-'"C .. Y-1 rf1l * ........ , ....
| |
| \) 1 (V I_..,........., 13 \ 9 i+ Verbal A!]proval Given? 0 Yes '¢. No j Date: N //-J Date: Date: d f}J<.. 14 't;'f SwAI FORM FE-45
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RSSSARCH INSTITUTC . N-UC1..EAR PROJeCTS OPeiA TING PROCSDUR5 MANUAL ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION OF PRESSURE-RETAINING WELDS IN HEAT EXCHANGERS SwRI-NDT-600-30 Revision 16 September 198_;3 Page 1 of 20 r!ftisicn 16 6 October 83.
| |
| I tetlowinq im'cmm1on mav t:a IJ.ad ="""ienca.
| |
| IC-en No. I. S..C::cntsi INot!S: I Swtiill =..,r..,..
| |
| Oaw I SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-30 Revision 16 September 1983* 1. PURPOSE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 2 of 20 MANUAL ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION OF PRESSURE-RETAINING WELDS IN HEAT EXCHANGERS SwRI-NDT-600-30 This procedure provides the technical information and the detailed steps necessary to ensure complete, accurate manual ultrasonic examination of Class 1 and Class 2 heat exchangers (HEs) _in accordance with the applicable ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes. -2. SCOPE AND APPLICATION Longitudinal, circumferential, support attachment, and branch connection welds, plus the adjacent base material of HEs in the thickness range of 0.4 to 2.0 inches shall be examined in accordance with this procedure.
| |
| Welds to be examined shall be as specified in the applicable SwRI Examination Plan. Longitudinal-wave straight-beam and shear-wave angle-beam, .manual, contact, and pulse-echo ultrasonic techniques shall be utiltzed for these examinations.
| |
| : 3. APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS (1) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section XI, 1974 Edition with Addenda through Summer 1975, "Rules for Inservice Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components" (2)
| |
| * ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section V, 1974 Edition, with Addenda through Summer 1975, "Nondestructive Examination," with the exception of the following:
| |
| Subparagraph T-533.1 of .Article 5 of Section V requires the basic calibration block for production material thicknesses (t) up to and including 1-inch to be 3/4-inch or t. Section 5. of this procedure requires the basic calibration block to be either t, no more than 25% less than t, or closer in thickness to the production material than the 3/4-inch alternate thickness allowed by Article 5 for production material thicknesses up to and including 1 inch. This exception will assure a more accurate calibration than the 3/4-inch basic calibration block design allowed by Code. (3) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, 1974 Edition with Addenda through Summer 1975, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications" SwRI Form QA 3-2 ., * *
| |
| * * ** 4. SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-30 Revision 16 September 1983 NUC!,.EAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE
| |
| ,_.. Page 3 of 20 (4) SwRI Nuclear Quality Assurance Program Manual (NQAPM) 3.1 Applicable Calibration and Examination Records SwRI NDTR Form No. Revision Date 17-48 5-9-77 17-49 5-9-77 17-18 7-31-75 17-19 17-25 3-14-79 RESPONSIBILITY (1) The Director of the Department of Engineering Services, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division, shall be responsible for the preparation, review, approval, and control of this procedure.
| |
| (2) The Project Manager shall be responsible for the implementation of this procedure in accordance with the NQAPM specified in the applicable SwRI Project Plan. (3) The examiner shall be responsible for implementing the requirements of this procedure.
| |
| (4) The Manager of the Support and Administration Section, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division, shall be responsible for the storage of records generated in accordance with this procedure.
| |
| : 5. PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT
| |
| | |
| ===5.1 Personnel===
| |
| | |
| Certification Personnel performing examinations in accordance with this cedure shall be certified in accordance with SwRI NQAP 11-1, "Special Process Control." 5.2 Reference Block Reference blocks used for screen distance calibration and fication shall be of the same basic material as the production material; i.e., stainless steel or carbon steel, and shall be one of the following:
| |
| (1) SwRI Half-Round, or (2) AWS Type DC, or (3) nw . SwRI Farm QA 3-2 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600...;30 Revision 16 September 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 4 of 20 5.3 Basic Calibration Block The basic calibration block shall be fabricated from material of the same or equivalent P-number grouping as the production material, as fied in Section IX of the ASME Code. Calibration reflectors shall be side-drilled holes in accordance with Article 5 of Section V of the ASME Code. Approved drawings of basic bration blocks are in the applicable SwRI Examination Plan. The material for the basic-calibration block shall be determined by the production material to which the search unit is applied. The basic bration block thickness shall be determined by the thickness of the production material to which the search unit is applied and by Article 5 of Section v. When a basic calibration block of the same thickness as the duction material is not available and where the production material thickness is 1 inch or less, the basic calibration block thickness shall be no more than 25% thinner than the production material or closer to the production material thickness than the 3/4-inch thick alternate
| |
| *calibration block allowed by cle 5 of Section v. A flat basic calibration block or block of essentially the same curvature as the part to be examined may.be used for the examination of welds with contact surface curvatures greater than 20 inches in diameter.
| |
| A curved basic calibration block in the range of curvature from . 0.9 to 1.5 times the basic calibration block diameter may be used to establish distance amplitude correction (DAC) curves for the examination of welds having a contact surface curvature of 20 inches in diameter or less.* 5.4 Search Units Search units shall be selected according to the following:
| |
| SwRI Form QA 3-2 (1) Angle-Beam Nominal Production Material Thickness LO" or less 0.40" to 2.0" 0.75" to 2.0". Nominal Search Unit Size 1/4" x 1/4", 1/4" Round 3/8" x 3/8", 3/8" Round 1/2" x 1/2", 1/2" Round * *
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-30 Revision 16 September 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 5 of 20 The exit point of the sound beam and the actual refracted beam angle of shear-wave search units shall be determined on an IIW reference
| |
| *block. The exit point shall be marked on the search unit wedge. Search unit wedges shall be fabricated as required to produce 45° +/-2° and 60° +/-2° refracted shear-waves.
| |
| The nominal shear-wave search unit frequency for examination of austenitic HE welds shall be as follows: Nominal Freguencz Search Unit Size 2.25 MHz 1/4" Round, 1/4" x 1/4" 1.5 MHz 3/8" Round, 3/8" x 3/8" 1.5 MHz 1/2" Round, 1/2" x 1/2" The nominal shear-wave search unit frequency for examination of ferritic HE welds shall be 2.25 MHz. (2) Straight-Beam Nominal Production Material Thickness*
| |
| 2.0" or less 1.0" to 2.0" Nominal Search Unit Size 1/4" Round 3/8" Round The nominal longitudinal-wave search unit frequency for ferritic HE welds shall be 2.25 MHz. The nominal longitudinal-wave search unit frequency for austenitic HE welds shall be 1.5 MHz or 2.25 MHz. The longitudinal-wave search unit frequency for attenuation measurements shall be 2.25 MHz to simulate a 1.5 MHz shear mode, and a.5.0 MHz to simulate a 2.25 MHz shear-mode.
| |
| | |
| ===5.5 Ultrasonic===
| |
| | |
| Instrument The examiner shall use a Sonic FTS Mark I ultrasonic instrument.
| |
| Each instrument shall be aligned and shall display a valid alignment tion tag as required by NQAP 10-1. 5.6 Couplant (1) SwRI Form QA 3-2 USP-grade glycerine or deionized water (with or without wetting agent) shall be used when perfo't'ming ultrasonic calibrations and examinations in accordance with this procedure
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE SwRI-NDT-600-30 Revision 16 September 1983 ,-Page 6 of 20 (2) *, USP-grade glycerine.
| |
| shall be certified for sulfur content and total halogens in accordance with ASTM D-129-64 and ASTM D-808-63.
| |
| The residual amount of total sulfur or halogens shall not exceed 1% by weight. Deionized water, when used, shall be supplied by the customer.
| |
| (3) Couplant materials used for examinations shall be the same as used for calibration.
| |
| : 6. CALIBRATION METHOD The ultrasonic calibration shall be completed prior to the examination.
| |
| NOTES The REJECT control shall be maintained in the 0 position during calibration and examination.
| |
| The FREQ MHZ control shall be turned to 2 when a 2.25 MHz search unit is used, 1 with a 1.5 MHz search unit, and 5 with a 5.0 MHz search unit. All spaces on the SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record shall be filled in. The centerline of the search unit shall be at least 1-1/2 inch from the nearest side of the block. Rotating the beam into the corner formed by the hole and the side of the block may produce a higher amplitude at a longer beam path. This beam path shall not be used for calibration.
| |
| | |
| ===6.1 Calibration===
| |
| | |
| for Circumferential Welds in HEs 6 .1.1 Straight-Beam Distance Calibration The screen distance chosen shall be the shortest applicable size that includes at least l/4t beyond the nominal production material thickness.
| |
| Observing .back reflections from the applicable reference block, obtain the required linear sound path distance along the screen baseline.
| |
| 6 .1.2 Angle-Beam Distance Calibration The screen distance chosen shall be the shortest applicable size to include at least 1/8 vee-path beyond the anticipated examination.
| |
| range. Observing radius echoes from the applicable reference block, obtain the required linear sound path distan.ce along the screen baseline.
| |
| SwRI Form QA 3-2 * *
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITU-TE SwRI-NDT-600-30 Revision 16 September 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 7 of 20 When the same instrument is used for both 45° and 60° inations, the screen distance calibration shall be conducted as follows: 6 .1.3 (1) The screen distance size shall be determined by the angle-beam search unit. requiring the longer examination range. (2) Position the 45° search unit on the appropriate reference block. Observe and record all reference block entries as required on the appropriate SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record. (3) Position the 60° search unit on the appropriate reference blqck; and without changing the calibrated screen tance, observe and record all reference block entries as required on the appropriate SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record. (4) No attempt shall be made to compensate for any delay difference observed between 45° and 60° screen distance calibrations.
| |
| This difference, shall be considered when resolving indications.
| |
| Stralght-Beam Distance Amplitude Correction DAC shall be constructed by utilizing the responses from the basic calibration holes. 6.1.3.2 SwRI Form QA 3-2 Production Material l Inch or Less in Thickness (1) Position the straight-beam search unit to obtain maximum response from the l/2T hole. (2) Obtain the primary reference response at an amplitude of 50% +/-5% of full screen height (FSH). (3) Draw a straight horizontal line on the instrument screen at the primary reference amplitude to extend a distance equal to the nominal thickness of the production material.
| |
| '(4) Signal amplitudes for indications recorded shall be erenced as a percentage of this line. Production Material Greater Than l Inch in Thickness
| |
| ,(1) _Position the straight-beam search unit to obtain maximum response from the calibration hole selected from the following, which produces the highest amplitude.
| |
| SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-30 Revision 16 September 1983 6.1.4 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 8 of 20 Holes Vee-Path Positions l/4T l/2T (if present) 3/4T 1/8 2/8 3/8 (2) Obtain a primary reference response at 50% +/-5% _of FSH and mark this amplitude on the screen. The gain controls shall not be adjusted once the primary reference response has been established.
| |
| (3) Position the search unit to obtain maximum response from the remaining calibration holes, mark and join all amplitude points with a smooth curved line. The line shall extend l/4T beyond the last qualified calibration point. Angle-Beam Distance Amplitude Correction If a curved block is used, DAC curves for the examination of circumferential welds shall be constructed by utilizing responses from the holes oriented perpendicularly to the axis of the basic calibration block. 6.1.4.1 SwAI Form QA 3-2 Material 1 Inch or Less in Thickness (45° and 60° DAC Curves) (1) Position the 45° search unit to obtain maximum response from the vee-path position selected from the following, which produces the highest amplitude:
| |
| Hole 45° Vee-Path Positions l/2T 2/8, 6/8, 10/8, 14/8 (2) Adjust instrument gain controls to obtain the primary reference response at 75% +/-5% of FSH and mark this tude on the screen. The gain controls shall not be adjusted once the primary reference response has been established.
| |
| (3) Position the search unit to obtain maximum response from the remaining vee-path positions, mark and join all tude points.with a smooth curved line which shall extend 1/8 beyond the last qualified calibration point. (4) Repeat steps (1) through (3) using a 60° search unit. -* * *
| |
| * * ** SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-30 Revision 16 September 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 9 of 20 EXCEPTION If the configuration of the weld is such that coverage of the entire weld volume is attained with a 45° 10/8 vee-path calibration and the 60° search tmit. beam is directed into the weld root on the straight pass, a 14/8 calibration is not required for either angle, and it will not be necessary to record indications detected beyond the 6/8 vee-path with 60°. 6.1.4.2 SwRI Form QA 3-2 Material Greater Than 1 Inch But Not Over 2 Inches in Thickness (45 and 60 DAC Curves) (1) Position the 45° search. unit to obtain maximum response from the vee-path position selected from the following, which produces the highest amplitude:
| |
| (2) Holes l/4T 3/4T 45° Vee-Path Positions 7/8, 9/8 3/8, 5/8 Obtain the primary reference response at 75% +/-5% of FSR and mark. this amplitude on the screen. The gain controls shall not be adjusted once the primary reference response has been established.
| |
| (3) Obtain maximum response from the remaining vee-path
| |
| * positions, and join all amplitude points with a smooth curved lfne, which shall extend 1/8 vee-path beyond the last qualified calibration point. (4) Repeat steps (1) through (3) using a 60° search unit utilizing the following vee-path positions:
| |
| Holes l/4T 3/4T 60° Vee-Path Positions 7/8 3/8, 5/8 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-30 Revision 16 September 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 10 of 20 EXCEPTIONS If the configuration of the weld is such that neither the 60° nor 45° full vee-path examination cover the entire weld volume, a 9/8 vee-path calibration shall be accomplished with a 60° search unit. If the configuration of the weld is such that the 60° search unit beam is not directed into the weld root, a 13/8 vee-path calibration shall be accomplished with a 45° search unit. 6.2 6.2.1 Calibration for Support Attachment, Branch Connections, and Longitudinal Seam Welds Distance Calibration The screen distance chosen shall be the shortest applicable size that includes at least l/4t beyond the nominal production material thickness.
| |
| Observing back reflections from the applicable reference block, obtain the required linear sound path distance along the screen baseline.
| |
| 6.2.2 Angle-Beam Distance Calibration The screen distance chosen shall be the shortest applicable size that includes at least 1/8 vee-path beyond the anticipated examination range. Observing back reflections from the applicable reference block, obtain the required linear soundpath distance along the screen baseline.
| |
| 6.2.3 Straight-Beam Distance Amplitude Correction DAC shall be constructed by utilizing the responses from the basic calibration holes. SwRI Form QA 3-2 * * *
| |
| * -* * -SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-30 Revision 16 September 1983 6.2.3.1
| |
| | |
| ====6.2.4 NUCLEAR====
| |
| PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 11 of 20 Production Material 1 Inch or Less in Thickness (1) Position the straight-beam search unit to obtain maximum response from the-1/2T hole. (2) Obtain the primary reference response at an amplitude of 50% +/-5% of FSH. (3) Draw a straight horizontal line on the instrument screen at the primary reference amplitude to extend a distance equal to the nominal thickness of the production material.
| |
| (4) Signal amplitudes for indications recorded shall be erenced as a percentage of this line. Production Material Greater Than 1 Inch in Thickness (1) Position the straight beam search unit to obtain maximum response from the calibration hole selected from the following which produces the highest amplitude:
| |
| Holes 1/4T l/2T (if present) 3/4T Vee-Path Positions 1/8 2/8 3/8 (2) Adjust instrument gain controls to obtain the primary erence response at 50% +/-5% of FSH and mark this amplitude on the screen. The gain controls shall not be adjusted once the primary reference response has been established.
| |
| (3) Position the search unit to obtain maximum response from the remaining calibration holes, mark and join all tude points with a smooth curved line which shall extend l/4T beyond the last qualified calibration point. Angle-Beam Distance Amplitude Correction If a curved block is used, DAC curves shall be constructed by utilizing the responses from the holes oriented axially with the basic bration block. 6.2.4.1 SwRI Form QA 3-2 Material 1 Inch or Less in Thickness (45° DAC Curve) (1) Position the 45° search unit to obtain maximum response from the vee-path position selected from the following, which produces the highest amplitude:
| |
| SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-30 Revision 16 September 1983 6.2.4.2 SwRI Form QA 3-2 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 12 of 20 Hole 45° Vee-Path Positions 1/2T 2/8, 6/8, 10/8 (2) Obtain a primary reference response at 75% +/-5% of FSH and mark this amplitude on the screen. The gain controls shall not be adjusted once the primary reference response has been established.
| |
| (3) Position the search unit to obtain maximum response from the remaining vee-path positions, mark and join all tude points with a smooth curved line which shall extend 1/8 vee-path beyond the last qualified calibration point. EXCEPTION If the configuration of the weld is such that a 45° full vee-path examination fails to cover the entire weld volume, a 14/8 vee-path calibration shall be plished with a 45° search unit. Material Greater Than 1 Inch But Not Over 2 Inches in Thickness (45° DAC Curve) (1) Position the 45° search unit to obtain maximum response from the calibration hole selected from the following, which produces the highest amplitude.
| |
| Hole l/4T 3/4T 45° Vee-Path Positions 7/8, 9/8 3/8, 5/8 (2) Obtain a primary reference response at 75% +/-5% of FSH and mark this amplitude on the screen. The gain controls shall not be adjusted once the primary reference response has been established.
| |
| (3) Position the search unit to obtain maximum response from the remaining calibration holes, mark and join all tude points with a smooth curved line which shall not extend more than 1/8 vee-path beyond the last qualified calibration point. * * *
| |
| *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI""."NDT-600-30 Revision 16 September 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE EXCEPTION If the configuration of the weld is such that a 45° full examination fails to cover the entire weld volume, an 11/8 vee-path calibration shall be plished with a 45° search unit *.. Page 13 of 20 6.3 Secondary DAC Calibrations If'all points on the DAC curve do not appear at 20% of FSH or greater, a secondary DAC curve shall be constructed as follows: SwRI Form QA 3-2 (1) All secondary DAC curves shall contain at least two points. (2) The DAC point at 20% of FSH or greater and adjacent to a DAC point that falls below 20% of shall be brought to the primary reference level and marked on the instrtiment . screen * (3) The adjacent point(s), previously at less than 20% of FSH shall be marked on the screen and all points connected with a smooth curved line. The instrument gain setting for this secondary DAC curve shall be recorded on the appropriate SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record. EXCEPTIONS When the first DAC point is the only point above 20% of FSH, the next highest point shall be brought to the primary reference level and marked on the instrument screen; The other points previously at less than 20% of FSH shall be marked and all points connected with a smooth curved line. The instrument gain setting for .this secondary DAC curve shall be recorded on the appropriate SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record. When the 60° calibration consists of a 2/8, 6/8, 10/8 vee-path and no indications are to be recorded past the 6/8 vee-path, it shall not be necessary to construct a secondary DAC.
| |
| SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-30 Revision 16 September 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 14 of 20 6.4 Calibration Verification Sweep Range and DAC Curve Verification Sweep range calibration shall be verified on the appropriate reference block and DAC curve calibration, if applicable, shall be verified by using the basic calibration block: 6.4.2 SwRI Eorm QA 3-2 (1) At the start of a series of examinations (2) With any substitution of search unit cable (3) With any substitution of the same type of power source; e.g.,. a change from one direct current to another direct current source (4) At least every 4 hours during the examination (5) At the finish of a series of examinations (6) Whenever the validity of the calibration is* in doubt Calibration Changes (1) Perform the-following if any point on the DAC curve has decreased more than 20% or 2 dB in amplitude or any point on the sweep line has moved more than 5% of full screen width: (a) Void all examinations referring to the calibration in question and performed after the last valid bration verification. (b) Conduct a new calibration. (c) Reexamine the areas for which examinations have been voided. (2) Perform the following if any point on the DAC curve has increased in amplitude more than 20% or 2 dB: (a) Correct the calibration. (b) Reexamine all indications recorded since the last valid calibration verification. (c) Enter proper values on a new SwRI Examination Record. ,.,. * *
| |
| * **
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH*
| |
| INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-30 Revision 16 September 1983 6.4.3 recalibration.
| |
| NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 15 of 20 Recalibration Substitution of any of the following shall be cause for (1) Search unit wedge or transducer (2) Couplant (3) Ultrasonic instrument (4) Examination personnel (5) Change in type of power source; e.g., a change from direct to alternating current 7. EXAMINATION
| |
| | |
| ===7.1 Examination===
| |
| | |
| Area 7.1 1 Examination Areas for Circumferential and Longitudinal Butt Welds in HEs HE pressure-retaining longitudinal and circumferential butt welds 0.4 to 2.0 inches nominal thickness shall be examined.
| |
| .. Manual ultrasonic examination of pressure-retaining welds and adjacent base material shall be performed from the outside surface of the HE. Base material adjacent to welds for a distance of lt (nominal thickness of production material) from the fusion line of the weld on each side of the weld shall be examined.
| |
| 7 .1. 2 Examination Areas for Butt and Fillet Welds of Branch Connecti*ons .and Support Attachments in HEs Butt and fillet welds of branch connections and support ments in HEs with a nominal thickness range of 0.4 to 2.0 inches shall be examined.
| |
| Manual ultrasonic eXa.mination of support attachment welds .and branch connection welds shall be performed from the outside surface of the HE. Base material shall be examined for*a distance of lt (nominal thickness of production
| |
| 'material) from the fusion line on the HE side of the weld . SwRI Form QA 3-2 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-30 Revision 16 September
| |
| .1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE
| |
| *Page 16 of 20 7.2 Surface Condition The contact surfaces shall be free from weld spatter, roughness, or other conditions which interfere with free movement of the search unit or impair transmission of ultrasound.
| |
| | |
| ===7.3 Indication===
| |
| | |
| Length Zero Reference (Lo) Location Areas to be examined in accordance with this procedure shall have a Lo marked in accordance with the applicable revision of SwRI Nuclear Projects Operating Procedure IX-FE-103.
| |
| | |
| ===7.4 Scanning===
| |
| Parameters When practicable, scanning shall be performed at a minimum gain setting 2 times the reference level sensitivity.
| |
| Instrument gain setting for scanning shall be determined on the basic calibration block as follows for each primary reference level utilized:
| |
| (1) With the instrument at the primary reference level, manipulate the search unit on. the basic calibration block to obtain a signal of 40% of FSH from a calibration reflector (side-drilled hole). (2) Add 6 dB of gain by utilizing the 6 dB switch (if present), the fine gain control or a combination of the fine gain control and coarse gain controls and choose the method which yields a signal response.closest to 80% FSH. (3) The signal response chosen shall be within +/-2 dB of 80% FSH. This amplitude and method shall be recorded on the SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record and shall be used during the valid calibration period for all scanning at two times the reference level sensitivity.
| |
| Scanning overlap shall be a minimum of 10% of the search unit piezoelectric element dimension perpendicular to the direction of the scan. The search unit movement rate for scanning shall not exceed 6 per second. SwRI Form QA 3*2 * * *
| |
| * L' ** *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE SwRI-NDT-600-30 Revision 16 September 1983 Page 17 of 20. 7.5 Lamination Scan, Attenuation and Thickness Measurements on Circumferential, Longitudinal, Branch Connection and Support Attachment Welds on HEs Attenuation measurements shall not be conducted for longitudinal welds if these measurements have been conducted on adjacent circumferential welds. Attenuation measurements shall not be conducted for branch connection and port attachment*welds if these measurements have been conducted on the adjacent.
| |
| circumferential or longigudinal welds. A straight-beam search unit as described for attenuation measurements graph 5.4) shall be placed on the appropriate basic calibration block. Obtain a backwall reflection, setting this signal between 50% and 90% of FSH. Record the signal amplitude and instrument gain settings on the appropriate SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record. Adjust the instrument gain controls to display the next backwall reflection at the same amplitude at which the preceding wall reflection was recorded.
| |
| Record the signal amplitude, instrument gain tings, and the dB difference required to obtain the adjacent backwall tions at an equal amplitude.
| |
| Place the straight-beam search unit on the examination surface *and determine the dB difference required to obtain signals of equal height from two adjacent backwall reflections.
| |
| Record this dB difference on the appropriate SwRI Sonic . Examination Record. The search unit for attenuation measurements shall be placed adjacent to Lo on the base material away from the heat-affected zone * (HAZ). Measurements shall be taken at least at the following locations:
| |
| (1) For circumferential welds, one position upstream and one downstream (2) For longitudinal welds, one position clockwise and one counterclockwise
| |
| : 3) For branch connection and support attachment welds, one position on the HE side If the attenuation measurements cannot be taken adjacent to Lo; the location of the measurements shall be recorded on the appropriate SwRI Examination Record. 7.5.1 Base Material Lamination Scan Before the angle-beam examination, a lamination scan using longitudinal-wave shall be performed, covering as much as practical of the area through which the angle-beam is later to be passed
| |
| * SwRI Form QA 3-2 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-30.
| |
| Revision 16 September 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 18 of 20 Screen distance calibration for this examination shall be conducted in accordance with Paragraph 6.1.1 for circumferential welds and Paragraph 6.2.1 for longitudinal branch connection, and support attachment welds. Scanning sensitivity shall be as required to maintain the first back reflection at an amplitude of between 50% and 90% of FSR. Intermediate echoes having an amplitude equal to or greater than 50% of the initial back reflection and accompanied by a 50% loss of back tion shall be recorded.
| |
| To record an intermediate indication, a back reflection signal shall be obtained from an indication-free area and the instrument gain control adjusted until this signal is at 75% %5% of FSH. Record the intermediate cation when its amplitude is equal to 50% of the initial back reflection arid accompanied by a 50% loss of back reflection.
| |
| If total loss of back reflection accompanies the intermediate echo, the area of total loss of back reflection shall be recorded on the appropriate SwRI Examination Record. 7.5.2 Thickness Measurements In conjunction with the lamination scan, thicknes.s measurements shall be taken at a minimum of three points on circumferential and longitudinal welds (on the centerline of the weld and at one point in the base material on both sides of the weld) and at a minimum of two points on branch connection or support attachment welds (one point on the base material on the HE side of the weld and one point on the branch connection or support attachment side of the weld). These measurements shall be recorded on the appropriate SwRI tion Record. Screen distance calibration for these examinations shall be conducted in accordance with Paragraph 6.1.1 for circumferential welds and Paragraph 6.2.1 for longitudinal, branch connection and support attachment welds. 7.6 Examination of Circumferential, Longitudinal, Branch Connection and Support Attachment WElds in HEs Angle-Beam Examination for Indications Parallel with the Weld Angle-beam examin.ations shall be accomplished using the priate angle(s) of refracted shear-waves from both sides of the weld. For this examination, the sound-beam shall be directed perpendicularly into the weld to detect indications which are parallel with the weld. Calibration for these examinations shall be in accordance with Paragraphs 6.1.2 and 6.1.4 for ferential welds and Paragraphs 6.2.2 and 6.2.4 for longitudinal welds, branch connection and support attachments welds. SwAI Form QA 3-2 ' ** * *
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-30 Revision 16 September 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 19 of 20 7.6.2* Straight-Beam Weld Examination Any areas of the weld not receiving complete angle-beam tion coverage from both sides of the weld shall be examined from one side of the weld with the required shear wave(s) and a straight-beam longitudinal wave applied to the surface of the weld crown in the affected areas. Calibration for the longitudinal-wave search unit shall be in accordance with Para-graphs 6.1.1 and 6.L3 for circumferential welds and Paragraphs 6.2.1 and 6.2.3 for longitudinal, branch connection and support attachment welds. 7.6.3 Angle-Beam Examination for Indications Perpendicular to the Weld Angle-beam examinations shall be conducted on each weld using a 45° =2° shear wave. This examination shall be conducted by placing the search unit on the weld with the sound beam directed into and parallel with the weld to detect indications perpendicular to the weld. The entire length of the weld shall be scanned with the search unit beam directed in this manner. The search unit shall then be turned 180° and the scan repeated.
| |
| Calibration for these examinations shall be in accordance with Paragraphs 6.1.2 and 6.1.4 for ferential welds, and Paragraphs 6.2.3 and 6.2.4 for longitudinal, branch connection and support attachment welds
| |
| * 7.7 Examination of Branch Pipe Connection and Support Attachment Welds 7.7.1 Straight-Beam Examination of Welds A straight-beam examination shall be performed on the surf ace of the weld crown when possible.
| |
| Calibration for the straight-beam examination shall be in accordance with Paragraphs 6.2.1 and 6.2.3. 7.7.2 Angle-Beam Examinations for Indications Parallel with the Weld An angle-beam examination shall be accomplished using 45° refracted shear waves from the HE side of the weld. For this examination the sound beam shall be directed perpendicularly into the weld to detect tions which are parallel with the weld. Calibration for these examinations shall be in accordance with Paragraphs 6.2.3 and 6.2.4 7.7.3 Aiigle-Beam Examination for Indications*Perpendicular to the Weld This examination shall be the same as that described in Paragraph 7.6.3
| |
| * SwRI Form QA 3-2 Q
| |
| 0 1¥\ SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE
| |
| | |
| ===7.8 Postexamination===
| |
| | |
| Cleaning SwRI-NDT-600-30 Revision 16 September 1983 Page 20 of 20 Arrangements shall be made with the customer for postexamination removal of couplant materials.
| |
| : 8. RECORDING CRITERIA Indications shall be recorded in accordance with the techniques outlined in the applicable revision of SwRI Nuclear Project Operating Procedure.
| |
| IX-FE-119. 19)rf
| |
| '-Ultrasonic reflectors producing a response 50% of the reference level or ..c; shall be recorded on the appropriate SwRI Examination Record. ''i? -, Indications producing a response 20% of the reference level or greater and , suspected by the examiner to be other than geometrical in nature shall be *::;;:. ** -. '* recorded and investigated by a Level II or a Level III examiner.
| |
| to the extent ... ; necessary to determine the shape, identity, and location of the reflector. ,, Indications 100% of the reference level or greater shall be investigated by a Level II or a Level III examiner to the extent necessary to' determine the shape, identity, and location of the reflector.
| |
| Indications 20% of the reference level or greater investigated and found to be other than geometrical in nature shall be reported to the customer for evaluation.
| |
| When examining tube sheet-to-shell welds from the tube sheet side, cations appearing beyond the 4/8 vee-path shall not be recorded.
| |
| Scanning limitations_
| |
| shall be recorded.
| |
| : 9. EVALUATION Evaluation of reportable indications shall be the responsibility of the customer, or the customer's representative, and shall be conducted in dance with the applicable ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section XI, Article IWA-3000.
| |
| : 10. RECORDS The customer shall receive copies of documents generated in accordance with this procedure in the examination report. Documents generated in accordance with this procedure shall be retained as a *portion of the examination report. The examination report shall be stored by the Manager of the Support and Administration Section, Quality Assurance tems and Engineering Division, in the Data Storage Facility for the period specified by the contractual agreement with the customer.
| |
| SwRI Form QA 3-2 * *
| |
| * fll IJ\
| |
| tt'Sl'4ltil.
| |
| :ma i I I I ! I f "'4 '(ln;t9JJ9 lml ntt ft-iq 'PBll
| |
| ..:= w en oi -.. -a:a
| |
| *u*: * ., ..... ,....... u .. tt** * ., !:allB't 2012 .nipo 'PW unwt;a,a tTW' .,_ J>>aU}l&Slal
| |
| *q Ll*49 vr-.a MP *ucnauu
| |
| 'Ill pm&DJ J* Mlnl ,,,_
| |
| * D'"l aaq n
| |
| * MP JO *'RDDt pa *o-papi ****mp a'tl')a*'A m w .UI II lllWI * .£q panl'pft.A.11J L ,.. *ptM MP l'll01'W "'II *l'>>Cl 1W mr:i 10
| |
| * n _..**em -'t11D -ci uwqa Wl8SQU Ml' ,a SM mip aaut wwwia:a'J'P'IQ:
| |
| ;.(r...n:i-u:>
| |
| 9 ;a qdmhDll }nm* .S8fll' l'Cl'fM?TOI '" * £ .... , J J llPlll*'l1 1 ........ -.u
| |
| * tl NOUYIAaa 11:1na1:>0l:ld . . .
| |
| .. ,.,_,... --._ *** ** *""""'""*
| |
| *.
| |
| -* *"' ... ..... -,......_
| |
| '"-------*. .-.*-. .,, _ _.._ .:..:: : :-*. -._. -
| |
| "": .-* -...
| |
| * *
| |
| * PROCEDURE DEVIATION I ,. SITE; PSI :::: I PROCEOUAEiREVISION NO. -Salem, Unit 2 1s1 JJ: 600-33/7 OEVtATION NO. ,----l \.(_ SECTIONISI AFFECTED:
| |
| DEVIATION PAGc NO.: l OF: l 6 CA TE REQUESTCD:
| |
| 8 November 198'.I EXAMINA TtON PERICO: 1984/85 PROCEDURE PAGES!: 15 OF: 20 EXAMINATION AREAISI AFFiCTED:
| |
| to be performed in accordance with this procedure at Salem, Unit 2 Q !'.... } ... 1---......
| |
| z 2 OEVtATION:
| |
| It is reauested mat me paragrapnlsl snawn below in me above proceaure/revision be deviated from as follows !use exae-:
| |
| proposed, additional sheers may be used if necessarvl:
| |
| Paragraph 6.4.4 to read as follows: Verification of Calibration Reflectors at Scanning Speed The examiner shall verify the presence of the calibration reflector scanning speed. NOTE It is not necessary to assure that this check confirms the signal amplitude at 100% of reference level, but merely to demonstrate that the signal from the calibration reflectors are readily observable at scanning speed. The following statement shall be documented on the SwRI Calibration Record Sheet and initialed: "Calibration reflectors have been verified at scanning speed:" t *:r JUSTIF!CA TION: Reason change is necessarv ana wnat it is intenoed to accomp1isn I use aaditionaa sheets if necessaryi:
| |
| < :::. .go o This change is necessary to verify the presence of the calibration reflectors under procedural scanning conditions . Swnl FOnM Fe-4-4
| |
| * *
| |
| * Title SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE SwRI-NDT-600-33 Revision 7 November 1984 Page 1 of 20 MA.i.'illAL ULTRASONIC OF PRESSURE VESSEL WELDS GREATER THAN 0.4 INCHES AND LESS THAN 2.5 INCHES IN THICKNESS EFFECTIVITY ANO APPROVAL Revision 7 of this procedure became effective on Nov 9 ' 1 984 . Other revisions of the base document may be effective concurrently.
| |
| Approvals SA f LJJ Date 1
| |
| ;fSo/. Date ttft 4a-I , The following information may be used for convenience.
| |
| Completion of this portion is not mandatory.
| |
| Deviation No. Date Effective Procedure Section(sl Affected Notes: SwAI Form QA-'OA-0
| |
| ., SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-33 Revision 7 November 1984 j R'"';:-..
| |
| I *NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE . I "!'i;f I', J-11 il\ tif/ // Page 2 of 20 MANUAL ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION OF PRESSURE VESSEL WELDS GREATER THAN 0.4 INCHES AND LESS THAN 2.5 INCHES IN THICKNESS SwRI-NDT-600-33
| |
| : 1. PURPOSE This procedure provides the technical information and detailed steps sary to ensure a complete and accurate manual ultrasonic examination of sure vessel welds, and the adjacent base material in accordance with the cable ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes. 2. SCOPE AND APPLICATION Pressure vessel welds and the adjacent base material in the nominal ness range of greater than 0.4 inches and less than 2.5 inches shall be examined in accordance with this procedure.
| |
| _ Manual, contact, pulse-echo, shear-wave angle-beam, and longitudinal-wave straight-beam ultrasonic techniques shall be utilized for the examination of clad or unclad vessel welds and adjacent base material.
| |
| Welds to be examined shall be circumferential, nozzle-to-shell, nal and support skirt butt welds, and fillet welds of support attachments as specified in the applicable SwRI Examination Plan. 3. Applicable Documents (1) ASM'.E Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section XI, 1974 Edition with Addenda through Summer 197 5, "Rules for Ins1arvice Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant (2) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section V, 1974 Edition with Addenda through Summer 1975, "Nondestructive Examination," with the exception of the following: (a) Subparagraph T-533.1, Article 5, Section V, requires the basic calibration block for production material thicknesses (t) up to and including 1 inch to be 3/4 inch or t. Paragraph 5.3 of this procedure requires the basic calibration block to be either t, no more than 25% less than t, or closer in thickness to* t than the 3/4-inch alternate thickness allowed by Article 5 for t up to and including l inch. This exception will assure a more accurate calibration
| |
| :han the Article 5 basic calibration block design allowed by Code. SwRI Form QA 3-2 ** * *
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE Revision 7 November 1984 (b) (3) N-UCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 3 of 20 Subparagraph T-535.l of Article 5 states that transfer ation compensation) be.accomplished between the production material and basic calibration block and a correction made for the difference.
| |
| Paragraph 7.5.1 of this procedure describes the method used to conduct attenuation measurements which shall be recorded and considered during analysis and evaluation of indications.
| |
| The examiner shall not compensate for any observed differences before or during the examinations.
| |
| ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, 1974 Edition with Addenda through Summer 1975 "Welding and Brazing cations" (4) SwRI Nuclear Quality Assurance Program Manual (NQAPM) 3.1 Applicable Calibration and Examination Records SwRI NDTR Form No. 4. RESPONSIBILITY 17-17 17-18 17-19 17-25 Revision Date 3-15-79 7-31-75 12-01-83 3-14-79 (1) The Director of the Department of Engineering Services, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division, shall be responsible for the preparation, review, approval, and control of this procedure.
| |
| (2) The Project Manager shall be responsible for the implementation of this procedure in accordance with the NQAPM specified in the cable SwRI Project Plan. (3) _The examiner shall be responsible for implementing the requirements of this procedure.
| |
| (4) *The Manager of the Support and Administration Section, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division, shall be responsible for the storage of records generated in accordance with this procedure
| |
| * SwRI Form QA 3*2*
| |
| SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTiTUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE
| |
| : 5. PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT
| |
| | |
| ===5.1 Personnel===
| |
| | |
| Certification SwRI-NDT-600-33 Revision 7 November 1984 Page 4 of 20 Personnel performing examinations in accordance with this procedure shall be certified in accordance with SwRI NQAP 11-1, "Special Process Control." 5.2 Reference Block Reference blocks used for screen distance calibration and v:erif cation shall be of the same basic material as the production material; i.e., stainless steel or carbon steel, and shall be one of the following:
| |
| (1) SwRI Half-Round, or (2) AWS Type DC, or (3) IIW. 5.3 Basic Calibration BLocks Side-drilled basic calibration hole reflectors, in accordance with Section V of the ASME Code, shall be placed in a block manufactured from material of the same or equivalent P-number grouping as the production material as identified in Section IX of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. P-numbers P-1, P-3, P-4, and P-5 shall be considered equivalent for the poses of this examination
| |
| *. The calibration material shall be determined by the production material to which the search unit is applied. The basic calibration block thickness shall be determined by the t of the production material to which the search unit is applied and Article 5, Section When a basic calibration block of the same thickness as t is not available and where t is 1 inch or less, the basic calibration block thickness shall be no more than 25% thinner than t or shall be closer to t than the 3/4-inch thick alternate calibration block allowed by Article 5. Approved drawings of basic calibration blocks to be used in accordance with this procedure are in the applicable SwRI Examination Plan. Flat basic calibration blocks or blocks of essentially the same curvature as the part to be examined may be used when contact surface tures are greater than 20 inches in diameter.
| |
| A single curved basic calibration block may be used to establish distance amplitude correction (DAC) curves for examinations on contact surfaces in the range of curvature from 0.9 to 1.5 times the basic calibration block diameter, when contact surface .curvature is 20 inches in diameter or les.:i. SwAI Form QA 3-2 * * *
| |
| *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-33 Revision 7 November 1984 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 5 of 20 The curvature of the vessel shall be.used to establish the requirements for the basic calibration block curvature.
| |
| | |
| ===5.4 Search===
| |
| Units SwRI Form QA 3-2 (1) Search unit sizes shall be selected from the following table: (a) Straight-Beam Nominal Production Material Thickness 0.4" to 2.0" 1.0" to 2.5" 2.0" to 2.5" Nominal Search Unit Size 1/4" Round 3/8" Round 1/2" Round (2) The nominal straight-beam longitudinal-wave search unit frequency for austenitic components shall be 1.5 MHz or 2.25 MHz * (3) The longitudinal-wave search unit frequency for tion measurements shall be 2.25 MHz to simulate a 1.5 MHz shear mode, and a 5.0 MHz to simulate a 2.25 MHz shear mode. (b) Angle-Beam Nominal Production Material Thickness 0.4" to 1.0" o.4" to 2.0" 1.0" to 2.5" 2.0" to 2.5" Nominal Search Unit Size 1/4" x 1/4",* 1/4" Round 3/8" x 3/8", 3/8" Round 1/2" x.1/2", 1/2" Round 1/2" x l", 3/4" Round * (4) The nominal angle-beam shear-wave search unit frequency for the examination of carbon steel components shall be 2.25 MHz.
| |
| SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-33 Revision 7 November 1984 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 6 of 20 (5) The nominal angle-beam shear-wave search unit frequency for examination of austenitic components shall be as follows: Nominal Freguencz Search Unit Size 2.25 MHz 1/4" Round, 1/4" x 1.5 MHz 3/8" Round, 3/8" x 3/8" 1.5 MHz 1/2" Round, 1/2" x 1/2" 1.5 MHz 3/4" Round, 1/2" x 1" (6) For examination of circumferential, longitudinal, to-shell and support skirt welds, s*earch unit wedges shall be fabricated to produce 45° +/-2° and 60° +/-2° refracted shear-waves.
| |
| (7) (8) For examination of support attachment welds search unit wedges shall be fabricated to produce 45° %2° refracted shear-waves.
| |
| The exit point of the sound beam and the actual refracted beam angle of shear-wave search units shall be determined on an IIW block. The exit* point shall be marked on the search unit wedge. 5.5 Ultrasonic Instrument The examiner shall use a Sonic FTS Mark I ultrasonic instrument which shall be aligned and shall display a valid alignment calibration tag as required by NQAP 10-1. 5.6 Couplant SwRI Form QA 3*2 (1) USP-grade glycerine or deionized water (with or without wetting agent) shall be used when performing ultrasonic calibrations and examinations in accordance with this procedure.
| |
| (2) USP-grade glycerine shall be certified for sulfur content and total halogens in accordance with ASTM-D-129-64 and ASTM-D-808-63.
| |
| The residual amount of total sulfur or halogens shall not exceed 1% by weight. Deionized water, when used, shall be supplied by the customer.
| |
| (3) Couplant materials used for examinations shall be the same as used for the calibration.
| |
| * * *-*
| |
| *--*
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-33 Revision 7 November 1984 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 7 of 20 6. CALIBRATION METHOD The ultrasonic calibration shall be completed prior to the examination.
| |
| All information blocks on the SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record shall be filled in. The REJECT control shall be maintained in the 0 position during tion and examination.
| |
| The FREQ MHz control shall be turned to 1 when a 1.5 MHz search unit is used, 2 with a 2.25 MHz search unit, and 5 with a 5.0 MHz search unit. 6.1 6 .i.1 Calibration for Circumferential, Nozzle-to-Shell, Support Skirt and Longitudinal Butt Welds Straight-Beam Distance Calibration The screen distance chosen shall be the shortest applicable size to include at least l/4t beyond the nominal production material thickness
| |
| * Observing back reflections from the applicable reference block, set up the required linear sound path distance along the screen baseline.
| |
| 6.1.2 Angle-Beam Distance Calibration The screen distance chosen shall be the shortest applicable size to include at least 1/8 vee-path past the anticipated examination range. Observing radius echoes from the applicable reference block, set up the required linear sound path distance along the screen baseline.
| |
| When the same instrument is used for both 45° and 60° tions, the screen distance calibration shall be conducted as follows: SwRI Form QA 3-2 (1) The screen distance size shall be determined by the beam search unit requiring the longer examination range. (2) Position the 45° _search unit on the appropriate reference block and record all verification block entries as required on the appropriate SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record (3) Without changing the calibrated screen distance, repeat step (2) with the 60° search unit
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-33 Revision 7 November 1984 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE (4) Page 8 of 20 No attempt shall be made to compensate for any delay ence between 45° and 60° screen distance calibrations.
| |
| This difference shall be considered when resolving indications.
| |
| Straight-Beam Distance Amplitude Correction DAC curves shall be constructed by utilizing responses from the basic calibration holes. 6 .1.3 .1 6.1.3.2 SwRI Form QA 3-2 Production Material Greater than 0.4 Inch to 1.0 Inch in Thickness
| |
| ' (1) Position the straight beam search unit to obtain maximum response from the l/2T hole. (2) Set this response to an amplitude of 50% +/-5% of full screen height (FSH). (3) (4) Draw a straight horizontal line on the instrument screen at the primary reference amplitude extended to a distance equal to the nominal. thickness of the production material
| |
| * Signal amplitudes for indications recorded shall be enced as a percentage of this line. Production Material Greater than 1.0 Irich to Less than 2.5 Inches in Thickness (1) Position the search unit to obtain maximum
| |
| * response from the calibration hole selected from the lowing, which produces the highest amplitude:
| |
| Hole l/4T l/2T (if present) 3/4T (2) Set this response to 75% +/-5% of FSH and mark the amplitude on the screen. The gain controls shall not be adjusted once this primary reference response has been established.
| |
| (3) Obtain maximum response from the remaining calibration holes; mark and join all a1uplii:ude points with a smooth curved line that shall extend l/4T beyond the last fied calibration point. * * *
| |
| ,.
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-33 Revision 7 November 1984 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 9 of 20 6.1.4 Angle-Beam Distance Amplitude Correction If a curved block is used, DAC curves for the examination of cumferential and support skirt welds shall be constructed by utilizing the responses from the holes oriented perpendicularly to the axis of the basic bration block. Responses from holes oriented axially with the curved basic bration block shall be utilized for the examination of nozzle-to-shell or tudinal welds. 6.1.4.1 . Unclad Material Greater than 0.4 Inch to 1.0 Inch in Thickness (45u and 60u DAC) (1) Position the 45° search unit to obtain maximum response;, from the calibration hole and vee-path position, .selected from the following, that produces the highest amplitude:
| |
| (2) Hole Vee-Path Positions l/2T 2/8, 6/8, 10/8 Set this response to 75% +/-5% of FSH and mark the amplitude on the screen. The gain controlS shall not be adjusted once this primary reference response has been established.
| |
| (3) Obtain maximum response from the remaining vee-path tions; mark and join all amplitude points with a smooth curved line that shall not extend more than 1/8 vee-path beyond the last qualified calibration point. (4) Repeat steps (1) through (3) using a 60° search unit.' NOTE -If the configuration of the weld is such that a combination of a 45° full path examination and a 60° 6/8 vee-path examination covers the entire weld ume from the side of the weld being examined, it will not be necessary to record indications detected beyond the 6/8 vee-path with 60°. EXCEPTIONS If the confi5uration of the weld is such.that the 60° search unit sound beam is not directed into the weld root on the straight pass, a 14/8 vee-path tion shall be accomplished with a 45° search Indications detected in the calibrated area shall be recorded.
| |
| SwRI Form QA 3-2 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-33 Revision 7 November 1984 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 10 of 20 If the configuration of the weld is such that a 45° 14/8 vee-path examination and a 60° 10/8 vee-path examination fail to cover the entire weld volume, a 14/8 vee-path calibration shall be accomplished with both a 45° and a 60° search unit and all indications in the calibrated area shall be recorded.
| |
| Unclad Material l Inch or Less in Thickness (45° and 60° DAC) (1) Position the 45° search unit to obtain maXimum response from the hole and the vee-path position, selected from the following, that produces the highest amplitude:
| |
| (2) (3) Hole l/4T l/2T (if present) 3/4T 45° Vee-Path Postions 7/8, 9/8 2/8 3/8, 5/8 Set this response to 75% +/-5% of FSH and mark the amplitude on the screen. The gain controls shall'not be adjusted once this primary reference response has been established
| |
| * Obtain maximum response from the remaining vee-path tions; mark and join all amplitude points with a smooth curved line that shall not extend more than 1/8 vee-path beyond the last qualified calibration point. (4) Repeat steps (1) through (3) with a 60° search unit ing the following vee-path positions:
| |
| Hole l/4T l/2T (if present) 3/4T 60° Vee-Path Positions 7/8 2/8 3/8, 5/8 EXCEPTIONS If the configuration of the weld is such that the 45° full vee-path examination fails to cover the entire weld volume, a 9/8 vee-path calibration shall be accomplished with a 60° search unit. If the configuration of the weld is such that a 60° full vee-path examination fails to cover the entire weld volume, a 13/8 vee-path calibration shall be accomplished with a 45° search unit. SwAI Form QA 3-2 * * *
| |
| *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-33 Revision 7 November 1984 6.1.4.3 6.2 graph 6. LL 6.2.2 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 11 of 20 Clad Piping (45° and 60° DAC) (1) Position the 45° search unit to obtain maximum response from the calibration hole and the vee-path position, selected from the following, that produces the highest amplitude:
| |
| Hole l/4T l/2T 3/4T 45° Vee-Path Positions 1/8 2/8 3/8 (2) Set this response to 75% +/-5% of FSH and mark the amplitude on the screen. The gain controls shall not be adjusted once this primary reference response has been established. , (3) Obtain maximum response from the remaining vee-path tions; mark and join all amplitude points with a smooth _ curved line that shall extend 1/8 vee-path beyond the last qualified calibration point. (4) Repeat steps (1) through (3) with a 60° search unit ing the following vee-path positions:
| |
| Hole l/4T l/2T 3/4T 60° Vee-Path Positions 1/8 2/8 3/8 Calibration for Support Attachment Welds Straight-Beam Distance Calibration This calibration shall be the same as that described in Para-Angle-Beam Distance Calibration This calibration shall be the same as that described in graph 6 .1. 2, using a 45 ° search unit only
| |
| * SwRI Form QA 3-2 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-33 Revision 7 November 1984 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 12 of 20 6.2.3 Straight-Beam Distance Amplitude Correction Distance amplitude correction shall be conducted by utilizing responses from the basic calibration holes. 6.2.3.1 Production Material Greater than 0.4 Inch to 1.0 Inch in Thickness This calibration shall be the same as that described in Para-graph 6.1.3.1. Production Material Greater than 1 Inch in Thickness This straight-beam calibration shall be the same as that described in Paragraph 6.1.3.2. 6.2.4 Angle-Beam Distance Amplitude Correction If a curved block is utilized, DAC curves shall be constructed by utilizing the responses from the basic calibration holes oriented axially with the basic calibration block. SwRI Form QA 3-2 Unclad Material Greater than 0.4 Inch to 1 Inch in Thickness (45 DAC) (1) Position the 45° sea.rch unit to obtain maximum response from the calibration hole and vee-path position, selected the from the following, that produces the highest amplitude:
| |
| Hole Vee-Path Positions l/2T 2/8, 6/8, 10/8, 14/8 (2) Set this response to 75% +/-5% of FSH and mark the amplitude on the screen. The gain controls shall not be adjusted once this primary reference response has been established.
| |
| (3) Obtain maximum response from the remaining vee-path tions; mark and join all amplitude points with a smooth curved line that shall not extend more than 1/8 vee-path beyond the last qualified calibration point. * *
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-33 Revision 7 November 1984 N"UCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 13 of 20: EXCEPTION If the configuration of the weld is such that coverage of the entire weld volume is attained with a 10/8 vee-path calibration, a 14/8 calibration is not required.
| |
| Unclad Material Greater than 1 Inch to Less than 2.5 Inches in Thickness (45 DAC) (1) Position the 45° search unit to obtain maximum response from the calibration hole and the vee-path position, selected from the following, that produces the highest , amplitude:
| |
| (2) Hole l/4T 3/4T Vee-Path Positions 7/8, 9/8 3/8, 5/8, 11/8 Set this response to 75% +/-5% of FSH and mark the amplitude on the screen. The gain controls shall not be adjusted once this primary reference response has been established.
| |
| (3) Obtain maximum response from the remaining vee-path tions; mark and join all amplitude points with a smooth curved line that shall not extend more than 1/8 vee-path beyond the last qualified calibration point. EXCEPTION If the configuration of the weld is such that coverage of the entire weld volume is attained with a 9/8 vee-path calibration, an 11/8 calibration is not required.
| |
| | |
| ===6.3 Secondary===
| |
| | |
| DAC Calibrations If all points on the DAC curve do not appear at 20% of FSH or greater, a secondary DAC curve shall be constructed as follows: SwRI Form QA 3-2 (1) All secondary DAC curves shall contain at least 2 points. (2) The DAC point at 20% of FSH or greater, adjacent to a DAC point that falls below 20% of FSH, shall be brought to the primary reference level and marked on the instrument screen. The adjacent point( s), previously at less than 20% of FSH, shall be marked on the screen and all points connected with a smooth curved line. The gain setting for this secondary DAC curve shall be recorded on the appropriate SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-33 Revision 7 November 1984 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 14 of 20 R" I ;,1:; j-5) :JK r; // EXCEPTIONS When the first DAC point is the only point above 20% of FSH, the next highest point shall be brought to the primary reference level and marked on the ment screen. The other points previously at less than 20% of FSH shall be marked on the screen and all points connected with a smooth curved line. It shall not be necessary to construct a secondary DAC when the calibration sists of a 2/8, 6/8, and 10/8 vee-path.
| |
| | |
| ===6.4 Calibration===
| |
| | |
| Verification
| |
| | |
| ====6.4.1 Sweep====
| |
| Range and DAC Curve Verification Sweep range calibration shall be verified.on.
| |
| the appropriate reference block; and DAC curve calibration, if applicable, shall be verified on the appropriate basic calibration block: 6.4.2 SwAI Form QA 3-2 . (1) Prior to a series of examinations (2) With any substitution of the search unit cable (3) With any substitution utilizing the same type of power source; e.g., a.change of batteries (4) At least every 4 hours during the examination (5) At the completion of a series of examinations (6) Whenever the validity of the calibration is in doubt Calibration Changes ( 1) Perform the following if any point on the DAC curve* has decreased more than 20% or 2 dB in amplitude, or any point on the sweep line has moved more than 5% of full sweep: (a) Void all examinations referring to the calibration in question and performed after the last valid bration verification. (b) Conduct a new calibration. (c) Reexamine the areas for which examinations
| |
| *have been voided. *** .. * *
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-33 Revision 7 November 1984 6.4.3 bration: NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE (2) Page 15 of 20 Perform the following if any point on the DAC curve has increased in amplitude more than 20% of FSH or 2 dB: (a) Correct the calibration. (b) Reexamine all indications recorded since the last valid calibration verification. (c) Enter proper values on a new SwRI Examination Record. Recalibration Substitution of any of the following shall be cause for recali-(1) Search unit transducer or wedge -(2) Ultrasonic instrument (3) (4) Couplant Examination personnel (5) Change in type of power source; e.g., a change from direct to alternating current 7
| |
| * EXA.."1INATION
| |
| | |
| ===7.1 Examination===
| |
| | |
| Areas Circumferential, nozzle-to-shell, support skirt and longitudinal butt welds with a nominal thickness of greater than 0.4 inch to less than 2.5 inches shall be examined from the outside surface of the vessel. Base material shall be examined for a distance of lt from the fusion line on each side of the weld for longitudinal and circumferential weld, and lt from the weld fusion line on the vessel side of the weld for nozzle-to-shell welds and fillet welds of support attachments.
| |
| Welds shall be examined for the length specified in the cable SwRI Examination Plan. 7.2 Surface Condition The contact surfaces shall be free from weld spatter, roughness, or other conditions which interfere with free movement of the search unit or impair the transmission of ultrasound
| |
| * SwRI Form QA 3-2 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-33 Revision 7 November 1984 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 16 of 20 Reference Points for Physical Measurements 7.3.1 Nozzle-to-Shell Welds A concentric reference circle around each nozzle that encompasses the scan area shall be marked on the shell and referenced to the centerline of the respective nozzle by indicating its radius. The 0° aximuth location of each nozzle shall be noted on the appropriate SwRI examination record. The 0°, 90°, 180°, and 270° azimuth shall be marked along the concentric reference circle of the nozzle weld in a clockwise direction as viewed from the vessel exterior.
| |
| Each 30 degrees of azimuth shall be marked around the reference circle for zle welds with a radius greater than 4 inches. Each 15 degrees of *azimuth shall be marked on nozzle welds with a radius greater than 12 inches. Nozzle welds with a radius greater than 24 inches shall be marked along the reference circle each 5 degrees of azimuth. A concentric reference circle shall also be marked within 1/2 inch of the weld centerline.
| |
| Every 10 inches around the inner ence circle shall be marked with a reference point for measurements.
| |
| Radial lines should be drawn through each of these azimuth points. 7.3.2 Longitudinal Butt Welds A reference line shall be drawn along the centerline of each longitudinal butt weld. Distance along this reference line shall be measured in inches and common fracttons from the junction of the intersecting circumf ential weld. 7.3.3 Circumferential Butt Welds A reference line shall be drawn along the centerline of each cumferential weld. The 0° point shall coincide with the vessel 0° point. tance along this reference line shall be measured clockwise in inches and common fractions, as viewed from above the vessel or, in the case of a horizontal sel, as viewed from the end of the vessel. 7.4 Scanning Parameters When practicable, scanning shall be performed at a minimum gain setting of 2 times the reference level sensitivity.
| |
| Instrument gain setting for scanning shall be determined on the basic calibration block as follows for each primary reference level utilized:
| |
| SwRI Form QA 3-2 (1) With the instrument at the primary reference level, late the search unit on the basic calibration block to obtain a signal of 40% of FSH frot:1. a calibration reflector hole). * * *
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-33 Revision 7 November 1984 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE -Page 17 of 20 -_ (2) Add 6 dB of gain by utilizing the 6 dB switch (if present), the fine gain control, or a combination of the fine and coarse gain controls and choose any method that yields a signal response within +/-2 dB of 80% FSH. (3) This amplitude and method shall be recorded on the SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record and shall be used during the valid calibration period for all scanning at 2 times the reference level sensitivity
| |
| * . Scanning overlap shall be a minimum of 10% of the search unit piezoelectric element dimension perpendicular to the direction of the scan. The search unit movement rate shall not exceed 6 inches per second. 7.5 Lamination Scan, Attenuation, and Thickness Measurements
| |
| | |
| ====7.5.1 Longitudinal====
| |
| | |
| Attenuation Measurements A straight-beam search unit, as described for attenuation measurements (Paragraph 5.4), shall be placed on the appropriate basic tion block. Obtain a backwall reflection, setting this signal between 50% and 90% of FSH. Record the signal amplitude and instrument gain settings on the appropriate SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record. Set the next backwall reflection at-the same amplitude as the preceding backwall reflection.
| |
| Record the signal amplitude, instrument' gain settings, and the dB difference required -to obtain both backwall reflections at an equal amplitude.
| |
| Place the straight-beam search unit on the examination surface -and determine the dB difference required to obtain signals of equal height from two adjacent backwall reflections.
| |
| Record this dB difference on the priate SwRI Examination Record. Attenuation measurements shall be taken at the following locations:
| |
| (1) One position adjacent to Lo, on the base material beyond the heat-affected zone (RAZ) on each side of the weld for circumferential, support skirt, and longitudinal welds (2) One position adjacent to Lo, on the vessel side of the weld for support attachment and nozzle-to-shell welds The locations of attenuation measurements that cannot be taken adjacent to Lo shall be recorded on the appropriate SwRI Examination Record
| |
| * SwRI Form QA 3-2
| |
| .. SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-33 Revision 7 November 1984 R 1-.J. IJ J l/l'l // NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 18 of 20 NOTES Attenuation measurements shall not be conducted for longitudinal or support attachment welds if measurements have been conducted in the applicable vessel base material.
| |
| No attempt shall be made to take attenuation measurements on clad vessels. 7.5.2 Base Material Lamination Scan A lamination scan using straight-beam longitudinal-wave shall be performed before.the initial angle-beam examination covering the entire area through which the angle-beam is to be passed. Screen distance calibration for this examination shall be conducted in accordance with Paragraph 6.1.1. The first back wall reflection shall be maintained at an amplitude of between 50% and 90% of FSH. To record an intermediate indication, obtain a back wall tion signal from an indication-free area and adjust this signal to 75% %2% of FSH.* Record the intermediate indication when its amplitude is equal to the remaining back wall reflection.
| |
| Areas of total loss of back wall reflection accompanying the intermediate echo shall also be recorded.
| |
| | |
| ====7.5.3 Thickness====
| |
| | |
| Measurements Thickness measurements shall be taken adjacent to Lo at three points for circumferential, support skirt and longitudinal welds (on the line of the weld and at one point in the base material on each side of the weld), at two points for nozzle-to-shell welds (on the-centerline of the weld and in the base material on the vessel side of the weld), and at two points for support attachment welds (on the vessel base material and on the base material of the support attachment).
| |
| -Locations of measurements that cannot be taken adjacent to Lo shall be recorded.
| |
| Screen distance calibration for this examination shall be ducted in accordance with Paragraph
| |
| | |
| ====6.1.1. Measurements====
| |
| | |
| shall be taken by placing the straight-beam search unit on the examination surface and recording the position of the backwall reflection observed on the instrument screen. Examination of Vessel Welds Angle-Beam Examination for Indications Parallel with the Weld Angle-beam examinations for circumferential, nozzle-to-shell, support skirt, and longitudinal welds shall be accomplished using 45° and 60° refracted shear-waves.
| |
| The examination shall be conducted from both sides of the weld, except for nozzle-to-shell welds, which shall be examined from the . SwAI Form QA 3-2 -*' * *
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE SwRI-NDT-600-33 Revision 7 November 1984 Page 19 of 20 vessel side of the weld, and support attachment fillet welds, which shall be examined from the vessel side of the weld using 45° only. The sound-beam shall be directed perpendicularly into the weld to detect indications parallel with the weld. Calibration for these examinations shall be in accordance with graphs 6.1.2 and 6.1.4 or 6.2.2 and 6.2.4, as required.
| |
| Angle-Beam Examination for Indications Perpendicular to the Weld An angle-beam examination shall be conducted on each weld using a 45° shear-wave.
| |
| This examination shall be conducted by placing the search unit on the weld with the sound beani directed into and parallel with the weld to detect indications perpendicular to the weld. The search unit shall then be turned 180° and the scan repeated.
| |
| Calibration for these examinations shall be in accordance with Paragraphs 6.1.2 and 6.1.4 or 6.2.2 and 6.2.4, as required.
| |
| 7.6.3 Straight-Beam Examination of Welds A straight-beam examination shall be applied to the surface of the weld crown when possible.
| |
| Calibration for the straight-beam examination shall be in accordance with Paragraphs 6.1.1 and 6.1.3 or 6.2.1 and 6.2.3, as required.
| |
| NOTE Examinations on clad vessels shall not be conducted on welded-on supports or lugs. 7.7 Postexamination Cleaning Arrangements shall be made with the customer for postexamination removal of couplant materials.
| |
| : 8. RECORDING CRITERIA Indications shall be recorded in accordance with the techniques outlined in the applicable revision of SwRI Nuclear Projects Operating Procedure IX-FE-119.
| |
| Ultrasonic reflectors producing a response 50% or greater of the reference level shall be recorded on the appropriate SwRI Examination Record. Indications 20% or greater of the reference level and suspected by the examiner to be other than geometrical in nature shall be recorded and gated by Level II or a Level III examiner to determine the shape, indentity, and location of the reflector
| |
| * SwRI Form QA 3-2 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE SwRI-NDT-600-33 Revision 7 November 1984 Page 20 of 20 Indications 100% or greater of the reference level shall be investigated by a Level II or a Level III examiner to determine the shape, identity, and location of the reflector.
| |
| Indications 20% or greater of the reference level and found to be other than geometrical in nature shall be reported to the customer for evaluation.
| |
| Scanning limitations shall be recorded.
| |
| 9
| |
| * EVALUATION Evaluation of reportable indications shall be the responsibility of the customer and shall be conducted in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section XI, Article IWA-3000.
| |
| : 10. RECORDS Documents generated in accordance with this procedure shall be stored as specified in the SwRI Project Plan. The customer shall receive copies of these documents in the Examination Report, unless specified otherwise in the SwRI Project Plan. SwRI Form QA 3-2 + * * *
| |
| * *
| |
| * PROCEDURE DEVIATlON PSI G ISi I PROCSOURE!P'='/ISION NO. 600-36/6 -SIT!: Salem Unii: 2 OEVIATlCN NO. OE:VIATION PAGc Nf'\: CATE REQUESTI!D:
| |
| EXAMINATION P!RIOC: OF: < r . l OF l l 1984 1984 /85
| |
| \.(, SECTICNISI AFFECTSD:
| |
| I==!===! PROCSCURE
| |
| ;tAGEISI:
| |
| 6 i i EXAMINA TIQN AREAISI AFFECTCD: ...... Examination to be performed in accordance with this procedure at Salem Unit 2 z )!------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ CEVIATION:
| |
| 11 is requested ma1 me snown below in me above proc.aurelrevision be deviauld from as follows luse exac: ; warain9 prooosecs.
| |
| additional sl'leftl ml'I be used if n1C1S1UVI: ... Q Add Paragraph 6.4. 3 to read as follows: Verification of Calibration Reflectors at Scanning Soeed The examiner shall verify the presence of the calibration reflector at scanning speed
| |
| * It is not necessary to assure that this check confir.ns the signal amplitude at 100% of reference level, but merely to demonstrate that the signal from the calibration reflectors are readily observable at scanning speed. The following statement shaJ.i be documented on the SwRI Calibration Record Sheet and initialed: "Calibration Reflectors have been verified at Scanning Speed." RHSOn c:11an9e 1s necess1rv and wna1 ii is imenaecs to ac:=mo1isn tuse aaditiona1sneea1f necessary1:
| |
| "" I :s JUSTTF1c.:.TTcN:
| |
| :c . c !his deviat:.on is :-equired t:o .verify t:!le detactabil.::.:y of t.,e cai!.braticn
| |
| \lnder ?rocedural
| |
| * SwrU FOi'IM Fe-I,...;\
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-36 Revision 6 NUCLEAR PROJECTS November 1984 * . OPERATING PROCEDURE Page l of 9 -Title -. r-MANUAL ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION OF STUDS AND BOLTS GREATER THAN ONE INCH TO LESS THAN TWO INCHES IN DIAMETER EFFECTIVITY ANO APPROVAL Revision 6 of this procedure became effective on Nov 9 z 1984 . Other revisions of the base* document may be effective concurrently.
| |
| Approvals SA Written BOw=t eurudi Date Technical Review Date g tJo\/.
| |
| q ,t.V-V 1 C\ i\f 19,9(
| |
| * if;'o;,..,., j -Manager of 0.A. Date fkli/ Date fNDel/'f/
| |
| 1'l1if 1 ..___ * .,,,,.------8"' 1 1 flaw/ ., The following information may be used for convenience.
| |
| Jplation of this portion is not Deviation No. Date Effectiv1r Procedure Section(s)
| |
| Affected Notes:
| |
| * SwAI Form QA-40A-O SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE SwRI-NDT-600-36 Revision 6 November 1984 Page 2 of 9 MANUAL ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION OF STUDS AND BOLTS GREATER THAN ONE INCH TO LESS THAN TWO INCHES IN DIAMETER SwRI-NDT-600-36
| |
| : 1. PURPOSE This procedure provides the technical information and detailed steps necessary to ensure a complete and accurate manual ultrasonic examination of pressure-retaining studs and bolts in accordance with the applicable ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 2. SCOPE AND APPLICATION Studs and bolts greater than one inch to less than two inches in diameter, four to 16 inches in length, shall be examined as required in the applicable Examination Plan. Studs and bolts of the specified size shall be examined ultrasonically using longitudinal-wave straight-beam, manual, contact, pulse-echo techniques in accordance with this procedure.
| |
| : 3. APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS (1) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section XI, 1974 F.dition with Addenda through Summer 1975, "Rules for Inservice Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components" (2) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section V, 1974, Edition with Addenda through Summer 1975, "Nondestructive Examination" (3) SwRI Nuclear Quality Assurance Program Manual (NQAPM) 3.1 Calibration and Examination Records SwAI Form QA 3-2 SwRI-NDTR Form No. 17-19 17-27 Revision Date 12-1-83 4-05-76 ** -. *
| |
| * **
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE
| |
| : 4. RESPONSIBILITY SwRI-NDT-600-36 Revision 6 November 1984 Page 3 of 9 (1) The Director of the Department of Engineering Services, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division, shall be responsible for the preparation, review, approval, and control of this procedure.
| |
| (2) The Project Manager shall be responsible for the implementation of this procedure in accordance with the NQAPM specified in the cable SwRI Project Plan. (3) The examiner shall be responsible for implementing the requirements of this procedure.
| |
| (4) The Manager of the Support and Administration Section, Quality ance Systems and Engineering Division, shall be responsible for age of records generated in accordance with this procedure.
| |
| : 5. PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT
| |
| | |
| ===5.1 Personnel===
| |
| | |
| Certification Personnel conducting ultrasonic examinations shall be certified in accordance with SwRI NQAP 11-1, "Special Process Control." 5.2 Reference Blocks Reference blocks used for screen distance calibration and verif tion shall be made of carbon steel and shall be one of the following:
| |
| * (1) SwRI Half-Round, (2) AWS Type DC, (3) IIW, or (4) RSR. 5.3 Basic Calibration Block The basic calibration block for straight beam shall be congruent with the component and fabricated of a material acoustically similar to the region being examined.
| |
| Calibration reflectors shall be notches machined one thread deep or 1/8-inch deep, whichever is smaller, from the base of the thread root and shall follow the lead angle of the thread. The depth location of these will be such that a distance amplitude correction (DAG) curve can be established covering the full examination distance.
| |
| Approved drawings of the basic calibration blocks are contained in the applicable SwRI tion Plan
| |
| * SwRI Form QA 3-2 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600"'."36 Revision 6 November 1984 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 4 of 9 5.4 Search Units The size of the straight-beam longitudinal-wave search units shall be selected from the following:
| |
| 1/4" Round 3/8'" Round The nominal search unit frequency shall be 2.25 MHz or 7.5 MHz, whichever obtains the best resolution of the calibration reflectors.
| |
| | |
| ===5.5 Ultrasonic===
| |
| | |
| Instrument The examiner shall use a Sonic FTS Mark I ultrasonic instrument which shall be aligned and shall display an alignment calibration tag as required by NQAP 10-1. 5.6 Couplant (1) USP-grade glycerine or deionized water (with or without wetting agent) shall be used when performing*ultrasonic calibrations and. examinations in accordance with this procedure.
| |
| (2) USP-grade glycerine shall be certified for sulfur content and total halogens in accordance with ASTM D-129-64 and ASTM D-808-63.
| |
| The residual amount of total sulfur or halogens shall not exceed 1% by weight. Deionized water, when used, shall be supplied by the customer *. (3) Couplant materials used for examinations shall be the same as used for the calibration.
| |
| : 6. CALIBRATION The ultrasonic calibration shall be completed prior to the examination.
| |
| The REJECT control shall be maintained in the 0 position during calibration and examination.
| |
| SwRI Form QA 3-2 * * *
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-36 Revision 6 November 1984 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 5 of 9 All information blocks on the SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record shall be filled in. The FREQ MHz control shall be turned to 2 when a 2.25 MHz search unit is used, and 10 with a 7.5 MHZ search unit. 6.1 Straight-Beam Distance Calibration Observing back reflections from the applicable reference block, set up a .linear sound path distance along the instrument screen baseline, which shall be the smallest applicable size to include at least 10% of the screen distance past the last calibration point. 6.2 Straight-Beam Distance Amplitude Correction ( 1) (2) Place the search unit on the basic calibration block surface corresponding to the examination contact surface. Position the search unit to obtain maximum response from the ref tor producing the highest amplitude
| |
| * Set this response to 75% +/-5% of full screen height (FSH) and mark the amplitude on the instrument screen. (3). Without changing the gain controls, obtain maximum response from each of the remaining reflectors; mark and join all amplitude points with a smooth curved line, extended to cover the required examination range. 6.3 Secondary DAC Calibration If all points on the DAC curve do not appear at 20% of FSH or greater, a secondary DAC curve shall be constructed as follows: SwRI Form QA 3-2 (1) All secondary DAC curves shall contain at least 2 points. (2) The DAC point at 20% of FSH or greater, adjacent to a DAC point that falls below 20% of FSH, shall be brought to the primary reference level and marked on the instrument screen. The adjacent point(s), previously at less than 20% of FSH, shall be marked on the screen and all points connected with a smooth curved line. The gain setting for this secondary DAC curve shall be recorded on the appropriate SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-36 Revision 6 November 1984 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 6 of 9 EXCEPTION When the first DAC point is the only point above 20% of FSH, the next highest point shall be brought to the primary reference level and marked on the ment screen. The other points previously at less than 20% of FSH shall be marked on the screen and all points connected with a smooth curved line. 6.4 Sweep Range and DAC Curve Verification Sweep range calibration and DAC curve shall be verified on the appropriate reference and basic calibration block when any of the following occur: 6.4.1 SwRI Form QA 3-2 (1) Prior to a series of examinations (2) With any substitution of the search unit cable (3) With any substitution utilizing the same type of power source; e.g., a change of batteries (4) At least every 4 hours during the examination (5) At the completion of a series of examinations (6) Whenever the validity of the calibration us in doubt Calibration Changes (1) Perform the following if any point on the DAC curve has decreased more than 20% or 2 dB in amplitude, or any point on the sweep line has moved more than 5% of full screen width: (a) Void all examinations referring to the calibration in question and performed after the last valid tion verification. (b) Conduct a new calibration. (c) Reexamine the areas for which examinations have been voided. * * *
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-36 Revision 6 November 1984 6.4.2 bration: NU.CLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 7 of 9 (2) Perform the following if any point on the DAC curve has increased in amplitude more than 20% or 2 dB: (a) Correct the calibration. (b) Reexamine all indications recorded since .the last valid calibration verification. (c) Enter proper values on a new SwRI Examination Record. Recalibration Substitution of any of the following shall be cause for recali-(1) Search unit transducer
| |
| _or wedge (2) Couplant (3) Ultrasonic instrument (4) Examination personnel (5) Change in type of power source; e.g., a change from direct to alternating current 7
| |
| * EXAMINATION 7.1 Examination*
| |
| Areas The thread root area of pressure-retaining studs and bolts greater than 1 inch to less than 2 inches in diameter with a length *of 4 inches to 16 inches shall be examined ultrasonically from both ends or, if installed, the accessible end or ends of the stud or bolt. 7.2 Surface Conditions The contact surfaces of the pressure-retaining studs or bolts shall be free from roughness or foreign particles which interfere.with free movement of the search unit or impair the transmission of ultrasound
| |
| * SwRI Form QA 3-2 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-36 Revision 6 November 1984 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 8 of 9 7.3 Examination of Pressure-Retaining Studs and Bolts A straight-beam longitudinal-wave search unit shall be applied to both ends or the accessible end of the installed pressure:...ret-aining stud or bolt. The entire accessible ends shall be scanned with prime attention given to indications propagating from the thread root area.
| |
| * Studs and bolts that are not installed shall be examined from both ends. 7.4 Scanning When practicable, shall be performed at a minimum gain setting of 2 times the reference level sensitivity.
| |
| Instrument gain setting for scanning shall be determined on the basic calibration block as follows for each primary reference level utilized:
| |
| (1) With the instrument at the primary reference level, late the search unit on the basic calibration block to obtain a signal of 40% of FSH from a calibration reflector. (machined notch). (2) Add 6 dB of gain by utilizing the 6 dB switch (if present), the fine gain control, or a combination of the fine and coarse gain controls and choose any method that yields a signal response within +/-2 dB of 80% FSH. (3) This amplitude and method shall be recorded on the SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record and shall be used during the valid period for all scanning at 2 times the reference sensitivity.
| |
| Scanning overlap shall be a minimum of 10% of the search unit piezoelectric element dimension perpendicular to the direction of scan. The search unit movement rate shall not exceed 6 inches per second. 7.5 Postexamination Cleaning Arrangements shall be made with the customer for postexamination removal of couplant materials.
| |
| SwRI Form QA 3-2 * * *
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE
| |
| : 8. RECORDING CRITERIA SwRI-NDT-600-36 Revision 6 November 1984 Page 9 of 9 Indications shall be recorded in accordance with the techniques outlined in the applicable revision of SwRI Nuclear Projects Operating
| |
| _Procedure IX-FE-117.
| |
| Ultrasonic reflectors producing a response 50% or greater of the reference level shall be recorded on the SwRI Ultrasonic Examination Record for Bolting. Indications producing a response 100% or greater of the reference level shall be investigated by a Level II or Level III examiner to determine the shape, identity, and location of the reflector.
| |
| Indications 100% or greater of the reference level, investigated and found to be other than geometrical in nature, shall be reported to the customer for evaluation.
| |
| Scanning limitations shall be recorded.
| |
| : 9. EVALUATION Evaluation of reportable indications shall be the responsibility of the customer, or the customer's representative, and shall be conducted in dance with the applicable ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section XI, Article IWA-3000. . 10. RECORDS Documents generated in accordance with this procedure shall be stored as specified in the SwRI Project Plan. The customer shall receive copies of these documents in the Examination Report, unless specified otherwise in the SwRI Project Plan
| |
| * SwRI Form QA 3-2
| |
| .,, SITE: Salem, Unit 2 PROCEDURE DEVIATlON PSI w ISi :0: ?ROCEOURE/REVISION NO. 600-37/5 DEVIATION NO. DEVIATION PAGE NO.: I DATE REQUESTCD:
| |
| EXAMINATION P!:i'llOO: 5 1 -.1 9 November 1984 1984/85 -
| |
| "" SECTIONISl AFi:ECTCD:
| |
| P!=IOCEOURE
| |
| ?AGE<SI: 3 and 6 EXAMINA TtON AREAi Si AFFCC'T'EO:
| |
| < Q "' Manual ultrasonic examination of hexagonal nuts 2 and 8 OF:
| |
| 3 ... s: s ... < u u ... ... ... ? ... < -:: Q .,,.. -I' ,... . .s :;:; ... Jj <.ll ..... liji ' I I DEVIATION:
| |
| It is 1'9QUemsG mat me paragraonlsl snown beiow in tne abcMt pracadum/IWisicn be from as follows luse exact raing additional sne.m mav be used if nece1111VI:
| |
| ge revision date for SwRI-NDTR From 17-19 in Paragraph 3.1 to 12-1-83. Paragraph 6.6.3 to read as follows: Verification of Calibration Reflectors at Scanning Speed The examiner shall verify the presence of the calibration reflector at speed. It is not necessary to assure that this check confirms the signal amplitude at 100% of reference level, but merely to demonstrate that the signal from the calibration reflectors are readily observable at scanning speed. The following statement shall be documented on the SwRI Calibration Record Sheet and initialed: "Calibration.reflectors have been verified at scanning speed." .JUSilFlC.:.
| |
| ilON: Reascn r:nam;e is necessarv ana wnat it is intanaea to aceomp1isn lusa additional sneeu it nec=sarv1:
| |
| This change is'necessary to provide the examiner with revised data sheet form and to verify the presence of the calibration reflectors under procedural scanning conditions.
| |
| Swrll i"ORM F:-4.-.4 11
| |
| -* SOUTl"!WESi' RESEARCH INSTJTi.JTE SwRI-NDT-600-37 N-U Cl..EA Fl FR O.J ECTS Revision 5 December 1983 _ I I .,,, . OPSA TING Page 1 of 11 ii'd* . MANUAL ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION OF HEXAGONAL NUTS EPrt:CnVtTY ANO 5 al tnis ,::11 c :11 :lun cffllc::Ne en 1-4-84. Otftw l'Wtsians of :a. dc=meni :nav rfftisicn . . 11iJ ,Nm:lrt
| |
| ...
| |
| Caal iec:nmc=a i? / I /.I 1C\6J *
| |
| *;1/ ..
| |
| /--<
| |
| * M3raqmr a+ c.A. ._ . (""' c._ ' o;<e=r f ::lam 1ftltf1(t 1 -. -Jli,'ll
| |
| # rl't*
| |
| im'crmnian mav t:. for =mteni.nc:L .eon at -:..,;s i:cn:icn is l'!Cl1: m3nt=terf.
| |
| Cftialicn Ne. I I I I I I I I I I C.-m I I I I I I I I I S..C::cn(si I I I I I I I I I I I Nous: i I I I I i I I I I I I *
| |
| ";;* SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-37 Revision 5 December 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 2 of 11 MANUAL ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION OF HEXAGONAL NUTS SwRI-NDT-600-37
| |
| : 1. PURPOSE This procedure provides the technical information and detailed steps required to ensure a proper ultrasonic examination of hexagonal nuts in accordance with the applicable ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 2. SCOPE AND APPLICATION
| |
| : 3. (1) (2) Hexagonal nuts shall be examined ultrasonically using shear-wave angle-beam, longitudinal-wave straight-beam, manual, contact, pulse-echo techniques in accordance with this procedure.
| |
| Hexagonal nuts greater than 1 inch in diameter shall be examined as specified in the applicable SwRI Examination Plan. APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS (1) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section XI, 1974 Edition with Addenda chrough Sum.mer 1975, "Rules for Inservice Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components" (2) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section V, 1974 Edition with Addenda through Summer 1975, "Nondestructive Examination" (3) SwRI Nuclear Quality Assurance Program Manual (NQAPM) 3.1 Calibration and Examination Records SwRI -NDTR Form No
| |
| * 17-19 17-27 Revision Date 3-14-79 4-05-76 4. RESPONSIBILITY (1) The Director of the Department of Engineering Services, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division, shall be responsible for the preparation, review, approval, and control of this procedure
| |
| * SwAI Form QA 3-2 * * *
| |
| * **
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE SwRI-NDT-600-37 Revision 5 December 1983 Page 3 of 11 * (2) The Project Manager shall be responsible for the implementation of this procedure in accordance with the NQAPM specified in the applicable SwRI Project Plan. (3) The examiner shall be responsible for implementing the requirements of this procedure.
| |
| (4) The Manager of the Support and Administration Section, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division, shall be responsible for
| |
| * storage of records generated in accordance with this procedure. 5 . PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT
| |
| | |
| ===5.1 Personnel===
| |
| | |
| Certification Personnel conducting ultrasonic examinations shall be certified in* accordance with SwRI NQAP 11-1, "Special Process Control." 5.2 Reference Block* Reference blocks used for screen distance calibration and cation shall be made of carbon steel and shall be one of the following:
| |
| (1) SwRI Half-Round, (2) AWS Type DC, (3) IIW, or (4) RSR. 5.3 Basic Calibration Block The basic calibration block shall be a threaded block fabricated
| |
| * from material of the same *nominal composition as the hexagonal nuts being examined.
| |
| Calibration reflector notches for straight-beam, shall be machined one thread deep or 1/8-inch deep, whichever is smaller, from the base of the thread root and shall follow the pitch angle of the thread. The location of these reflectors will be such that a distance amplitude correction (DAC) curve can be established covering the full path of beam travel. For angle-beam, a notch (maximum of 1/8-inch wide transverse to the direction of the threads) shall be machined to the. bottom of the threads +/-0 005 inch. Approved drawings of the basic calibration block are contained in the SwRI Examination Plan. 5.4 Search Units The search units to be used shall be a straight-beam 1/4" or 3/8" round and an angle-beam 1/4" x 1/4" or 1/4" round. Search unit wedges shall be fabricated to produce 45° +/-2° refracted shear-waves.
| |
| A search unit producing 0° longitudinal-waves shall also be used . SwRI Form QA 3-2 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUJE SwRI-NDT-600-37 Revision 5 December 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 4 of 11
| |
| * The exit point of the sound be2111 and the actual refracted beam angle of shear-wave saarch units shall be determined on an Irw block. The exit point of the sound beam shall be marked on the search unit wedge. The nominal search unit frequency for angle-beam shear-wave examinations shall be 2.25 MHz. The straight-beam longitudinal-wave search unit shall be either 5.0 MHz or 2.25 MHz. 5.5 Ultrasonic Instrument The examiner shall use a Sonic FrS Mark I ultrasonic instrument which shall be aligned and shall display a valid alignment calibration tag as required by NQA? 10-1. 5.6 Couplant (1) (2) USP-grade glycerine or deionized water (with or* without ting agent) shall be used when performing ultrasonic tions and examinations in accordance with this procedure
| |
| *. USP-grade glycerine shall be certified for sulfur content and total halogens in accordance with ASTM D-129-64 and ASTM D-808-63.
| |
| * The residual amount of total sulfur or gens shall not exceed 1% by weight. Deionized water, when used, shall be supplied by the customer.
| |
| (3) Couplant materials used for examinations shall be the same as used for the calibration.
| |
| : 6. CALIBRATION METHOD The ultrasonic calibration shall be completed prior to the examination.
| |
| NOTES The REJECT control shall be maintained in the 0 position during calibration and examination.
| |
| The FREQ MHZ control shall be turned to 2 when a 2.25 MHz search unit is used, and to 5 when 5.0 MHz is used. All spaces on the SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record shall be filled in
| |
| * SwRI Form QA 3-2 ------------* * *
| |
| -*
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-6QQ...,37 Revision 5 December 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 5 of 11 6.1 Straight-Beam Distance Calibration Observing back reflections from the applicable reference block, set up a linear sound path distance along the baseline of the screen, which shall be the smallest applicable size to include at least 10% of the screen _distance past the examination area. 6.2 Angle-Beam Distance Calibration Observing radius echoes from the applicable reference block, set up a l:f.near sound path distance along the baseline of the screen, which shall be the smallest applicable size to include at least 10% of the screen distance past the examination area. 6.3 Straight-Beam Distance Amplitude Correction (1) (2) A search unit, as described in Paragraph 5.4, shall be tioned on the most geometrically favorable surface (top or bottom) of the hexagonal nut basic calibration block and a maximum response shall be obtained from the notch which produces the highest amplitude.
| |
| This response shall be adjusted to the primary reference level of 75% +/-5% of FSH and recorded on the SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record. (3) Without changing the instrument gain controls, maximum responses shall be obtained from other reflectors to establish a DAC curve, which shall be marked on the instrument screen and extended to inciude the anticipated examination area. 6.4 Angle-Beam Distance Amplitude Correction NOTE A nonrelevant echo from the inside surface of the hexagonal nut may be observed.
| |
| This echo shall be disregarded during calibration and examination.
| |
| SwAI Form QA 3-2 (1) Position the search unit on .the outside surface of the basic calibration block. Obtain the maximum response from the notch transverse to the threads with *the search unit at position number 1 or number 2 (Sketch 1), whichever produces the highest amplitude
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-37 Revision S Dece:nber 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 6 of 11 (2) Set this response to the primary reference level of 75% +/-5% of FSH, and without changing the instrument gain controls; tion the search unit at the other position (Sketch 1) to lish a DAC curve, which.shall be marked on the instrument screen. 6.5 Secondary DAC Calibration for Straight-Beam If all points on the straight beam DAC curve do not appear at 20% of FSH or greater, a secondary DAC curve shall be constructed as follows: (1) All secondary DAC _curves shall contain at least 2 points. (2) The DAC point at 20% of FSH or greater; adjacent to a DAC point that falls below 20% of FSH, shall be brought to the primary reference level and shall be marked on the instrument screen. The adjacent point(s), previously at less than 20% of FSH, shall be marked on the screen and all points connected with a smooth curved line. The gain setting for this secondary DAC curve shall be recorded on the appropriate SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record. EXCEPTION When the first DAC point is the only point above 20% of FSH, the next highest point shall be brought to the primary reference level and marked on the ment screen. The other points previously at less than 20% of FSH shall be marked on the screen.and all points connected with a smooth curved line. The gain setting for this secondary DAC curve shall be recorded on the appropriate SwRI Son'ic Instrument Calibration Record. 6.6 Sweep Range and DAC Curve Verification Sweep range calibration and DAC curve shall be verified on the appropriate reference and basic calibration block when any of the following occurs: SwRI Farin QA 3-2 (1) At the start of a .series of examinations (2) Substitution of search unit cable (3) With any substitution utilizing the same type of power source; e.g., a change from one direct current to another direct current source -* * *
| |
| * * ..
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-600-37 Revision 5 December 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING Page 7 of 11 . I
| |
| / / (4) At least every 4 hours during the examinations (5) At the completion of a series of exaninations (6) Whenever the validity of the calibration is in doubt 6.6.1 Calibration Changes (1) Perform the following if any point on the DAC curve has* decreased more than 20% or 2 dB in amplitude, or any point on the DAC has moved on the sweep line more than 5% of full (2) screen width: (a) Void all examinations ref erring to the calibration in question and performed after the last valid calibration verification. (b) Conduct a new calibration. (c) Reexamine the areas for which examinations have been voided
| |
| * Perform the following if any point on the DAC curve has increased in amplitude more than 20% or 2 dB: (a) Correct the calibration. (b) Reexamine all indications recorded since the last valid calibration verification. (c) Enter proper values on a new SwRI Examination Record. 6.6.2 Recalibration Substitution of any of the following shall be cause for recalibration:
| |
| (1) Search unit wedge or transducer (2) Ultrasonic instrument (3) Examination*personnel (4) Couplant SwRI Form QA 3-2
| |
| -SwRI-NDT-600-37
| |
| * Revision 5 _ . ' December 1983 *SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 8 of 11 (5) Change in.type of power source; .e.g., a change from alternating to direct current 7
| |
| * EXAi.'1INATION Examination Areas Hexagonal nuts shall be examined ultrasonically from the most geometrically favorable surface (top or bottom) with straight-beara, and the outside surface with angle-beam.
| |
| The examination shall achieve 100% coverage of the hexagonal nut. 7.2 Surface Condition The contact surfaces shall be free from weld spatter, roughness or other conditions which interfere with the free movement of the search unit or impair the transmission of ultrasound.
| |
| | |
| ===7.3 Scanning===
| |
| When practicable, scanning shall be performed at a*mininum gain setting of 2 times the reference level sensitivity.
| |
| Instrument gain setting for scanning shall be determined on the basic calibration block as follows for each primary reference level utilized:
| |
| (1) With the instrument at the primary reference level, late the .search unit on the basic calibration block to obtain a signal of 40% of FSH from a calibration reflector (machined notch). (2) Add 6 dB of gain by utilizing the 6 dB switch (if present), the fine gain control, or a combination of the fine and coarse gain controls; choose the method which yields a signal response closest to 80% FSH. (3) The signal response chosen shall be within +/-2 dB of 80% FSH. This amplitude and method shall be recorded on the SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record and shall be used for all scanning during the valid calibration period. Scanning overlap shall be a minimum of 10% of the search unit piezoelectric element dimension perpendicular to the direction of the scan. The search unit movement rate shall not exceed 6 inches per second
| |
| * SwRI Form QA 3-2 * *
| |
| ,_ * * -* SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE 7.4 Straight-Beam Examination SwRI-NDT-600-37 Revision 5_ December 1983 Page 9 of 11
| |
| * Position the 0° search unit on the surface (top or bottom) of the hexagonal nut which corresponds to the calibration surface. Manipulate the search unit in such a manner, that the entire volume of the nut is scanned from this surface. Calibration for the 0° longitudinal-wave examination shall be in accordance with Paragraphs 6.1 and 6.3. 7.5 Angle-Beam Examination Position the 45° search unit on the outside surface of the nut in such a manner, that the sound beam follows the direction of the threads. Examine the thread root area from each of the six flat outer surfaces for the full width of the nut. Turn the search unit 180° and repeat this examination.
| |
| Calibration for this examination shall be in accordance with Paragraphs 6.2 and 6.4. 7.6 Postexamination Cleaning Arrangements shall be made with the customer for postexamination removal of couplant materials
| |
| * 8. RECORDING CRITERIA Indicatio_ns shall be recorded in accordance with the applicable revision of SwRI Nuclear Projects Operating Procedure IX.-FE-11-7.
| |
| Ultrasonic reflectors producing a response 50% or greater of the reference level shall be recorded on the SwRI Ultrasonic Examination Record for Bolting. Indications producing a response 100% or greater of the reference level shall be investigated by a Level II or a Level III examiner to determine the. shape, identity, and location of the reflector.
| |
| Indications 100% or greater of the reference level investigated and found to be other than geometrical in nature shall be reported to tt).e customer for evaluation.
| |
| Scanning limitations shall be recorded.
| |
| SwRI Form QA 3-2 SOUTHVVEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE 9
| |
| * EVALUATION SwRI-NDT-600-37 Revision 5 December 1983 Page 10 of 11 Evaluation of reportable indications shall be the responsibility of the customer, or the customer's representative, and shall be conducted in dance with Article IWA-3000, Section XI, of the applicable ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. 10. RECORDS Documents generated in accordance with this procedure shall form a part of the examination report which shall be stored by the Manager of the Support and Administration Section, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division, in the Data Storage Facility for the period specified by the contractual agreement with the customer.
| |
| The customer shall receive copies of these documents in the examination report. SwRI Form QA 3-2 * * *
| |
| -* \ \ \ \ ' * ; Cf.l z 0 H E-< H Cl.l 0 ' i:i.. :z; \ 0 E-< H 0 .-! ;::c: *U E-< Cf.l SwRI-NDT-600-37 Revision 5 December 1983 Page 11 of 11
| |
| -* .. *
| |
| * PROCEDURE DEVIATION SITE: PSI 0 ISi I PROCEDURE/REVISION NO. -800-36/28 . Salem, Unit 2 DEVIATION NO. ,-DEVIATION PAGE NO.: 1 OF: 3 DATE REQUESTED:
| |
| EXAMINATION PERICO: 1984/85 14 '-( SECTIONIS)
| |
| AFFECTED:
| |
| 9 November 84 1=:::;::=1 3 , 6 and 8 PROCEDURE PAGE!Sl: 3,6,8,9,13 and 14 OF: 14 ........ EXAMINATION AREAISI AFFECTED: Manual ultrasonic examination of thin wall piping welds c:
| |
| :i DEVIATION:
| |
| It is requested that the paragraph(sl shown below in the above procedure/revision be deviated from as follows (use exact proposed, additional sheeta may be used if necessaryl:
| |
| _ *.,, : Item change in Paragraph 3.1: Revision date for SwRI-NDTR Form 17-19 is 12-1-83. =*1 Change the second paragraph under NOTES of Section 6 to read as follows: The nominal piping production material thickness shall be used to determine the correct calibration block and search units for examinations with geometric restrictions such as piping or components which may be thicker than the nominal pipe size, examinations limited to one side of the weld, or wide weld crowns. The Level II examiner shall ensure that complete of the examination area is obtained *. Additional calibration vee-path positions.
| |
| and larger screen sizes which may be required to assure this coverage, shall be used for the examination from either side of the weld * ..:USTIFICA TION: Reason change is necessary ano wnat it is intenaed to accomp1isi1 (use additional sheets if nece=isarvl:
| |
| These changes are necessary to provide the examiner with the same revised data form used with other examinations during this ISI, to ensure complete coverage of examination areas with geometric restrictions, to verify the detectability of the calibration reflectors under procedural conditions and to introduce.
| |
| improved techniques . SwrU FORM FE-4-4
| |
| : 6. Change 6.5.l follows: SwRI-NDT-800-36/28 Deviation 14 November 9, 1984 Page 2 of 3 Sweep Range and Distance-Amplitude Calibration Verification Sweep range and distance amplitude calibration shall be verified on the appropriate reference and basic calibration block when any of the following occurs: (1) Prior to a series of examinations (2) Substitution of search unit cable (3) With a substitution utilizing,the same type of power source; e.g., a change of batteries
| |
| ''* (4) At least every 4 hours during the examination (5) At the completion of a series of examinations (6) Whenever the validity of the calibrat.ion is in doubt Change (l) of 6.5.J. to read as followi: (1) Search unit transducer or wedge Delete Paragraph
| |
| .<2) of 6 .5 .3. Add Paragraph 6.5.4 to read as follows: Verification of Calibration Reflectors at Scanning Speed The examiner shall verify the presence of the calibration reflector at scanning .speed. It is not necessary to assure that this check confirms the signal amplitude at 100% of reference level, but merely to demonstrate that the signal from the calibration reflectors are readily observable at scanning speed. The following statement shall be documented on the SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibratioc Record and initialed: "Calibration reflectors have been verified at scanning speed". * *
| |
| -* ***
| |
| * Change Section 8 to read as follows: RECORDING CRITERIA SwRI-NDT-800-36/28 Deviation 14 November 9, 1984 Page 3 of 3 Indications shall be recorded in accordance with the techniques outlined in the applicable revision of SwRI Nuclear Projects Operating Procedure IX-FE-117, except for the recording levels which shall conform to the following paragraphs of this section. Indications producing a response of 20% or greater of the reference level shall be recorded and investigated by a Level II or a Level III examiner to determine the shape, identity, and location of the reflector.
| |
| Indications 20% or greater of the reference level attributable to geometry shall be recorded only once, even if the amplitude of the indication fluctuates above and below the required recording amplitude along its length. These indications shall be investigated by a Level II or a Level III examiner to determine the shape, identity, and location of the reflector.
| |
| If indications, which have been recorded as geometry, have been investigated and found to be nongeometric reflectors, the entire weld shall be reexamined, recording all nongeometric reflectors and other reflectors not previously recorded at least once. The end points of nongeometric indications shall be determined where the signal is discernable from the noise. All ultrasonic reflectors (regardless of signal amplitude), not readily *attributable to geometry by the examiner shall be recorded on the appropriate Ultrasonic Examination Record and investigated by a Level II or a Level III examiner to determine the shape, identity, and location of the reflector.
| |
| Examples of non-geometric reflectors are those which are slightly removed from the weld root and/or chamfer, mask the root indications, are transverse to the weld, or have linear dimensions with side branches.
| |
| Indications investigated and found be other than geometrical in nature shall be reported to the customer for evaluation.
| |
| Scanning limitations shall be recorded *
| |
| -* * ., *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INST1TUTE
| |
| :-. NUCLEAR PROJECTS PROCEDURE 1it!e HANUAL ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION OF THIN WALL PIPING WELDS ez:t=:cnvrN ANO A??ROVAI.
| |
| SwRI-NDT-800-36 Revision 28 July 1983 Page 1 of 14 F!n1sicn 28 of this i;ircadun becim. !ffac:ive on 21 July 1983 Omer of me bast document may t:e effec:ive
| |
| =nc:.irrennv.
| |
| Aamovais rec..,nic:U F!e-tiew 7/i3/B3 Manager or C.A. The follcwinc; intormatian may be usad for i:::inveniena.
| |
| Oaviation Ne. Sec:icn(sl A.ffec:2d Not2S: II . '
| |
| of t..,is ciorticn is iict mandatory . .. 1. I I
| |
| -.. SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-800-36 Revision 28 July 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 2 of 14 MANUAL ULTRASONIC EXAMINATION OF THIN WALL PIPING WELDS SwRI-NDT-800-36
| |
| : 1. PURPOSE This procedure provides the technical information and detailed steps necessary to ensure a complete and accurate manual ultrasonic examination of welds and adjacent base material of Class 1 and Class 2 thin wall piping in accordance with the applicable ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes. 2
| |
| * SCOPE AND APPLICATION Angle-beam straight-beam longitudinal-wave, manual, contact, pulse-echo ultrasonic techniques shall be employed for thin wall piping weld examinations.
| |
| Thin wall piping welds and adjacent base material in a 0.1-to 0.4-inch nominal thickness range shall be examined as specified in the cable SwRI Examination Plan. 3. APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS (1) ASME Boiler* and Pressure Vessel Code, Section XI, 1974 Edition, with Addenda through Summer 1975, "Rules for Inservice Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components" (2) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section V, 1974 Edition, with Addenda through Summer 1975, "Nondestructive Examination," with the exception of the foll9wing:
| |
| SwRI Form QA 3-2 .(a) Subparagraph T-533.1 of Article 5, Section V, requires the basic calibration block for production material thickness (t) up to and including 1 inch to be 3/4 inch or t. Paragraph 5.3 of this procedure requires the basic calibration block to be either t, no more thari 25% les.s than t, or closer in thickness to the production material than the 3/4-inch alternate ness allowed by Article 5 for production material thicknesses up to and 1-inch. This exception will assure a more accurate calibration than the Article 5 basic calibration block design allowed by Code. (b) Subparagraph T-535. l(d) of Arti.cle 5 states that transfer (attenuation compensation) be accomplished.
| |
| between the tion material and basic calibration block and a correction be made for the difference.
| |
| No attempt shall be made by the -** * *
| |
| -* ** SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE SwRI-NDT-800-36 . Revision 28 July 1983 Page 3 of 14 examiner to determine differences in the acoustic properties between the basic calibration block and the production material as stated in Paragraph 7.3 of this procedure.
| |
| (3) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, 1974 Edition, with Addenda through Summer 1975, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications" (4) SwRI Nuclear Quality Assurance Program Manual (NQAPM) 3.1 Applicable Calibration and Examination Records SwRI NDTR Form No. 17-71 17-72 17-18 17-19 17-25 4
| |
| * RESPONSIBILITY Revision Date 12-28-78 12-28-78 7-31-75 3-14-79 3-14-79 (1) The Director of the Department of Engineering Services, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division, shall be responsible for the preparation, review, approval, and control of this procedure.
| |
| (2) The Project Manager shall be responsible for the implementation of this procedure in accordance with the NQAPM in effect on the date. this procedure .is approved.
| |
| (3) The examiner shall be responsible for implementing the requirements of this procedure.
| |
| (4)
| |
| * The Manager of the Support and Administration Section, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division, shall *be responsible for storage of records generated in accordance with this procedure.
| |
| : 5. PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT
| |
| | |
| ===5.1 Personnel===
| |
| | |
| Certification Personnel performing examinations in accordance with this procedure shall 'be certified in accordance with SwRI NQAP 11-1, "Special Process Control." 5.2 Reference Block Reference blocks used for screen distance calibration and tio*n shall be of the same basic material as the production material; e.g., carbon steel or stainless steel, and shall be one of the following:
| |
| (1) SwRI Half-Round, (2) AWS Type DC, or (3) IIW. SwRI Form QA 3-2 r -SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-800-36 Revision 28 July 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 4 of 14 5.3 Basic Calibration Block The basic calibration block shall be fabricated from material of the same or equivalent P-number grouping as the production material, as fied in Section IX of the ASME Code. P-numbers P-1, P-3, P-4, and P-5 shall be considered equivalent for the pur*pose of this examination.
| |
| Calibration reflectors shall be notches machined on the outside
| |
| * and inside surf aces of the basic calibration block. The notches shall be in accordance with approved drawings of the basic calibration block contained in the applicable SwRI Examination Plan. The basic calibration block thickness shall be determined by the thickness of the production piping material to which the search unit is .applied and by Article 5, Section V. When a basic calibration block of the same ness as the production piping material is not available, the basic calibration block thickness shall be no more than 25% thinner than the production material thickness or shall be closer to the production material thickness than the 3/4-inch thick alternate basic calibration block ailowed by Article 5. A single curved basic calibration block may be used' to establish distance amplitude correction (DAC) curves for the examination of welds*in the curvature range from 0.9 to 1.5 times the basic block diameter when contact surface curvature is 20 inches or less in diameter.
| |
| Contact surface curvatures greater than 20 inches in diameter may use a flat basic calibration block or block of essentially the same curvature as the examination contact surface to establish DAC curves. 5.4 Search Units SwRI Form QA 3*2 (1) Search units shall be selected from the following: (a) Straight-Beam Longitudinal-Wave Search Unit Size 1/4" x 1/4" Aerotech (Diamond)
| |
| Gamma MSWS 1/4" Round Dual Element (b) Angle-Beam Shear-Wave Nominal Production Material Thickness 0.1" to 0.4" O. 2" to 0 .4" Search Unit Size 1I4" x 1I4", 1I4" Round 3/8" x 3/8", 3/8" Round ,.(. * * **
| |
| -*
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-800-36 Revision 28 July 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE (2) Page 5 of 14 The nominal shear-wave search unit frequency for examination of austenitic piping shall be as follows: Nominal Freguency 2.25 MHz 1.5 MHz Search Unit Size 1/4" Round, 1/4" x 1/4" 3/8" Round, 3/8" x 3/8" (3) The nominal shear-wave search unit frequency for carbon steel piping shall be 2.25 MHz. (4) A 1/4" round longitudinal-wave dual element search unit shall be used at a frequency of 2.25 MHz or 5.0 MHz. An Aerotech (Diamond) 1/4" x 1/4" Gamma MSWS search unit shall be used only at a frequency of 5.0 MHz. . (5) Search unit wedges shall be fabricated as required to produce a 45° +/-2° refracted shear-wave.
| |
| Other angles' may be used to supplement the examination.
| |
| (6) The exit point of the sound beam and the actual refracted beam angle of shear-wave search units shall be determined on an IIW block. The exit point shall be marked on the search unit wedge. 5.5 Ultrasonic Instrument The examiner shall use a Sonic FrS Mark I ultrasonic instrument which shall be aligned and shall display an alignment calibration tag as required by NQAP 10-1. *5. 6
| |
| * Couplant SwRI Form QA 3-2 (1) USP-grade glycerine or deionized water (with or without wetting agent) shall be used when performing ultrasonic calibrations and examinations in accordance with this procedure.
| |
| (2) USP-grade glycerine shall be certified for sulfur content and total halogens in accordance with ASTM D-129-64 and ASTM D-808-63.
| |
| The residual al!IOunt of total sulfur or halogens shall not exceed 1% by weight. Deionized water, when used, shall be supplied by the customer.
| |
| (3) Couplant materials used for examinations shall be the same as used for the calibration
| |
| * SOUTHWEST HESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-800-36 Revision 28 July 1983 NUClEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE
| |
| ..Page 6 of 14 6. CALIBRATION*METHOD The complete ultrasonic calibration shall be performed prior to the examination.
| |
| NOTES The REJECT control shall be maintained.in the 0 position during calibration and examination.
| |
| The nominal* piping production material thickness shall be used *to determine the correct basic calibration block and search units for the examination of piping components which may be thicker than the nominal pipe size and welded to the pipe. The Level II examiner*
| |
| shall ensure that complete coverage of the thicker piping component is obtained.
| |
| The FREQ MHZ control shall be turned to l when a 1.5 MHz search unit is used, to 2 with a 2.25 MHz search unit, and 5 with a 5.0 MHz search unit. All applicable spaces on the SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record.shall be filled in. 6.1 Straight-Beam Distance Calibration (1) The screen distance chosen shall be the shortest applicable size to include at least l/4t beyond the thickest production material to which the search unit is applied. (2) Attach a delay line shoe if a 1/4" x 1/4" Aerotech (Diamond)
| |
| Gamma MSWS search unit is used. (3) *Position the straight-beam search unit on an appropriate reference block and observe the back reflections.
| |
| (4) Adjust CAL, DELAY,* and RANGE controls to obtain the required linear sound path distance displayed along the screen baseline.
| |
| * 6.2 Angle-Beam Distance Calibration SwRI Form QA 3*2 (1) Select the shortest screen distance size that includes at least 1/8 vee-path beyond the anticipated examination range * ** * *
| |
| * **** -' SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-800-36 Revision 28 July 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE
| |
| ,-Page 7 of 14 (2) Position the shear-wave unit on an appropriate reference block and observe the radius echoes. (3) Adjust MAT'L CAL, RANGE, and DELAY controls to obtain the required linear sound path distance displayed along the screen baseline.
| |
| 6.3 Angle-Beam Distance Amplitude Correction DAC curves shall be constructed from notches perpendicular to the axis of the basic calibration block when examining circumferential welds ing a curved block. DAC curves shall be constructed from the axial notches for examinations of longitudinal welds, support attachments and branch pipe tions when a curved basic calibration block is utilized.
| |
| The DAC shall be constructed as follows: (1) Position the. angle-beam search unit on the basic calibration block to obtain maximum response from the vee-path position, selected from the following, which produces the highest amplitude:
| |
| Vee-Path Positions 4/8, 8/8, 12/8 (2) Adjust the instrument gain controls to obtain a primary reference response at 75% +/-5% of full screen height (FSH) and mark this amplitude on the screen. The gain controls shall not be adjusted once the primary reference response has been established.
| |
| (3) Position the search unit to obtain maximum responses from. the remaining vee-path positions and mark each amplitude on the screen. (4) Join these points with a smooth curved line that shall extend 1/8 vee-path beyond the last qualified calibration point. 6.4 Secondary DAC Calibrations Each point on the DAC curve shall appear at a minimum of 20% FSH or a secondary DAC curve shall be constructed as follows: (1) Secondary DAC curves shall contain at least 2 points
| |
| * SwRI Form QA 3-2 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-800-36 Revision 28 July 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 8 of 14 (2) The DAC point at the 8/8 vee-path position shall be brought to the primary reference level by manipulating the ment gain controls.
| |
| This point shall be marked on the instrument screen. The 12/8 vee-path position, previously at less than 20% of FSH shall be marked on the screen and these points connected with a smooth curved line. The instrument gain settings for this secondary DAC curve shall be recorded on the appropriate SwRI Sonic bration Record. EXCEPTION When the 8/8 vee-path position .is set at the primary reference level, and the 12/8 vee-path position is below 20% of FSH, a secondary DAC curve is not required.
| |
| | |
| ===6.5 Calibration===
| |
| | |
| Verification 6.5.1 Sweep.Range and DAC Curve Verification Sweep range calibration shall be verified on the appropriate reference block and DAC curve calibration, if applicable, shall be verified on the appropriate basic calibration block: SwRI Form QA3-2 (1) At the start of a series of examinations (2) With any substitution of search unit wedge (3) With any substitution of the same type and length of search unit cable (4) With any substitution utilizing the same type of power source; e.g., a change from one direct current to another direct current source (5) At least every 4 hours during the examination (6) At the finish of a series of examinations (7) .Whenever the validity of the calibration is in doubt ** -* *
| |
| *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-800-36 Revision 28 July 1983 6.5.2 tion: SwAI Form QA 3-2 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 9 of 14 Calibration Changes (1) Perform the following if any point on the DAC curve has decreased more than 20% or 2 dB in amplitude, or any point on the sweep line has moved more than 5% of full screen width: (a) Void all examinations referring to the calibration in question and performed after the last valid calibra-tion verification.
| |
| \ (b) Conduct a new calibration. (c) Reexamine the areas for which examinations have been voided. (2) Perform the following if any point on the DAC curve has increased in amplitude more than 20% or 2 dB: (a) Correct the calibration. (b)
| |
| * Reexamine all indications recorded since the last valid calibration verification. (c) Enter proper values on a new SwRI Examination Record. Recalibration Substitution of any of the following shall be cause for recalibra-(1) Search unit transducer (2) Search unit cable type or length * (3) Ultrasonic instrument (4) Examination personnel (5) Couplant (6) Change in type of power source; e.g., a change from alternating to direct current SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE 7
| |
| * EXAMINATION
| |
| | |
| ===7.1 Examination===
| |
| | |
| Areas 7 .1.1 Longitudinal and Circumferential Butt Welds in Piping SwRI-NDT-800-36 Revision 28 July 1983 Page 10 of 14 Longitudinal and circumferential piping welds and adjacent base material 0.1-to 0.4-inch nominal thickness shall be examined ultrasonically from the outside surface. Base material.adjacent to welds shall be examined for a minimum distance of 1.0 inch from the fusion line on each side of the weld. Class 1 longitudinal welds shall be examined along the entire length of the weld during the preservice examination, and for 12 inches from the fusion line of the intersecting circumferential weld during inservice examinations.
| |
| Class 2 longitudinal welds shall be examined along the entire ,length of the weld during the preservice and inservice examination.
| |
| 7 .1.2 Butt and. Fillet Welds of Support Attachments and Branch Pipe Connections Butt and fillet welds of support attachments and branch pipe connections in piping of 0.1-to 0.4-inch nominal thickness dimensions shall be examined ultrasonically as described herein. Examination of support attachment welds and branch pipe connection welds shall be performed from the outside surface of the main run pipe. Base material of the main run pipe shall be examined for a minimum distance of 1.0 inch from the weld fusion line. i.2 Surface Condition The contact surfaces shall be .free from weld spatter, roughness, or other conditions which interfere with free movement of the search unit or impair the transmission of ultrasound.
| |
| | |
| ===7.3 Transfer===
| |
| No attempt shall be made to determine differences in the acoustic properties between the basic calibration block and the production material which would result in an instrument gain charige. SwRI Form QA 3-2 " ** * *
| |
| * * *-SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-,800-36 Revision 28 July 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 11 of 14 7.4 Indication Length Zero Reference (Lo) Location Areas to be examined in accordance with this procedure shall have a Lo marked in accordance with the applicable revision of SwRI Nuclear Projects Operating Procedure IX-FE-103.
| |
| | |
| ===7.5 Scanning===
| |
| Parameters When practical, scanning shall be performed at a minimum gain setting five times the reference level sensitivity.
| |
| Instrument gain setting for scanning shall be determined as follows on the basic calibration block for each primary reference level utilized:
| |
| (1) With the instrument at the primary reference level, position the search unit on the basic calibration block to obtain a signal from a calibration reflector (notch)_of 20% of FSH. (2) Add 14 dB.of gairi by utilizing the 14 dB switch (if presen_t), the fine gain control, or a combination of the fine and coarse gain controls and choose the method which yields a signal response closer to 100% FSH. (3) The signal response of the method shall be within +/-2 dB of 100% FSH. This amplitude and method shall be recorded on the SwRI Sonic Instrument Calibration Record and shall be used during the valid calibration period for all scanning at five times the reference level sensitivity.
| |
| The search unit movement rate for scanning shall not. exceed 6 inches per second. Scanning overlap shall be a minimum of 10% of the search unit piezoelectric element dimension perpendicular to the direction of scan *. Scanning performed in a direction perpendicular to the weld shall extend as required to examine the weld and a minimum of l inch of base material back the weld fusion line. Scanning performed in a direction parallel to the weld shall include the weld and a minimum of l inch of base material measured from the weld fusion line. SwRI Form QA 3-2 '. *':".'
| |
| -i. I \' SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-800-36 Revision 28 July 1983 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Page 12 of 14 7.6 Base Material Lamination Scan Before the angle-beam examination, a lamination scan using. longitudinal-wave shall be performed.
| |
| This scan shall cover as much as practical of the area through which the angle-beam.is later to be passed. The lamination scan shall be conducted as follows: 7.7 7. 7 .1 (1)
| |
| * Screen distance calibration for this examination shall be conducted in accordance with Paragraph 6.1. (2) Scanning sensitivity shall be as required to maintain the first back reflection at an amplitude of between 50% and 90% of FSll. . (3) To record an intermediate indication, a back reflection signal shall be obtained from an indication-free area and the instrument gain control adjusted until this signal is at 75% +/-5% of FSH; record the intermediate indication when its amplitude is equal to 50% of the initial back reflection and accompanied by a 50% loss of back reflection.
| |
| If total loss of back reflection accompanies the.intermediate*
| |
| echo, the area of total loss of back reflection shall be recorded on the appropriate SwRI Examination Record. Longitudinal and Circumferential Butt Welds in Piping, Butt and Fillet Welds of Support Attachments and Branch Pipe Connections Thickness Measurements In conjunction with the lamination scan described in Para-graph 7.6, thickness measurements shall be taken at a minimum of three points (on the centerline of the weld and at one point in the base material on both sides of the weld). Thickness measurements for support attachments and branch pipe connections shall be taken at a minimum of two points (one point in the base material on the main run pipe side of the weld and one point on the branch connection or support attachment side of the weld). Screen distance tion for this examination shall be conducted in accordance with Paragraph 6.1. I Q Measurements shall be taken by placing the 0 search unit* in the appropriate position on the examination surface and observing the position of the back wall reflection on the instrument screen. These measurements shall be recorded on the appropriate SwRI Examination Record. SwRI Form QA 3-2 .; * **
| |
| -* SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE SwRI-NDT-800-36 Revision 28 July 1983 Page 13 of 14 7.7.2 Angle-Beam Examination for Indications Parallel with the Weld An angle-beam examination shall be accomplished using a 45° +/-2° refracted shear-wave from both sides of the weld and from the main run pipe side of the weld for support attachments and branch pipe connections.
| |
| The sound beam shall be directed perpendicularly into the weld to detect tions parallel with the weld. The entire weld and base material for a distance of 1 inch from each side of the weld fusion line shail be examined (l inch of base material of the main run pipe for support.attachments .and branch pipe connections).
| |
| Calibration for these examinations shall-be in accordance with Paragraphs
| |
| .6.2 and 6.3. Other angles may be used as referenced in Paragraph 7.7.3 Angle-Beam Examination for Indications Perpendicular to the Weld An angle-beam examination shall be conducted on the weld and adjacent base material using a 45° +/-2° shear-wave search unit. This tion shall be conducted by placing the search unit on the weld and base material surf ace with the sound beam directed into the weld and base material in an axial orientation with respect to the weld to detect indications pendicular or transverse to the weld. The entire length of the weld and base material for a distance of 1 inch from each side of the fusion line (l inch of base material of the main run pipe for support attachments and branch pipe connections) shall be scanned with the search unit directed in this manner. The search unit shall then be turned 180° and the scan repeated.
| |
| Calibration for this examination shall be in accordance with Paragraphs 6.2 and 6.3. 7.8 Postexamination Cleaning*
| |
| Arrangements shall be made with the customer for postexamination removal of couplant
| |
| : 8. RECORDING CRITERIA Indications shall be recorded in accordance*
| |
| with the techniques outlined in the applicable revision of SwRI Nuclear Projects Operating Procedure IX-FE-117, except for the recording levels which shall conform to the following paragraph ofthis section. Indications producing a response 20% or greater of the reference level shall be recorded and investigated by a Level II or a Level III examiner to the extent. necessary to determine the shape, identity,--and locationof the reflector.
| |
| Indications 20% or greater of the reference level investigated and found to be other than geometrical in nature shall be reported to the customer for evaluation.
| |
| SwRI Form QA 3-2 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE Scanning limitations shall be recorded.
| |
| 9
| |
| * EVALUATION SwRI-NDT-800-36 Revision 28 July 1983
| |
| * Page 14 of 14 Evaluation of reportable indications shall be the responsibility of the customer, or the customer's representative, and shall be conducted in dance with ASME Boiler and Pressure*
| |
| vessel Code, Section XI, Article IWA-3000.
| |
| The applicable year and Addenda of the Code shall be as specified in Section 3
| |
| * of this procedure.
| |
| : 10. RECORDS The customer shall receive copies of documents generated in accordance with this procedure in the examination report. Documents generated in accordance with this procedure shall be stored and retained as a portion of the examination report. The examination report shall *be stored by the Manager of the Support and Administration Section, Quality *", . Assurance Systems and Engineering Division, in the Data Storage Facility for the period specified by the contractual agreement with the customer.
| |
| SwRI Form QA 3-2 ... * * *
| |
| -'
| |
| * RESEARCH INSTITUTE
| |
| _SwRI-NDT-900-1 . NUCLEAR PROJECTS Revision 50 OPERATING PROCEDU AE December 1982 -Page 1 of 5 Title r-VISUAL EXAMINATION OF NUCLEAR REACTOR COMPONENTS BY DIRECT OR REMOTE VIEWING EFFECTIVITY AND APPROVAL of this procedure became effective on 1/3/83 . Other revisions of the base document may be effective concurrently.
| |
| SA Approvals
| |
| <!.k Date Technical Review Date 12/13/e2
| |
| /ti.: k?v **
| |
| Date o;,octo* I 1'1
| |
| <::::::: oe.. 'I rt;/!110... . &ht! The following information may be used for convenience.
| |
| eolletion of this portion is not mandatory.
| |
| Deviation No. Date Effective
| |
| ' Procedure Section(s)
| |
| Affected Notes:
| |
| * SwRI Form QA-40A.O
| |
| -SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE SwRI-NDT-900-1 Revision SO December ,1982 Page 2 of 5 VISUAL EXAMINATION OF NUCLEAR REACTOR COMPONENTS BY DIRECT OR REMOTE VIEWING SwRI-NDT-900-1
| |
| : 1. PURPOSE This proce*dure provides the technical information and detailed steps required to ensure the proper.visual examination of nuclear power plant components in-accordance
| |
| _with the *applicable ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes. 2
| |
| * SCOPE AND APPLICATION Direct and remote visual techniques for the examination of nuclear power plant components are described in this procedure.
| |
| Components and welds to be examined are specified in the applicable SwRI Examination Plan. 3. Applicable Documents (1) ASME Boiler*and Pressure Vessel Code, Section XI, 1974 with Addenda through Summer 1975, "Rules for Inservice Inspection of Nuclear Power Plant Components" (2) ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section V, 1974 Edition with Addenda through Summer 1975, '"Nondestructive Examination" (3) SwRI Nuclear Quality Assurance Program Manual (NQAPM) 3.1 Applicable Examination Record SwRI-NDTR Form No. Revision Date 17-28 7-31-75 4. RESPONSIBILITY (1) The Director of the Department of Engineering Services, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineerin_g Division, shall be responsible for the preparation, review, approval, and control of this procedure.
| |
| (2) The Project Manager shall be responsible for the of this procedure in accordance with the NQAPM specified in the applicable SwRI Project Plan. SwRI Form QA 3-2 -* * .-
| |
| * * * -PROCEDURE DEVIATION Page 1 of 1 Pages Procedure SwRl-NDT-9 oo-l The following examination areas are affected by this deviation:
| |
| Revision so Visual examinations conducted in accordance with this procedure The following paragraphs shall be deviated from as indicated:
| |
| I Deviation 1 Replace the second paragraph of 6.1 with the following two paragraphs:
| |
| The surface of welds and adjacent base material to be examined shall be free from scale, slag, dirt, paint, or other extraneous matter that obscures the surface or interferes with the visual examination.
| |
| Examinations on components with painted or coated surfaces are permitted When looking general conditions such as misalignment, movement or other abnormalities on supports, hangers, snubbers and shock absorbers, or loose, missing and damaged bolting . Rationale for deviation:
| |
| This change clarifies the examination requirements for painted or coated components, Written Mana1;1er of O.A.: -
| |
| .,, SwRI FORM FE-4-5 APPROVALS Date: __ 2. 3 19 9£) Date: Technical
| |
| __
| |
| .. ---Verbal Approval Given? 0 Yes No Cogni4a flt Director: , O '!JJ;01.i 1 Lr ait I -I i SA PL.l> Date: N /A Date:
| |
| -* *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE SwRI-NDT-900-1 evision 50 ecember 1982 NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE age 3 of 5 (3) The examiner shall be responsible for implementing the requirements of this procedure.
| |
| (4) The Manager of the Support and Administration Section, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division, shall be responsible for storage of records generated in accordance with this procedure.
| |
| : 5. PERSONNEL AND EQUIPMENT
| |
| | |
| ===5.1 Personnel===
| |
| | |
| Certification Personnel performing examinations shall be certified in accordance with SwRI NQAP 11-2, "Procedure for Certifying Visual Examination Personnel." 5.2 Equipment The Visual Examination Acceptability Test Card shall be made from Kodak Neutral Test Card No. R-27 or an equivalent, with an 18% neutral grey side having a 1/32-inch wide black line across its center. Commercially available equipment shall be used as required for the performance of examinations by the techniques described in Paragraphs 6.2 and 6.3 * . 6. EXAMINATION METHOD 6.1 Surface Condition Yi-tsal eMamiMtien vhieh eleaft er aeeefttamiM:tieft hE" val!& !seePp!'eeeeies ei Peettlee eltell 'Be pPeeeaea 'By. eppHprieee eleeaiftg p!'eeeeeee.
| |
| BHatti::aaeieBS may 'Be WRePe eae BUE'iaee is paiReee 9!' Aa8 eeaeP eypes e£ eeeeiage.
| |
| Tltie shall 'Be pe!"ll1!eeee ii ie is aeeeli:m:iaee eaae euelt eeeeinge ae ftet iaterrere with ualia ef reetslte.
| |
| | |
| ===6.2 Direct===
| |
| Visual Technique Direct visual examination shall be performed by placing the eye within 24 inches and at an angle no less than 30 degrees with the surface to be examined *. Mirrors may be used to improve the angle of vis.ion, and_ aids such as magnifying lenses. may also be used
| |
| * SwRI Form QA 3-2 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE
| |
| | |
| ====6.2.1 Lighting====
| |
| wRI-NDT-900-1 evision 50 ecember 1982 age 4 of 5 In addition to the general lighting, illumination of the area to be examined shall be provided at right angles and oblique angles to expose cracks or evidence of corrosion or erosion. 6.2.2 Resolution Resolution shall be considered adequate when the combination of access, lighting, and angles of vision (either unaided or corrected), can resolve a black line, 1/32-inch-wide,_on an 18% neutral grey card placed on the surface to be examined.
| |
| | |
| ===6.3 Remote===
| |
| Visual Technique Remote visual examination may be used when conditions exist that do not permit direct visual examination.
| |
| Remote visual examination may include visual aids such as telescopes, periscopes, borescopes, fiber optics, or video cameras and monitoring systems, with or without attachments for permanent recording.
| |
| Remote techniques shall demonstrate the ability to provide a tion at least equivalent to that obtainable by direct visual examination.
| |
| Mirrors, movable lights, or rotating optics, or any combination thereof, may be employed to display cracks, surface scratches, or evidence of corrosion, sion, misalignment, or movement.
| |
| Scanning parameters, if required, for the remote visual examinations shall be included in the applicable SwRI Scan Plan. 6.3.l Resolution Resolution shall be acceptable provided the surface resolution is at least equivalent to that considered obtainable by direct visual technique.
| |
| | |
| ===6.4 Replication===
| |
| | |
| Surface replication techniques shall be considered acceptable provided the surface resolution is at least equivalent to that obtainable by visual technique.
| |
| 7
| |
| * EXAMINATION AREAS Components, parts, and areas to be examined shall be as specified in the applicable Examination Plan. Remote visual examinations utilizing mechanized scanning devices shall be as specified in the applicable Scan Plan. Scanning parameters, if required, for the remote visual examination, shall be included in the applicable SwRI Scan Plan. SwAI Form QA 3-2 -* * *
| |
| -* * . -* SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NUCLEAR PROJECTS OPERATING PROCEDURE SwRI-NDT-900-1 Revision 50 December 1982 Page 5 of 5 The examination area of welds shall include the weld and the adjacent base material for at least one wall thickness beyond the-edge of the weld. The examinations described in this procedure are designed to determine the general condition of the reactor component, part, or surface to be examined.
| |
| These general shall include scratches, wear, cracks, corrosion, or erosion on the surface. Evidence of leaking, misalignment, and relative movement of the part or component shall also _be noted. 8. RECORDING CRITERIA Indications shall be where applicable, in accordance with the -techniques outlined in the latest revision of SwRI Nuclear Projects Operating Procedure IX-FE-116.
| |
| Vis_ual indications detected during remote examinations shall be recorded.
| |
| in accordance with the customer's specifications, remote equipment turer' s specifications, or the SwRI scan plan, if applicable
| |
| * . Visual abnormalities shall be recorded on the SwRI Visual Examination Record and reported to the customer
| |
| * 9. EVALUATION Evaluation of reportable indications shall be the responsibility of the customer, or the customer's representative, in accordance with Paragraph IWA-3000 of Section XI of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. The applicable year and addenda of the Code shall be as specified in Paragraph
| |
| : 3. of this procedure.
| |
| : 10. RECORDS The customer shall receive copies of documents generated in accordance with this procedure in the examination report. Documents generated in accordance with this procedure shall be stored and retained as a portion of the examination report. The examination report shall be stored_ by the Manager of the Support and Administration Section, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division, in the SwRI Data Storage Facility for the period specified by the contractual agreement,with the customer
| |
| * _ SwRI Form QA 3-2
| |
| * APPENDIX E ULTRASONIC CALIBRATION BLOCK DRAWINGS * **
| |
| ** *
| |
| * APPENDIX E ULTRASONIC CALIBRATION BLOCK DRAWINGS Block No. 8-ss-xx-.860-23-SAM 8-SS-10-.140-24-SAM 6-SS-160-.764-25-SAM 6-SS-40-.287-26-SAM 3-SS-160-.451-30-SAM 16-C S-160-1. 610-34-SAM 2 .312-SS-37-SAM 8-SS-40-.330-44-SAM 8-CS-160-.906-46-SAM
| |
| * 7-CSCL-50-SAM PL-3-CS-51-SAM 14-SS-160-1.40-78-SAM 9.5-ss-x-.750-86-SAM 1.125-8-CS-87-SAM PL-CS-4.5-88-SAM 1.625-8-S-CS-89-SAM 1.625-8-N-CS-92-SAM PL-SS-.250-97-SAM 1.125-8-N-CS-101-SAM 1.125-8-S-CS-103-SAM
| |
| *Certifications included
| |
| * Table of Contents E-i E-1 E-2 E-3 E-4 E-5 E-9 E-10 *E-11 E-12 E-13 E-14 E-15 E-16 E-17 E-18 E-19 E-20* E-21 E-22 *E-23 E-24 E-25 ., *,**
| |
| *
| |
| * 80° ARC (REF) <;:--6; 0 I. DIMt.NSIONS A.RE 'H INCHES. 2.. DE8URR f BR£AH SI/ARP E:DGES 3". 00 NOT MACHINE OR ALTER ID OR OD SURFACES.
| |
| ** IC> t OD SURFACES TO BE' F'REE OF TOOL MAl'!l<S.
| |
| 5'-MAtERIAL f'OR STANDARD TO BE F"'REE OF; PIPE WELDS. FABFllC14TIOll OR REPAIR. WELDS, ANY LAMllVA/t INOICA.TION9
| |
| \JHICH MAY AFFECT @
| |
| ...
| |
| SURFACE SHOWN, IN CHARACTERS 3/tt 11111. HFIGNT. 7. ALL HOL.E s AlfE. --1,2 DIA x 3 DEEP,. anEAl'CINQ THROVGJI .oos To. 010 WIDE' DE ... P. B .. x.11*ow.r.
| |
| SSPl.I'.! .Svl"PUEO or t°SE(GC,a
| |
| #&Ar, -i'R MAX . ---4 ___ J 1t ---j<-*--l ! . I HOLES ARE DIA. X 3 DEEP .....-----*, 1-.....--8 ,. -IN :--**
| |
| i i 2 ' ! -*'
| |
| -
| |
| ... \ ---=* . . y/1 i .
| |
| L _J IP£ JTAllDAllO 8 'ir .860 IJ.T. PIPE lll. (ttANCil . ...........
| |
| llVISIOHS PAIJS UH ... rOM o -* M-*U PfL I. CRANE SEE
| |
| ...
| |
| 1 rx. 8,P w.r. "'"" VT REFEllENCE srANPRA/}
| |
| ..... SOUTllWUT RfSWICH IHSllTUll 12 IAH AHlor..G, IUAI
| |
| * i t'rj I N :;6".51' -1 I i I -------.. J 73°-17'(6"R[F)
| |
| I I NOTES. I. VIM[NSION5 ARE IN INCfltS. f'. DE BURR 4 BREAK SHl\Rf' EDGES. 3 DO NOT MACHINE OR Al 7l-H I[) OR OD SU,lFACE.
| |
| 4' ID 4 OD SURFACES TO Bl' FRF! OF TOOL MAl<KS. 5. MATERIAL FOR STANDARD TO 8£ FRt"E OF: FAB/llCATION OR REPAIR WELDS, ANY L /\MINAR INOICA TION5 WHICH M,1 Y AF/ [Cf' ANGLE BEAM OR STRAIGHT BEAM CALIBRATIONS.
| |
| © STffL STAMP /[) NO. l\.'i. ,)I/OWN, ON s:J/11 AC/ INOICl\l / /J ¢ WITHIN LIMITS OF AFIEA NOTED, IN CHAfiAC fl!<-' 3/16" MINIMUM HEIGHT. 0 SCRIBE CEN l'ERLINES
| |
| .003 ro .005 WIDE AND. DI: r p WHERE NOTED. ':3TEEL STAMP, OR Mill cur, AN INDEX MAHK AT FACH [ND -:JF CFN'J/ f<UNE8 AS SHOWN, 1/32 DEEP,\' 1/32 X 1/4 LONG B. MAKE FROM s* SCH IDS PIPE SUPPLIED fJY 1:*c;f AND G SA 530 TYPE 30"1 /fEAT 80724/c'.
| |
| J *3* ''.A' ''.A" t--.J Ll_ .. 8' NOT INCLUDED AS PART OF GROOVE j ;* l/,l/l fvl;IX -7/f?z*.r-;r:Zrz7'??-J
| |
| __ LENGTH (TYP)
| |
| SECTION 8-8 *-... ---* .. --SCALE * ,'.'/! _S_ECTJON A-A SCALE -<>/!
| |
| Pllll.CTU>NS
| |
| +/- f//6 A"Olf.S .!. /* PD.JI. OATI: 5-3-78 .--,----.--...,-,.ur="'";771-y,-,c;;?-
| |
| --
| |
| 7i1'0115 DCN 1111 DATE CH(CllllO aY JFC *
| |
| * a-ss-10-.140 SAM PARTS LIST SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE QUAUTY ASSURUICE S'YSTEUS AND ENCINfUtHG DIVISION SAM A*To*10, nu.1 8" SCH !OS UT. CALIBRATION BLOCK SALEM SH[[J SCAL[ C C-3052 Oc5 . 1/1 A *
| |
| * 10 1------104' ARC (REF) 6 * ------------
| |
| ----1 ! --t HOLES ARE tz DIA. X 3 _DEEP -1<>1 l
| |
| * NO. 6-SS-160-.764-25-SAM_J
| |
| --------------------------'
| |
| =i---------
| |
| -*-__ --------
| |
| NOTc5: I. DIMENllON!.
| |
| ARE IN JNCHE S. 2. DE811R.R 4 BREAl-i SHAF<P EDGES Yo*. 3. 00 .VOT t-IA:.HJNE Oft AL l/J OR OD SURFACES.
| |
| "°* ID AND OlJ SIJRFACtS TD BE FREE OF TOOL MAA.H.S. S. """'TffilA._
| |
| f.TAHDARD TO SE FREE OF: iJlflf SEAM W'flCJ:i 1 FABRICATION REPAIR W£tl>5, Af\/'f LAMINAR INOICATIONS WHICH MAY AFFECT @ s INVJ(;ATED..
| |
| IN CHAAACT£RS .l/J,'* MIN HEICH'-1.
| |
| : 7. ALL HOLC $ ARE '/J2 "DIA. @ 5CR18E Z CENTEH.Lllo/E S ,._S SHOWN .DO> To .OIO IJIDf' DEEP. © MAX.5' rROM 6" SCHEDULE /60 TYPE 316 STAIN.LESS STE..;;z.PJPESl/Pf'L/£08Y PSEl>>d'G-h'EAT N.!!-B-/960.
| |
| :-@ STEEL 5TAMP SCR!.BE L/IYE R£FER£NC£ .IURRS A5 5'\t>WN. , ..... lt:VISiON1
| |
| .302 ____________
| |
| ,. ______ _ NO -110'0 PIPC STA/JOAll l.'1.SCll IW PIPe PAHi UST 6"SCHEDULE 160 PIPE U.T. CALIBRATION STANDARD SOUJHWiSI IWllCll ICSDIUll .. ,. 6-23-75 1uu I/I =::"
| |
| NOTES: L DIMENSIONS AR[ IN INCHES 2 DEBURR ( jjREAr. SHARP EDGlS 5 00 NOT MAC:lllNC OR AL T!R ID OR OD :JUHfACt:S
| |
| : 4. ID ( OD SURFACES TO &." FREf OF TOOL MARHS 5 MATERIAL FOR :JTANDARD TU BE llU.f OF FABRICATION OR HlPAIR WE:LDS, ANY LAMINAR INDICATIONS WHICll M4r' Afft"CT ANGLE BEAM OR SfRAIGllT 8lAM CAL 18kATIONS
| |
| @sTCCL STAMP ID NO AS SI/OWN, ON :>iJM"AC[
| |
| INDICATED ( WITHIN LIN.ITS Of ARE.A NOUD, IN CllARACTEhS 3/16* MINIMUM HEIGHT @SCRIBE CEN7£RUN£S 003 TO OO!i WIDC ( Ut.t"P WHCRE N01ED ST[[L STAMP, OR Mill cur. AN INDEX MAAX AT fACli !ND ,Jr CENTERLINES A.S SllOWN. 1/32 OCt.P X l/Je 1/4 LONG @MAii[ FROM 6* SCH 40, 1>11-'i. :JUPPtlE.D tJr f'St ' t3 TYPE .304 SS HEAT NO Tl:::J/(Jd
| |
| * I e 1 01 ,{ii '"I------_1 (r) \ r--Ii A A t J l. --Ii ---'!_ --__ J *J __ J Z HAD MAX EXCEPT AS N01"ED NOr INCLUDED PART OF GROOVE LENGrH (TYP) (Tri') * , r
| |
| * 062 (T'rP) I (TYP) -rzIZTfillJ'l11!Llll
| |
| __ fJ-SlCTION A-A -*-sc-ALc.
| |
| 2/1*
| |
| * 86 * .?9' (5) / \ ,/ / , .287 REF).-/ \ i l!:i h'AD 5-55-40-.eBT-26-S4M B SOUTHWESTHiEAllCH INSTITUTE
| |
| ..... un UMUU 11111** -laa.fl-11\llWO. l**NH*llllUI 6" SCH 40 PIPE CAUBRA TION BLOCK SALEM c D-305!' 057
| |
| * t:rJ I lJl
| |
| * I / I ------; / 3 JZ DIA. HOLE 4 1 t --------r-
| |
| ,. I :: i / :: I / '-/---/ I I .c_(D NOT ES : MINIMUM SPOTFACE AT EACH END AS REQUIRED ___ J 1. BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES AND REMOVE BURRS
| |
| * 2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE JN INCHES
| |
| * STEEL STAMP STANDARD ID. NO. AS SHOWN , * , .. -SAW NOTCH (NOT FOR CALIBRATION)
| |
| I /
| |
| I
| |
| -*----**---------
| |
| 1*i*-/ / . / \ *"-_.,/" 8 /,/ .536\REF)
| |
| ON SURFACE , IN CHARACTERS MINIMUM ur. CHANGE HEIGHT , AT EACH END
| |
| * REVISIONS DIA. HOLE (288) SAW ( NOT FOR CALIBRAllOO)/
| |
| 1i-.536....._/
| |
| *(REF)/'-_"-._
| |
| ! ., . ,_ '1 '---.. / 41", . , '>/ . ID. NO. 4-SS-160-.536-13 L DAIH NO. '"° HQ'D PAii NAMI PARTS LIST
| |
| * i _J MAIU1Al 4" SS PIPE STANDARD 4-SS-160-.536-13 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE DAn1'j rvtAI-< sc.t.u 1.
| |
| * 1 IAN ANTONIO, UXAI SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE.
| |
| *
| |
| * rP-NOMBER CLASSIFICATION FOR CALIBRATION STANDARDS CALIBRATION STANDARD 4-SS-160-.
| |
| 536...;13 IS HEREBY CLASSIFIED
| |
| * AS P-NUMBER __ a __ GROUP 1 IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION :er 1974 EDIT ION OF THE ASME BOILER ANO PRESSURE VESSEL CODE . THE P -NUMBER CLASSIFICATION FOR THIS CALIBRATION STANDARD IS SUBSTANTIATED WITH THE ATTACHED CHEMICAi.
| |
| ANALYSIS REPORT FOR SA 312, 316
| |
| * IN ACCOR CANCE WITH THE MATERIALS SPECIFICATION.
| |
| SECTION Ir OF THE ASME BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE * ( S I G N A TUR E )
| |
| * E-6
| |
| .--------------------------------------------------------------
| |
| * *
| |
| * rCHARLES COMPANY METAL.L.URGICAL.
| |
| L.ABORATORIES CHEMISTS
| |
| * MIECH.AHICA'-
| |
| TESTING *
| |
| * CONSUl.TANTS MAIL.ING ACCRESS I P.O. BOX 310 I MAYWOOC. ILLINOIS 60153 r ..., DAT!£: 10-29-74 Southwest .Research Institute DE5CRIP'TION: . Attn:. Mr. Robert L. Edwards POl.l2Ul L _J Stainless Steel Lab * £112 to 19 SAMl"U ICE.NT. p L-ss-.765-63 -ss-PL 1 .ll8-6l 3-SS-40-.222-44 .._..<I
| |
| \J*-+1 8-ss-100-596-32 Q*" -SS-160-440-50 l.1")
| |
| .3o+2-l41....,:oo 4 4 *-SS-160-.535-13
| |
| -* 6 -ss..,.100-
| |
| .502-30 '(11.1 ... \ c Mn Si .07 1.96 .54 .04 1.28 .60 .05 1.30 .40 .04 l.33 .46 .05 1.36 .48 p. .. .pa .35 .29 .06 l.64 .49 .06 1.14 .42 p s Ni Cr Mo Cu Mg Al v Cb+Ta .032 .008 8.81 19.51 .20 .Ol .026 .014 9.29 19.54 .30 .Ol -.026 .009 10.77 19.37 .27 .01 .027 .Ol7 8.06 19.44 .33 .Ol .027 .015 13.70 17.18 2.21 .Ol .020 .002 75.06 lS.36 .10 _.,.-.Ol .034 .OlS 13.92 17.46 2.26 .01 .027 .017 10.43 19.80 .19 .Ol LASORATORIE'S-
| |
| !IROAOVllKW.
| |
| n .. .&... ANO DUll'P"ALO, N.Y . E-7
| |
| * Drawing No.: C 70 CJ 0? Job Request No.=.....,,---==------
| |
| Date: .:1. '/1"1...d"V 7J-INSPECTION AND TEST RESULTS Part No. and/or Part Name: *S .J-1' 0 -,,j-.J' Inspection or Test Performed: Results: (attach data sheets as necessary)
| |
| Number of Articles Inspected or Tested: __ .__ ___ _ Number of Conforming Articles:.
| |
| _____ / _____ _ Number of Articles Rejected:.
| |
| ______ ...... ..._ ____ _ Nature of Defects Observed:
| |
| ____________________
| |
| _
| |
| * Basic Causes for Article Rejection=-----------------
| |
| In,.eoted
| |
| _________
| |
| _ Form DF-03
| |
| * E-8
| |
| *
| |
| * B -*-**--*-*****1
| |
| -*-------....:.....
| |
| ------------------&------.
| |
| J 1*1 t ------* 1-----1---..,r.---------------
| |
| .. !-----1 ! I M l'f---_,,h l2J -*d* 131° ARC (REF) ---_______ ....!._ ___ _ ----*MINIMUM SPOT FACE EACH END AS REQUIRED r--3--1 : I I r-1 2--"._[-.ns
| |
| * I I ' \ \ \ NOTES: I. DIMEN.SrONS ARE *HCHE $. 2.
| |
| # BREAK SNARP EDGES Jl**-3. 00 NOT MACHINE OR l\L TER ID OJI 00 SURFACES.
| |
| +. ID t OD SURFACES TO 8E Fii Et OF TOOL HAI0(.5. s; MAtElllAL FOii STANDARD MUST 81! F'llEE OF':
| |
| ...
| |
| l.IELDS, ANY LAMINA/I INDICATIONS WHICH MAY AFFECT ANGILE BEAM OR 5T/IAl5HT BEAM CltLl8RATIONS.
| |
| @STEEL STAl1P sTl\NDARD ID NO. AS SHOWN ON SURF .. CI! IND/CllTED 1 IW
| |
| 'A* 11/11 HEIGHT. J.. HOLE 5 11/<I 3/1e l@.j SC/llllE 2 5 l\S SHOWN .003 TO .DID WIDE j DIEi'. ©.::1* 5Ctl. 1c;.o 5,5, PIPE: suPPLl!O'I>
| |
| t;y P. ';l.f'. Bo c;;, co. HEAT M 4S"4 111. ........ PMllUST * '\ TOH Oa :.. ";SC.H. llOO 5.5. PIPE: .4118" .Ll..T
| |
| _S.TANl>A12.D somMSl mIAm, ...
| |
| l:rj I ...... 0
| |
| * NOTES: R[MOVC: au<<u ( Bi.ERi(. 5HAlP E OGEJ. 1/l z. 2. 0,1 Nt'T DC Al Tl.C. ID. OK QD SURFACC.5.
| |
| J. LOE_, 0 SLJICFllrlS ro H£ FL.Cl OF TOc>L M.t.(k'S 4, rtJl. S141110.4RO TO OC FKCE OF: PIP£ SElllll WELDS, FA8RltATllJN (ll( Kt.PRiil WllOS, .A.HY LAMllflll WlllCll M1h' AFFlCT AN(.L£ BinM DIC. 5TtAIGHr RlAtd CAll6lATtl!Nj.
| |
| STUL S1AMP ST'\NO/),{Q ID. NP A) s-.owN,.ON
| |
| :'JUKFAC£ INDIUITEO, IN CllAll.Al'U.K.S 1/11.. Ml/Ill Hl.ll;Hr.
| |
| sc11ar z ft#Tl.I{ 1 llfl i A!i SlltJWlll -. OM" VIPE ( 0£/P. STEEL STAMP SCIZ/8£ LIKC A.'LF,[K£Ntr
| |
| /HAll.'Kl AS SlllJWN. MAKE f"NDM ll*SrH Jt.IJ f!IUBAAI ST££J. PIPE SUPl'LlriJ BY PSE( G. 11£/IT 119 <.488/ F .. ---3---,--
| |
| 10 5 _ __J ____ _ -::::-: _-:.:-_:....J I -==--1 ..:: _-...: => I
| |
| * I ,I I' 1/8 DRILL 9 HOLES C"ANGI i ARE 1/8 DIA )( 3 DEEP I lO L" NQ,16-CS-160-1.610-34-SAM
| |
| _J PIPE STANDARD 15* SCtl 160 PIPE ASTM A 106 PAITS wr -II -.-n _.U -01 ..
| |
| 16"SCH 160 PIPE U.T. CALIBRATION STANDARD Su AL SOUTHWUT HSUl<JI uismun DAll6*-,3Q-75 KAU \/2 :.:.::" C-3052 042.4
| |
| * l:7l I ...... ...... *
| |
| * rh-i!nf1 ilt IJI 111 11 II II 11 ii 1 1 111 II I :1 1!: 11 1j_ 2 I jl 125/
| |
| f uts
| |
| -+-1------------
| |
| t 1.734 I ill $ 2.312 ...__-----jf---+
| |
| ------------
| |
| 1 Wi 3/16 DIA. DRILL 6 PLACES NOTES: l © . !i © RfMDVE: BURR.5 f BIU'AK BHARP EDGES. ffOUGH SUffFACf' GRIND TOP t BOTTONI 'i 'II SUffFACfS 7 0 A 12f/ SURFACE: FIN/Sii. SCRIBE LINC AS SHOWll .OOl TO .OO'f 11110£ t Of'EP. STEEL S7AMP SCff/8£' llNC REFEKE'NC£ MRK.KS A5 SHOWN . STEEL STAMP ID. Ne. Jjli. lETTEKS IH SHOWN. MAK[ FKONI 2 x 7 *IS, TYPC 31&. FOR6/N6 SUPPUEO 6Y PSetG, HEAT N!! Bl9I02 3 i 111 111 II' 11 II lj :: II :1 .. , "' :1: 11* 1,1 Lii. CHANGIE HVISIONS
| |
| * i jHoLES l_:o. N!l. 2.312-SS-37-SAM
| |
| =.J DAJI IY APP. :' 1;'°* PAIJ NAMI MAIHIAl PAITS LIST 2-fiE;°' PLATE STANDARD *2.312-SS-37-SAM SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE OAtlG-26-75 ICAU 1/2 IAN ANIONIO, JIXAS t:t:I I ...... N
| |
| * I -'1 2 'l' .,, '{' ... ? "' "' ? ' ... I ... "' ' )> i:: I _J f-NOTES: I. DIMEN:HONS ARC llf INCHES. 2. DE8URR 6RCAK SHARP £0GfS. 3. DO NOf MACHINE OR AL Tf.H ID OR OD SVRF/llCES._
| |
| : 4. ID 4 OD SURFAGCS TO BE FRff OF TOOl MARHS. '5. MATERIAL FOR 5TANOARO 10 fj£ FR££ Of; FABRICATION OR RfPNR \.lfLDS, ANT LAMINAR llWDIC>.TIONS WHICH MAY AFFl CT AN9L£ 8(AM OR STRAIGHT BEAM CALIBRATIONS.
| |
| 3 14* @ STCCL STAMP W NO. A:; 5HOWH 1 ON SURFACE INDICATED \.,/JTHIN LIMITS OF ARt:A NOTED, 11'1 CHARACTE*S
| |
| .3/io ,, MINIM UH HEIGH r. @ SCRIBC. :EN1£RLINES .OO'!J 10 .005 'W'IDf ANO DECP \./HER£ NOTED. 5TffL STAMP, OR MILL cur, AN MAllK AT EACH ENO OF CENTERLINES AS V 32 DEEP * '"°3 2 ')( l ONG. @ MA.K.E FllOM 6" 40 PIPE SuPPLIEP BY Hi;AT 'Z.P4-754 i I -__ j I I 4 t --....... 10 *--*--------! (fr.-*-*-**2 RAO MAX NOT INCLUDED AS PART OF GROOVE LENG TH (TYP.) .032 ! .oOG (TYP) .062 (TYP) 66° -t3 '\,/ .330(REF ) ---GROOVES ARE -d;x 1tx .032 DEEP 10
| |
| ---'.
| |
| :.7.---.---t --.
| |
| Sc"lLL: Z// * *-' --.032 ! .OOG 6 _ . ..,.__ (TYP) ID NO: 8-SS-40-.330-44-SAM (KAHGI DAii IY Arr -.::'
| |
| rAll NAllllt MAIHIAl llVISIONS PAIJS UH -10.n.....i:u
| |
| -*u -11*
| |
| :::. "!
| |
| 'Tcir*fo J.A. -* M-1*cRANE 8" SCH. 40 PIPE U. T. STANDARD SALEM ,_. .. ., () ... " -<: ..J....U--
| |
| ...........
| |
| *-11 ::t1* SOUTHW£ST RESUICH INSTITUTl 1.1.N AHIOHIO. llaAI c I SK 130 DAU Ii OCT. 7:5 sou I I I OIAWIHG .........
| |
| C-3052055
| |
| * 106° ARC (REF) ...... . 453 NOTES: I. DINfNSIONS ARE IN IN!:Hf ; 2. DE8UliR f BREAK SHARP ' :fs Vo. 3. 00 NOT MA,;rltN£ OR AL 1: \ ID Of( DD SURFACES.
| |
| +. ID t OD $UliFAcES To BE FREE OF TOOL !J. HATC:RIAL FOR STANDARD TO BE FREE OF: PIPE SfA"'t WEtOSl FABRICATION OR WfLDS 1 ANY' L.iliMINAff
| |
| *NDICATtONS
| |
| -...JHICH M.AY Ji.FFlCT ANGLE BEAM,,,. STRA/f;HT BEAM CAL18RAT10NS.
| |
| @
| |
| .. "'=::.1 H
| |
| * HE :iH 1. 7. ALL HOc..fS ,.'-£ DIA Jj 3 8f<l.li.l\l/111',
| |
| ,----. OF DRILL P.JINT 15 ACCEP..-AE:J:.....E. RtBE 2 CEIVT!RLl/'vES AS SHOk.iN ,OOJ 70 .OIC WILJE .t ('j. MAKE FROM 8" SCH.160 PIPE 5UPPLIED-BY P SE & G HEAT N2 21907. @srEEL STAMP SCRIBE LINE REFERENCE MARKS 1/32 11/IDE & DEEP x 1/4 LONG AS SHOWN ** * * ,_
| |
| B ----1 "t"'---,,.
| |
| I ! ---t ,.,
| |
| 3 ... --------____ _t 4 1t HOLES ARf X 3 DEEP ,. ft I J_ 2 ... t--jN ID NO. 8-CS
| |
| * 160,906 SAM ' *p ''!
| |
| 13"' _,.. le., a,f>! CARBON ST[[l -
| |
| ll(YISIONS
| |
| * ----1 ***---. .* , ....... ,, S"SCH.160 PIPE U.T.
| |
| £! _;.... ,.* STANDAR[)--,-----*
| |
| SALEM *** i SOUIHWEST RESlARCH INSTllUTI
| |
| .**
| |
| ,"*' 'le ,_,-.
| |
| C-3052060
| |
| --------------
| |
| r 21 ------*--*----*-----------
| |
| *--**----***
| |
| 1 4 A A u -l i ----ii . -** -*---*--* 7 I . . 4 (\ I' I I 11' **---'( :1: ,., I I 5 J_ --4 3.1 .-*-2 (!) \ I \ <J:I \ 1.' '11 I.I *!I -.. -*--------
| |
| 1' 1'' I I Cl> \ 93 RAD II !1 :i 1 I I
| |
| -L 3-tlfu. :.:: J fl,*DRILL X DEEP 6 PLACES
| |
| * i-----..l 1 I& "2 ---86 RAD REF I ... CD I f---1 ____,, *--l 3.500 I 5.250 ___ j 7 @MAKE rnoMDROP OUT Ml\TE.f\IAL SUPPLIED UY PSE ( G HEAT No.A-0497.
| |
| @ STEEL STAMP SCRIUE LINE kEFf.RENCE MARKS AS
| |
| .,, A 2066 SHOWN 1/4 LONG X 1/32 DEEP. OCH HO. I HOLES AR[. 5/16 DIA )( 3 1/2 DEEP, *1. 4 CLAD I _I.D. No.7*CSCL-50-SAM r .140 :!: .010 --, 7*CSCL*50-SAM
| |
| -_ ::.-..:::
| |
| .::::.=, --:.._-_-_-.=-J l& --------*---*---..:...:..,.
| |
| L. ______ .J
| |
| & PAii tiAMI FDIZ. lj J/1-AftllAl PAIJS llSJ REF. l. J CLAO REF. @ SCRIBE LINE AS SHOWN .003-.005 WIDE AND DEEP. @ STEEL STAMP l.D. No. AS ON SUHFACE INDICATED, De.llWM If Jt0 rou'°""''
| |
| UMIH ..Ollll t-=-J'-'.
| |
| R"-'A'-"M"'-O=S--1-*-***_*
| |
| 7"CLAD PLATE U.T. CALIBRATION STANDARD @ 3/16 MIN. LE TH.R HEIGHT £ I. REMOVE l:!UHRS UHEllK EDCl::.S 1/32. NOTES: *
| |
| * AflfOlll :!:t-.i* SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE 125 SAN ANIONlO, nus I DAllll-19*75*
| |
| !CAU Y !HAWING NUMIH C-3052069A
| |
| * i I jl 11 11 * ------9 ----------
| |
| ----i 6 I I I 'I' : I t'I I I I --+ I I I I -IN .,
| |
| J & .060 t.010 r---1 --,-t ------------*---------*--*-
| |
| \ ' 3 I. 2.. s. \'. .5-@ <Ir------DllfENSIONS lo/IE IN INCHES. DE81JRR /. BREAK SHARP EDGES Top t BOTTON 6 SURFACES TO BE FREE OF TPOL 11ARJ<S. MATERIAL FOR STANDARD To BE FREE OF: FABRICATION OR REPAIR VELDS, ANY LAMINAR INDlt:ATIONS
| |
| 'l.llllCH HAY AFFECT ANGLE BEAN OR STRAIGHT IJE/111 CAL/IJR/ITIO"IS.
| |
| STEEL ST/IMP STANDARD ID NO-/IS SHO'-IN, ON SURFACE INDICATEOJ IN CHARACT.,.,s
| |
| "/" MIN. HEIGHT. " ALL HOLt:.S Alie" 3/" DIA
| |
| * 3 DEEP. * $CA/BE CENTERLINE AS SHOWIV .003 TO .oos WIDE t DEEP. MAKE FROY SA302 8 DROPOUT MATERIAL SUPPLIED BY P SE a G . HEAT STEEL SCRIBE. LINE MARKS I I 32 WIDE ANJ DEEP X I/ 4 LONG AS SHOWN **1 *'\ A ft. Lii.
| |
| * I HOLES ARE .lo1A.x 3 DEEP . ---.:.:...::*=
| |
| -:=" = ::::-*::.... 3--PAlf NAMI . /. ..I/IN MAHllAL SAN ANJOHIO, llXAI C I (-3052 Q59 A SK 400
| |
| * 1.050 I . .
| |
| .. ---t----. IR MAX. .125 !.005 DIA. x 3 DEEP
| |
| * 7 PLACES __ ,NOTES:* I. BR£AI( All SHARP EDGES t R'CMDVE BURRS. 2. DO liO r J>U.CNINC OR "llTCR 1.a Off AO. SUR'FA<[S.
| |
| :t. IUT£1rlAL IS TO BE Fff£E OF \o/ClDS /JAMINll1"£"S
| |
| \,//llC/I MAY llFFCCT CllLIBR"ITION.
| |
| © STC£L STAMP BLOCK ID IJa AND HEAT 10 lt/f 1 A5 SHD.WN, 011 .
| |
| INDICllTED IN C'll<<AlTCtrS
| |
| '1(. Ml,V. HEIGHT. @
| |
| AS .oo.3 T0.005 AND 1)2 sntMP MILL cvr AN iNDEX
| |
| __ ----. EACH J:ND OF .:.£.NTEIZ.1:/IJE:
| |
| ,,-*'A.S--"Sl'lt:JWN, . .!:t.1.oilG!.
| |
| @. 'M11idl'll.01<rl4* . .scH. laO PIPE, SA 312.. .rre# 316-r JfEAT -**--N:! .. :i353UJ., .SWll..L /l.JR ... N!:.
| |
| ............ . 10--------
| |
| A Dc.M-82.'3 llT. ID **n 14-SS-160-1.40-78-SAM L:...... .
| |
| * 1111' ---.I +
| |
| 14" SCH 160 PIPE CALIBRATION BLOCK SALEM -r1*
| |
| * Mlll-31-76 KAii JiZ :::" (.3052167 A * *
| |
| * r ---l :, . ,, ,, ,, ,, * . **----10 *--*--------1
| |
| *'
| |
| -----f il \ *t L.1--L .094 !.CO> 0/A. ,-DEEP _L_L.____
| |
| E .750 H-----:H*
| |
| ,-----NOTES; L &)IUENSION:J ARE IN INCHES. 2. DEOURR AND fJREAK SHARP EOGE.:J * .S. MATERIAL FOk BLOCK Ml.IST BE FREE FAlJRICATION Oil REPAIR WELDS, ANY LAMINAR INDICATIONS WHICH MAY ANGLE BEAM Oil 5TllAIGHT OEAM CAll8RATIONS.
| |
| ©3TEEL STAMP ID. N>> AND Ht;AT Nlil ,tJS SHOWN, ON SURFACE INOICATEO, IN CHARACTERS
| |
| 'J/tf. MIN. HEIGHT. @5CRl8£ CENTERLINES
| |
| .003 -.005 WIDl:' AND £JEEP WHEJ.lE NOTED. STEEL STAMP, OR Mll.L cur, AN INDEX MARJI: Ar ENDS OF EACh CENTEKl./NE AS SHOWN, A 1/32 *I/-' LONG @MAKE FROM 5A TYPE 104, HEAT tv>l IVUL"'I, SW/U LOG Nil
| |
| * ;:;; --------© ...:-en ' "' <D ' 0 "'Ol l'oN IQ cno cn-..!J r: O..I PL-SS-.750-85-SAM SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE
| |
| ....... Qol&l.111 n1411...a tn11n ...Ol_I_ """"'*
| |
| I t---------**
| |
| I NOTES: I. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES. 2. .J tJREAK :JHARP EDGES. s. MATERIAL FOR BLOCK ro BE FREE OF: PIPE SEAM WElDS, FAlJRJCArlON OR REPAIR WEL05 1 B 114.(,,"REF.
| |
| -.0'14 !.005 DIA. ANY LAMINAR INOICATIO/V.S Wll/CH MAY AF/:ECT ANGLE BEAM OR STRAIGHT LJEAM CAl/BRATIONS.
| |
| ON SiJR.CACE
| |
| @scRJtJE CENTERLINES
| |
| .003 10 .005 WIOI:. ANO DEEi-' WHERE NOTED. STEEL :iTAMP, OR MILL cur, AN INOEX MARK AT END.:J OF EACll CEl'ITERUNE AS SHCJWN 1 1/32-" t/fHI 1/../ 1.0NU. fb1A1<.E ;:itoM 5A?JO, TYPE 3/ti, HEAT N"
| |
| ___ _ 5WRI .. (!!f.Q.tl.1.!.
| |
| .. . _
| |
| * L_ ________________________
| |
| --r 10 ---'-----'------+-------------
| |
| * 1 / l -MIN. SPOTFACE. ,l 2 -----__ I A!i llEOUIRED
| |
| ________ r*H5 .0'14 ! .00:5 DIA. I l INSTITUTE ... 1flU*I ..-1 ... 1 ... ll'IQllM u. -l**ut uu1 9 , .. PIPE ULTRASONIC CALIBRATION BLOCK C D-3052-242 A *
| |
| * A I /(5-tJN THllEAD RE/:. 4-PLACES NOTES: OEBURR AND 8REAK SHARP EDGES. '2 MATERIAL FOR 8LOCI< TO BE /:REE OF: FABRICATION OR REPAIR WELDS, ANY LAMINAR INDICATIONS WHICH MAY A/:FECT ANGLE BEAM OR STRAIGHT BEAM CAL/8RATION.S.
| |
| STEEL STAMP. ID. NO. SURFACE INDICATED, IN CHARACTERS 3/1' MIN. HEIGHT. @MAKE SWRI /:ROM STUD SUPPLIED BY PSE I G RIC NO. 5'-. UT DCN NI REVISIONS
| |
| *
| |
| * i ON THREAD ROOT ALIGNED WlrH THREAD PITCH -0'211 . . . . MACHmE ONE '"RE'D DEPTH L 8ELOW THllEAD ROOT :t.005 SECTION A-A SCALE: '.l/I TYP. 4 PLACES fDU:IUNCH UlllUH ltOTID DICIM.&La f .010 r11.acr10..a t I 1.125-8-S-CS-87-SAM DASH lll ... ll[QD, NIXT ASllllllLll"I 4 l"Alltl NAME MATUUAL PARTS LIST SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE QUALITY ASSUAAICCE SYSTEMS ANO ENGINURIMG OtYISIOH IH HTONI0 0 TUAI STUD CALIBRATION BLOCK IHUT Of C C-3052-251 trJ I N 0 * /--i'-DIA. FLAT END Mll.L r**
| |
| NOTCH .OOS OUP, 2-PLAC<S
| |
| \
| |
| 1 :: H ;! :*! : : -* .. 1 j 1 :: :: :: d 1f l r---\ // -DlllL l I IU.MW
| |
| * L:;O ! .005 DIA. <"f) *-2,J. .--PL* CS**4.5*8e-::-sk HT. C4380*2 . r
| |
| ---------*-** I NOTES: L OIUENSIONS All£ IN
| |
| : 2. DClJUllll ANO BREAK EDGES . .S. UATElllAL roR t:JJ.OCK TO lU .CREE OF: FABRICATION Oil REPAIR WELDS, ANY LAMINAR INDICATIONS WH/Cll MAY A'"l""ECT ANGLE BEAM OR STRAIGHT tJEAU C."AU&!ATION*.i. ;,°,/
| |
| @scR11le CENTEllLINE TO .OO!I WIDE ..lNV NOTED. STEEL STAMP, OR MILL cur, AN INDEX M-1"-'K AT EACH END OJ." CENT.ERLINE AS SHOwN 1 1/!ll,,
| |
| 1/-1 lUN(i
| |
| -'B Ciri.U CL!, Ht:'AT NO.
| |
| * \/ (5) i\
| |
| * m ill I " ' II I I '** '*' "' " " " II II II " " " A 'l415 I PL-CS *4.5 *88 *SAM PLATE ULTRASONIC CALIBRATION BLOCK c c D-3052*244 A"
| |
| * t>:I I N ...... * * * '---------------------*------*
| |
| 13 . -----***-*--------------------!
| |
| A REF. **---***-------------------*---
| |
| II ----****-**--*-*.
| |
| -----*--*-*----------'
| |
| aJ------
| |
| 4 --1 *-------+-------
| |
| ---u-----*-*-
| |
| **---*-i p " u ----*-**-*-----------* . *--*-----------l----
| |
| --------*
| |
| -*------*-----**[I.
| |
| ___
| |
| NOTES: ., e;R-4 PLACES
| |
| -8N THREAD REF. DEBURR AND BREAK SHARP EDGcS. 2. MATERIAL FOR lJLOCK TO !3E FREE OF: FA/JR/CATION OR REPAIR WELDS 1 ANY LAMINAR /ND/CATIONS WHICH MAl" AFFECT ANGLE lJEAM OR STRAIGHT BEAM CALIBRATIONS.
| |
| @ STEC£ STAMP ID., NO. ON Sl/RFACE /NO/CA TcD, IN CHARACTcRS 3/lt. MIN. I/EIGHT. 0 MAKc FROM STUD Sl/PPllcD Br PSE -I G SWRI RIC NO. 57£. ri=-CENTERED ON THREAD ROOT ALIGNED WITH THSlEAD PITCH J
| |
| MACHINE ONE THREAD DEPTH BELOW THREAD ROOT t.oas SECTION A :...A SCALE: :z/t TYP. 4 PLACE5 TOUh .. CIO UMlUIS NOTIED DLCllilaLI f .0/Q ,.llACTIOHI t /j/lo DASH NI NI ll[QD. 1.625-8-S-CS-89-SAM LIST SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE QUALITY lSSURlHC£.
| |
| SY5TEMS AND EHGUtf.fRINQ DMSION IAlll IMTOMIO, TUAI STUD CALl8RA TION CJ LOCK z 'ltt[ff OF c c-305'2 -240 lll[Y. L<T DCN ... REVISIONS l:x:I I N N 5 /6-0N THREAD\ ,f----_ 10s* REF. r -L _ --J------f----'
| |
| ----. 10!!>" NOTES: OEBURR ANO BRE:AK SH,,,RP EDGES. 2 MATERIAL FOR LJLOCK TO BE FREE OI=: FABRICATION OR REPAIR WELDS, ANY LAMINAR INDICATIONS WHICH MA r AFFECT ANGLE BEAM OR STRAIGHT BEAM CAL lfjRA TIONS. @STEEL STAMP ID. NO. ON SURFACE INDICATED, IN CHARACTER.5 3/1'-MIN. HEIGHT. 0 MAKE FROM NUT SUPPLIED SWRI RIC NO. 57F.
| |
| * BY P5E ./ G 3 PLACES 13 32 li!EF. 1g-1 II II II SECTION C-C --*-CENTERED ON THREAD ROOT ALIGNED WITH THREAD PITCH .Dt".2 '\ 1.625-8-N -CS-92-SAM
| |
| -MACHINE TO !JOTTOM OF THREAD ROOT t.oos DETAIL A SCALE: 2/1 SECTION B-B SCALE: 2/1 TYP. .3 PLACES TOL1£11111HCll l>>ILl'.SS NOTED OECIMAU t. .010 ,,'IACTIOHS t I/It. !/9 DASH Ht fll lllEQD. Mt'XT ASSEW*ut:I 4 PAllT .NAWt: MAT(IUAL SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE Q.U&LITY ASSUHMCf SYSTEMS AND U.GIN£EIWK DIVISION IAtl A*TONIO. TIU1I NUT ,CALIBRATION BLOCK c c-3052-t:i::l I N w
| |
| * 1.l. 2 _J_ "'. MACHIN£ NOTCH. ._ __ A _ _,_----------------****
| |
| _ ___. -j *-..Dli2 WIDE X .025 Z PLF'tC£S I
| |
| ARf IN
| |
| : l. 8R£At\
| |
| EOUEr:t AHD REMOVE BUAR":a
| |
| * l. MATERIAL FOR 6LOCK Bf FREE Of ;
| |
| T .I.MULE B!AM OR 5TRAIC.HT Bf.AM CALlbR-'TIONS.
| |
| © STEEL ID. NI.. AND HEU h*. ShOwN ON SURfA(E INDICATfD, IN CnARAC.TCR'":I 311" MIU. ul16Hl. . © SO\llU CfNTERUNH
| |
| .003 -.OOS. WIDE AND Of.fP WttfHf >>OTCD. 'IITlfL '5.1,.MP, Qjl MIU. C.UT, AN lffDU.
| |
| AT Of (l\l:H CUlERUN[ A':I 5hDWN, 1n2. J. 1/32 >.. 1/4 LONG.. @MAKE FROM SA2.10, TYPE 304, HEAl KL. 8GS4404-LOG. N*. 01'12.. . ,
| |
| * SE:CTION A-A SCAL£; 2./ I ILnl
| |
| * ID. N'. PL *55-.2'>0
| |
| * 51-SAM , ..........
| |
| -.. ... m '::"l.:!.I I db.) :-_=-..
| |
| * SOUTHWEST IESEARCH INSTITUTE
| |
| .... *-
| |
| QU.IUTI llUUllUCI llUl*I (l.l1UM11 lll'ftllClll
| |
| ..... _ .. u: 7-.1o-7 ,. PLATE fil<<Jt' / SALEM 2. -1c-10-30!:>2 254 , **
| |
| SECTION 0-0 SCALE: I/I NOTE'=>"*
| |
| c DEBURR AND BREAK SHARP EDGES. D 105° 2. MATERIAL FOR BLOCK TO BE FREE OF: FABRICATION OR RE.PAIR WELD'=>, ANY LAMINAR INDICATIONS WHICH MAY AFFElT 'AN6LE BEAM OR STRAIGHT BEAM CALIBRATIONS.
| |
| @STEEL STAMP ID. Ni.. ON SURFACE INDICATED JIN C.HARACTERS
| |
| .3/ICO MIN. llE.IC.HT.
| |
| @MAKE FROM NUT SUPPLIED BY P5E 4 f:> . 5wRI RICN.!?..
| |
| A82354 A L<T l_R 8 4 PlAC.ES e743 OAT[ 3 OETl\IL A SCALE: 2/1 1-)r REF r IOI:: j%tl1i4 10 5 4 SECTION C-C SCALE I/I MACHINE TO BOTTOM OF THREl\O ROOT ! . om;
| |
| * OG>2 TOL[llANCfS UHLE5S NOTIO OfCIMAU '! 0 I 0 ,.llACTION*
| |
| J: I/ 16 !.
| |
| * CENTERED ON THREAD ROOT ALIGNED WITH THREAD PITCH i r MAC.HINE ONE THREAD DEPTH 1?.E.LOW THREAD ROOT i .005 I I SECTION B*B SCALE: 2./ 1 T"l'P. 4 PLAC.E':>
| |
| 1.125-8-N-CS-101-SAM PAllJ _NAiii[ lllAfllllAL
| |
| ,,ARTS UST NEXf ASSfMILll:I SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEMS AND fll<MHEERING O'VISIOll SALEM 2 SttECT Of SCALE: I I I ltlY.
| |
| t:i::l I N Vo * * * * .,.I ______________ -I 2 7 ..!_ ___________
| |
| ___.. 2 5 ----------l 3t J.-----t-i 3 n u _________
| |
| ____n__ ________ _Vt I . Id -aN THREAD REF. NOTES: 7 aR* 4.-PLACE5 I. OEBURR ANO BREAK SHARP EDGES. :2. MATERIAL i:OR BLOCK TO BE FREE OF: FABRICATION OR REPAIR WELO.S, ANY LAMINAR /NO/CATIONS Wll/CH MAY AF/:'ECT ANGLE BEAM OR STRAIGHT BEAM CAUBRATIONS.
| |
| 0 STEEL STAMP /0. NO. AS S/.IOWN ON SURFACE INDICATED IN CHARACTERS
| |
| !3/lt. MIN. llEIG/.IT.
| |
| @MAKE FROM STL/D SL/PPL/ED BY PSE I G . SWRI RIC. /'10. C 1 SA 193 tj7, HT. 'No. 5382:1 UT DCN N* Ir CENTERED ON THREAO ROOT ALIGNED WITH THREAD PITCH .
| |
| * Oti.2 --:a--__ _l_ MACHINE ONE THREAD OEPTll BELOW THREAD l<OOT t .005 SECTION A-A 'SCALE: t/I TY'P. 4. -PLACES 1.125-8 -S -CS -103 -SAM © NOTID t 1/14' LIST REVISIONS SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEMS &NO UIGINEERING DIVISION Hll ANTONIO, TU.Al STUD CAll8RATION BLOCK SALEM 2 IHUT Of SCAL[ '/I c C-5052 260
| |
| * APPENDIX F CERTIFICATES OF PERSONNEL QUALIFICATIONS
| |
| * -*
| |
| * APPENDIX F CERTIFICATES OF PERSONNEL QUALIFICATIONS
| |
| ,-Table of Contents Name VT PT UT Page Diaz, -H. III -F-1 Howell, w. M. I* F-2 Magaro, s. II II F-3 Moreno, c. G. II II II F-5 Ng, G. p. I* F-8 Riser, R. M. I I F-9 Roberds, B. A. II II F-11 Stahler, D. A. I* I I F-13 -* Turner, P. c. II II F-16 *Level I Trainee F-i
| |
| * * ** SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION STATEMENT OF CERTIFICATION The Vtce President, Quality Aa.urance Systems and Engineering Division, cartifie91hat
| |
| _H_e_c_t_o_r_D_i_a_z
| |
| ________ _ is qualified a L8wl Ill in U 1 trasonic Testing in accordance with the requirements of SwAI Nuclelr Oualit'f Assurance Procedure 11-1, which incorpoiat11atheguideline9of SNT-TC-1A, 1975and 1980 Editions.
| |
| cartificlnionUmita1ionll:
| |
| Certification valid only while employed by SwRI Speciaj Cualifica1iotm litany): __.N,_o:.:n::.;e=----------------------------
| |
| Date: $h.1e; '1 . . i . . EDUCATION AND EXPERIENC!
| |
| HISTORY EDUCATION: . High School Addi'lionaJ:.
| |
| NAME J.W. Nixon (Tx) YEARS 4 Laredo Jr. College 2 St. Phillips College 1/1/2 Major Field of Study Mathematics DEGREE GRAD NO NO Previous NOE Experience (if used for qualification):
| |
| COMPANY FROM TO None by SwAI: . 07I15 I 7 2 . The indfvldual ha been c:nidited with at !eat
| |
| * montfl8 of expeiieoce in this examination med1od on the dat9 of certification.
| |
| Some of the uperieitce may have been accrued simultaneously with
| |
| * other NOE methods (at least 25% was in this method). . VISUAL ACUITY AND COLOR PERCEPTION The individual is C81)8ble of reeding Jaegs Number 1 rea.. at 12 lnct. In at teat one_,. lusin9 C011ec1M *-if specified belowl, and c:an dildnguilh and differentiate c:antrat i.twem cob. Ullld 1n mis IMttlod. Date Corr. Req. 10/29(84 No . Verified by Heidi Gutierrez A1ff=. MOST RECENT EXAMINATION GRADES SCORES WSGHT General/Basic:
| |
| *95.83 0.4 Specific:
| |
| **93.18 0.2 Practical/
| |
| Method: ***94.94 0.4 Composite: . 94.94 Date: *7 Responsible L8wl Iii:
| |
| Date Corr. Req. Verified by
| |
| * CERTIFICATION HISTORY: THIS LEVEL Initial Certification:
| |
| 08/07/81 Recenific:atian:
| |
| 07/24/84 Recenitication:
| |
| Receniftcalion:
| |
| Rec:enification:
| |
| Recartification:
| |
| REMARKS requirement for experience records has received IGSCC training by EPRI and the IGSCC SwRI Fonn QA-44-1 F-1 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION STATEMENT OF CERTIFICATION The Direc:tor of the D...,uneiif of Engineering Services, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division, certifies that W. Mark Howell is qualifl9d 89 Level I Trainee in ___ U_l_t_r_a_s_o_n_i_c
| |
| _________
| |
| _ Testing in accordance with th* requiremenu of SwRI Nuclaat Quality Aauranca Procedure 11*1, Revision 2, which incoriiorat*
| |
| the guidelines of SNT*TC*1A, 1975 Edition. Caniflca11onlimiUtiona:
| |
| ____
| |
| _________________
| |
| ___ EDUCATION:
| |
| NAME YEARS DEGREE High School Calhoun H.S. (Tx) 4 GRAD Additional Texas A&M 4 B.S. Major F"ielcl of Study Industrial Engineering Date Employed by SwRI: ___ 0;..8;..:./....;0_2"'"/""'8..;;;;2
| |
| __ _.., ______ _ Th* individual hu bean credited with N /A months of experience in this examination mlthod on the date of certification.
| |
| Some of the exparianc:9 may have been accrued simulUlneously with other N DE methods lat least 25'!!. wu in this methodl. TRAINING (this method and lavell: Date Completed:
| |
| 10/12/82 Hours: 4 Location:
| |
| SwRI Pnwloua NOE experience (if uaad f!Jr qualification I: Company None Fnim VISUAL ACUITY AND COLOR PERCEPTION To The individual is capable of reeding Jaeger Number 1 letters ft 12 lnchn in at least one eye lulling corrective lenses if below I. and can distinguish and differentiate contrast betWeen colors used in this method. Corr. Date Req. Verified by 10/15/82 Yes Heidi .Gutierrez 09{.22{.83 Yes Q2L2lLS{t MOST RECENT EXAMINATION GRADES Scores Weight General: N/A Specific:
| |
| N/A Practical:
| |
| N/A Composite:
| |
| N/A Date: N/A Responsible Level Ill: N/A SwRI Form OA*11*5 *Date Corr. Req. Veriflei:I by CERTIFICATION HISTORY: THIS LEVEL Date Initial Certification:
| |
| 10/18/82 Recertification:
| |
| Recertification:
| |
| Recertification:
| |
| Recertification:
| |
| Recertification:
| |
| REMARKS F-2 .,
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION STATEMENT OF CERTIFICATION The Director of the Oepanment of Engineering Sarvices, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division, ce"ifies that ____ S_t_e_v_e_M_a_.g.._a_r_o
| |
| _____ is qualified as Level II in-Visual Tasting !VTl, categories VT-1, VT-2, ___
| |
| _ __,h1 accordance with the requirements of SwRI Nucl11.1r Quality Assurance Procedure 11*2, Revision 2. Certification Wmitations:
| |
| '' I _..., A I Expir111ionOete:
| |
| 08/07 /87 /
| |
| *
| |
| * J 1 /441/ ffa/,,,/ Signed: I 'I IJ }'/,/ // fU, hi.ate:
| |
| xr) 1-G-+llf.
| |
| __________
| |
| _ uirector, Depe""1ent of l:ng1 ..... .. ,. .*
| |
| --
| |
| .... *r --, -v EDUCATION:
| |
| High School EOfl::ATION, TRAINING ANO EXPERIENCE HISTORY NAME v YEARS Robert E 'Lee H. S (Tx) 3 DEGREE GRAD TRAINING (this method and levell: Cate Completed:
| |
| 6/24/81 j 7 /17 /84 Addition11I St. Philip's College 3 NO Hours: 12; 6 Location:
| |
| __ _ Mejor Field of Study _W=e.,,l..,,d
| |
| .. i..,n,......g
| |
| _______ ----------Cate Employed by SwRI: _......;.0....;l;.:../....;2""'2-./_7...;;.9
| |
| __________
| |
| _ Previous NOE experience.(if used for qualification!:
| |
| The individual has been credited with _...,,7 __ months of experiance in this . examination method on the date of certification.
| |
| Some of the experience may have been accrued simultaneously with other NOE methods (at least 25'!& wes in this methodJ
| |
| * Company None VISUAL ACUITY ANO COLOR PERCEPTION From To The individual is capable of reading Jaeger Number 1 letters at 12 inchee, and is capable of reading Snellen Number 30 letters at a distance of 20 feet, in at least one eve (using corrective lenses if specified below I, and can distinguisl1 and differentiate contrast between colors used in this method. Corr. Cate Req. Verified by Cate Verified by 07/02/84 No Heidi Gutierrez -----------------------
| |
| MOST RECENT EXAMINATION GRADES CERTIFICATION HISTORY: THIS LEVEL Scores Weight Cate Gotner11I:
| |
| 22.5Q .33-1/3 Initial Ce"ification:
| |
| 08/24/81 Specific:
| |
| 84.00 .33-1/3 Recertification:
| |
| 08/07/84 Practical:
| |
| 100.00 Rece"ification:
| |
| Composite:
| |
| 92120 1.00 Rece"ification:
| |
| R ec:e"ification:
| |
| Rece"ification:
| |
| REMARKS S_wRI Form OA-42*0 F-3
| |
| ,-SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION STATEMENT OF CERTIFICATION The Director of the Department of Engineering Services, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division,*
| |
| certifies that Steve Magaro is qualified as Level II in __ ___.u ... l_t_r=-=a
| |
| ... s...;:o""n"'i=-c=----------
| |
| Testing in accordanca with the requirements of Swfll Nuclear Quality Assurance Procedure 11* 1, Revision 2, which incorp0tatas the guidelines of SNT*TC*1A, 1975 Edition. Certification Umitation1:
| |
| Certification valid only while employed by SwRI Expiration Date: __
| |
| EDUCATION:
| |
| NAME YEARS DEGREE High School Robert E. Lee H.S. (Tx) 3 GRAD Additional St. Phili:e's College 3 NO Major Field of Study Welding Date Employed by Swfll: ___ O._l .....
| |
| _________
| |
| _ The individual ha1 been credited with __ l_2_ months of experience in this examination method on the dlte of certification.
| |
| Some of the experience may have b111tn accrued simultaneously with other NOE methods (at least 25% was in this method). TRAINING (this method and level): DateCompletlld:
| |
| 02/21/80; 6/6/83; Hours: 56; 8; 14 Location:
| |
| SwRI Previous NOE experience (if used for qualificationl:
| |
| Company From None VISUAL ACUITY ANO COLOR PERCEPTION 6Ll5L8 To The individual is capable of reading Jaeger Number 1 letters at 12 inches in at least one eye (using corrective lenses if specified below I. and can distinguish and differentiate contrast between colors used in this method. Corr. Date Req. 07/22/82 No 07LOSL83 No 07L02{.84 No .Scores General: 97.50 Specific:
| |
| 98.50 Practical:
| |
| 92.00 Composite:
| |
| 95.60 Data: 06/07 /83; Responsible Level Ill: S tanle Corr. Date Req. Verified by CERTIFICATION HISTORY: THIS LEVEL Weight Date 0.3. Initial Certification:
| |
| 09/24/80 0.3 Recertification:
| |
| 06{.16{.83
| |
| | |
| ===0.4 Recertification===
| |
| | |
| ===1.0 Recertification===
| |
| | |
| Recertification:
| |
| Recertification:
| |
| REMARKS Note! This individual has received IGSCC detection training by EPRI and the IGSCC statement of Qualification is on file at SwRI. SwRI Form OA*11*5 F-4 * * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTiTUTE NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION
| |
| .. ' J_* STATEMENT OF CERTIFICATION
| |
| .,-Th* Oin1ct0t of th* Oei>amnem of Enginnring Services, Quality Aauranc1t System* and Engineering Division, caroties !hit Carlos G. Moreno is qualified u Laite! II in Visual Teming (VT), CllltegOria VT-lz VT-2z VT-3 2 VT-4 i., accordance
| |
| 'with th* miuinmenm of SwRI Nuclur Quality Aauranca Procedure 11-2. Revision 2. Caniflc:ation Umialtiona:
| |
| Certification valid ,/ onlv while emn loved bv SwRI Expiration Oatm: 1n/?"'i/R7 I :///)11A1
| |
| .; 1!!J1J/
| |
| Signed: ., 1111 J'J(f/ Cata: 01rGCtOr, Oeil<!!mnent or t:n9111**mng El UCATION, TRAINING ANO EXPERIENCE HISTORY EDUCATION:
| |
| NAME YEARS DEGREE TRAINING .!this method and lavell: Higl! Scl!ool New Braunfels H.S. 4 GRAD Cate Completed:
| |
| 0 8 / 14_/ 81 :
| |
| Additional
| |
| : s. w. Tx. State Univ. 4 B.A. Hours: 12; l.ocation:
| |
| SwRI Major Field of Study SocioJ.ogJ!LSocisJ.
| |
| Wo:t:k Cate Empjoyed by SwRt: 02/04/80 P""'1oua NOE Hperienca lif usac:I tor oua1ificationl:
| |
| The individual has been Cf11dited witl'I 4 mon!M of experience in this uamination method on th*
| |
| ceniflc:.tion.
| |
| Some of the 911perience have Company From To b8111'11c:i:Niad simultanoousv with omer NOE mathaas lat least 25'!& w11 in this Mane method! *
| |
| * VISUAL ACUITY ANO COLOR ?ERCEPTION The inoividual ia capallle of ruciing Jaegm Numa. 1 lethlrs at 12 lncl!n. and is caiiallle of reading Snellen Number 30 letrars at a distance of 20 t-. in at I-one eve (using corrective len-if specified belowl, and can distinguish and differentiate contrast berween colors use<t in this metllod. Corr. Corr. Cata Req. Verified by Cate Req. Verified by 08LlOL84 No Heidi
| |
| * MOST RECENT EXAMINATlON GRACES CERTIFICATION HISTORY: THIS I.EVE!. Scores Weigl!! Cate Genar1I: 85.00 .33-1/3 Initial Certification:
| |
| 11/11/81 Scecific:
| |
| 2'.QQ .n-J.LJ Recenification:
| |
| J.QL25 L84 I f'raciical:
| |
| 92.00 .33-1/3 Rec11rnfication:
| |
| Ccmoosit11:
| |
| 89.6i 1.00 Recertification:
| |
| Flecartification:
| |
| Dau: 10/17/84 Recertification:
| |
| Resoonlillle l..wel Ill: E.H. Ruescher REMARKS
| |
| * SwRI Form OA-42-0 F-5 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION STATEMENT OF CERTIFICATION
| |
| -** ,-TIMI Oltwc:tDr of me O..,mnment of Engine.i119 SetVica. QualicV Aauranc:e and Engineering Oi11ision, cenffia mat Carlos G. Moreno ia qualified
| |
| -L.awl II in Liquid Penetrant Teainv in ac:c:ardanc:e with of SwAI NuC-Quality Aaurance Pracedut9 11*1, R9'1ision
| |
| : 2. whic:h inc:oll)Cl'8ta me guidelines at SNT*TC*1A, 197! EdJtlan.
| |
| Cdftc:Ran Umimions:
| |
| 2ni:z J;i:z SwRI so-c:m llf 1nv1: None ? . ExcinOon Daer. 02/01/85 !Ii l 1JIJ11 SiQned: l '/JI/ If ii J'L -eau: 1J1rwc:ior, l.l..,.nJneni or
| |
| *7-"' -eouo. TlON, T'RAINING ANO EXPERIENC!
| |
| HISTORY EOUCATlON:
| |
| NAME YEARS OEGREi T'RAINING Imm mettled and lwell: High Sc:hool New Braunfels H.S.
| |
| 4 GRAD Ona ComQJeted:
| |
| 08l11l81 AdditioMI s.w. Texas State Univ. 4 B.A. Haun: 12 l.oc:atian:
| |
| SwRI Major Fielc:I of Study Sociologz/Social Work Oau Emptov9d by SwAI: 02lQ4l80 Prwwiaull NOE nperienc:e (if used for qualiflc:aoanl:
| |
| The incilvidual ha ti.-c:reciited wid'I mamne ot uQerienea in mis txamiMtHJn meUlod on me <tea of c:eniflClltion.
| |
| *some of me aperienca m-v h-Comoany Fram To &e1:n1ed simultaneouliy wid'I oUler NOE memodll (ft IUSl.25'!'
| |
| -in this
| |
| * medlodl. VISUAi. ACtJITf ANO COLOR PERC!PTlON The lndividum 19 of reeding JMger Numo.r 1 ltmen ft 12inchainai1..si one..,. <usin9 conwc:till*
| |
| len-if beiowl. and c11n lfld diffenmillu connu between c:clonl uMd in tl'lie metflod. CarT. -Corr. Oaa R9Q. Verified by O.u Req. Verffied by 04/02/81 No Heidi Gutierrez Ug lJ LOZ l83 lie Be:! c:! Gut:! e:c::i::ez llit 03l02l82 No Heidi GutierTez OBLlOlBA tlg !leii;li G1.u:ie:c:i:::ez Lif 12L29L82 Ng rt-Heidi Gutierrez
| |
| -MOST REC!NT EX.AMINA TlON GRAOES C!RTIFICATION HISTORY: THIS l..EVE!..
| |
| I Sc:ora Weight Cate I GM!eral: 90.00 0.3 c.nttlc:ation:
| |
| 02l01/82 Soec:it!c:
| |
| 86.66 0.3 Receniffc:nion:
| |
| -l'Twc:ilcal:
| |
| 96.00 0.4 R KSniflc:ation:
| |
| 91.40 1.0 Rec8ftiflc:atian:
| |
| RKerttflcatian:
| |
| Oair.
| |
| Rec:enlf!caiicn:
| |
| R-.it!le l..ewl 111: Jo 1 G. -M'-'/ . REMARKS
| |
| * SwAI Form QA.11.5 F-6
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NONOESTRUCTIVE STATEMENT OF CERTIFICATION The OilwcUlr at the Ceganm.m at S.mc-, Cluallty Aaumic:e Sysie1n9 Ind Engineering Division, certifies that Carlos G. Moreno iaqualiflad
| |
| .. Lft'll II in __ _,.U"""l ... t..,r..,at:.s
| |
| ... o .... n.,.i...,c._
| |
| _______ _ T..arta in ICCOl'danca widl the at SwRI Nuciar Quaiily A-..,._ PToc:adu1'9 11-1, Revision 2. which iftCOtl)Oma tn. guidelinea of SNT*TC*1A.
| |
| 1975 Edldaft. C..tlllcadcftl.lmialdonc Cer'tification valid only while e111J?loyed by SwRI ... Speci11Quallflcsdon8(ifanyl:
| |
| ___
| |
| _______________________________________________
| |
| __ -JI/ I /J " &QimlcnOai.:
| |
| 09/06/87 l
| |
| A/jll/,,.J Slgnac:I:
| |
| * , llAJV/JY/
| |
| * -ff//l'Wcata:
| |
| _________
| |
| __ LJirlC:Ulf, IJeQlftlTlen1 Of-*-***"'
| |
| I""'"" ,_ -., r* I . I ll!OUC.ATION, TRAINING ANO EXPERIENCE HISTORY EDUCATION:
| |
| NAME . YEARS OEGREE TRAINING lttlia memad Ind laveO: New Braunfels H.S. S.W. Tx. State Univ. 4 GRAD B.A.
| |
| 6/26/81;7/3
| |
| /81; 8/21 /84 AddlCiaM6 4 Houn: 6 a; 1 i.oc.tion:
| |
| .... s .... w .... R ... I ___ _ MaiorFieldatStudV Sociology/Social Wo ... rk _____ -----O.c.Emplaywd tiySw,.I:
| |
| __________
| |
| _ PTWioua lif used for qualfficaiionl:
| |
| The individu*
| |
| ha 0-crwdff9d wfttl 9 mamfta af Upet --in thil IUlllinatlan ml'thod on the dai. of c:.ntfic:arion.
| |
| Some af the uperienc:91NY haV9 ti.It ac:cn.itld wnn OU-NOE m.moda lft i.a wain thil medMldl. 'None VISUAL ACUITY ANO COLOR PERCEPTION To The indMduml i1I readlnQ Jngw Num0.1 i.u.s If 12 tnct. in ft lallC one..,. IU8ift9 CCI reci:iw lenw belowl, ind can dlllingui9h and diff9rwltinl comr.i c:Dlora ul9d in thil mecftod, Corr. o... Aeq. 08/10/84 No Verified by Heidi Gutierrez MOST RECENT EXAMINATION GRACES G-.1: Soaciflc: Compoajtr.
| |
| Scorw Wei;ftt 95 .00 0.3 86.33 0.3 93.00 0.4 91.60 1.0 Cl!RTIFIC.ATION HISTORY: THIS LEVEL Cata lnitlaj CM!ification:
| |
| 11/02/81 Flecaniflcation:
| |
| 09/06/84 Flec.nlfiealioft:
| |
| Flecenification: Fleceniflcatian:
| |
| 0-. 8/21/84 FlftOOMibleLIVWlll:
| |
| E.H. Ruescher ./ .. REMARKS Note! This individua1 bas received IGSCC detec'tion training by EPRI and the IGSCC s'tatement:
| |
| of Qualification*
| |
| is on file at SwRI. F-7 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NON DESTRUCTIVE EXAM !NATION ....._ ... l. STATEMENT OF CERTIFICATION * -,-Th* Oirectar of th* Oeo.,unent of Engineering Services, Qu1lity Asauranc*
| |
| Sysiiims and Engineering Division, cenifin thlt Gene P. Ng is qualified as Lwel I Ultrasonic Testift9in1ccordlnce with Ille r1quiremants of SwRI Nudar Qu.lity Aaui'ance Procadur911*1, Revision 2. which incorporates th* guidelines of SNT-TC-1A, 197! Edition. c.nmcation Umilltiona:
| |
| Certification valid onl! while em12lozed by SwRI SPKial Qullificltions llf anvl: 1\Tn,., .. n Expmon Dita: 10/23/87 /J /jj'}
| |
| * 1 Cate: ;¢it.£ Signed: I 11/;f'U/J u1rector.
| |
| 1Jeo1runent or i:ng1n .. nng., 7rvrc81i -_, CATION, TRAINING AND EXPERIENCE HISTORY EDUCATION:
| |
| NAME YEARS DEGREE TRAINING I this method and lavell: High School Sam Houston 4 GRAD Oat* Completed:
| |
| 09/27/84 Additionll San Antonio 1 1/2 NO Hours:* 97 Location:
| |
| SwRI Major Field of Study Electronic Cate Employed by SwRI: 0Zl30l8*t Prwioua NOE experience lif used for qualification!:
| |
| Th* individull hH been cn!dited with N /A month* of experience in thil eumin1tion method on th* date of cenification.
| |
| Some of th* experience m1y have Comp1ny From To None bean accn.iad simutainaously with other NOE mamodl lat I-25% wH in thil
| |
| * metnodl. VISUAL ACUITY ANO COLOR PERCEPTION The indlviwat is cao1bl* of re1dlng Jaec;er Number I letters at 12 inchn in at leUl one ev* tusing corrective lenMI if 511ecified below I, and can diltinguiah and diffen!ntiata contrast between colors uMd .in this method. Corr. Corr. Cata Req. Verified by Cate Req, Verified by 10/22/84 Yes Heidi Gutierrez MOST RECENT EXAMINATION GRADES CERTIFICATION HISTORY. THIS LEVEL Scores Weight Cate Genenl: N/A Initial Certification:
| |
| lOl'.23£'.84 Specific:
| |
| NlA Recenification:
| |
| Practical:
| |
| N/A Recertificatian:
| |
| Comoosite:
| |
| N/A Recertification:
| |
| R ecertifie1tion:
| |
| Oata: N/A Recertification:
| |
| RllS!IOnsibl*
| |
| Lwet Ill: N7A REMARKS
| |
| * SwRI Form OA*l1*5 F-8
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION
| |
| -..... '-. -STATEMENT OF CERTIFICATION
| |
| -,--Th* Oirec:uir of !ti* 091Mrtmen1 ot Engineering Sllf'lic*, Qu*lkv Auuninc* Sysiems and Engineering Oivision, camties tn111 Robert M. Riser is qumlified
| |
| .. Lavel I in Liguid Penetrant TasUn<a in accord1nc:e widl me requiremenu ot SwRI Nuclur Qudty Procedure 11*1, Revision 2. which inc:or;101111n ma guidelines of SNT*TC*1A, 1975 Edidcn. CMtiflcalion UmiUUcn1:
| |
| Certification valid onlz while emplozed bz SwRI Soecill au.liflc:aUcM lit *nyl: None fl /If * . Exoir1tion Can: 08/28/87 II If/II/I ** l tH.11/?4 Si9nld: ., Y/JA/ VM/1 u1rac:uir, 091Mrtment or i:nq1nj,...."9
| |
| '""'cal eo CATION.
| |
| ANO EXPERIENCE HISTORY EOUCATION:
| |
| NAME I YEARS DEGREE . TRAINING (this memod and lavell: High Schco4 John Jaz H.S.
| |
| 4 GRAD Cate Completed:
| |
| 7t_27t_84; 7t_26t_83 Addltlon.t San Antonio College 1 sem. NO Hours: 3* 24 Loc:uian:
| |
| SwE,J; . .:, : M1jorF'!81dofSIUdV Technical Oan EmplOved by SwRI:
| |
| Prwvious NOE e11perienc:e
| |
| !if uud for quaJiflc:1nionl:
| |
| * The individual nu been c:r!tdited witll l monms of uperiem:*
| |
| in thil sumiftation m.mod an m* dam of ceniflcation.
| |
| Some of th* uperience may hne Company From To None !>..-. 1c:i:ruld simultPeclu9IV with other NOE memOdl <*1 leat 25"' wu in mil method!. VISUAL ACUITY ANO COLOR PERCEPTION The indlvidu.i is c:a1111bll of rudlng Juger Number 1 l.nen *112 indl* In *t lun one eye luling corrective len-if 30ec:iflld belowl, and can dialinguilh and differ9fltiln c:ol!lrMI belW9e colors u.Md in this method. Corr. Corr. 01tm Req. Vl!riflldby Dan Req. Verified by 08/08/84 Yes Heidi Gutierrez J..h d'-' MOST RECENT EXAMINATION GRACES CERTIFICATION HISTORY: THIS LEVEL I Scorn Weight Oat11 I Genenil: *100. 00 0.3 lnitill C.rntlc:ation:
| |
| 08t_28l84
| |
| * 90.00 0.3 I Soec:iflc::
| |
| Rec:llttiflc:ation:
| |
| ** 97.00 0.4 R sc:ertiflc:ation:
| |
| CQmociin:
| |
| 95180 1-0 R sc:llttific:arion:
| |
| Rec:llttiflc:*rion:
| |
| 01t11: *7/26/83; 7/27/84**
| |
| Rsc:amtic:ation:
| |
| Resoonsibte Lhel 111: F'._H_ -o,, ..... ,..h .....
| |
| l REMARKS I I
| |
| * I SwRI Form OA*11*5 F-9 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NONCESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION STATEMENT OF CERTIFICATION Tiie Oim:mt of the Oeiianment ot En;ineerintJ S.mc-. Quality Aaurwnce and En;ineerin; Division, canifin mat Robert M. Risor ia qua4ified 18 Lewi I in __ .... u ... 1,_t_r ... a ... s ... o,_n ... i-.-c ________ _ T..mtv in accardance wid'I the l'9Cluir9ment:I of SwRI Nudeu CluaJity Aaai...ca Pl'OC8Cluni 11*1, Reviaion 2. which inCCt'llOmM the guidelinn of SNT*TC*1A, 1979 Edition.
| |
| * caniflc81icn Unritationa:
| |
| Certification valid only while emploved by SwRI Spcial Quallflcatlona Ci1 anyl: __ N_o_n_e _ ___.at-----------------------------
| |
| A y ... eouo .TION, AND EXPERIENCE HISTORY ' EDUCATION:
| |
| NAME YEARS OEGREE ltllia method and lftell: Sdlooi AadilioNt John Jay H.S. (Tx) 4 GRAD NO Cn.Complend:
| |
| __ O_l-.f.-1._7._/8
| |
| .... *4 _____ _ San Antonio College 1 sem. 84 Hours: ------Location:
| |
| _S_w_R_I __ _ Major Field of StudV __ T_e_chni ___ cal __ Ma_th __ --------ca*Emplayed 11y swRI: ____ o_s_/_1_6_/_8_3
| |
| _______ _ PlWioua NOE 1iqierienc*
| |
| Cif UMd for Qualification I: eumifledon meUtoc:t on ti!* d.-of ceniflcilllian.
| |
| Some of ttl* uperi9nc:8 m.., ,,.,,. tie.1-=ved simuttaneoualy witn ortltr NOE IMdloda Cat l...c 25-,. -in thia meatodl. Coml*IV None VISUAL ACUITY AND COLOR PERCEPTION From To The indlvidu ia caoable of raecilnCJ Jnver Numtler 1 Im.ta at 12 lncn. in at I-one 9'f9 Cuaing corr9C?ive lenses i1 SQKifled belowl, and can dillin9uim and dilf&1.,11iai1*
| |
| camrat c:cnor. uMd In mia medlod. Corr. Oste Req. V.nt!edby Heidi Gutierrez 09/14/83 Yes ----08/08/84 Yes Heidi GutierTez G9Mrlll: Soec:fflc:
| |
| Practical:
| |
| Comooaice:
| |
| MOST RECENT EXAMINATION GRACES Scarw
| |
| * 95 .00 **95. 60 ***92.50 94.18 Wei;ht 0.3 0.3 0.4 1.0 o.-. *5/30/83;
| |
| **6/30/83;
| |
| ***01/17/84 E.H. Ruescher c:-;*"" --*-... Cara Corr. Req. Verified by CERTIFICATION HISTORY: THIS LEVEL Dilte Initial C.rtiflc:ation:
| |
| 02/10/84 Rteanificalian:
| |
| Recmiflc:atian:
| |
| R ecmiflc:ation:
| |
| Receniflcatian:
| |
| Rec1Mtiflca1icin:
| |
| REMARKS SwAI Farm OA*11*5 F-10 * * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION
| |
| ...
| |
| STATEMENT OF CERTIFICATION
| |
| ----The Director of the Department of Engineering Services, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division, certifies that Barbara A. Roberds is qualified aa Level II in Liguid Penetrant Testing in accordance with th* requirements of SwRI Nucl11111r Quality Assurance Pn>cedure 11*1, Revision.
| |
| 2, which incorporates the guidelines of SNT*TC*1A, 1975 Edition. -* C*rtification Umitationa:
| |
| Certification valid only while e!!!J:!loyed by SwRI Special Queliflcations fif any): None I Expiration Data: 10/28/86 I '/. ,, f/l;/il Signed: I '/IUTJl/-1 Data: Ulrector, Uepartment Of t:nglr nr1n1 OtJJVICllS
| |
| .--... llDUCATION, TRAINING ANO EXPERIENCE HISTORY EDUCATION:
| |
| NAME YEARS DEGREE TRAINING !this method and levttO: High School Mason High School 4 GRAD Date Completed:
| |
| lOLlBL83 Additional SACz St.* Ma!!' s Univ. 2 NO Hours: B Location:
| |
| SS!ZBI Major Field of Study AccountinB Cate Employed by SwRI: 01112L81 Previous NOE axperience (if uMd for qualification):
| |
| The individual has been credited with 3 months of experience in this
| |
| * examination method on the dato of certification.
| |
| Some of the experience may have Company From To None been accrued simuit!lnoously with other NOE methods (at least 2S'!!t was in this method). VISUAL ACUITY ANO COLOR PERC.EPTlON The individual is capable of reading Jaeger Number! letters at 12 inches in at least one eye !usin_g corrective lenses if specified below I; and can distinguish and differentiate contrast between colors used in this method. Corr. Corr. Cate Req. Verified by Date Req. Verified by 12/07/82 No Heidi Gutierrez J.J.A: 11/07/83 Yes Heidi Gutierrez J.f? . 11£'.06£'.84 Yes Heidi Gutierrez L lfn. ,.J-MOST RECENT EXAMINATION GRADES v CERTIFICATION HISTORY: THIS LEVEL Scores Weight Cate General: 81.82 0.3 Initial Certification:
| |
| 10£'.28£'.83 Specific:
| |
| 100 .00 0.3 Recertification:
| |
| Practical:
| |
| 95.00 0.4 Recertification:
| |
| Composite:
| |
| 92.55 1.0 Rocertiflcation:.
| |
| Rocertification:
| |
| Date: 10/18/83 *Recertification:
| |
| Responsible Level Ill: Stanlev M. W.alker /' -/ "" REMARKS
| |
| * SwRI Form OA*11*5 F-11 i: SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION * .l.." STATEMENT OF CERTIFICATION
| |
| -* The Director of the Oep111tment
| |
| -of Engineering Services, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division, certifies that Barbara A. Roberds is qualified as Level II in Ultrasonic Testing in accord1nca with tha requiraments of SwRI NuclHr Quality Asauranca Procedura 11-1, Revision 2, _which incorporates tha guidelines of SNT*TC-tA, 1975 Edition. Certification Umitlltiona: -Certification valid onlz while emEloyed by SwRI Specill Qu1lifications Hf any I: None I .,., . El!piration Cate: 01 /13/86 I Signed; '/ u1ractor, uepartmant or cng1n"'""" g 1)e71ces , EOUCIP.TION, TRAINING ANO EXPERIENCE HISTORY EDUCATION:
| |
| NAME YEARS DEGREE TRAINING !this method and lavall: High School Ma.son High School 4 GRAD Cate Completed:
| |
| 06/24/83 Additional SAC; St. Mary's Univ. 2 NO Hours: 64 Location:
| |
| SwRI Major Field of Study Accounting Cata Employed by SwRI: 01/12/81 Previous NOE experiance Hf used for qualificarionl:
| |
| The individual hll been credited with 14 months of experience in this Company From To examination method on tha data of certification.
| |
| Some of the experience may hava None bMn accrued simultanaously with othar NOE mathods lat least 25% was in this ** mathodl. VISUAL ACUITY ANO COLOR PERCEPTION The individual is capable of raading Jaeger Number 1 letters at 12 inches in at laast one eye (using corractiva lenses if spacified belowl, and can distinguish and differantiate contrast betwffn colors used in this mathod. Corr. Corr. Cata Req. Verified by Cata Req. Verified by 12l07l82 No Heidi Gutierrez 11/07l83 Yes Heidi Gutierrez 1 PlJ 11/06/84 Yes --Heidi Gutierrez i Pl_ a -.. MOST RECENT EXAMINATION GRADES CERTIFICATION HISTORY: THIS LEVEL Scoras Weight Date General: *90.00 0.3 Initial Cdnification:
| |
| 07/13/83 Soacific:
| |
| **74.08 0.3 R ecartification:
| |
| Practical:
| |
| **84.00 0.4 Recanification:
| |
| Composita:
| |
| 82.82 1.0 Racenification:
| |
| Recenification:
| |
| Cata: *06/15/83;
| |
| **06/24/83 Recertification:
| |
| Responsibla Level Ill: Stanley M. Walker --_, a _; ,,__ _; , REMARKS Note! This individual has received I GS CC detection training by EPRI and the IGSCC statement of Qualification is on file at SwRI.
| |
| * SwRI Form OA-11*5 F-12
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION STATEMENT OF CERTIFICATION The Director of the Oepanment of Engineering Services, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division, certifies that David A. Stuhler iaqualifledasL11vel I Trainee inVisualTesting!VTJ,cat119ories VT-1, VT...:2, __ VT __ -_3-','--VT
| |
| __ -_4 ___ _.*n accordance with the requirements of SwRI Nuclear Quality Aaurance Procedure 11-2, Revision 2. Ceftiflc:ation UmiUltioni:
| |
| Certification valid only while employed by SwRI 1V Date: fffer/n I EciUCATION, TRAINING ANO EXPERIENCE HISTORY EDUCATION:
| |
| TRAINING (this method and levell: High School Additional NAME Alamo Heights High YEARS 3 DEGREE GED Date Completed:
| |
| ___ 0_9_/_3_,o_/_8_3 _____ _ Hours: __ 1_8 ___ _ Location:
| |
| _S_w_R_I ___ _ Major Field of Study -----------
| |
| --------Date Employed by SwRI: ___ o_s_/_l_6_1_8_3 _________
| |
| _ Previous NOE experience lif used for qualificationl:
| |
| Th* individual hH been credited with N /A months of experience in this examination method an the date of certification.
| |
| Some of the experience mey have been accrued simultaneously with other NOE methods (at least 25'!& was in this methadJ
| |
| * None VISUAL ACUITY ANO COLOR PERCEPTION Company From To The individual ie capable af reading Jaeger Number 1 letters at 12 inches, and is capable af reading Snellen Number 30 letters at a distance of 20 faet, in at least one eye I using corrective lenses if specified belawl, and can distinguish and differentiate contrast betWeen colors used in tnis method. Corr. Date R eq. V erifled by 09/26/83 No Heidi Gutierrez 1tjg, 08 / l 7/ 84 ===N=o===
| |
| __.,H...,e...,,i..,,d.,.i......,G...,1..,1 t..,1.,.e..,rr
| |
| ........ .,.e ...
| |
| ... fOllr"""",...--
| |
| MOST RECENT EXAMINATIO.N GRADES Scores Weight General: N/A Specific:
| |
| Practical:
| |
| Compositl!:
| |
| N/A N/A N/A Date: _______ N=-r/..,.A
| |
| _________
| |
| _ Responsible Level Ill: ___ N_l_A ___________
| |
| _ Date Corr. Raq.-Verified by CERTIFICATION HISTORY: THIS LEVEL Date Initial Certification:
| |
| 09/27/83 Recertification:
| |
| Recertification:
| |
| Recertification:
| |
| Recertification:
| |
| Recertification:
| |
| REMARKS SwRI Form OA-42-0 F-13
| |
| ,-SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION STATEMENT OF CERTIFICATION The Director of the Department of Engineering Services, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division.
| |
| certifies that payid A. Stubler isqualifi<<fasLevel T in Iiqnid_Penetrant Testing in accordance with the requirements of SwRI Nuclear Quality Assurance Procedure 11*1, Revision 2, which incorporates the guidelines of SNT*TC*lA, 1975 Edition. Caniflcatlon Umitatlona:
| |
| __ c_e_r_t_i_f_i_c_a_t_i_o_n_v_al_i_d_o_n_l
| |
| __ y_w_h_i_l_e_e_mp
| |
| ___ l_o_.y,_e_d_b
| |
| __ y __ S_w_R_I _________
| |
| _ Special Qualifications tit any I: _N_o_n..;;.e
| |
| _____________________________
| |
| ...._ ____ _ oate:
| |
| _______ _ FI. EDUCATION, TRAINING ANO EXPERIENCE HISTORY EDUCATION:
| |
| NAME TRAINING (this method and levell: High School Additional Alamo Heights H.S. YEARS 3 DEGREE GED OateCompleted:
| |
| 07 /27 /84 : 07 /26/83 Hours: 3 : 24 Location;
| |
| _S_w_R_r_*
| |
| __ _ Major Field of Study -----------
| |
| --------Oate Employed by SwRI: __ 0=5.._/=l.:.6.._/.:.8:.3
| |
| __________
| |
| _ The individual has been credited with __ , __ months of experience in this axamination method on the date of certification.
| |
| Some of the experience may have been accrued simultaneously with other NOE methods lat least 25'!& was in this method). Previous NOE experience Of used for qualificationl:
| |
| Company From None VISUAL ACUITY ANO COLOR PERCEPTION To The individual is capable of reading Jaeger Number! letters at 12 inches in at least one eye (using corrective lenses if specified below I, and can distinguish and differentiate contrast between colors used in this method. Corr. Date Req. 09/26/83 No 08/17(84 No Verified by J}tl 1 Heidi J:f ... 1,.H f.. jf) MOST RECENT EXAMINATION GRADES Scores Waight General:
| |
| * 23 * .3.3 0.3 Specific:
| |
| * 90.00 0.3 Practical:
| |
| **98.00 0.4 Composite:
| |
| 91.20 1.0 Date: *07/26/83
| |
| **OZ/27/84 Responsible Level Ill: E. H. Rues ch er,..-?-/,.</, 4rJ..r / v Date Corr. Req. Verified by CERTIFICATION HISTORY: THIS LEVEL Date Initial Certification:
| |
| 08/15/84 Recertification:
| |
| Recertification:
| |
| Recertification:
| |
| | |
| Recertification:
| |
| Recertification:
| |
| REMARKS SwRI Form OA*T 1*5 F-14 * * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION
| |
| -STATEMENT OF CERTIFICATION
| |
| ---,-----The Director of the Department of Engineering Services, Quality Assurance Systems and Engineering Division, certifies that David A. Stuhler is qualified aa Level I in Ultrasonic T91ting in 1ccordllnce with the requirements of SwRI Nuclear Quality Assurance Procedure 11*1, Revision 2, which incorporates the guidelines of SNT*TC*!A, 1975 E1:1ition.
| |
| Certification Umitetions:
| |
| * Certification valid onl! while e!!!Eloied bI SwRI Special Qualifications lif any!: None II 7 . . .... . 03/27/87 I f/ l fblv Ellpir1tion Date: :U1Aiit,/....
| |
| _.... t1 Signed: . I Date: uirector, uepartment of cngan* enn w:.erv1c81 I I IDUCATION, TRAINING ANO EXPERIENCE HISTORY I . EDUCATION:
| |
| NAME YEARS DEGREE TRAINING lthis method and levell: High School Alamo Heights High 3 GED Date Completed:
| |
| 01/31/84 Additional Hours: 84 Location:
| |
| SwRI Major Field of Study Date Employed by SwRI: 05/16/83 Previous NOE experience lif usa-.1 for qualificationl:
| |
| *-The individual ha* been credited with 3 months of experience in this axamination method on the date of certification.
| |
| Some of the axperience may have Company From To None been mccrued simultaneously with other NOE methods lat least 25% wes in this methodl" VISUAL ACUITY ANO COLOR PERCEPTION The individual is capable of reading Jaeger Number 1 letters at 12 inches in at least one eye I using corrective lenses if specified below), and can distinguish and differentiate contrast between colors used in this method. Corr. Corr. Date Req. Verified by Date Req. Verified by 09/26/83 No Heidi Gutierrez 1 h. -Q8(!.7 l84 No r.u+--4 I. P/J ct MOST RECENT EXAMINATION GRADES CERTIFICATION HISTORY: THIS LEVEL .Scores Weight Date General:
| |
| * 82.50 0.3 03/27/84 Initial Certification:
| |
| ** 96.62 0.3 Specific:
| |
| Recertification:
| |
| *** 88.50 0.4 Practical:
| |
| Recertification:
| |
| Composite:
| |
| 89.14 1.0 Recertificati-on:
| |
| Recertification:
| |
| Data: *5/30/83;
| |
| **6/30/83;
| |
| ***l/31/84 Recertification:
| |
| Responsible Level Ill: E. H. Rues ch er ?:.""21./Jl
| |
| __ / r REMARKS -* SwRI Form OA*11*S F-15 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION STATEMENT OF CERTIFICATION The Director of the C91>11mnent of Engineering Services, Quality Assurance Syst*ms and Engineering Division, certifies that Patrick C
| |
| * Turner is qualified as Level II in Visual Testing IVTJ, categories VT-2
| |
| * VT-3
| |
| * VT-4 * *n accordanc*with th* requirements of SwRI Nuclear Quality Assurance Procedure 11-2, Revision 2 * . Certification Umitations:
| |
| Certification valid only while employed by SwRI A ExpiratlonCate:
| |
| 07/18/86 //In *-r/ f .//J /;
| |
| Signed: /? fUA'I// ,r,j'/),/;/
| |
| Cate: _ _,,!f3J_, .....
| |
| u1rector, uapamnent or 1:ng1n.,.., 1rry :. .,, ..... --, * -EDU CATION, TRAINING ANO EXPERIENCE HISTORY EDUCATION:
| |
| NAME YEARS DEGREE High School J.. F. Kennedy H. S .. (Tx) 4 GRAD Additional San Antonio College 21 sem. hrs. NO Major Field of Study _S_c_i_en_c_e
| |
| _______ ----------Cato Employed by SwRI:
| |
| ____ 0_1_./_1_2_./_8_1
| |
| ___ _ Tho individual has been credited with _3 __ months of experience in this examination memod on the date of certification.
| |
| Some of the experience may have been acctUed simultaneously with other NOE methods lat least 25'!& was in this TRAINING (this method and levell: Cate Completed:
| |
| __ 0_7_/_0_7_/_8_3
| |
| ______ _ Hours: 12 Location:
| |
| _ ... s;;...w_R=I'---
| |
| Previous NOE experience lit used for qualification!:
| |
| Company None From To
| |
| * method).
| |
| ___ A_N_o_c_o_L_O_R_P_E_R_c_EP_T_1o
| |
| __ N ________________________________ The individual is capable of reading Jaeger Number 1 letters at 12 inches, and is capable of reading Snellen Number 30 letters at a distance of 20 feet, in at least one eye I using corrective lenses if specified belowl, and can distinguish and differentiate contrast betWeen colors used in this method. Cate 12/15/82 11/07/83 Hll08l8£.
| |
| Corr. Req. No No ----Verified by Heidi Gutierrez Heidi Gutierrez No r.!ni-.f ...... .,..,..,.
| |
| LriPa _ ........ .___ rl"" MOST RECENT EXAMINATION GRACES Scores Weight General: 2Q,QQ 0.33-1/3 Specific:
| |
| 92.00 0.33-1/3 Practical:
| |
| 70.70 0.33-1/3 Composite:
| |
| 84.23 LOO Cate: 07/07/83 Responsible Level 111: S tanlev M. AWalker .r SwRI Form OA-42-0 Cate Corr. Req. Verified by CERTIFICATION HISTORY: THIS LEVEL Cate Initial Certification:
| |
| 07/18/83 Recertification:
| |
| Recertification:
| |
| Recertification:
| |
| Recertification:
| |
| Recertification:
| |
| REMARKS F-16 *
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE NONDESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION STATEMENT OF CERTIFICATION The Director of the Depertment-of Engineering SeNices, Quality Assurance Systema and Engineering Division, certifies that Patrick C. Turner is qualifl9d as Level II in ____ U_l_t_r....;a;;..;s;..o"-n_i_*_c
| |
| _________
| |
| _
| |
| * Tesdng in accordance with the requirements of SwRI Nuclear Quality AAUrance Procedure 11*1, Reviaion 2, which incorporates the guidelines of SNT-TC*1A, 1975 Edition. Certification UmiUltlona:
| |
| __ ......;C;..;e;..;r;..;t;;.;i;;.;f;..;i;;..;c""a""t_i""o;..;n:;;..*_v;..;;a..,l..,i;;.;d;;.....;o:;.;:n=l""'y'--'w""h=i-1;;.;e;;.....;e_mp_._l;;.;o-..v
| |
| ...
| |
| ________ _ Speci81 Qualif"ic:atlona lif anyl: --=N""o""n=e=---,i'-*4
| |
| -------------------....,..------------
| |
| ,11 / Expiration Date: 10/08/85 fl///_,,-;,._ , 1 4 a,_ ,, / . * .,l / Signed: t / / 1/1/,/J( l, j ---t{ftf:,,/_,t,, Date:
| |
| .... 2-________ _ Llll'ltCtOr, uepartment OT t:ng1 ........ u *11 wJ! ., .. es -I EDVCATION, TRAINING ANO EXPERIENCE HISTORY EDUCATION:
| |
| NAME DEGREE TRAINING (thismethod and levell: High School J. F *. Kennedy H. S. (Tx) 4 GRAD Date Completed:
| |
| __ 0_7 .... /_2_3 ..... /_8_2 ______ _ Additional San Antonio College 21 sem. hrs. NO Hours: 64 Location:
| |
| ___ s""w...,R=I
| |
| __ _ Major F"ield of Study _S_c_i_e_n_c._e"--------
| |
| ____ ----Data Employed by SwRI: ___ O;l-f ___
| |
| ... 1 .... 1=2 .... 1 ... s .... 1 ___ _ Previous NOE experience (if used for quallficationl:
| |
| The individual hH been credited with 13
| |
| * months of experience in this examination method on the date of certification.
| |
| Some of the experience may have been accrued simultaneously with other NOE methoda lat least25% was in this method I. Company None VISUAL ACUITY ANO COLOR PERCEPTION From To The individual is capable of reading Jaeger Number 1 letters at 12 inches in at least one eye I using corrective lenses if specified below I, and can distinguish and differentiate contrast between colors used in this method. Corr. Date Req. Verified by 01/26/82 No Heidi Gutierrez J.J. c; 12/15/82 No Heidi Gutierrez UF 11/07/83 No Heidi MOST RECENT EXAMINA_TION GRADES
| |
| * Scores Weight General: 92.50 0.3 Specific:
| |
| 82.00 0.3 Practical:
| |
| 89.00 0.4 Composite:
| |
| 87.95 1.0 Date: 07 /23/82 Date Corr. Req. Verified by 10/08/84
| |
| _
| |
| ...... ....... CERTIFICATION HISTORY: THIS LEVEL Date Initial Cartification:
| |
| 10/08/82 Recertification:
| |
| Recertification:
| |
| Recertification:
| |
| Recertification:
| |
| ResponsibleLevellll:
| |
| Joel G.
| |
| Recertification:
| |
| REMARKS *
| |
| * SwAI Form QA-11-5 F-17
| |
| * APPENDIX G MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT CERTIFICATIONS
| |
| * *.,.' '"'-
| |
| * APPENDIX G r--MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT CERTIFICATIONS Table of Contents MATERIAL Date Page Glycerine, Lot No. TB-831123-1, Log /11881 13 Apr 84 G-1 Glycerine, Lot No. TB-830330-1, Log #1773 06 May 83 G-2 Pencils, Eagle Prismacolor, Black #935, Log /11882A 17 Oct 84 G-5 Pencils, Eagle Prismacolor, White #938, Log #1882A 17 Oct 84 G-6 cPenetrant, SKL-HF/S, Batch //82K019, Log /ll717B 14 Oct 82 G-7
| |
| * SKD-S, Batch /182H057, Log /11681C 20 Aug 82 G-8 Cleaner, SKC-S, Batch #83H075, Log #1829A 26 Aug 82 G-9 EQUIPMENT Brand Serial No. Date Page ':.., Amprobe Fas temp 097 02 Oct 84 G-11 Amprobe Fastemp 100. 02 Oct 84 G-13
| |
| * Sonic FTS MK I 01103E 01 Oct 84 G-15 Sonic FTS MK I OlllOE 28 Nov 84 G-17 Sonic FTS MK I 01118E 19 Nov 84 G-19 Sonic FTS MK I 04331E 01 Oct 84 G-21 Sonic FTS MK I 774101 27 Nov 84 G-23 Sonic FTS MK I 774208 19 Sep 84 G-25 Sonic FTS MK I 774226 . 28 Aug 84 G-27 Sonic FTS MK I 774714 18 Sep 84 G-29 TRANSDUCERS Brand Serial No. Date Page Aero tech Bl4232 14 Sep 84 G-31 Aero tech C03845 25 Jul 84 G-33 Aero tech Cl6449 19 Jul 84 G-35 Aero tech C23316 05 Oct 84 G-37 Aero tech H22985 16 Oct 84 G-39 Aero tech H22990 24 Sep 84 G-41 Aero tech JD4817 28 Aug 84 G-43 Aero tech KB2929 29 Nov 84 G-45 Aero tech K30078 09 Oct 84 G-47 SwRI 514 05 Oct 84 G-49 SwRI 637 05 Oct 84 G-51 SwRI 834 14 Sep 84 G-53 /. G-i APPENDIX G
| |
| * r-_MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT CERTIFICATIONS Table of Contents (Cont'd) TRANSDUCERS (Cont'd) Brand Serial No. Date Page SwRI .1088 14 Nov 84 G-SS SwRI 1S24 OS Oct 84 G-S7 SwRI 1783 18 Oct 84 G.,-S9 SwRI 1793 11 Oct 84 G-61 SwRI 1796 11 Oct 84 G-63 SwRI -1801 11 Oct 84 G-6S SwRI 1843 19 Nov 84 G-67 SwRI 1846 29 Oct 84 G-69 SwRI 19_67 14 Sep 84 G;,..71 SwRI 2172 16 Oct 84 G-73 SwRI 2211 22 Oct 84 G-7S SwRI 2213 01 Oct 84 G-77 $ SwRI 2214 19 Nov 84 G-79 SwRI 221S 19.Nov 84 G-81 SwRI 2S44 OS Oct 84 G-8_3
| |
| * SwRI 26S8 14' Nov 84 G-8S SwRI 267'3 12 Oct 84 G-87
| |
| * G-ii
| |
| *
| |
| * DATE: £j-/ 3 .,,.5"'f C. rOMER: >>k.1ee.u-4-a._ //)( DOW CHEMICAL U.S.A. MIDLAND, MICHIGAN 486'0 CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE GLYCERINE, USP, 99.5% CUSTOMER ORDER N0._-"-1--'""'--'-/_/_, ___ _ SHIPPED FROM ICITYI CARRIER DOW INVOICE NO.
| |
| __ LOT NO. 22'ijf:J 1-1 IDATI!: SHIPPl!DI This is to certify that th& above listed materials covered on above Dow lnvaice Number and suppliOd under the subject purchase mnt the ritquiremitnts of the following sp&cificctians:
| |
| U.S. Pharmacop1tia or more rigorous Dow Specification 38698 ill! ldantillc:nion Sp. Gr., 2S/25 1 C P-v IFrcm Sp. Gr. in Airl Water Color,APHA Residue On Ignition Olloride Infrared 1.2607 -1.2625 IDowl 99.S" Min. IDowl 0.59' Mox. IDowl 10Mox. IDowl .005" Mox. IDowl NoM Detected IDowl DOW CHEMICAL U.S.A. SwRI Sulfate Arsenic (ao Ao) He""Y metals, Cao Pb) Readily Carbonizable aub*t*c**
| |
| Chlorinat*d Compound* (as Cl) Acroloin, gtucou, and -ammonium compound*
| |
| FattY acida & eaten, i P.
| |
| P. B. J zo.t.. LOG 1881 AN OPERATING UNIT OF THE DOW CHEMICAL COMPANY G-1 20 ppm mo. 1.5 ppm max. .5 ppm maw. 0.0005" ma .. (Daw) Pa**** 0.2 max. (Daw)
| |
| May 11 1 1983 Southwest lesearcb Iastitute 6220 Culebra P. O. !oz 28510 Saa Aatoaio, Texas 78284 Attention:
| |
| Hs. Martha Leigh
| |
| | |
| ==Dear Martha:==
| |
| Fotemost*McKasaon Chemical Group McKnson C."lemical Campany
| |
| : :.:i:-**
| |
| San 1..: i..:
| |
| 512 JJ:' McKESSON ... ,, CHEMICAi.
| |
| As pu your request, pleaH find atached die Certificate of CompU.aace au ch* two (2) of Glycarina, lot aumiMr Tl!-830330-1, wbich you purchased frDlll iia nceatly oa :roar purcba-order aumber 06204. If we can be of any aasist.anc*, at aay cu.. please feel free to call. Your ba.sil:less is apprmcia tad. ?ours truly, Mdasson Chemical Co111p&11T FORJ!MOST-Mc:.:O:SSON raMICll Gactn' Petar P. llacuwc:yk Acu.cm.nc:
| |
| (1) G-2 * * *
| |
| * **
| |
| * CU! AER1 DOW CHEMIC.AL U.S.A. ' MIOU.HO, l&IC:HIGAH 4116.0 CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE
| |
| ('{\£,.
| |
| r:rJ Cl{g,1,J.L e,,\ 5 J N A N1;1Y1 COt.YC!RIHE, USP, CUSTOMER ORCER NO. 'f , Pf? c SHIPPED FRCM IC Y1 CARRIER p,-,, ... I OCW INVOICE NO. Thia i1 to certify !hat !he cOO.e listed matwial1 cav*ecl on aba ... Caw In-ice 111-0... w suppliecl umler !fte sub;*ct purchase ".. * -*' the r.quir_.,,,.
| |
| af me fallawi119 specificatians:
| |
| U.S. Phannacapeia w -rigaravs Oaw Siiecificatlon 38698 !ill !::!l!!!!! , ....... 1.n-w Sa. 25J2S*C 1.:JSJ7 * , .21125 (Cawi "-'"""" So. c;,. in Airl 111.S'llo Min. (c-l -0.5'5Mll* (Door! Caler, "'"4A 10Mu. !Caw! R-)19 On 191i1ian .00!5'5Mu.
| |
| !Cowl Cl-(Clowj OOW CHEMICAi.
| |
| U.s.A. ........
| |
| 1..0o8CRATORY SlJPERVISC'
| |
| ?u:::>
| |
| ,..... <** ..... , H-_,..la, (n Pb) R-., C:-1aal* .........
| |
| °'''---c:--** ,_ C:ll -...i.,..
| |
| c:..-....
| |
| ** Fentyeci9*
| |
| &. **twa, _-100. AH OPERATING UNIT Cl' TMe COW C:H!*oUC:.W.L C:CMPANT G-3 20,-.... 1.s,_ ..... 5..-*-* F''J1Se8 0.2 ..... CC.WI THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK *
| |
| * G-4
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOU-TH WEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE i-0ST OPPIC! O"AWI" %1510
| |
| * e220 CU LEDA A AOAD
| |
| * SAN ANTONIO, T'EXAS, USA 782M
| |
| * 15121U4-Stt1*T!LEC 79-7357 Mr. J.H. Wilson Quality Assurance Systems * & Engineering Southwest Research Institute 6220 Culebra Road San Antonio, TX 78284
| |
| | |
| ==Dear Siri October 17,==
| |
| 1984 The analysis that you requested on two marking pencils has been *completed.
| |
| The results are as follows: Eagle Eagle PTismacolor, White 1>938 Sulfur, 1. we.* AS'IM D-129 0.25 & 0.23 0.02 & 0.01 Chlorine, 1. wt. AS'IM D-808 0.15 & 0.13 0.13 & 0.10 If you have any questions concerning these test results, please contact me. SwRI P.
| |
| 3 ?oC.. P.
| |
| LOG ri i:Jf2 RWB/ygc Sincerely, Ralph W. Bowen, Manager Engines, Fuels and Lubricants Dept. of Petroleum Chemistry Research SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS ""''T"" 0'1111Cll l/llf lfOUSTQll, TIXAI, ANO W'ASNtlfQTOllll, Q e . G-5 SOU'I'-HWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE OlllllCE D"AWl1' 281510. 9220 CULlill .. A ,.OAO. SAN ANTONIO. TEXAS. USA 7921'4. C912J 8 .. *5111*TeLax 79-73157 Mr. J. a. Wilson Quality Assurance Systema & Engineering Southwest Research Institute 6220 Culebra Road San Antonio, IX 78284
| |
| | |
| ==Dear Sir:==
| |
| October 17, 1984 The analysis that you requested on CYo marking pencils has been completed.
| |
| The results are as follows: Eagle l'rismacolor, Black !>935 Eagle Prismacolor, Sulfur, t we. ASTM D-129 0.25 & 0.23 0.02 & 0.01 Chlorine, t we. ASTM D-808 0.15 & 0.13 0.13 & 0.10 If you have any questions concerning these test results, please contact me. SwRI P. o, .Jleos 3 P, B. 373 7"'-3 RWB/ygc Sincerely, Ralph W. Bowen, Manager Engines, Fuels and Lubricants Dept. ot Petroleum Chemistry Research G-6 ** * **
| |
| * *
| |
| * Oau: Oc:<:.cce: l9S2 PuJ"':.ltasa Order Ila. -*------Subjec:: Pen..-t=:mt , i)?e: SEL-:riF/S , Bate.It No. m9 We hereby that when tast..cad at the time of manufactun, the above matel"'ial:
| |
| : 1.
| |
| t.ie*requil"'!lllellts of and has testad for sulfur and halogens according to: (a) ASMS: Bo'flel"'
| |
| and Pnssun Vessel Code, Section V, Nondestr.:c:ti*:e Examination, July 1977 edition with Addenda thl"'Ough Wintar 1978, Paragl"apn T-oJO. (b) *A!WIE 6oi1er and Vessel Se<:t1on V, Suamer 1979
| |
| \.linter 1981 Addenda, Pangnph i-544. (c:) ASiM E-165-80, Paragraph 7.t. (d)
| |
| ZS0-1500-1 (Rev. 10 June 1979) Paragraphs and lZ.S.1.1.1.
| |
| * (e) rm.-Si'U-271E, (31 1973) and ACl-1 (24 Oct:ber 1980), P!nqraph S.3.1. (f) ROT Standard F3-0., May 1974 and October 1975 including Amendme.'!ts 1 (4-o-iS) and 2 {2w9-78), Article 6, Paragraph i-530
| |
| * Tiie following re..sults obi:ained:
| |
| Su1f'..lr:
| |
| 0.0090 : of raidue, Halogen: o.c:z53 : of residue Cie.!ner residue (see Note 3) lL\ q/100 g lL\ c;/100 :nl Z. Meets the requirements of MIL-I-25135C (Amendment 3 and Intarim AmenC!lent 4), and is appl"'Ove<I by the U.S. Afr
| |
| : 3. Coes not Ctlntain mercu17 as a basic:
| |
| and no merczr"/ bearing equipment was 1.1se<I in its manufactun.
| |
| CORPORATION R. W. Ga'CZlman
| |
| -
| |
| of . A. S. l!rit'tQn
| |
| -Supervisor, Q1.1al ity 1. OUP ,,,,_,. 1aaHf'\ a11 :iie !lac:-it all son,. =nu1rtef'S .a on :::. o1 111 . z.
| |
| W'C "9Ult:a sum ill lNC Sm9 _,,.. ,.,. "51l1cn (PP.'!). T'o
| |
| *-::era11c*
| |
| fl;iil"'l!I
| |
| =
| |
| ;;er :nl1ta11*
| |
| ="ti :1a I favr : I 1c:a = ale 'lllC* z. uvs :..cc-1 :oa-1. :m .* zn. n-.1 w J.SM v 111 .._,,.. :.uc ::uar1als
| |
| :e SllAJtc'!
| |
| :o 1 :recKUrw :::i ..,.oorwca ot'f *Ol&i'tl*.
| |
| :efarw uiaiys1s fof' sylful' &na ilaioi;e.
| |
| :::i ':.-:tSI
| |
| ':.'!4se ...s1aues
| |
| .,,i;n.,.
| |
| ::ia11 o.;as q/!00 =** snail 111alyzeo 1111.fur 1111t
| |
| \.......,.
| |
| snail :e
| |
| -'* ':"!lit 1aa.e = M!IUlts 1c -:::e :1:!!!1 o1 -fii=.in * .l4* UICI .. ,..11 :ar
| |
| :f 1ll'f .qcarnl. :ntema11cnai C.:rccraucn G-7 . , __ -;. :.
| |
| __ _
| |
| Purchas1 Order Ka. 2 9 Ju.I
| |
| | |
| ==Subject:==
| |
| _..;s.:.i=o_t.e_r:h
| |
| __ e_c:k_D_e_vei_=e..;._r
| |
| _______
| |
| * Type: 53:0-S , Ba tc:h No. SZ!057 We llereby C!!l"'t:ify that when tested-the tinie "If n:anufacture, the above materi.al:
| |
| : 1.
| |
| the requi n!!!?!!nts of and has besn testad for su 1 fur and ha 1 cgens to: {a) ASl4E Boiler and Pressure Vessel: Code, Section V, Nondestructive Examination, July 1977 edition with Addenda through Winter 1978, Paragraph T-oJO. (b) AS11E Boiler and Pressure Vessel CQde, Section V, Summer 1979 Wintar Paragraph T-044. (c:)
| |
| E-165-80, Pangnph 7.1. (d) 250-1:00-1 (Rev. 10 June 19i9) Paragraphs and 12.s.1.1.1. (e) MIL-ST0-271E, (31 Oc:tocer 1973) Paragraph 5.3. 1. and rriii.-lE (June 16, 1978) Paragraph 5.3. ROT Standard F3-0i', May 1974 and October.1975 including
| |
| {"2"-9-7st:
| |
| ... Amc:te--5,.-
| |
| T-630.
| |
| * ine following test results were obtained:
| |
| Sulfur: o.cc62 : of residue, Halogen: __ o.;..*._ooa_-_a
| |
| ___ : of residue Cleaner residue (see Mota J) __ NA ___ _.9/100 g ?:A q/100 ml 2. Meets the of MIL-I-2513SC (Amencili".ent J and Interim and is approved by the U.S. Air Force. J. Does not contain merozry as a basic elemen't, and no illen:-.Jr,/
| |
| bearing equfpment was use<! in its manufacture.
| |
| MAGiiAFtUX
| |
| : t. Cul" :a:cn "......,.
| |
| 1""" on t11* == ot 1il sciny =nu;nen .''!'I en lADel ot &II ol:llM' c:n-:a1n'!!n.
| |
| ?.
| |
| saK1f1cui=n r?.:U1" M!s11lts s-:atM in buc M!Wil"9 , * .-:: ,.,. :iilicn {l'!':1).
| |
| ia
| |
| *,111":2n:"
| |
| ;:i *:=..-..=
| |
| ::r :;!1ion* :a"* =e fear co :.-i* Mor.:. ..
| |
| zn. r1.:oi 111:: .U:'.!
| |
| 't 111
| |
| :..*.,:-:
| |
| :::a:1r-;a1s
| |
| =*
| |
| :a .a
| |
| ...
| |
| !'-:r ltld
| |
| .:...::::-:1n9
| |
| ::i .:n*sa :.-.ne n;<;n*,. :..,an .J * .:cs
| |
| ::I. s:i.11 :e
| |
| *:ir-s111:,.,..
| |
| *nd halacm.
| |
| :a
| |
| .. :. 'nle aeov-i!
| |
| g1vt!'S
| |
| :.::.?inH
| |
| *: :."le oT :::nuil:-:=re.
| |
| ;.;e &n4 ..s* ,,..Y &l:ar-cr:e
| |
| :if ill"/ "l:A!M&l.
| |
| Gao 1nremanona1
| |
| =ccrauon :-***---------: :':*."I I . ..)9i'-?.f3w
| |
| ! *"''* Af-f'f).1 I ** ****-*--I : '* 1 2 s a 1 c . 1 . **-**
| |
| :.. .. **-* *-*
| |
| r'or.!! 1 ::s -S/S2 G-8 * * *
| |
| * *
| |
| * S!'Qt.e.'leck Cleaner ,,,_er SKC-S S3H075
| |
| .. Tne: ______ ..,.. &ac=i No. lie
| |
| =ar.1f7 :ll&: -tlSUtd &: tlle t1me Of 1111111f&c::1"1 0 tlll &DOH llllltu"tll: l':elU :.'18 -IJ"l!lllllMS of Ind llaS t.111 :&sUd fv A1lfur lllC llaio9111S ac:::il"ll1nq z. (1 l AS!'!
| |
| and ?T'ftSOll"t Vessel ** aaa V
| |
| *it:i s-r 1980 t:l'l"aUCJft wtnQ!' usz A4Cana. ?1nva1111 aM Z4 u (Ill ASŽ E*l6!-ac.
| |
| P1nqn1111 7 .1. (1:) llAYS Z!O-lSC0-1 (lift. 10 Ji.e 15791 Pvavalllll 1%.!.1.1 11111 tz * .s.1.1.1. (ell lltt.*S'Tt-UIE, (l1 Oc'=DV' 19731 and .ta-l (%' Oc:=er lS!C), ?anv-1111 S.J.:. (el Mr ... rn:.uit. m-tt. .i-16. 1m. ""'"e11 s.:. (f) (SH), 1' 1581. 'an;nons !.I.!. 5.1.l Ulli s.:.& or 5.1 * .S 11111
| |
| : a.
| |
| la. (;) llrl' S:anc&re F'3 .. I. 1'ay 1f7A Ind Oc::ller' 197! lnclud1119
| |
| .-n=o11a l
| |
| &nit z :z.;.:1), Amel* '* ''"CJl'IGll r-63C. S..lfvr.
| |
| ___ .--:. : of ru1Glla. H&laqe: __ .-NA .. *,__ __ .. w:. : 111 l"n1cue . . Ila.ts wi .._.1r"l!!!llMS of mi.-t-m:i:c
| |
| .6-.-: 'I* !.. Ca111 ll01: c:ria1n -=t'7 u a Mite llllil no ba1r1119 ..s YHd 1n tu
| |
| * I ;7n . :. c. _,..i .... r_q"'""q._.l..__
| |
| ?
| |
| * E._...3 ... ;._o_e._ct
| |
| ... J..__ 182 9 A A. * .. Mm.II*
| |
| ar 1.1\1*11-:y
| |
| *si1.1nnr:1 A. s. ilr'1c=n
| |
| * S..111rrtsor, Ou.al 1, Our-
| |
| -111ae11"S on :118 :iar..=-of 111 s;n1 c:nu1n.,., Uld 1111 :.'le 11cel of 111 OUU' c:llQ1ftlf'S, ?.. l'llln s=ee1f1ca:1!1111
| |
| ,,_1,.. ta: l"ftlllts s:at:.al 1n ::iitf":an:
| |
| !:1111' s-1"!111111" a&r'"..S cet" :11'11111111 (PP.!). Ta c::n-.
| |
| f,;iirH "';lar""..S ger-:n1111cm*
| |
| :nine f:lll"
| |
| .::i t:ie 1"1911:..
| |
| : l.
| |
| Mtl.*il'n-D't.
| |
| IUIT ... '"':' UICS SllCt'!llll v all
| |
| ... :i:ac saur-tals
| |
| ::e SllQJK: = 1 -aaurt ,.,.o:rsu off vola:11* sal .. na :*f:"
| |
| f:r s11lfllr' 11111 l!alo111n
| |
| * .&c::"1"" = :."=H soec:1f1a:1cns.
| |
| only tr.as*
| |
| :.'WI 4'.CCS g/1CC 9 Slllll ::e 111alyua s11lflll" &llG naloqllft.
| |
| snail :e
| |
| '* 1"h1 IDOY*
| |
| ;1 .. es :.'le
| |
| :oain.a IC :.-:a :1ii=. of :ianufac:-::i.... ana ..se ,,.,. altar t:ie any IOltanal.
| |
| G-9 r
| |
| * *
| |
| * Calibration Record ITEM Sa:rtiaa 9 11 iclr' Te** e "U;.? SOURCE _D::ai..._y_.1
| |
| .... z ___ _ r-, .. ., MODEL -5X666 2<&i1 SIN __ 3.._9"-'o:..'l.;.....:.7""'3"---------
| |
| SWRI NO:
| |
| .........
| |
| 7,__ __ / PLUO-INS, ETC.
| |
| _____________________
| |
| _ Standard No. MFGRModel Taylor 18-89 STANDARDS Description SIN Ther .*. on.eter 63F3159 Taylar 77-131 Thermometer 64F2451 7-..,cJF ENVIRONMENT:
| |
| Temperature
| |
| / H?midity _ _.1 __ ""------Location Room F7, Bldg 68, SWBI PROCEDURE D *Essentially as outlined in MFG RS Service Manual ____ ,._.
| |
| ICJI-A4-1os-1 . SWBI Nnclear Projects Operating Procedure
| |
| !CIT
| |
| * Ca1e5 +,W CONCLUSION 0 Item within tolerance.
| |
| No adjustment was neci:ssary.
| |
| D Item ADJ/repaired to tolerance
| |
| -----------.-.;t------------. Ii,..;.,..,, Iii! Item of aboye pros;edure.
| |
| see dati{a sheet. Calibration was in. accord with requirements of MIL*STD-4S662, MIL*Q-98S8 and MIL-C-4S208. surements are traceable 10 the National Bureau of Standards*
| |
| Inspection and test data are on file and available for inspeetion.
| |
| SIGNED c;_z;-&-7 DATE I RECORDNUMBER:
| |
| ___
| |
| __ __ NEXT CALIBRATION DUE: __
| |
| __ G-11 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH SHEET
| |
| --DATA J
| |
| PROJECT _..,ca_,l..,i..,b.-ra..,t..,io.-n
| |
| ____ _ SUBJECT,-CALIBRArION QYHlK mw .. DATE __ _. .... 11.; ... ,.1.,, __ ;z._**_J_'I..._
| |
| ____ _ S/N 3 'lu7 7 3 :; ... ,._.,.a; SwRID fl 1 "7 i.:? 9y ___ .... G3 ... .... ----------A,4f J'i! fl (It: 1-1su FA<JI c"1 I'
| |
| ________ _ S/N J "O '77 3 PROBE# :; "/ 7 . . I __
| |
| only on high range at pointa Standard*
| |
| tiJ op Checked tow points indicated below:: *I I
| |
| ____________
| |
| _ Reading Indication
| |
| -:
| |
| Standard 75""".r . G-12 * * *
| |
| * *
| |
| * SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE
| |
| ,.OST a ..... w ... 29910 . 15220 CULEfJllA
| |
| .. OAO . SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS 782M 15121 aa.e .. 5111 Calibration Record AM /'/C.O 8 E p'* /;-.., t4 ITEM Daiteri:, Otiick !'e * .-.pji-p SOURCE
| |
| .... y_.t ... z ___ _ 7-,s.:,, "-5/ MODEL 5JE666 , a SIN __ 3_1f_O _ _._ ________ . SWRI NO. __ 1c_c.;_cJ
| |
| ___ ...,.....
| |
| PLUG-INS.ETC.
| |
| __
| |
| Standard No. MFGRModel Taylor 18-89 Tayler 77-131 STANDARDS Description SIN Cal. Due Cal. Rec. No. Ther .** on.eter 63F3159 Thermometer 64FZ451 ENVIRONMENT:
| |
| Temperature
| |
| ____ 7_7_*_P-____ Humidity Location; Room F7, Bldg 68, SWBI PROCEDURE 0 Essentially as outlined in MFG RS Service Manual
| |
| ;CJ!-A4-1os-1 CD SWBI Nnclear Projects Operating Procedure 3CH ;!:C tes o.-p CONCLUSION 0 Item within tolerance.
| |
| No adjustment was necessary.
| |
| 0 Item ADJ/repaired to tolerance li.,.ir..s
| |
| ;iJl1 llQ Item of aboye procedure.
| |
| see datji;Lsheet.
| |
| Calibration was in accord with requirements or MIL-STD-4S662, and MIL*C-4S208.
| |
| Mea* surcments are traceable to the National Bureau of Standards.
| |
| Inspection and test data arc on file and available for inspection.
| |
| SIGNED
| |
| ____ _ DATE _ _.../ ....
| |
| _______ _ RECORD NUMBER: ___
| |
| ...... 5=*--NEXTCAL!BRATION DUE: +/-'-.;. -'? S G-13 SOUTHWEST RESEARCH INSTITUTE
| |
| -DATA
| |
| 'C"' SHEET NO.-L-OF--l..-SHEETS PROJECT calibration SUBJECT CALIBR.4TION OF B-4t¥TOO I 5X666. QY16K TES? 0._,:.; DATE ___ /_,O_-_;.._-
| |
| _-._; _____ _ S /N * '3 'f..J "!' 5 ( SwRill (O<J 8 y __
| |
| =-_.:-' . MtPl.!*:J<" ,*r.;;.-;;_
| |
| ... ,,,-,//====
| |
| ======= ...
| |
| .. -...
| |
| * -=-"'-='*"*
| |
| -_.::J,(P _DaytOll, 5X66,_Q*11hk ump, _SwRI_D __ ,_0_<.) ______ _ S/N '15 /
| |
| __ 1;...u;...o:-.
| |
| -----------* _ *-* --*-__ -* --'-------------------.Checked only on high range-at points
| |
| ------------------------------
| |
| __ _z:
| |
| e -
| |
| ____________
| |
| Reading Indication
| |
| --------5 S/ .. -,:--. ---. ------i 1.0. ¥'F l..0 .. ,.. . ____ Checked tow *at points indicated below:. -
| |
| ------*-*-------
| |
| Reading
| |
| __________
| |
| _ Indication
| |
| -71//71--.
| |
| --------*-'----
| |
| ------------"'--
| |
| --------------
| |
| -------------
| |
| ---,,;,, ,;:,Af
| |
| .....
| |
| Baytoft
| |
| ;ell! ----*--* Standard
| |
| --------______ .. ______________________
| |
| _ --------------------------PC-=.--
| |
| --------G-14 *-, * * *
| |
| * SONIC FTS MARK I FLAW DETECTOR CALI BRAT ION I OPERATIONAL CHECKLIST FOR SONIC . FT s MK I No. ...........
| |
| r .... 1 .. o...,3o:..=E.._
| |
| ______ _
| |
| | |
| ==REFERENCE:==
| |
| .
| |
| PROCEDURE Xll-f I, ALIGNMENT OF SONIC FTS MARK :C FLAW DETECTOR I. CURRENT DRAIN Jf 3 (.,, MA. 2. AMPLITUDE LINEARITY I 0/c FSH 3. CALIBRATION OF GAIN COARSE ) 1H: 4. CALIBRATION OF GAIN DB ( FINE ) 5. HORIZONTAL LINEARITY I % FSW 6. CHECKS OF POTS AND SWITCHES:
| |
| * FREQUENCY MHZ rt RANGE 1( REJECT I)(( DELAY POT. rt FILTER __ 1.':..:.*J..__
| |
| _________
| |
| _ MATL. CAL. Qt REP. RATE _..,9.:..LfC..__
| |
| _______ _ DELAY SW. CK () /( VIDEO SW. -THRU TRANS -NORM .. DAMPING _
| |
| (.._( _________
| |
| _ DEC. 6 DB SWITCH _ ... 17........,.
| |
| ________ _ 14 DB SWITCH (JI[ 7. LOW BATTERY LIGHT ADJUSTMENT
| |
| : ( JUST ON AT 10; 75 VOLTS) lI CERTIFICATION
| |
| : ALIGNMENT PERFORMED BY i::e'f/T
| |
| / . ( SIGNATURE c ,:. +. 's' ;I ( DATE
| |
| * 5'#111
| |
| .... 2 G-15
| |
| ' ,, INSTRUMENT.
| |
| VERIFICATION RECORD INSTRUMENT SERIAL NO. DATE, s £.,.,.. ,' c J"\ \c;. I Oii o 3 E I of!+. fit AMPLITUDE LINEARITY CONTROL LINEARITY . LARGER ECHO SMALLER ECHO ACTUAL 80 % -6 DB H1J % NOMINAL ) )0 % FSH 80 O/o, -12 DB -14' O/o 100 % 50 % I -90 °/o 45 % tJ.{" 40 O/o + 6 DB .o/o 80 % 40 % >>t () 20 % <6"1 O/o + 12 DB 70 °/o. 35 % 3$" 60 % 50 % "30 -50 % 25 % :6 5" 40 % 20 % __2.0 DISTANCE LINEARITY 30 % 15 % ,; ACTUAL THICKNESS ULTRASONIC MEASURED 20 % 10 % 1£2 10 11 I 0'' ,,r 6DB B 14DB SWITCH LINEARITY 9" <J' 100% -6DB 5"0 O/o 8" '!{ 100 % -14DB O/o 7" '1 40% + 608 &:S O/o 6" l 10% t 14DB O/o 5" *-.... ;f 5" 1 2" ?.. I" I J2 y--:-? s / TEST BY :
| |
| .>" J-.<,4-../_.._-. i (SIGNATURE) . -SWRI FOllW PN-1-I * *
| |
| * *
| |
| * I SONIC FTS MARK :r FLAW DETECTOR CALI BRAT ION OPERATIONAL CHECKLIST FOR SONIC FT S MK ! No. _ ..... ¢::;....:/-'j'--/...:rP;....__£
| |
| _____ _
| |
| | |
| ==REFERENCE:==
| |
| | |
| PROCEDURE c I, ALIGNMENT FLAW DETECTOR OF SONIC FTS MARK I: I. CURRENT DRAIN MA. 2. AMPLITUDE LI NE AR ITY /% FSH ok 3. CALIBRATION OF GAIN COARSE ) 4. CALIBRATION OF GAIN DB ( FINE ) oA< 5. HORIZONTAL LINEARITY I O/o FSW 6. CHECKS OF POTS AND SWITCHES; FREQUENCY MHZ Ok REJECT /'IV RANGE C/"I DELAY POT, $. FILTER k/.l'f MATL. CAL. cA" REP. RATE DELAY. SW. d VIDEO SW. THRU TRANS-NORM.
| |
| DAMPING Of< DEC. 6 DB SWITCH ___
| |
| 14 DB SWITCH
| |
| : 7. LOW BATTERY LIGHT ADJUSTMENT
| |
| : ( JUST ON AT I 0 ; 75 VOL TS ) ____ df"' ___________________________
| |
| _ JI CERTIFICATION
| |
| : ALIGNMENT PERFORMED BY :_ ( ilGNA tuRE ) ;i_g /Vv.Yc..n*v3c/<..
| |
| i9c y,. ( DATE ) , . ., .. , ,.01111 ,. .. -11.-2 G-17 G') I ...... 00 '), INSTRUMENT VERIFICATION RECORD INSTRUMENT SERIAL NO. DATE 5oA//c ;-::/s 0 /// ¢.E ,,,1 ;_? :l!hvEN6tf/<., S'''/ AMPLITUDE LINEARITY CONTROL LINEARITY LARGER ECHO SMALLER ECHO ACTUAL t/t> % .BO% -6 DB NOMINAL 100 % 50 % ..5{) 0{11 FSH 90 % 45 % ""'O O/o I ,., 8d-D/o 80 % -12 DB 40 % + 6 DB BO% 40 %
| |
| 70 °/o 35 % 3S'7" {,I O/o 20 °/o + 12 DB 60 % 30 % ..
| |
| 50 % 25 % d-S"?d 40 % 20 % ;J.t.> "lt> DISTANCE LINEARITY 30 % 15 % /Sf'" ACTUAL THICKNESS ULTRASONIC' t.EASURED 20 % 10 °/o 608 6 1408 SWITCH LINEARITY 100% -608 ¥.,f % 100 % -1408 /,J' O/o 40% .. 608 J?.J-.-% 10% + 1408 so % TEST BY: **
| |
| * 10 11 9" a" .7" 6" 4"* 3" 2" 1" -/t}// 9/1' P'"° (.* 7" h // r"' ,_-;, 71.-..) :z11 ,/ '"
| |
| * SONIC FTS MARK I FLAW DETECTOR CALIBRATION . ' I ,--I OPERATIONAL CHECKLIST FOR SONIC FT S MK :t No. {) ///fJti
| |
| | |
| ==REFERENCE:==
| |
| | |
| PROCEDURE J'l I*-t='6-ID(, -0 , ALIGNMENT OF SONIC FTS MARK J: FLAW DETECTOR I. CURRENT DRAIN z. MA. 2. AMPLITUDE LINEARITY I % FSH 3. CALIBRATION OF GAIN ( COARSE ) !),(" 4. CALIBRATION OF GAIN DB ( FINE ) ()/( 5. HORIZONTAL LINEARITY I O/o FSW 6. CHECKS OF POTS AND SWITCHES:
| |
| * FREQUENCY MHZ at' REJECT rat I RANGE at. DELAY POT. 12?-FILTER MATL. CAL.
| |
| REP. RATE tJf DELAY SW. 0( VIDEO SW. IJfc. THRU TRANS-NORM. Pi:. DAMPING DEC. at; 6 OB SWITCH 14 DB SWITCH at 7. LOW BATTERY LIGHT ADJUSTMENT
| |
| : ( JUST ON AT 10 ;75 VOLTS) tJI: lI CERTIFICATION
| |
| : £i!-U ALIGNMENT PERFORMED BY : 1 (SiGN'1°URE ) ( DATE ) ** G-19 G) I N. 0 INSTRUMENT t' -. INSTRUMENT
| |
| *-
| |
| _50,,u1 C.. /11 K_* -T AMPLITUDE LINEARITY LARGER ECHO SMALLER ECHO ACTUAL NOMINAL 100 % 50 % ,.;-a 0/Q FSH 90 % 45 %
| |
| 80 % 40 % ..Y.o 70 % 35 % 60 % 30 % ?o 50 % 25 % Z: s: 40 % 20 % 2D. 30 % 15 % /'£ 20 % 10 % IQ
| |
| * 60B a 1408 SWITCH LINEARITY 100% -608 'Yf/ % 100 % -1408 l'i_ O/o 40% + 6DB OJ O/o 10% + 14D8 £ .. ] O/o TEST BY: SWiii fOllll PM-l-1 * * " VERI FICA TIO N RECORD SERIAL NO. DATE 0/1/8 G I 9 .AJtJ11'8f CONTROL LINEARITY 80 O/o -6 DB. % 80 O/o -12 'DB O/o I ' 40 % + 6 DB go O/o 20 O/o + 12 DB O/o DISTANCE LINEARITY ACTUAL THICKNESS ULTRASONIC MEASURED 10 11 /0 g" £ e" 7" 7 6" (, '5 II r 4" 3" .5 2" z 1" I **
| |
| * *
| |
| * I SONIC FTS MARK :I FLAW DETECTOR CALIBRATION r-. OPERATIONAL CHECKLIST FOR SONIC FT s MK I No.
| |
| _____ _
| |
| | |
| ==REFERENCE:==
| |
| | |
| *X/l*/tf .-/ot-IJ Cll( ALIGNMENT FLAW DETECTOR OF SONIC FTS MARK J: I. CURRENT DRAIN 2. AMPLITUDE LI NE AR ITY 3. CALIBRATION OF GAIN ( COARSE ) 4. CALIBRATION OF GAIN DB ( FINE ) 5. HORIZONTAL LINEARITY
| |
| : 6. . CHECKS OF POTS AND SWITCHES:
| |
| FREQUENCY MHZ '2/ RANGE FILTER oC REP. RATE VIDEO SW. @{ J . I ot I REJECT DELAY POT. MATL. CAL. DELAY SW * ,o(= THRU TRANS -NORM . t2/ DEC. /)t: MA. % FSH % FSW DAMPING Qf:_ 6 DB SWITCH 14DB SWITCH
| |
| : 7. LOW BATTERY LIGHT ADJUSTMENT
| |
| : ( JUST ON AT 10: 75 VOLTS) CERTIFICATION
| |
| : ALIGNMENT PERFORMED BY /&err?¥ ( DATE ) s**ftl l'ORll I'll -II-2 G-21.
| |
| Ci) I N N. ' ,, ii INSTRUMENT VERI FICA TIO N RECORD = l INSTRUMENT SERIAL NO. DATE ,.30AJIC f tJ /f AMPLITUDE LINEARITY CONTROL LINEARITY LARGER ECHO SMALLER ECHO ACTUAL 80 O/o -6 DB c?CZ NOMINAL 2J . ._$""t) 80 % -12 DB 100 % 50 °/o % FSH I 90 % 45 % ""5. 40 % + 6 DB (J/' 80 % 40 % £1J 20 % PtJ + 12 DB 70 °/o 35 % 60 % 30 % .-.co ..... 50 % 25 % z> 40 % 20 % 2iJ. DISTANCE LINEARITY 30 % 15 % ££ ACTUAL THICKNESS.
| |
| ULTRASONIC MEASURED 20 % 10 % ff.;. 10'1 /{) , 'l GOB 8 1408 SWITCH LINEARITY 9" 100% -6DB .,.Ytf O/o e" R 100 % -1408 $ % 7" 7 40% + SOB R/ O/o 6" /. 10% t 14DB _5"q % S"" 4" f 3" J 2" z , .. I ( GNATU ) SWiii FOllU Pll-1-I *
| |
| * O/o O/o O/o % -*
| |
| ** **** * ** I SONIC FTS MARK I FLAW DETECTOR CALI BRAT ION OPERATIONAL CHECKLIST FOR SONIC FT S MK t No.
| |
| | |
| ==REFERENCE:==
| |
| | |
| PROCEDURE xtI-rE-/ti6-tJ ALIGNMENT OF SONIC FLAW DETECTOR I. CURRENT DRAIN 2. 3. CALIBRATION OF GAIN ( COARSE ) 4. CALIBRATION OF. GAIN DB ( FINE ) 5. HORIZONTAL LINEARITY
| |
| : 6. CHECKS OF POTS" AND SWITCHES:
| |
| FREQUENCY MHZ O/(" RANGE C)/(' FILTER REP. RATE VIDEO SW. O,,f DAMPING. O,f REJECT DELAY POT. MATL. CAL. DELAY SW. /)A' ex'' iJ.r THRU TRANS -NORM . M' DEC. FTS MARK :C MA. or 1% FSW 6 DB SWITCH ______
| |
| __ _ 14 OB SWITCH _
| |
| _____ _ 7. LOW BATTERY LIGHT ADJUSTMENT
| |
| : ( JUST ON AT 10; 75 VOLTS) .JI CERTIFICATION
| |
| : ALIGNMENT PERFORMED BY ( DATE ) G-23
| |
| '" "' INSTRUMENT VERIFICATION RECORD INSTRUMENT SERIAL NO. DATE '4 . --7?
| |
| ...$?.IV/
| |
| C, V1 7 v--*" ,'-? J /tJ-?I/ c*1.J //..'/Jfi._ (I / , ' AMPLITUDE LINEARITY CONTROL LINEARITY LARGER ECHO SMALLER ECHO ACTUAL 80 O/o -6 DB. 3&' % NOMINAL : \)p .... -C> 80 O/o -12 DB O/o 100 % 50 % -..._1 % FSH I / 90 % 45 % $15-71 40 O/o + 6 DB . r(
| |
| * I ) 0/o 80 % 40 % xl.J. % 20 % + 12 DB 70 °/o 35 %
| |
| so* % 30 % .3-J?P 50 % 25 % .. _., 40 % 20 % ,,.fJO% DISTANCE LINEARITY
| |
| ' 30 % 15 %
| |
| ACTUAL THICKNE.SS ULTRASONIC MEASURED 20 %. IQ 0/o
| |
| ' 10 11 1011 608 a 1408 SWITCH LINEARITY g" ;u1 100% -608 f :f O/o a" 100 % -1408 ;,y O/o 7" :z. /,' 40% ... 608 '?3 O/o 6" 10.3. t 1408 O/o l5 II s-// 4" .;/'/ ...., .. , 3" :..") ,(, 2" ' ::;..P -11,** 1" TEST BY' (SIGNATUR{)
| |
| IWlll 'II Pll-l-1 * **
| |
| * *
| |
| * I SONIC FTS MARK I FLAW DETECTOR CALI BRAT ION OPER"-TIONAL CHECKLIST FOR SONIC FT S MK I No.
| |
| ... f ______ _ REFERENCE' PROCEDURE){Jl-,C:Ji*
| |
| lo,;-o-Cl, I , ALIGNMENT OF SONIC FTS MARK J: FLAW DETECTOR I. CURRENT DRAIN 2. . AMPLITUDE LI NE AR ITY 3. CALIBRATION OF GAIN ( COARSE ) 4. CALIBRATION OF GAIN DB ( FINE ) 5. HORIZONTAL LI NEAR IT Y 6. CHECKS OF POTS AND SWITCH.ES:
| |
| * FREQUENCY MHZ OK RANGE ___ o ........ x __________
| |
| _ FILTER
| |
| _________
| |
| _ REP. RATE
| |
| ________ VIDEO SW. __.0 ... 1...,.< ________ _ DAMPING _..,.0 ..... K.-.*----------
| |
| 6 DB SWITCH
| |
| : 7. LOW BATTERY LIGHT ADJUSTMENT
| |
| : ( JUST ON AT 10; 75 VOLTS) '*)/ 13 MA. I% FSH I% FSW REJECT ol< DELAY POT. nv MATL. CAL. al( DELAY SW. 01( THRU TRANS -NORM . dS DEC. ot 14 DB SWITCH Q/(
| |
| * lr CERTIFICATION
| |
| : ALIGNMENT PERFORMED BY S'#lll
| |
| .... -II-2 ( SIGTURE) 11 .s *nr. r>1-( DATE ) G-25
| |
| ---------------------------
| |
| -----? N 0\ -* INSTRUMENT INSTRUMENT 11\c.. t f-T..s AMPLITUDE LINEARITY LARGER ECHO SMALLER ECHO ACTUAL NOMINAL 100 % 50 % .)-0 0/Q FSH 90 % 45 % If .f 80 % 4Q 0/o >#(} 70 % 35 % 3.( 60 % 30 % 30 , 50 % 25 °/o ).s 40 % 20 % 30 % 15 % If 20 % 10 °/o I fl 6DB 8 1408 SWITCH LINEARITY 100% -608 O/o. 100 %' -1408 l q_ % 40% + 6DB O/o 10% + 14DB O/o TEST BY : "/t#J, ...--
| |
| E) IWlll fOllll Pll-1-I "* VERIFICATION RECORD ' SERIAL NO. DATE 17Jt VI f:?Jf CONTROL LINEARITY 80 O/o -6 DB 3q % '\ 80 O/o -12 DB ').. (J O/o I 40 O/o + 6 DB ¥ Lt O/o 20 % + 12 DB 8'1 % DISTANCE LINEARITY ACTUAL THICKNESS ULTRASONIC MEASURED 10 11 I ti" 9" '1 a" f( 7" 7 &" (, 5" 4" H 3" 1 2" 'l 1" I
| |
| *
| |
| * I SONIC FTS MARK I FLAW DETECTOR CALIBRATION OPERATIONAL CHECKLIST FOR SONIC FT S MK I No.
| |
| | |
| ==REFERENCE:==
| |
| | |
| *t[[-f{-jt:JC:,-:0 C/ , ALIGNMENT FLAW DETECTOR I. CURRENT DRAIN OF SONIC FTS MARK :C "'731 MA. 2. AMPLITUDE LI NE AR ITY _____________________
| |
| : 3. CALIBRATION OF GAIN ( COARSE ) 4. CALIBRATION OF GAIN DB . ( FINE ) 5. .HORIZONTAL LINEARITY
| |
| : 6. CHECKS OF PO TS AND SWITCHES:
| |
| FREQUENCY MHZ RANGE FILTER REP. RATE VIDEO SW. DAMPING 6 DB SWITCH 7. LOW BATTERY LIGHT ADJUSTMENT
| |
| : (JUST ON AT 10;75 VOLTS) REJECT DELAY POT. MATL, CAL. DELAY SW. Ok /3 FSW THRU TRANS -NORM
| |
| * _d"....;, _____ _ DEC. ol' 14 DB SWITCH _..;.....O;....
| |
| _____ _ lr CERTIFICATION
| |
| : ALIGNMENT PERFORMED BY '--( SIGNf TUREC'P ;:2 !l A'<./9 / cJ? fl > ( DATE ) S"lfRI I'll -II-2 G-27 (j) I *N 00 '*'* INSTRUMENT VERI FICA TIO N RECORD INSTRUMENT SERIAL NO. DATE )o IC° /=IS /11',lf'k?//
| |
| --r Jjf? /le.-'} ift/ # -I -'-_,,___ AMPLITUDE LINEARITY CONTROL LINEARITY LARGER ECHO SMALLER ECHO ACTUAL 80 .o/o -6 DB % NOMINAL
| |
| ' 100 % 50 % .so °Ill FSH 80 O/o -12 DB O/o I 90 % 45 %
| |
| 40 % + 6 DB J_J-O/o 80 % 40 % 7"t> fo 76 O/o 20 O/o + 12 DB 70 % 35 O/o 35% 60 % 30 % ?o!b 50 % 25 % .2s.-% 40 % 20 %
| |
| DISTANCE LINEARITY
| |
| -30 % '15 % IS?tJ ACTUAL THICKNESS ULTRASONIC MEASURED 20 % 10 °/o Ltl. 'YP ' 10 11 /IJ# 6D8 8 14 DB SWITCH LINEARITY g" tf # 100% -6D8 StJ O/o 8" g// 100 % -1408 Le..* % 7" 7u 40% + 608 ?g O/o 6" 10% + 14DB <'"3 O/o 5" .._<)// C> 4" 7'// 3" 3v 2" --.1) .:r , .. //I TEST e . --9Al BY : 2-* (SIGNATdRf r SWRI fl\ltM PM-I-I * * **
| |
| * .SONIC FTS MARK I' FLAW DETECTOR CALI BRAT ION I OPERATIONAL . CHECKLIST FOR SONIC FT S MK I No. 77/./7 !-¥ REFERENCE.
| |
| PROCEDURE XI/-fE-/Q(p-0 c..H-( ALIGNMENT OF SONIC FTS MARK J: FLAW DETECTOR I. CURRENT' DRAIN 437 MA. 2. AMPLITUDE
| |
| * L,INEARITY
| |
| / % FSH 3. CALIBRATION OF GAIN COARSE ) !'.:" -4. CALIBRATION OF GAIN OB ( FINE ) 5. HORIZONTAL LINEARITY I% FSW 6. CHECKS OF . POTS AND SWITCHES:
| |
| * FREQUENCY MHZ c?. K. RANGE Q
| |
| * K. REJECT {).K. DELAY POT, D.t FILTER fJ /( MATL. CAL. 0.f( REP. RATE Q .{( DELAY SW, a.r(. VIDEO SW. o. {( THRU TRANS -NORM * ("l. /( c OA,.,PING . t? * (( . 6 OB SWITCH _______ __.0""-=-'i.;:f(_;;,,,,,,,.-
| |
| DEC. /1_ /( 14 DB SWITCH ?. '(' 7. LOW BATTERY LIGHT ADJUSTMENT
| |
| : ( JUST ON AT 10 ;75 VOLTS) .II' CERTIFICATION
| |
| : ALIGNMENT PERFORMED BY ( DATE l .
| |
| * S*#ftl 1"11 2 G-29
| |
| *, ,, INSTRUMENT VERIFICATION RECORD INSTRUMENT SERIAL NO. .DATE 5orJ IC.. fY\ I<.. .J__ 77471'--/
| |
| /rf 5EPI 2't/* AMPLITUDE LINEARITY CONTROL LINEARITY LARGER ECHO SMALLER ECHO ACTUAL 80 O/o -6 DB '+-D % O/o 0 ') O/o 80 -12 DB ?-,..( I NOMINAL 100 % 50 % SD % FSH 90 % 45 O/o 45 "?, 40 O/o + 6 DB I --ZR O/o 20 % + 12 DB % 80 % 40 °/o '-4:-0 "!., 70 % 35 % 3S-60 % 30 % .30 1., 50 % 25. 0/o i DISTANCE LINEARITY ACTUAL THICKNESS ULTRASONIC MEASURED GJ 40 % 20 % 2.0 t, I -l w fD 0 30 % 15 % 20 % 10 % 10 cJl. (U 10 11 . I Jo'I 6DB 8 l4DB SWITCH LINEARITY g" '-} . 100% -6DB LLC1 O/o a" !J ,, 100 % -14DB /fl O/o 7" 7'' 40% + 6DB O/o 6" c, It 10% t 14DB IC) 2... O/o 5" s_,,, 4" J-/ 3" _;" 2" 2" , .. I,. * *
| |
| *
| |
| * FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND R. F. WAVEFORM ANALYSIS DATE OPE RA TOR '5e.PT S. nt'c.Ao (so SEARCH UNIT MANUFACTURE SERIAL NO. CASE STYLE TEST ANGLE ()° FREQUENCY ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER ANALYZER 'SETTINGS ATTENUATION GATE WIDTH GAIN DAMPING 555 MODE EXT. GATE DELAY 5lS REP. RATE 115 EXT. SPECTRUM ANALYZER -R. F. SECTION 30 SCAN WIDTH s.o INPUT ATTENUATION CENTER FREQUENCY IUND WIDTH 30 IC HZ TUNING STABILIZER RANGE SPECTRUM ANALYZER -I . F . SECTION LOG REF. LEVEL 2.-M \JI DIV DISPLAY AD.IUST VIDEO FILTER OFF TRIGGElt SCAN TIME*/ DIV. 2 MILi SEC TRIM PULSER TRIGGER MHZ OFF 0 -II 0 AUTOMATIC 026 DOWN DOWN TARGET REFLECTOR SWRI SPEC PHOTOGRAPH DAT A MINIMUM MAXIMUM 0 3 / 32 IN. I/ 3 T HOLE IN PT 300 BLOCK J.7 I A)S USEC I CM D 3 /Ill IN., 3/4 T HOLE IN MEASURED FREQUENCY 2.( VOLTS / Clll 50 NV E. E. T. BLOCK REVIEWED AND ACCEPTED BA LL BL OCX S.D.H. 0 OTHER SIGNATURE SWllll 1'011111 lllD -Z -I C£111TlflCATIOll Ill AOCOllDAllCI WITH XII -llD *IOI G-31 I Ci') I w N WD 100 90 80 s I G 70 N A L 60 A M p liO L I T u 40 D E 30 20 10 0 Swlll FOAM AD-4*2 * '* -* .. SEARCH UNIT BEAM PROFILE !DISTANCE VS AMPLITUDE RANGE ill SEARCH UNIT TEST EQUIPMENT TEST BLOCIC REVIEWED & ACCEPTED BRAND SERIAL NO. 'R / tf.::J :f :J -
| |
| STAINLESS STEEL WITH CASE STYLE '1); IA t\"'I" '-1 A. o* TYPE / ANGLE 1111 INc;H DIAMETER
| |
| *CRYSTAL SIZE FREO. SIDE DRILLED HOLE 4l/t2A;y' GAIN dB lol SERIAL HO. Dl rEsTEDBY:
| |
| s OATE . nidiefson Se.PT DATE * '\ l 1 \ .'\ '-.. ..._ ..... " ' .. ' -*. -.... 114 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1*1/2 1-3/4 2 HOLE DEPTH IN STEEL * **
| |
| * *-* FREQUENCY SPECTRUM ANO R. F. WAVEFORM ANALYSIS OP! RA TOR .S . N *, cJ.,.o JS OA..I SEARCH UNIT MANUFACTURE CASE STYL.E Aero+ecb Du"I CRYSTAL. SIZE SERIAL. NO. TEST ANGLE l'REQUENCY
| |
| '2.ZS ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER ANALYZER SETTINGS ATT!NU1' TION __ .3.._ ______ _ 555 DAMPIN8 MODE OAT! WIDTH _(.a=-4:...._'].__
| |
| ____ _ +hrU. GATE DELAY R!P. RATE 115 SPECTRUM ANALYZER -R. F. SECTION INPUT ATTENUATION 30 SCAN WIDTH CENTER FREQUENCY 5.0 GAIN TRIM EXT. PUL.SER EXT. TRIGGER MHZ OFF 026 DOWN DOWN !AND WIDTH 30 IC HZ TUNING STABILIZER RANGE 0 -II SPECTRUM ANALYZER -I . F . SECTION L.OG REF. L.EVEL. DIV DISPLAY ADJUS"f 0 VIDEO FIL.TER OFF TRIGGER' AUTOMATIC SCAN TIM! /DIV. z MIL.I SEC TARGET REFLECTOR SWRI SPEC PHOTOGRAPH DAT A MINIMUM 1. '2r MAXIMUM 2.1 0 . 3 / 32 IN. I/ 3 T HOL.E IN PT 300 BLOCK MHZ/DIV IMS USEC I CM 0 3/19 IN., 3/4 T HOL.E IN MEASURED FREQUENCY 2.25 VOL. TS / CM 50 WV E. £. I. BLOCK REVIEWED AND ACCEPTED ri PLASTIC BA LL BL OCX S.Q.H. D OTHER SIGNATURE SWiii ,OllM llD -a -S Cl!:llTlflCATIOll 1'11.,0llMID Ill ACOOllDAllCI WITH XII -llD -IDI G-33 SEARCH UNIT BEAM PROFILE (DISTANCE VS AMPLITUDE
| |
| -RANGE Bl SEARCH UNIT TEST EQUIPMENT TEST BLOCK REVIEWED & ACCEPTED -BRAND Aet'o-J.ech SERIAL NO. Co?..B"-5
| |
| ..:S'on"1c.
| |
| STAINLESS STEEL WITH Rd TYPE CASE STYLE ANGLE 1/8 INCH DIAMETER mar-k:r . 2.5o" Duell z.is -CRYSTAL SIZE FREQ. MODEL SIDE DRILLED HOLE GAIN dB Dllt>9E /SIGNATURE TESTED BY: DA;3 Tuh* SERIAL NO. . 7 ZS-L iY 5. Nic..ho\.sor-1
| |
| ' DlTE . 100 *-I 90 00 ..... s ' I ' G 70 N ' A L 60 ' A l M ' p 60 .. .... L I .... T u 40 D , E " 30 "' ' "' 20 -.. 10 0 1/4 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-3/4 2 HOLE DEPTH IN STEEL &wRI FORM RD-4-2 * * **
| |
| * *-* FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND R. F. WAVEFORM ANALYSIS DATE OPE RA TOR S. Nichol.son SEARCH UNIT MANUFACTURE SERIAL NO. CASE STYLE TEST ANGLE . 2so** Dul'\ I CRYSTAL SIZE *-...;..;;=_x..._,;:::;...;;;.;....,.,;:.;;.:..----------
| |
| FltEQUENCY ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER ANALYZER SETTINGS ATTENUATION
| |
| __ 5 _______ _ UT! WIDTH t,(o'f: #lt-u GAIN TRIM DAMPING 555 GATE DELAY s.o MODE REP. RATE 115 SPECTRUM ANALYZER -R. F. SECTION SCAN WIDTH EXT. PULSER EXT. TRIGGER MHZ OFF 026 DOWN DOWN INPUT ATTENUATION CENTER FREQUENCY llAND WIDTH 30 KHZ TUNING STABILIZElt RANGE 0 -II LOG REF. LEVEL 2. VIDEO FILTER __ O...,F_,F
| |
| ___ _ SCAN TIME /DIV. ----=-2 __ _ TARGET REFLECTOR 0 3 / 32 IN. I/ 3 T HOLE IN PT 300 BLOCK 0 3 / 16 IN., 3 /4 T HOLE IN E. E. T. BLOCK D PLASTIC BA LI. llL OCK S.D.H. [ii oTHER I" .sed,'oN oAJ P. I. .300 block. SPECTRUM ANALYZER -I . F . SECTION MY/ DIV DISPLAY AD.IUST TRIGGER'" llllLI SEC SWRI SPEC MINIMUM '* 8 MAXIMUM 2.'1 MEASURED FREQUENCY
| |
| | |
| ===2.1 REVIEWED===
| |
| AND SIGNATURE llWIU '01111 ltO -I -ll CUT.,ICATIOll 1'111,0111110 111 ACCOllDAllCI WITH XII -lt0
| |
| * 101 G-35 0 AUTOMATIC PHOTOGRAPH DAT A Ill HZ.,:' DIV USEC I CM IAJS VOLTS I CM ACCEPTED z/;1frfl/
| |
| .. ' ...
| |
| * SEARCH UNIT BEAM PROFILE 8D !DISTANCE VS AMPLITUDE
| |
| -RANGE Bl SEARCH UNIT TEST EQUIPMENT TEST BLOCK REVIEWED & ACCEPTED BRAND SERIAL NO. C.ilo'4-""4 .Sonic STAINLESS STEEL WITH Rd. oo TYPE CASE STYLE ANGLE I/Ii INCH DIAMETER .250 .. Dual mar\<. I *CRYSTAL SIZE FREQ. MODEL SIDE DRILLED HOLE ;;GN,RE GAIN dB ']'J QalO'iE TESTED BY: DATE SERIAL NO. 7
| |
| : 5.
| |
| 11 r ATE . i 100 90 BO s ' I G 70 ' N 1 A ' L 60 ' A \ ' M 1 p 60 L I ' T ' u 40 D ' E 30 '" --20 ..... 10 0 1/4 1/2 3/4 1 1*1/4 1-1/2 1-3/4 .2 HOLE DEPTH IN STEEL SwRI FORM RD-4*2 * * ., I
| |
| * *
| |
| * FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND R.F. WAVEFORM ANALYSIS DATE 4 Oc:-T. '('-/ OPERATOR S . ii ,*ch_c /Son SEARCH UNIT MANUFACTURER
| |
| _--....,A..;:e:.
| |
| ..... @..o=-_li.._.e:-...-c..
| |
| ....
| |
| SERIAL NO.
| |
| (,,:::.=--------
| |
| CASE STYLE
| |
| * TEST ANGLE _________
| |
| _ CRYSTAL SIZE 1 25Q 11 d_LL.o..R FREQUENCY ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER ANAL VZER SETTINGS ATTENUATION
| |
| __ ....;;:Q'-----
| |
| GATEWIDTH GAIN TRIM __ 026 _____ _ DAMPING 555 MODE EXT. PULSER __;;;D....;.O..;..;W..;..;N_.
| |
| ----GATE DELAY 3JSL.f-REP. RATE 115 EXT. TRIGGER DOWN SPECTRUM ANAL VZER R.F. SECTION INPUT ATTENUATION
| |
| __ c(....,.-O
| |
| _______ SCAN WIDTH ____ 1 M_H_z ______ _ CENTER FREQUENCY
| |
| _ ____;s:ooc...
| |
| 1=0;;.__ ______ TUNING STABILIZER
| |
| __ o_F_F _______ _ BAND WIDTH 30 KHz RANGE 0-11 SPECTRUM ANALVZER -l.F. SECTION LOG REF. LEVEL -----MV/DIV DISPLAY ADJUST ___ o ________ _ VIDEO FILTER ___ OF_F __ TRIGGER _____ A_U_T_O_M_A_n_c
| |
| ____ _ SCAN TIME/DIV.
| |
| __ 2 ___ MIU SEC . TARGET REFLECTOR 0 3/32 INCH, 1 /3 T HOLE IN PT 300 BLOCK 0 3/16 INCH, 3/4T HOLE IN E.E.I. BLOCK 0 PLASTIC BALL BLOCK S.D.H. __/ ,., . !Zl OTHER 5e<<Jj Q n on 3oc:> .b I oc...k.. SwRISPEC MINIMUM _ ____,_\'--.
| |
| MAXIMUM _ _.;)-.....:..-. MEASURED FREQUENCY
| |
| -=;( ....... .._I _ PHOTOGRAPH DATA MHz/DIV __ *.._I ____ _ USEC/CM _ _,_/___;,,,;:,;;;;..,S.=....---
| |
| VOLTS/CM __ 50_M_V ___ _ REVIEWED AND ACCEPTED SIGNATURE SwRI FORM RD-2-4 CERTIFICATION PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH Xll-RD*101 G-37 i I i
| |
| <;1 I w 00 ID 100 90 80 s I G 70 N A L 60 A M p 50 L I T u 40 0 E 30 20 10 0 SwRI FORM RD*4*2
| |
| * SEARCH UNIT BEAM PROFILE IDISTANCE VS AMPLITUDE
| |
| -RANGE Bl SEARCH UNIT TEST EQUIPMENT TEST BLOCK .. REVIEWED & ACCEPTED BRAND SERIAL NO. *c.
| |
| l' 6on[c_ STAINLESS STEEL WITH ecL# oo TYPE CASE STYLE ANGLE -1111 INCH DIAMETER ,'2 II du.a...J MAil.i'-.I.. *CRYSTAL SIZE FREQ. MODEL SIDE DRILLED HOLE GAIN dB If> 4' SERIAL NO. ouo1 e TESTEDllY: DATE . '111' bo n ,
| |
| '-I OC..T. r"" ' ' ,, " \.. ... ' ... '-. ' \. ' ' -----....._ 1/4 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-3/4 2 HOLE DEPTH IN STEEL *
| |
| * *.. .
| |
| * FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND R.F. WAVEFORM ANALYSIS DATE OPERATOR SEARCH UNIT MANUFACTURER
| |
| _
| |
| ____ SERIAL NO. _.-Jo.OH.__2.=-='2."-9
| |
| ..... 8........,.5---.
| |
| _____ _ CASE STYLE 'D ,"A rrt 0 r.J 0 TEST ANGLE ----""'"-0 ________ _ CRYSTAL SIZE
| |
| * 2 5 0 " FREQUENCY
| |
| .::J * .;>.6 ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER ANAL VZER SETTINGS ATTENUATION DAMPING GATE DELAY J 3 GATEWIDTH fe"f'f GAIN TRIM __ 0_26 _____ _ 555 MODE '"'f')O.e,m EXT. PULSER ___.;.D..;..OW_N
| |
| ____ _ 5/ 1 REP. RATE 115 EXT. TRIGGER DOWN SPECTRUM ANAL VZER -R.F. SECTION INPUT ATTENUATION
| |
| ______ SCAN WIDTH ____ 1 M_H_z ______ _ CENTER FREQUENCY
| |
| __ .5,,..:...:*..;..o
| |
| ______ ..... , TUNING STABILIZER
| |
| __ o_F_F _______ _ BAND WIDTH 30 ll::Hz RANGE 0-11 SPECTRUM ANAL VZER -l.F. SECTION LOG REF. LEVEL __ ...;..__ __ MV/DIV DISPLAY ADJUST ___ O --------VIDEO FILTER ___ OF_F __ TRIGGER ______ AU_T_O_M_A_Tl_C
| |
| ____ _ SCAN TIME/DIV.
| |
| __ 2 ___ MILi SEC D 0 TARGET REFLECTOR 3/32 INCH, 1 /3 T HOLE IN PT 300 BLOCK 3/16 INCH, 3/4T HOLE IN E.E.I. BLOCK GT PLASTIC BALL BLOCK S.D.H. 0 OTHER -------SwRISPEC PHOTOGRAPH DATA MINIMUM --*--=-/._8
| |
| ___ _ MHz/DIV __ .._) ____ _ MAXIMUM _ _.c2=-::...
| |
| 7_,_ __ _ USEC/CM j ""S MEASURED FREQUENCY VOLTS/CM __ so_M_v ___ _ REVIEWED AND ACCEPTED SIGNATURE t?'.44c. J 4.L, SwRI FORM RD-2-4 CERTIFICATION PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH Xll-R0-101 G-39
| |
| \ SEARCH UNIT BEAM PROFILE . *-* ID !DISTANCE VS AMPLITUDE
| |
| -RANGE Bl SEARCH UNIT TEST EQUIPMENT TEST BLOCK REVIEWED & ACCEPTED BRAND AGl{oTeCf SERIAL NO. IJ.Z. 2'-8.5 Sonic--STAINLESS STEEL WITH
| |
| 'DjAmoAJb Qt:) TYPE CASE STYU: ANGLE 1/B INCH DIAMETER I Z50" J.:15 MODEL mlf lff! J:; I I CRYSTAL SIZE ,;oEQ. -SIDE DRILLED HOLE SIGNATURE GAIN dB /t:J /IJ, I "ti TESTED* BS DATE SERIAL NO. 0 l f 0 " C N1'e-ho lso;:, J I . lc:l. CJc.T. B'f 'fATE 100 90 90
| |
| * s \ 1 I G 70
| |
| * N A ' L 60 l A l M p 60 \. L ' I T .. u 40 -D .. .... E I'.. 30 ..... -.... "" 20 .. 10 0 1/4 1/2 3/4 1 H/4 M/2 1*3/4 2 HOLE DEPTH IN STEEL Swtll FORM RD*4*2 *
| |
| * L___ ____ ----
| |
| * ** __ * ..
| |
| * FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND R.F. WAVEFORM ANALYSIS DATE l '$ .ep T. <6 y OPERATOR s . Yl ,. c.J...a {:s,o n SEARCH UNIT MANUFACTURER A*. f!.() TC-Cd! SERIALNO.
| |
| _
| |
| _____ _ TESTANGLE
| |
| __
| |
| FREQUENCY (X', cZ,5 CASE STYLE 'D I d mo,.;) 1> CRYSTALSIZE ,Z-Qo ,. ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER ANAL VZER SETTINGS ATTENUATION 12-GATEWIDTH (eLf3 GAIN TRIM __ 026 _____ _ DAMPING 555 MODE -=() D /?rn EXT. PULSER _D_OW_N_.
| |
| ----GATE DELAY 5 '2,..0 REP. RATE 115 EXT. TRIGGER DOWN SPECTRUM ANAL VZER -R.F. SECTION INPUT ATTENUATION 3CJ SCANWIDTH
| |
| ____ 1 M_H_z ______ _ CENTER FREQUENCY Q, 0 TUNING STABILIZER
| |
| __ O_F_F _______ _ BANDWIDTH 30KHz RANGE 0-11 SPECTRUM ANAL VZER l.F. SECTION LOG REF. LEVEL __ .... c?2-___ MV/DIV DISPLAY ADJUST ___ o ________ _ VIDEO FILTER ___ OF_F __ TRIGGER _____ A_U_T_O_M_A_Tl_C
| |
| ____ _ SCAN TIME/DIV.
| |
| 2 MILISEC 0 0 *TARGET REFLECTOR 3/32 INCH, 1/3 THOLE IN PT 300 BLOCK 3/16 INCH, 3/4T HOLE IN E.E.I. BLOCK PLASTIC BALL BLOCK S.D.H. 0 OTHER -------SwRISPEC MINIMUM _ __.l.._--=8
| |
| ___ _ MAXIMUM _ _.;J__._, _.] ___ _ MEASURED FREQUENCY PHOTOGRAPH DATA USEC/CM __ /
| |
| VOLTS/CM __ so_M_v ___ _ REVIEWED AND ACCEPTED SIGNATURE DATE SwRI FORM RD-2-4 CERTIFICATION PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH Xll-RD-101 G-41
| |
| <;) I N h 100 90 80 s I G 70 N A L 60 A M p 50 L I T u 40 D E 30 20 iO 0 SwRI FORM Rp*4*2
| |
| * SEARCH UNIT BEAM PROFILE IDISTANCE VS AMPLITUDE
| |
| -RANGE Bl SEARCH UNIT TEST EQUIPMENT TEST BLOCK REVIEWED & ACCEPTED BRAND A e /2.D-r 6,. CH SERIAL NO. t:J.2zqqo 6Dn1'c.., STAINLESS STEEL WITH :D1A OW)ll> 0 () TYPE LJ.AL-CASE STYLE ANGLE I/II INCH DIAMETER .zt=,n**
| |
| * CRYSTAi, SIZE FREQ. SIDE DRILLED HOLE GAIN dB fo:J,.. DllQ<J..**
| |
| TESTED BY: DATE SERIAL NO. 5. c\,o\so1'l .ll DATE I ' '\ ' , I' \ ' II. -.... "" .... _ .. ... ""' -----.*. 1 *. ,.1 __ 1/4 1/2 3/4 t 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-3/4 .2 HOLE DEPTH IN STEEL *
| |
| * *-*-**
| |
| * FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND R. F. WAVEFORM ANALYSIS OPERATOR 23 S. Ni <!ho .s n SEARCH UNIT MANUFACTURE Rero+e.c.h SERIAL NO. CASE STYLE TEST ANGLE . 2.Qo'' DL4Gt.1 CRYSTAL SIZE ---------------------
| |
| FREQUENCY
| |
| : 2. 'Z,5 ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER ANALYZER SETTINGS ATTENUATION
| |
| __ 0..._ ______ _ GATE WIDTH 5.2.. GAIN TltlM 026 DAMPING 555 MODE +hr I.(' EXT. PULSER DOWN GATE DELAY REP. RATE 115 EXT. TRIGQER DOWN SPECTRUM ANALYZER -R. F. SECTION INPUT ATTENUATION SCAN WIDTH MHZ CENTER FREQUENCY s.o OFF llAND WIDTH 30 KHZ TUNING STABILIZER RANGE 0 -11 SPECTRUM ANALYZER -I . F . SECTION LOG REF. LEVEL M V /DIV DISPLAY ADJUST 0 VIDEO FILTER OFF TRIGGEl't AUTOMATIC SCAN TIME /DIV. 2 MILi SEC TARGET REFLECTOR SWRI SPEC PHOTOGRAPH DAT A D 3 / 32 IN. I/ 3 T HOLE IN PT 300 BLOCK MINIMUM I. MHZ/DIV MAXIMUM 2.'1 USEC I CM IAJs D 3 /IS lN., 3/4 T HOLE IN MEASURED FREQUENCY
| |
| ::2. '3 VOLTS / CM !50 NV E. E. l. llLOCK REVIEWED ANO ACCEPTED 0 PLASTIC BALL BLOCK S.O.H. ri OTHER l" sec.4' OI"\ on P. T. bloc.k Z?C:(tu-rf"''( SIGNATURE jfATE SWiii FOllll 110 -a -I Cl:llTIFICATIOll l'!ltFOlllllD Ill AOCOltDAllCI:
| |
| WITH XII -ltD
| |
| * 101 G-43
| |
| *-,;I' .. SEARCH UNIT BEAM PROFILE ID !DISTANCE VS AMPLITUDE
| |
| -RANGE Bl SEARCH UNIT TEST EQUIPMENT TEST BLOCK REVIEWED & ACCEPTED BRAND SERIAL NO. :ro'fa11 Sonic.. STAINLESS STEEL WITH Rd. oo TYPE .
| |
| CASE STYLE ANGLE l/B INCH DIAMETER [Y)Qrk:C . 2.5o" Dual
| |
| -CRYSTAL SIZE . I FRED. MODEL SIDE DRILLED HOLE dB q SIGNATURE GAIN TESTED BY: DATE SERIAL NO. Cl' I 0 q e: 5. cho I 2.3 Aue; sif um , 100 I' 90 80 s ' I '\. G 70 "' N \. A '\. L 60 ,, A .., M .. p 60 ... L I ' T ' u 40 D '-'\.. .E .... 30 ' ...... ...... -.. 20 -_, 10 0 1/4 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-3/4 2 HOLE DEPTH IN STEEL SwRI FORM RD-4*2 * *
| |
| * *-** *
| |
| * MANUFACTURER CASE STYLE CRYSTAL SIZE ATTENUATION DAMPING GATE DELAY FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND R.F. WAVEFORM ANALYSIS OPERATOR rJ . _ 1 _ 1 -V
| |
| * I c..it._O .SO ...J DATE SEARCH UNIT f-Ec.A-. SERIAL NO. __
| |
| _____ _ u . TEST ANGLE ___ 0=._0 ________ _ I Z.$0'' dy.AJ FREQUENCY 0(.2? ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER ANAL VZER SETTINGS 0 GATEWIDTH
| |
| :#9 I GAIN TRIM _...;0...;26'-------
| |
| 555 MODE tb r i.r.... EXT. PULSER
| |
| ____ _ 3'1" REP. RATE 11S EXT. TRIGGER DOWN SPECTRUM ANAL VZER R.F. SECTION INPUT ATTENUATION
| |
| __ 30=---------
| |
| SCAN WIDTH ____ 1_M_H_z ______ _ CENTER FREQUENCY
| |
| ---=5.o TUNING STABILIZER
| |
| __ o_F_F _______ _ BAND WIDTH 30 KHz RANGE 0-11 SPECTRUM ANAL VZER -l.F. SECTION LOG REF. LEVEL MV/DIV DISPLAY ADJUST ___ O --------VIDEO FILTER OFF TRIGGER ______ A_UT_O_M_A_T_IC
| |
| ____ _ SCAN TIME/DIV.
| |
| __ 2 MILISEC 0 TARGET R-EFLECTOR 3/32 INCH, 1/3 THOLE IN PT 300 BLOCK 0 3/16 INCH, 3/4T HOLE IN E.E.I. 0 BLOCK SwRI SPEC PHOTOGRAPH DATA MINIMUM __ I_. _i ___ _ MHz/DIV _ ___.:.( _____ _ MAXIMUM __ :;(_.'1 ___ _ -USEC/CM
| |
| __ _ MEASURED FREQUENCY i(. 3 VOLTS/CM __ so_M_v ___ _ REVIEWED AND ACCEPTED SIGNATURE DATE SwRI FORM RD-2-4 CERTIFICATION PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH Xll-RD-101 G-45 SEARCH UNIT BEAM PROFILE ID !DISTANCE VS AMPLITUDE
| |
| -RANGE Bl SEARCH UNIT TEST EQUIPMENT
| |
| *TEST BLOCK REVIEWED & ACCEPTED BRAND SERIAL NO. .Sdn CARBON STEEL WITH ed t QO TYPE
| |
| / CASE STYLE ANGLE l/B INCH DIAMETER . z-so** . c!.u.e--l z_, z.-s mA,e.c.'I CRYSlAL SIZE qqREO. MODEL SIDE DRILLED HOLE SIGNATURE GAIN dB Oil oc:ra I!.
| |
| TESTED BY: s
| |
| * DATE SERIAL NO.
| |
| :z.q rJov. il DATE .. ' 100 II 90 80 s "" II.. I G 70 " .. N \ A ' L ' 60 \ A l M ' p 50 \ L I T '\ u 40 '\. D , .. E 30 .... 20 .... _ -10 t-t-0 1/4 1/2 3/4 1 1-1 /4 1-1/2 1-3/4 2 HOLE DEPTH IN STEEL SwRI FORM RD-4-3 * * *
| |
| * *
| |
| * FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND R.F. WAVEFORM ANALYSIS DATE OPERATOR 5. f.ji cholSon SEARCH UNIT MANUFACTURER
| |
| ______ SERIAL NO. K.,.3oo1 g --,..... o* CASE STYLE ...J,..#;
| |
| An:' Ord TEST ANGLE --"'""------------
| |
| CRYSTAL SIZE * 'l-So" FREQUENCY
| |
| '2* 25 ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER ANAL VZER SETTINGS ATTENUATION DAMPING GATE DELAY \ GATE WIDTH b"(-J GAIN TRIM __ 0_26 _____ _ 555 MOOE {I oft.rn
| |
| * EXT. PULSER _D_O_W_N ____ _ 31'1 REP. RATE 115 EXT. TRIGGER DOWN SPECTRUM ANAL VZER R.F. SECTION INPUT ATTENUATION 30 SCAN WIDTH 1 MHz CENTER FREQUENCY
| |
| | |
| ===5.0 TUNING===
| |
| STABILIZER OFF BANDWIDTH 30KHz RANGE 0-11 SPECTRUM ANAL VZER -l.F. SECTION LOG REF. LEVEL ;l... MV/DIV DISPLAY ADJUST 0 VIDEO FILTER OFF TRIGGER AUTOMATIC SCAN TIME/DIV.
| |
| 2 MILISEC TARGET REFLECTOR SwRI SPEC PHOTOGRAPH DATA MINIMUM f .'-MHz/DIV. 0 3/32 INCH, 1 /3 T HOLE IN PT 300 2.1 I J.J.S BLOCK MAXIMUM USEC/CM 0 3/16 INCH, 3/4T HOLE IN E.E.1. MEASURED FREQUENCY
| |
| :;< .;.s VOLTS/CM 50MV BLOCK PLASTIC BALL BLOCK S.O.H. REVIEWED AND ACCEPTED 0 OTHER SIGNATURE DATE SwRI FORM RD-2-4 CERTIFICATION PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH Xll-R0-101 G-47
| |
| | |
| ----SEARCH UNIT BEAM PROFILE ID CDISTANCE VS AMPLITUDE
| |
| -RANGE Bl SEARCH UNIT TEST EQUIPMENT TEST BLOCK REVIEWED & ACCEPTED BRANO Aeral-M SERIAL NO.
| |
| Sonic. STAINLESS STEEL WITH -o* TYPE CASE STYLE ANGLE I/II INCH DIAMETER mark:r .250'' Z.2.6 *CRYSTAL SIZE FREQ. MODEL SIDE DRILLED HOLE SIGNATURE GAIN dB 1(2 TESTED BY: s
| |
| * DATE SERIAL NO. 011 a9£ 5 oc+/-. r ?ATE 100 I 90 80 s \ I G 70 .. N A " L* 60 A ' M p 60 L ' I ... T ' u 40 D ' E ..... 30 ,.., , -20 ... -10 0 1/4 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-3/4 2 HOLE DEPTH IN STEEL Swill FORM RD:4*2 * * * -
| |
| ** *'.--. *.
| |
| * FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND WAVEFORM ANALYSIS DATE Lt Qo)-. i..j OPERATOR s . 0 le.he, SEARCH UNIT MANUFACTURER Su.)t:...I.
| |
| SERIAL NO. ..51 L./ CASE STYLE TEST ANGLE oo CRYSTAL SIZE .3/R ,, FREQUENCY
| |
| | |
| ===1.5 ULTRASONIC===
| |
| | |
| TRANSDUCER ANAL VZER SETTINGS ATTENUATION 0 GATE WIDTH GAIN TRIM 026 DAMPING 555 MODE '110l..n'L EXT.PULSER DOWN* GATE DELAY ,S.;<. j REP. RATE 115 EXT. TRIGGER DOWN SPECTRUM ANAL VZER -R.F. SECTION INPUT ATTENUATION CENTER FREQUENCY BANDWIDTH O(o SCAN WIDTH ____ ,_M_H_z ______ _ .$ .Q TUNING STABILIZER
| |
| __ o_F_F _______ _ 30KHz RANGE 0-11 SPECTRUM ANAL VZER -l.F. SECTION LOG REF. LEVEL __ __._ __ MV/DIV DISPLAY ADJUST ___ o ________ _ VIDEO FILTER ___ OF_F __ . TRIGGER _____ A_U_T_O_M_A_TI_c
| |
| ____ _ SCAN TIME/DIV.
| |
| __ 2 ___ MIU SEC TARGET REFLECTOR 0 3/32 INCH, 1 /3 T HOLE IN PT 300 BLOCK 0
| |
| * 3/16 INCH, 3/4T HOLE IN E.E.I. BLOCK f/ PLASTIC BALL BLOCK S.D.H. 0 OTHER -------SwRISPEC PHOTOGRAPH DATA VOLTS/CM -* _50_M_v ___ _ MINIMUM ____ I_ . .-3 ___ _ MAXIMUM _ __._I _. _...J __ __,.._ 1.1 MEASURED FREQUENCY MHz/DIV __ I. _____ _ USEC/CM __ J_AJs-=..;=----
| |
| REVIEWED AND ACCEPTED SIGNATURE DATE SwRI FORM RD-2-4 CERTIFICATION PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH Xll-RD-101 G-49
| |
| ? l..n 0 ID 100 90 80 s I G 70 N A L 60 A M p 60 L I T u 40 D E 30 20 10 0 SwRI fORM RD*4*2
| |
| * SEARCH UNIT BEAM PROFILE (DISTANCE VS AMPLITUDE
| |
| -RANGE Bl SEARCH UNIT TEST EQUIPMENT TEST BLOCK REVIEWED & ACCEPTED BRAND 5wtL::r..
| |
| SERIAL NO. .51 'f STAINLESS STEEL WITH
| |
| / g,tc.----r.
| |
| oo TYPE CASE STYLE ANGLE -1111 INCH DIAMETER
| |
| .* 1.5
| |
| :::r: *CRYSTAL SIZE *JEO. MODEL SIDE DRILLED HOLE JNATURE i GAIN dB SERIAL NO. DU O'j, E TESTED BY: DATE /?J S-/ 'l . S. )J 1'c.ho fson Y oa.+. \(1-l I l ' \ , \ \.. '\ I.. '\ '\ '\ I.. -' ... .... '" ..... -..... -----1/4 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-3/4 2 HOLE DEPTH IN STEEL *
| |
| *
| |
| * FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND R.F. WAVEFORM ANALYSIS DATE .4./ 0 e--+. 2 "-/ OPERATOR s . /Ji"cht)JSOn SEARCH UNIT MANUFACTURER
| |
| __
| |
| ______ SERIAL NO. _
| |
| CASE STYLE uee-r. TEST ANGLE _-...:-.....,, 0.---________ _ CRYSTALSIZE 11 FREQUENCY I* 5 ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER ANAL VZER SETTINGS ATTENUATION I GATE WIDTH fu / GAIN TRIM __ 026 _____ _ DAMPING 555 MODE 110 /?tl'L EXT. PULSER -"'D..;;.O_W-"'N-*
| |
| ----GATE DELAY 5 OS I REP. RA TE 115 EXT. TRIGGER DOWN SPECTRUM ANAL VZER -R.F. SECTION INPUT ATTENUATION 30 *SCAN WIDTH ____ 1 M_H_z ______ _ CENTER FREQUENCY 5.o 1'.'UNINGSTABILIZER
| |
| __ o_F_F _______ _ BANDWIDTH 30KHz RANGE 0-11 SPECTRUM ANAL VZER -l.F. SECTION LOG REF. LEVEL __ ......._ __ MV/DIV DISPLAY ADJUST ___ o_....._ ______ _ VIDEO FILTER ___ OF_F __ TRIGGER ______ AU_T_O_M_A_Tl_C
| |
| ____ _ SCAN TIME/DIV.
| |
| __ 2 ___ MIU SEC TARGET REFLECTOR 0 3/32 INCH, 1/3 THOLE IN PT 300 BLOCK 0 3/16 INCH, 3/4T HOLE IN E.E.I. BLOCK !!( PLASTIC BALL BLOCK S.D.H. 0 OTHER -------SwRISPEC MINIMUM J. 3 MAXIMUM _-.....:.J
| |
| ._7....._
| |
| __ _ MEASURED FREQUENCY J
| |
| * 5 PHOTOGRAPH DATA USEC/CM _ ......
| |
| VOLTS/CM __ 50_M_V ___ _ REVIEWED AND ACCEPTED SIGNATURE DATE .?' t) SwRI FORM RD-2-4 CERTIFICATION PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH Xll-RD-101 G-51 SEARCH UNIT BEAM PROFILE
| |
| .... SEARCH UNIT TEST EQUIPMENT TEST BLOCK REVIEWED & ACCEPTED BRAND s u) :c. SERIAL NO. la 3 7 <::> STAINLESS STEEL WITH I CASE STYLE ___ e,._._e: ....... c-__ ............
| |
| ______ ANGLE 0 D TYPE &:>QO: c.e I/II INCH DIAMETER -/ -CRYST*L
| |
| ____ 3_/_g_*_*------=
| |
| FREQ. I .s MODEL m M...tC::. .J_ dB ';<..2 --SIDE DRILLED HOLE / t;)
| |
| c/ TESlEDBY=s t0ki.'1D lsor"'\ Oc.,, +. V'/ SERIAL NO. 011oct
| |
| * _ 100 90 80 s I I I c;J G 70 , I N lJ1 , N A L 60 l'l A ' M p 60 L I T u 40 D E 30 20 ... 10 0 114 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-3/4 2 HOLE DEPTH IN STEEL SwRI FORM RD-4-2 * * * *
| |
| *
| |
| * FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND R. F. WAVEFORM ANALYSIS DATE OPE RA TOR 13 S. (\ icho (56 rt SEARCH UNIT MANUFACTURE SERIAL NO. CASE STYLE TEST ANGLE CltYSTAL SIZE ___ ._5_o_o_" _____________
| |
| _ FREQUENCY
| |
| | |
| ===1.5 ULTRASONIC===
| |
| | |
| TRANSDUCER ANALYZER SETTINGS ATTENUATION
| |
| ___ 9 _______ _ GATE WIDTH '210 GAIN TRIM DAMPING 555 GATE DELAY INl'UT ATTENUATION CENTER FREQUENCY BAND WIDTH LOG REF. LEVEL 3C 5.0 30 MODE ooem REP. RATE II !5 EXT. PULSER EXT. TRIGGER SPECTRUM ANALYZER -R. F. SECTION SCAN WIDTH TUNING STABILIZER KHZ RANGE SPECTRUM ANALYZER -I. F . SECTION MV/ DIV DISPLAY ADJUST MHZ OFF 0 -II 0 VIDEO FILTER OFF TRIGGER' AUTOMATIC SCAN TIME I DIV. __ _.2=-----llllLI SEC 026 DOWN DOWN TARGET REFLECTOR SWRI SPEC PHOTOGRAPH DATA MINIMUM I MHZ 1. DIV MAXIMUM 1.:i USEC I CM /Ms 0 3 / 32 IN. I/ :S T HOLE IN PT 300 BLOCK 0 :s /re IN., 3/4 T HOLE IN MEASURED FREQUENCY
| |
| : l. 7. VOLTS I CM 50 MV E. E. t. !ILOCK REVIEWED AND ACCEPTED IC BALL BLOCK S.D.H. D OTHER SIGNATURE 3Wlll 'ORM 110 ll C&llTIFICATIOll 1'1:11,0llM&D Ill ACCOllOANCI WITH XII* 110
| |
| * 101 G-53
| |
| | |
| ,, ' SEARCH UNIT BEAM PROFILE WD !DISTANCE VS AMPLITUDE
| |
| -* RANGE Cl SEARCH UNIT TEST EQUIPMENT
| |
| -, TEST BLOCK REVIEWED & ACCEPTED BRAND 6, w. , &JI STAINLESS STEEL WITH SERIAL NO.
| |
| oo TYPE CASE STYLE 'Rp r
| |
| * mAetT l/B INCH DIAMETER ANGLE , 5CfJ' J.5 MODEL SIDE DRILLED HOLE CRYSTAL SIZE . GAIN dB ()ltDCJif
| |
| /INAV:f lESTED BY: DATE SERIAL NO. $ . Y\ ich.o Se..pT DATE i 100 ' 90 --80 """ \. -* s ' I 70 ' G N ' A 60 ' 1 L ' A -M 60 ' p I\ ' L ...... I 40 ..... T " u ' D E 30 ..... .... -20 .--.... --..... --10 ---0 112 1 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4, HOLE DEPTH IN STEEL SwRI fORM flD-6-2 * *
| |
| * *--* FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND R.F. WAVEFORM ANALYSIS DATE 13 f\JCJlJ. RY OPERA TOR c:::t. , '\ . _ A ) SEARCH UNIT MANUFACTURER
| |
| -------SERIAL NO. __ 1,_0 __ 8.;;...8::;__
| |
| ________ _ CASE STYLE
| |
| ---------TEST ANGLE _ __....._0 _________
| |
| _ CRYSTAL SIZE .:3fg" FREQUENCY
| |
| '2. '2.S ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER ANAL VZER SETTINGS ATTENUATION 1 GATEWIDTH 1"°='8 GAIN TRIM __ 0_26 _____ _ DAMPING 555 MODE Oo R.n1. EXT. PULSER _D_o_w_N ____ _ GATE DELAY .s I 5 \REP. RATE 115 EXT. TRIGGER _D_o_w_N ____ _ SPECTRUM ANAL VZER -R.F. SECTION INPUT ATTENUATION 30 SCANWIDTH
| |
| ____ 1 M_H_z ______ _ CENTER FREQUENCY
| |
| : 5. 0 TUNING STABILIZER
| |
| __ O_F_F _______ _ BANDWIDTH 30KHz RANGE 0-11 SPECTRUM ANALVZER -l.F. SECTION LOG REF. LEVEL MV/DIV DISPLAY ADJUST ___ o ________ _ VIDEO FILTER ___ OF_F __ TRIGGER _____ A_U_T_O_M_A_n_c
| |
| ____ _ SCAN TIME/DIV.
| |
| 2 MILISEC TARGET REFLECTOR 0 3/32 INCH, 1 /3 T HOLE IN PT 300 BLOCK 0 3/16 INCH, 3/4T HOLE IN E.E.I. BLOCK " PLASTIC BALL BLOCK S.D.H. 0 OTHES -------SwRISPEC PHOTOGRAPH DATA MINIMUM I. R MHz/DIV*---------
| |
| MAXIMUM "Z.'J USEC/CM __
| |
| ___ _ MEASURED FREQUENCY VOLTS/CM __ so_M_v ___ _ REVIEWED AND ACCEPTED SIGNATURE
| |
| >> ' SwRI FORM RD-2-4 CERTIFICATION PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH Xll-RD-101 G-55 Cj) I VI °' -. SEARCH UNIT BEAM PROFILE ID !DISTANCE VS AMPLITUDE
| |
| -RANG!: Bl SEARCH UNIT TEST EQUIPMENT BRAND Oc-t R::c: SERIAL NO.
| |
| Sonic.. 'Rd. Oa TYPE CASE STYLE
| |
| * ANGLE rnark-:c.
| |
| CRYSTAL SIZE ,,EO. MODEL GAIN dB ouoqe. SERIAL NO. TESTED BY: s
| |
| * Nid.o*lsoA)
| |
| DATE f;;l. A.Jo". 8'/ 100 90 80 s .. I ' G 70 ..... -N ... A .... ... L .. 60 .... A ... , M ' p 50 '\. L I ' T .. -u 40 '"' D -.. .... . E 30 ... ... ""' 20* 10 --0 1/4 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 llOLE DEPTH IN STEEL SwRI FORM RD-4-3 *
| |
| * TEST BLOCK REVIEWED & ACCEPTED CARBON STEEL WITH 1/B INCH DIAMETER ,/ -SIDE DRILLED HOLE SIGNATURE 11/t'/IN DATE --I..., J 1-1/2 1-3/4 *
| |
| * **
| |
| * FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND R.F. WAVEFORM ANALYSIS DATE "-{-C) c..-+. )?y OPERATOR C ""'-1'\ . _ I. ..,::)
| |
| * 1 1 1 c..:-nO I Sor\ SEARCH UNIT MANUFACTURER ,SW g :::r. SERIAL NO. _ ___.::..l
| |
| ________ _ CASE STYLE e_ t: CT TEST ANGLE _ __...;-....
| |
| 0 _________
| |
| _ CRYSTAL SIZE 3/ 8' II FREQUENCY I. 6 ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER ANAL VZER SETTINGS ATTENUATION
| |
| \ GATEWIDTH
| |
| '251 GAINTRIM __ 026 _____ _ DAMPING 555 MODE :.0 D f?._fl1-EXT. PULSER _D_O_W_N_.
| |
| ----GATE DELAY 5<2 I REP. RATE 11S EXT. TRIGGER DOWN SPECTRUM ANAL VZER -R.F. SECTION INPUT ATTENUATION 30 SCANWIDTH
| |
| ____ 1_M_H_z ______ _ CENTER FREQUENCY
| |
| ,") 0 TUNING STABILIZER
| |
| __ O.;...F_F
| |
| _______ _ BANDWIDTH 30KHz RANGE 0-11 SPECTRUM ANAL VZER -l.f. SECTION LOG REF. LEVEL __ _...Ql........__
| |
| __ MV/DIV DISPLAY ADJUST ___ o ________ _ VIDEO FILTER ___ O_F_F __ TRIGGER _____ A_U_T_O_M_A_n_c
| |
| ____ _ SCAN TIME/DIV.
| |
| 2 MIU SEC TARGET REFLECTOR 0 3/32 INCH, 1 /3 T HOLE IN PT 300 BLOCK 0 3/16 INCH, 3/4T HOLE IN E.E.I. BLOCK ilt"' PLASTIC BALL BLOCK S.D.H. 0 OTHER -------SwRISPEC MINIMUM ) . 3 MAXIMUM I, 7 MEASURED FREQUENCY LS PHOTOGRAPH DATA MHz/DIV __ .;....} USEC/CM _
| |
| VOLTS/CM __ so_M_v ___ _ REVIEWED AND ACCEPTED SIGNATURE SwRI FORM RD-2-4 CERTIFICATION PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH Xll-RD-101 G-57
| |
| ? lJ1 _CX> ID 100 90 80 s I G 70 N A L 60 A M p 60 L I T u 40 D E 30 20 10 0 Swftl FORM RD*4*2
| |
| * SEARCH UNIT BEAM PROFILE (DISTANCE VS AMPLITUDE, -RANGE Bl SEARCH UNIT TEST EQUIPMENT TEST BLOCK REVIEWED & ACCEPTED BRAND .S 'w f2.. ::L SERIAL ND.
| |
| STAINLESS STEEL WITH c...-T. QO TYPE CASE STYLE ANGLE 111 INCH DIAMETER 3/ g II MODEL l* 5 -CRYSTAL SIZE J\ ?!'EQ. SIDE DRILLED HOLE
| |
| '?1 GAIN dB SERIAL NO. 0 I I 0 Cf * /OS-? .. TESTED BY: DATE S . I),* ciJ.o J SOty. "I OC/t. 'if"' f'n " I" 'I " '\. "' ... " , .... , ' ... .... '" --.... 1/4 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-3/4 2 HOLE DEPTH IN STEEL *
| |
| * ______ _J
| |
| * -*--* FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND R.F. WAVEFORM ANALYSIS DATE I (o Oc... T. y '-I OPERATOR s _
| |
| * 1J ; c..hc ts"J SEARCH UNIT MANUFACTURER
| |
| ________ SERIAL NO. __ 1_1_9_3._
| |
| ________ _ CASE STYLE TEST ANGLE ---=0'-Q----------
| |
| CRYSTAL SIZE '?g* FREQUENCY 2,. '26 ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER ANAL VZER SETTINGS ATTENUATION DAMPING GATE DELAY 5 GATEWIDTH l:,50 GAINTRIM __ 0_26 _____ _ 555 MODE EXT. PULSER ___-.D_;,O_W_N
| |
| ____ _ 5 I 7 REP. RATE ll5 EXT. TRIGGER DOWN SPECTRUM ANAL VZER R.F. SECTION INPUT ATTENUATION
| |
| --'3--.....0....._
| |
| _______ SCAN WIDTH ____ 1 M_H_z ______ _ CENTER FREQUENCY S.Q TUNING STABILIZER
| |
| __ O_F_F _______ _ BAND WIDTH 30 KHz RANGE 0-11 SPECTRUM ANAL VZER -l.F. SECTION LOG REF. LEVEL __ .,..;l_ ___ MV/DIV DISPLAY ADJUST ___ o ________ _ VIDEO FILTER ___ OF_F __ TRIGGER ______ Au_r_o_M_A_T1_c
| |
| ____ _ SCAN TIME/DIV.
| |
| __ 2 MIU SEC TARGET REFLECTOR 0 3/32 INCH, 1 /3 T HOLE IN PT 300 BLOCK 0 3/16 INCH, 3/4T HOLE IN E.E.I. BLOCK --ri' PLASTIC BALL BLOCK S.D.H. 0 OTHER -------Sw.RISPEC PHOTOGRAPH DATA MINIMUM __ ___,l..._
| |
| ...... i __ _ MHz/DIV I MAXIMUM __ _..;;;..2_.1
| |
| __ _ USEC/CM . IA.JS MEASURED FREQUENCY
| |
| ;;. S VOLTS/CM __ so_Mv ___ _ REVIEWED AND ACCEPTED SIGNATURE SwRI FORM RD-2-4 CERTIFICATION PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH Xll-RD-101 G-59 GJ I °' 0 .ID 100 90 80 s I G 70 N A L ' 60 A M p 60 L I T u 40 D E 30 20 10 0 SwRI FORM R0-4-3
| |
| * SEARCH UNIT BEAM PROFILE !DISTANCE-VS AMPLITUDE
| |
| -RANGE Bl SEARCH UNIT TEST EQUIPMENT TEST BLOCK "REVIEWED
| |
| & ACCEPTED
| |
| * BRAND OwR.:C. SERIAL NO. 11i3 .5on; C.. CARBON STEEL WITH CASE STVLE "R e.c...+.:
| |
| .[)o TYPE LJ.b ANGLE (nQrkl:. l/B INCH DIAMETER /_ 3/!" z.. 26 CRYSTAL SIZE -,,_,:;rn.
| |
| MODEL SIDE DRILLED HDLE SIGNATURE GAIN dB TESTED BY:. cg DATE SERIAL NO. On o'tE. . t\J; cho l<o C)c.... T. 'it/ .r DTE ' ' ' , \. ' , ' ' !'lo.. .... ""'" .... ... ..... ,_ --
| |
| 1/4 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-3/4 .'J. HOLE DEPTH IN STEEL *
| |
| *
| |
| * FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND R.F. WAVEFORM ANALYSIS DATE l"'1
| |
| * I 0¢. OPERATOR , ' , _ L l . ...:)
| |
| * IV l f"'\ SEARCH UNIT MANUFACTURER SERIAL NO. _ _.l_'1'"""'i3=-----------
| |
| CASE STYLE °Rec.+. TEST ANGLE _ _..._0 __________
| |
| _ CAYST AL SIZE '3/ !" FREQUENCY
| |
| .2 .':Z..'S ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER ANAL VZER SETTINGS ATTENUATION DAMPING GATE DELAY b GATE WIDTH (,c 5 3 GAIN TRIM __ 0_26 _____ _ 555 MODE (loon* EXT. PULSER _D_O_W_N ____ _ .5 I "'1 REP. RATE 115 EXT. TRIGGER DOWN SPECTRUM ANAL VZER R.F. SECTION INPUT ATTENUATION 30 SCAN WIDTH 1 MHz CENTER FREQUENCY s.o TUNING STABILIZER OFF BANDWIDTH 30KHz RANGE 0-11 SPECTRUM ANAL VZER -l.F. SECTION l LOG REF. LEVEL ca MV/DIV DISPLAY ADJUST VIDEO FILTER OFF TRIGGER SCAN TIME/DIV.
| |
| 2 Mill SEC 0 0 TARGET REFLECTOR 3/32 INCH, 1 /3 T HOLE IN PT 300 BLOCK 3/16 INCH, 3/4T HOLE IN E.E.I. BLOCK SwRI SPEC MINIMUM __ _./.._. '6...__ __ _ MAXIMUM __ 2=-.1......._
| |
| __ _ MEASURED FREQUENCY 0 AUTOMATIC*
| |
| PHOTOGRAPH DATA MHz/DIV ___ ..._ ___ _ USEC/CM --"""'')Jt.;:;_.;::.S._
| |
| __ _ VOLTS/CM __ so_Mv ___ _ ttJ"' PLASTIC BALL BLOCK S.D.H. REVIEWED AND ACCEPTED 0 OTHER -------SIGNATURE DATE SwRI FORM RD-2-4 CERTIFICATION PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH Xll-RD-101 G-61
| |
| *. SEARCH UNIT BEAM PROFILE ID IDISTANCE VS AMPLITUDE
| |
| -RANGE Bl SEARCH UNIT TEST EQUIPMENT TEST
| |
| ,_ REVIEWED & ACCEPTED BRAND SERIAL NO. 1123 STAINUSS STEEL WITH *"Red*. Do TYPE ft.t.. CASE STYLE ANGU l/B INCH DIAMETER .:fa** :i.2.S rrlaK.lI MODEL *CRYSTAL SIZE '1 rEO. SIDE DRILLED HOLE SIGNATURE GAIN dB
| |
| /II/ f..<f:. TESTED BY: s ' DATE SERIAL NO. 0£10'1_£ /\Ji c.-h.l> I Son 'I () c;J-, '-/' 7 100 90 80 -s "" I ' G 70 \. N A L 60 " A ' M p 60 ' L '""' .... I "' T u 40 .... D .... E ... 30 ... --20 .... 10 0 114 112 3/4 1 1-114 1-112 1-3/4 2 HOLE DEPTH IN STEEL SwRI FORM RD*4*2 * ** **
| |
| *
| |
| * FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND R.F. WAVEFORM ANALYSIS DATE g () aJ-. 'ts'-( OPERATOR S . fJ t' c.J..i.o I.so l""I SEARCH UNIT MANUFACTURER SERIAL NO. _
| |
| CASE STYLE "Rec.f. TEST ANGLE --0-g----------
| |
| CRYSTAL SIZE FREQUENCY 2.'Z..5 ATTENUATION DAMPING GATE DELAY INPUT ATTENUATION CENTER FREQUENCY BANDWIDTH LOG REF. LEVEL VIDEO FIL TEA SCAN TIME/DIV.
| |
| ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER ANAL VZER SETTINGS .5 GATE WIDTH lo 'f R GAIN TRIM __ 026 _____ _ 555 MODE Ooeni. EXT. PULSER _D_O_W_N ____ _ 6/'f REP.RATE.
| |
| 1 1 5 EXT.TRIGGER
| |
| _o_o_w_N ____ _ SPECTRUM ANAL VZER R.F. SECTION 30 SCAN WIDTH 1 MHz s.o TUNING STABILIZER OFF 30KHz RANGE 0-11 SPECTRUM ANAL VZER -l.F. SECTION d,, MV/DIV DISPLAY ADJUST 0 OFF TRIGGER AUTOMATIC 2 MILISEC TARGET REFLECTOR SwRl.SPEC PHOTOGRAPH DATA 0 3/32 INCH, 1/3 THOLE IN PT 300 BLOCK 0 3/16 INCH, 3/4T HOLE IN E.E.I. BLOCK a(" PLASTIC BALL BLOCK S.D.H. 0 . OTHER -------MINIMUM /. i MAXIMUM __
| |
| MEASURED FREQUENCY ef* ;:< MHz/DIV ___ .__ __ _ USEC/CM I JJS VOLTS/CM __ so_M_v ___ _ REVIEWED AND ACCEPTED SIGNATURE DATE SwRI FORM RD-2-4 CERTIFICATION PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH Xll-RD-101 G-63
| |
| -, *1. SEARCH UNIT BEAM PROFILE
| |
| * IDISTANCE VS AMPLITUDE
| |
| -RANGE Bl SEARCH UNIT TEST EQUIPMENT TEST BLOCK REVIEWED & ACCEPTED BRAND .Si.u2I SERIAL NO. 11q1p 5on'1c.. STAINLESS STEEL WITH CASE STYLE oo TYPE Jidfl&J/1./.
| |
| ANGLE 118 INCH DIAMETER 3/8'' z:z.s rf\ark.:C:
| |
| *CRYSTAL SIZE FREQ. MODEL SIDE DRILLED HOLE SIGNATURE GAIN dB r'J tu OllOCiE. /P////,y TESTED BY: s
| |
| * DATE SERIAL NO. 1'Ji'c,hoJ SOI"\ q Oc.t-. 8'-/ ., ,_ 100 ' 90 80 ' s I " G 70 \. N I' A l L 60 " A .... M -p 60 L I " ... T u 40 D ' ... E "" 30 .. .... ...... .... 20 ---10 0 : 114 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-3/4 2 HOLE DEPTH IN STEEL SwRI FORM ftD*4*2 * * *
| |
| * .-** FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND R.F. WAVEFORM ANALYSIS DATE '3 Oc+/-. '1 OPERATOR S. r.,j i ch_o SEARCH UNIT MANUFACTURER Sta-R..J:
| |
| SERIAL NO. _ ..... ..... O;.....:...I
| |
| ---------CASE STYLE "'Rec+. TEST ANGLE ---=0 ..... 0_-_________
| |
| _ CRYSTAL SIZE--..!3'"9g::;;..*"'-*
| |
| ---------FREQUENCY 2 * "Z.5 ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER ANAL YiER SETTINGS ATIENUATION DAMPING GATE DELAY ,6 GATE WIDTH (a p(.., GAIN TRIM __ 0_126 _____ _ 555 MODE (\oRm. EXT. PULSER _D_OW_N ____ _ ..51Go REP. RATE 115 EXT. TRIGGER _D_O_W_N _ __._ __ _ SPECTRUM ANAL VZER R.F. SECTION INPUTATIENUATION 30 SCANWIDTH
| |
| ____ 1 M_H_z ______ _ CENTER FREQUENCY
| |
| | |
| ===5.0 TUNING===
| |
| STABILIZER
| |
| __ O_F_F _______ _ BANDWIDTH 30KHz RANGE 0-11 SPECTRUM ANAL VZER -l.F. SECTION LOG REF. LEVEL MV/DIV DISPLAY ADJUST ___ O ________ _ VIDEO FILTER ___ OF_F __ TRIGGER ______ AU_T_O_M_A_n_c
| |
| ____ _ SCAN TIME/DIV.
| |
| 2 MILISEC TARGET REFLECTOR 0 3/32 INCH, 1/3 THOLE IN PT 300 BLOCK 0 3/16 INCH, 3/4T HOLE IN E.E.I. BLOCK PLASTIC BALL BLOCK S.D.H. 0 -OTHER -------SwRI SPEC PHOTOGRAPH DATA MINIMUM f. <3 MHz/DIV __ ___._ ___ _ MAXIMUM 2.1 USEC/CM __ ..._/ ..U_...S..__
| |
| __ _ MEASURED FREQUENCY
| |
| ;2.Q(5 VOLTS/CM __ 50_M_V ___ _ REVIEWED AND ACCEPTED SIGNATURE DATE /t? SwRI FORM RD-2-4 CERTIFICATION PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH Xll-RD-101 G-65 L 0 I °' °' WD 100 90 80 s I G 70 . N A L 60 A M p 50 L I T u 40 D. E 30 *20 10 0 SwHI FORM RD-4*2 * .... SEARCH UNIT BEAM PROFILE !DISTANCE VS AMPLITUDE
| |
| -RANGE Bl SEARCH UNIT TEST EQUIPMENT TEST BLOCK REVIEWED & ACCEPTED BRAND SwR.:c SERIAL NO. l tg 0\ :Son'*c... , STAINLESS STEEL WITH
| |
| :Bc?c+. ao TYPE CASE STYLE ANGLE l/B INCH DIAMETER mcn*kr 3/g ... -CRYSTAL SIZE FREQ. MODEL SIDE DRILLED HOLE SIGNATURE GAIN dB -., d-. 01109E. 10/11 J f'i.. TESTED BY: DATE SERIAL NO. S. tJ i c.h-o I q oc;:t. et.t-I ;;;;ATE. .* "' "' ' .... .. .... "" "' ' "' --* .._ r... ' "' .... ... ---...... -....._ .._ ..... ' 1/4 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-3/4 2 HOLE DEPTH IN STEEL
| |
| * 1* I *
| |
| * FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND R.F. WAVEFORM ANALYSIS DATE \(o /\JO\) . '? '-/ OPERATOR 8. ,..J; c-k..o /so ,J SEARCH UNIT MANUFACTURER SERIAL NO. _ ....... l ......
| |
| CASE STYLE _:J<--'-"=d=*----------
| |
| TEST ANGLE _--.0 __________
| |
| _ CRYSTAL SIZE f.Q" FREQUENCY
| |
| : 2. 'Z.5 ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER ANAL VZER SETTINGS ATTENUATION DAMPING GATE DELAY l GATEWIDTH
| |
| '-i9S GAIN TRIM __ 0_26 _____ _ 555 MODE 0 0112.l"'n.
| |
| EXT. PULSER _D_OW_N ____ _ {..,
| |
| * REP. RATE 1 1 5 EXT. TRIGGER DOWN SPECTRUM ANAL VZER -R.F. SECTION INPUT ATTENUATION
| |
| ________ SCAN WIDTH ____ 1 M_H_z ______ _ CENTER FREQUENCY
| |
| | |
| ===5.0 TUNING===
| |
| STABILIZER
| |
| __ O_F_F _______ _ BANDWIDTH 30KHz RANGE 0-11 SPECTRUM ANAL VZER -l.F. SECTION LOG REF. LEVEL MV/DIV DISPLAY ADJUST ___ o ________ _ VIDEO FILTER OFF TRIGGER _____ A_U_T_O_M_A_Tl_c
| |
| ____ _ SCAN TIME/DIV.
| |
| __ 2 MILi SEC TARGET REFLECTOR SwRI SPEC PHOTOGRAPH DATA *0 3/32 INCH, 1/3 THOLE IN PT 300 BLOCK cgl' 3/16 INCH, 3/4T HOLE IN E.E.I. MINIMUM I. g MAXIMUM Z.'J MEASURED FREQUENCY MHz/DIV ___ . ----USEC/CM ___
| |
| VOLTS/CM __ so_M_v ___ _ 02. l BLOCK 0
| |
| * PLASTIC BALL BLOCK S.D.H. REVIEWED AND ACCEPTED 0 OTHER -------SIGNATURE SwRI FORM RD-2-4 CERTIFICATION PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH Xll-RD-101 G-67 G"l I CJ'\ 00 SEARCH UNIT BEAM PROFILE ,, '* .IDISTANCE VS AMPLITUDE
| |
| -RANGE Cl SEARCH UNIT TEST EQUIPMENT BRANO 6wR:C SERIAL NO.
| |
| ..9on'*c ""£.cl .. t:l> TYPE CASE STYLE ANGLE h1ark:i::
| |
| CRYSTAL SIZE I.Cf FREQ. 2.2.5 MODEL GAIN dB '1'1 011o'lf TESTED BY: DATE SERIAL NO. .S . IV ; dvt> l-so..J tto 100 90 80 -..... 1 .. -s I 70 -I , ci , N , A 60 -* L A M 50 p j L 'I' I 40 ( T u -D E 30 20 ,_..._ ---*---1--0 1/2 1 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 HOLE DEPTH IN STEEL SwRI FORM RD-5-3 *
| |
| * TEST BLOCK REVIEWED & ACCEPTED CARBON STEEL WITH .LJJ_/4 / 1/8 INCH DIAMETER SIDE DRILLED HOLE //IG7'URE
| |
| * L4--'i J1.-DATE 11 ' I'.. ,_ ---... -.... -3 3-1/2 4 .
| |
| * ***
| |
| * FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND R.F. WAVEFORM ANALYSIS DATE Qc..t. 84 OPERATOR s . (\j i c..A..o j SEARCH UNIT MANUFACTURER
| |
| _
| |
| _____ SERIAL NO. _ __._) ...;::;<6-'4,_.b
| |
| _________
| |
| _ CASE S1Y)-E ed . TEST ANGLE ---=0'-0 _________
| |
| _ CRYSTAL SIZE I. 0 " FREQUENCY Ci. 92.,S ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER ANAL VZER SETTINGS ATIENUATION (3ATEWIDTH GAIN TRIM __ 026 _____ _ DAMPING 555 MODE 'b oe..t'Yl EXT. PULSER _D_O_W_N ____ _ GATE DELAY b REP. RATE 115 EXT. TRIGGER _D_O_W_N ____ _ SPECTRUM ANAL VZER R.F. SECTION INPUTATIENUATION 30 SCANWIDTH
| |
| ____ 1 M_H_z ______ _ CENTER FREQUENCY
| |
| : 5. 0 TUNING STABILIZER
| |
| __ O_F_F _______ _ BANDWIDTH 30 KHz. RANGE 0-11 SPECTRUM ANAL VZER -LF. SECTION LOG REF. LEVEL ___ tfA ___ MV/DIV DISPLAY ADJUST ___ o ________ _ VIDEO FiLTER OFF TRIGGER _____ A_U_T_O_M_A_Tl_C
| |
| ____ _ --'' SCAN TIME/DIV.
| |
| __ 2 MILi SEC 0 TARGET REFLECTOR 3/32 INCH, 1 /3 T HOLE IN PT 300 BLOCK SwRISPEC MINIMUM ___ ) _. _,. ___ _ MAXIMUM __ Q).._._1-'----
| |
| if1' 3/16 INCH, 3/4T HOLE IN MEASURED FREQUENCY
| |
| ;;;. 3 PHOTOGRAPH DATA MHz/DIV __ ...._ ____ _ USEC/CM J US) VOLTS/CM __ so_M_v ___ _ BLOCK 1--------------------------------------------t 0 . PLASTIC BALL BLOCK S.D.H. REVIEWED AND ACCEPTED 0 . OTHER -------SIGNATURE DATE SwRI FORM RD-2-4 CERTIFICATION PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH Xll-RD-101 G-69 G"l I ....., 0 3!) 100 90 80 s I 70 G .N A 60 L A M 50 p L I 40 T u 0 E 30 20 10 0 SwRI FORM RD-5-3 * *. ' SEARCH UNIT BEAM PROFILE" --!DISTANCE VS AMPLITUDE
| |
| -RANGE Cl SEARCH UNIT TEST EQUIPMENT BRAND SweI.. l Soo; e-SERIAL NO. t2ol. o* TYPE CASE STYLE ANGLE LQ 11 Ol. CRYSTAL SIZE FRED. MODEL GAIN dB ., , 011ctf E . SERIAL NO. TESUDBY: $ f\J DATE oct. . -L/ "" ... ,, l II "" ---I . I j --, __ -1/2 1 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 HOLE DEPTH IN STEEL
| |
| * TEST BLOCK REVIEWED & ACCEPTED CARBON STEEL WITH A.Ii 1/8 INCH DIAMETER lfl_ / SIDE DRILLED HOLE SIGNATURE
| |
| /If) /Zi
| |
| / DATE I -... .. -... ... .... ... ,_.._
| |
| * 3 3-112 4
| |
| * *:-; **-* ---------------FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND R. F. WAVEFORM ANALYSIS 13 DATE OPERATOR
| |
| $ . SEARCH UNIT MANUFACTURE SERIAL. NO. CASE STYL.E TEST ANGL.E oo . t:'.00 ,, CRYSTAL. SIZE __ ..,u ...... 1_ .. _.._ ____________
| |
| _ FREQUENCY
| |
| / .5 ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER ANALYZER SETTINGS ATTENUATION---'°=-------
| |
| GAT! WIDTH GAIN TRIM DAMPING 555 GATE DEl.AY INPUT ATTENUATION 30 CENTER FREQUENCY 5.0 MODE ooe.m. R!P. ltATE EXT. PUL.SElt EXT. TRIGGER SPECTRUM ANAL VZER -R. F. SECTION SCAN WIDTH TUNING STABIL.IZElt MHZ OFF 026 DOWN DOWN llAND WIDTH 30 KHZ RANGE 0 -11 SPECTRUM ANALYZER -I . F . SECTION L.OG REF. L.EVEL. ;;} M V/ DIV OISPL A Y AD.IUS"i' 0 VIDEO FIL. TER OFF TltlGGElt AUTOMATIC SCAN TIME /DIV. 2 MILi SEC TARGET REFLECTOR SWRI SPEC PHOTOGRAPH DATA 0 3 / 32 IN. I/ 3 T HOL.E IN PT 300 BL.OCIC MHZ/DIV MINIMUM /,3 MAXIMUM /. 7 / .05 USEC I CU 0 3 / 16 IN. I 3 /4 T HOL.E IN MEASURED FRE OUEN CY l.S VOL.TS I CW 50 WV E. E. ?. llL.OCIC REVIEWED AND ACCEPTED [12(' PL.ASTIC BA LL.. SL OCK S.O.H. D OTHER SIGNATURE SWIU P'Olllf llD -Z -I ClllTIPICATIOll l'll"OllllllD Ill ACCOllDANCI WITH XII -llD-101 G-71
| |
| ,;. : SEARCH UNIT BEAM PROFILE -CDIS TANCE VS AMPLITUDE
| |
| -RANGE Cl SEARCH UNIT TEST EQUIPMENT TEST BLOCK REVIEWED & ACCEPTED 1'1 lo7 ' 5orJt''G STAINLESS STEEL WITH BRAND SERIAL NO. Ru.f oo TYPE rnArJ:.I 1/8 INCH DIAMETER / CASE STYLE ANGLE '500** 1.s SIDE DRILLED HOLE CRYSTAL SIZE ''1FREO. MODEL GAIN . dB rt . QllQ'it /;IG'V,RE TESTEDS .-r\i Ctho
| |
| * DATE SERIAL NO. 5ePT g'f '. i ATE 100 ; .,. I 90 80 ' I\ s 1 I -70 ' -I\. G *-N -A 60 ' 1 L A M 5o ..... p L ' I\ I ' 40 ' T -... u D , -*-E 30 -... -20 ... ,_ ..... --------* ---1-f---0 112 1 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4. tlOLE DEPTH IN STEEL SwRI FORM RD*6*2 * *
| |
| * *--* MANUFACTURER CASE STYLE CRY ST AL SIZE ATTENUATION DAMPING GATE DELAY FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND R.F. WAVEFORM ANALYSIS DATE I ?.. Qc.:r: 8 "i OPERATOR s . /..] i C-.ho I So,:) SEARCH UNIT ..---$ i:U e...J:. SERIAL NO. __ 2_/_7_2..
| |
| ________ _ ea. TEST ANGLE --=o;....G/----------
| |
| * .Z. 50 11 du.a../ FREQUENCY S. Q ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER ANAL VZER SETTINGS l0 GATEWIOTH GAIN TRIM __ 026 _____ _ 555 MODE r<A... EXT. PULSER _o_o_w_N ____ _ 313 REP.RATE 1 1 5 EXT.TRIGGER DOWN SPECTRUM ANAL VZER R.F. SECTION INPUT ATTENUATION
| |
| _______ SCAN WIDTH ____ 1 M_Hz ______ _ CENTER FREQUENCY
| |
| ___ 5 .............
| |
| 0"--------
| |
| TUNING STABILIZER
| |
| __ O_F_F _______ _ BANDWIDTH 30KHz RANGE 0-11 SPECTRUM ANALYZER -l.F. SECTION LOG REF. LEVEL -----MV/DIV DISPLAY ADJUST ___ o ________ _ VIDEO FIL TEA OFF TRIGGER _____ A_U_T_O_M_A_T1_c
| |
| ____ _ SCAN TIME/DIV.
| |
| __ 2 MILISEC TARGET REFLECTOR 0 3/32 INCH, 1 /3 T HOLE IN PT 300 BLOCK 0 3/16 INCH, 3/4T HOLE IN E.E.I. BLOCK SwRI SPEC MINIMUM _ _..':f_. _Z-.....
| |
| MAXIMUM _
| |
| MEASURED FREQUENCY S. 7 PHOTOGRAPH DATA MHz/DIV'----------
| |
| USEC/CM _,_Z._lll_...S
| |
| _____ _ VOLTS/CM __ so_M_v ___ _ 0 PLASTIC BALL BLOCK S.D.H. REVIEWED AND ACCEPTED OTHER I 1 1 Sec...Tt.'
| |
| o" PT 3oo bloc..k. SIGNATURE DATE SwRI FORM RD-2-4 CERTIFICATION PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH Xll*RD-101 G-73
| |
| !j. '' " SEARCH UNIT BEAM PROFILE !DISTANCE VS AMPLITUDE
| |
| -llANGE Bl SEARCH UNIT TEST EQUIPMENT TEST BLOCK REVIEWED & ACCEPTED BRAND Swe..:r., SERIAL NO. Z l"TZ..
| |
| ;c.. CAllBON STEEL WITH fZ.d. oo TYPE CASE STYLE , ANGLE l/B INCH DIAMETER / .
| |
| d.IA.Q....1 S,o ffi.ALILI.
| |
| CRYSTAL SIZE q711EO. MODEL SIDE DlllLLEO HOLE )GNATURE GAIN dB TESTED BY: s
| |
| * DATE , SERIAL NO.
| |
| E.
| |
| 1.); cho Q<:!....r.
| |
| BL/ DATE . 100 II 90 80 ..... s .... I r\.. G 70
| |
| * r\ N ' A ' L 60 '\ A ' M ' p 50 , L I ' " T u 40 D I' ... E 30 ' ... ""' 20 ... 10 0 1/4 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-3/4 2 HOLE DEPTH IN STEEL SwRI FORM RD-4-3 * *
| |
| * ***
| |
| * FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND R.F. WAVEFORM ANALYSIS DATE l'i Oc.T. C( lf oPERATO.R S . UI lsa;J SEARCH UNIT Ck,*'-,., -r _, '2.. I I MANUFACTURER
| |
| ../""-' SERIAL NO. --"'"""-----------
| |
| CASE STYLE TEST ANGLE ---""-o _________
| |
| _ CRYSTAL SIZE $00 ,, X 1.0 '' FREQUENCY 2 .Z..S ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER ANAL VZER SETTINGS ATIENUATION I l GATEWIDTH fo3'( GAINTRIM __ 026 _____ _ DAMPING 555 MODE :n Q f...rn EXT. PULSER _D-'-O_W_N
| |
| ____ _ GATE DELAY 5 ;2. \ REP. RATE 115 EXT. TRIGGER DOWN SPECTRUM ANALVZER R.F. SECTION INPUT ATIENUATION
| |
| __ 3 ___ o _______ SCAN WIDTH ____ 1 M_H_z ______ _ CENTER FREQUENCY 0.Q TUNING STABILIZER
| |
| __ O_F_F _______ _ BANDWIDTH 30KHz RANGE 0-11 . SPECTRUM ANAL VZER -l.F. SECTION LOG REF. LEVEL ___ .;2 ___ MV/DIV DISPLAY ADJUST ___ O ________ _ VIDEO FILTER ___ OF_F __ TRIGGER ______ AU_T_O_M_A_Tl_C
| |
| ____ _ SCAN TIME/DIV.
| |
| __ 2 MILISEC 0 0 TARGET REFLECTOR 3/32 INCH, 1/3 THOLE IN PT 300 BLOCK 3/16 INCH, 3/4T HOLE IN E.E.I. BLOCK ' -PLASTIC BALL BLOCK S.D.H. 0
| |
| * OTHER -------SwRISPEC PHOTOGRAPH DATA MINIMUM _ __._r *_,*
| |
| ___ _ MHz/DIV __ ._} ____ _ MAXIMUM -""""cQ.._.,__i..___
| |
| __ _ USEC/CM _ _../_.AJ-=--S..__
| |
| __ _ MEASURED FREQUENCY
| |
| .;<.O VOLTS/CM __ so_M_v ___ _ REVIEWED AND ACCEPTED SwRI FORM RD-2-4 CERTIFICATION PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH Xll-RD-101 G-75
| |
| . 1 SEARCH UNIT BEAM PROFILE' !DISTANCE VS AMPLITUDE
| |
| _; RANGE Cl SEARCH UNIT TEST EQUIPMENT TEST BLOCK REVIEWED & ACCEPTED .Stu e -::c.. . "2-2-' l Son,' c., CARBON STEEL WITH BRAND SERIAL NO. ... ..+-. oo TYPE l/B INCH DIAMETER CASE STYLE ANGLE 15<?0" )( 1.0 11 FREQ. z.. 2..5 MODEL f'YlA.LL .I SIDE DRILLED HOLE CRYSTAL SIZE GAIN dB ,,, ? SIGNATURE TESTED BY: DATE SERIAL NO. t:)I i Q_9_ £ z.
| |
| s . IJ,'cl.olso,.°:)
| |
| lq Oc....T ..
| |
| * DATE 100 90 80 J ... , s ' II I 70 ' G I ' -N * ' -A ,60 J ... L * -' I" A 50 " M .... p . -L I'll.. I 40 T -u D *-...._ E *30 -... --20 10 ,_,_ -* 0 112 1 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4 HOLE DEPTH IN STEEL SwRI FORM RD-5-3 * *
| |
| *
| |
| * FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND R.F. WAVEFORM ANALYSIS SEARCH UNIT MANUFACTURER 5we..:i:.
| |
| SERIAL NO.
| |
| t.3 CASE STYLE eec.T. TEST ANGLE 0 CRYSTALSIZE
| |
| -* $00 .* .x 1.0'' FREQUENCY .Q. ;2.$ ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER ANAL VZER SETTINGS ATTENUATION 12-GATE WIDTH la '-15 GAIN TRIM 026 DAMPING 555 MODE EXT. PULSER DOWN. GATE DELAY SZ3 REP.RATE 115 EXT. TRIGGER DOWN SPECTRUM ANAL VZER -R.F. SECTION INPUT ATTENUATION CENTER FREQUENCY BANDWIDTH 30 SCAN WIDTH ____ 1 M_H_z ______ _ * ;$ 0 TUNING STABILIZER
| |
| __ o_F_F _______ _ 30KHz RANGE 0-11 SPECTRUM ANAL VZER -l.F. SECTION LOG REF.
| |
| MV/DIV DISPLAY ADJUST ___ o _______ _ VIDEO FILTER ___ OF_F __ TRIGGER ______ AU_T_O_M_A_Tl_C
| |
| ____ _ SCAN TIME/DIV.
| |
| 2 MILISEC TARGET REFLECTOR 0 3/32 INCH, 1/3 THOLE IN PT 300 BLOCK 0 3/16 INCH, 3/4T HOLE IN E.E.I. BLOCK SwRISPEC MINIMUM _ ___./_.* ......
| |
| MAXIMUM ____ d..._. _.'7 ___ _ MEASUREDFREQUENCY c:( . .,3 PHOTOGRAPH DATA MHz/DIV _ ___... _____ _ USEC/CM I VS VOLTS/CM __ so_M_v ___ ___ [!(" PLASTIC BALL BLOCK S.D.H. REVIEWED ANO ACCEPTED 0 OTHER -------SIGNATURE
| |
| &'--.I. DATE SwRI FORM RD-2-4 CERTIFICATION PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH Xll-RD-101 G-77 L <;) I ........ CX> 100 90 80 s I 70 G N A 60 L A M 50 p L I 40 T u D E 30 20 10 0 SwRI FORM R0-6-3 * .. SEARCH UNIT BEAM PROFILE ,, !DISTANCE VS AMPLITUDE
| |
| -R;._NGE Cl SEARCH UNIT TEST EQUIPMENT TEST BLOCK REVIEWED & ACCEPTED llRAND $we:r. J,;l,13 SDnic.-CARBON STEEL WITH SERIAL ND.
| |
| Ju__. TYPE 118 INCH DIAMETER CASE STYLE ANGLE CRYSTAL SIZE
| |
| * x l* 0" '1 ;ro. MODEL f'VJBllL I SIDE DRILLED HOLE GAIN dB /() /tZTtlf TESTED BY: DATE SERIAL NO.
| |
| s *l\i
| |
| ' .. I . \. I J L.o " ... .... ... r... .. r.. I'll.. ro.. .... I'-........ --. .... .,.. -...._ --.... --1/2 1 1-1/2 2 2-112 3 3-112 4 HOLE DEPTH IN STEEL *
| |
| * -* FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND R.F. WAVEFORM ANALYSIS DATE f\JD u. "8l{ OPERATOR s f\.J. -I I
| |
| * tc..J>...0 so A,j SEARCH UNIT MANUFACTURER
| |
| __
| |
| SERIAL NO. _
| |
| CASE STYLE R.ec...+.
| |
| TEST ANGLE _ ____,0::;.._
| |
| 0 _________
| |
| _ CRYSTAL SIZE I Soo *I x (. 0 *t FREQUENCY
| |
| ;;. ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER ANAL VZER SETTINGS ATTENUATION f I GATEWIDTH
| |
| '-/91.f-GAINTRIM __ 0_26""""*-----
| |
| DAMPING 555 MODE :no e...m EXT. PULSER _D_O_W_N ____ _ GATE DELAY 501 REP. RATE 115 EXT. TRIGGER DOWN SPECTRUM ANAL VZER R.F. SECTION INPUT ATTENUATION SCANWIDTH
| |
| ____ 1 M_H_z ______ _ CENTER FREQUENCY S .0 TUNING STABILIZER
| |
| __ O_F_F _______ _ BANDWIDTH 30KHz RANGE 0-11 SPECTRUM ANALYZER -l.F. SECTION LOG REF. LEVEL---'---
| |
| MV/DIV DISPLAY ADJUST ___ o ________ _ VIDEO FILTER ___ OF_F __ TRIGGER ______ A_UT_O_M_A_Tl_C
| |
| ____ _ SCAN TIME/DIV.
| |
| __ 2 ___ Mill SEC TARGET REFLECTOR , 0 3/32 INCH, 1 /3 T HOLE IN PT 300 BLOCK . 0 3/16 INCH, 3/4T HOLE IN E.E.I. BLOCK '(/' .. PLASTIC BALL BLOCK S.D.H. 0 OTHER -------SwRI SPEC MINIMUM _ __,_\ ::...o.*
| |
| MAXIMUM __ o(....;..;....1.:.__'------
| |
| MEASURED FREQUENCY
| |
| : 02. I PHOTOGRAPH DATA MHz/DIV -----USEC/CM --LI ....:.:AJ:,.;S...__
| |
| ___ _ VOLTS/CM __ 50_M_V ___ _ REVIEWED AND ACCEPTED SIGNATURE Lil l::t.L. DATE SwRI FORM RD-2-4 CERTIFICATION PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH Xll-RD-101 G-79 L . 0 I 00 0 SEARCH UNIT BEAM PROFILE., COISTANCE VS AMPLITUDE -. RANGE Cl SEARCH UNIT TEST EQUIPMENT .Sw 12..:L :J.01.. '"' Qooi c_., BRANO SERIAL NO. rc..ed-* TYPE 0. " CASE STYLE ANGLE 1$00 1* 1.0 **
| |
| MAILK--+ CRYSTAL SIZE )C FREQ. MODEL .R-0 GAIN dB TESTED BY: s DATE SERIAL ND. ll11cA e .tJ;dof.sou l(a 100 90 80 ' --, s 70 " I G ' N ""' A 60 ,.., L ... -A .... M 50 -, p -L " I 40 .... T .. u .... D , -*-E 30 --20 10 -0 1/2 1 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 HOLE DEPTH IN STEEL SwRI FORM RD-5-3 *
| |
| * TEST BLOCK REVIEWED & ACCEPTED CARBON STEEL WITH ' 1/8 INCH DIAMETER SIDE DRILLED HOLE JJ It. --* l11iiiii1" / -J Sl,TURE l.I L'1 N T' DATE '* -.... ,. .... .. 3 3-1/2 4 "
| |
| I* * *
| |
| * FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND R.F. WAVEFORM ANALYSIS OPERATOR s . tJ So tU SEARCH UNIT MANUFACTURER
| |
| -""'$__...w""-"'12.._J:.=-------
| |
| SERIAL NO.
| |
| ---------CASE STYLE !?£...c.;I:.
| |
| TEST ANGLE ___ 0 ___________
| |
| _ cRYSTALs1zE
| |
| * Soo''x 1.0" FREQUENCY ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER ANAL VZER SETTINGS ATIENUATION j 3 GATE WIDTH 49 '-f GAIN TRIM __ 0_26 _____ _ DAMPING 555 MODE "T\Crl.('b EXT. PULSER _D_O_W_N ____ _ GATE DELAY 5o'l REP. RATE 115 EXT. TRIGGER DOWN SPECTRUM ANAL VZER R.F. SECTION INPUT ATIENUATION Olo SCAN WIDTH ____ 1 M_H_z ______ _ CENTER FREQUENCY
| |
| | |
| ===5.0 TUNING===
| |
| STABILIZER
| |
| __ O_F_F _______ _ BANDWIDTH 30KHz RANGE 0-11 SPECTRUM ANALVZER -l.F. SECTION LOG REF.LEVEL-----
| |
| MV/DIV DISPLAY ADJUST ___ O --------.-* VIDEO FILTER OFF TRIGGER ______ AU_T_O_M_A_Tl_C
| |
| ____ _ SCAN TIME/DIV.
| |
| -,-2 MILi SEC TARGET REFLECTOR 0 3/32 INCH, 1 /3 T HOLE IN PT 300 BLOCK 0 3/16 INCH, 3/4T HOLE IN E.E.1. BLOCK IE"" .PLASTIC BALL BLOCK S.D.H. 0 OTHER -------SwRI SPEC PHOTOGRAPH DATA MINIMUM _..._I ......
| |
| MHz/DIV--------
| |
| MAXIMUM
| |
| ...... 1 ____ _ USEC/CM I CS" MEASUREDFREQUENCY C(,.2!, VOLTS/CM __ so_M_v ___ _ REVIEWED AND ACCEPTED SIGNATURE DATE SwRI FORM RD-2-4 CERTIFICATION PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH Xll-RD-101 G-81 G'.l I 00 N ,** '' --SEARCH UNIT BEAM PROFILE " ' !DISTANCE VS AMPLITUDE
| |
| -. RANGE Cl SEARCH UNIT TEST EQUIPMENT BRANO Si..0 L"I-sSC)n;v SERIAL NO. I!. e c.:1-* . 01)' TYPE CASE STYLE ANGLE 1 5oO" x* '.o" Mee." I CRYSTAL SIZE FREQ. MODEL GAIN dB '1'1 TESTED BY:s DATE SERIAL NO. Qf l!E, lb IUou 100 90 80 , " ..... s I r I 70 ,. . G ... N ... A 60 -L .... ... A r.... M 50 .... p -L ... I 40 .... T """' -u . -0 / E 30 --*---20 10 e-r-r---1------*--,_,_ 1---r-------,__ _ _ ,_ 1-----1---0 1/2 1 1: 1/2 2 2-1/2 HOJ_E DEPUI IN STEEL SwRI FORM*RD-5-3
| |
| * ** . ; " TEST BLOCK REVIEWED & ACCEPTED CARBON STEEL WITH 4 1/8 INCH DIAMETER / SIDE DRILLED HOLE y-'1 DATE II " ... ... . -... ..... 3 3-1/2 4
| |
| * *** -* * ... *. __ FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND R.F. WAVEFORM ANALYSIS DATE 4
| |
| <? 4 OPERATOR$.
| |
| '-ni c..hof son SEARCH UNIT MANUFACTURER
| |
| __
| |
| ______ SERIAL NO.
| |
| --------CASE STYLE f?..E" c.... 'T. TEST ANGLE ___ o=-0 _______ ___,__ =-;n ll J ..t!!!...
| |
| CRYSTAL SIZE FREQUENCY
| |
| * -::J ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER ANAL SETTINGS . ATTENUATION
| |
| \ GATEWIDTH GAINTRIM __ 026 _____ _ DAMPING 555 MODE -noem. EXT. PULSER _D_O_W_N_.
| |
| ----GATE DELAY .5 ¢. REP. RATE 115 EXT. TRIGGER DOWN SPECTRUM ANALVZER -R.F. SECTION INPUT ATTENUATION 30 SCANWIDTH
| |
| ____ 1 M_H_z ______ _ CENTER FREQUENCY 6 ;0 TUNING STABILIZER
| |
| __ O_F_F _______ _ BAND WIDTH 30 KHz RANGE 0-11 SPECTRUM ANAL VZER -l.F. SECTION LOG REF. LEVEL MV/DIV DISPLAY ADJUST ___ o ________ _ VIDEO FILTER ___ OF_F __ TRIGGER ______ AU_T_O_M_A_Tl_C
| |
| ____ _ SCAN TIME/DIV.
| |
| __ 2 ___ MILi SEC TARGET REFLECTOR 0 3/32 INCH, 1/3 THOLE IN PT 300 BLOCK 0 3/16 INCH, 3/4T HOLE IN E.E.I. BLOCK Ii(: PLASTIC BALL BLOCK S.D.H. 0 OTHER -------SwRISPEC PHOTOGRAPH DATA MINIMUM I * ,3
| |
| * MHz/DIV -----'------
| |
| MAXIMUM * 'l USEC/CM _ _.J_AJ_CS
| |
| ___ _ MEASURED FREQUENCY VOLTS/CM __ so_M_v ___ _ REVIEWED AND ACCEPTED SwRI FORM RD-2-4 CERTIFICATION PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH Xll-RD-101 . G-83
| |
| ... *. SEARCH UNIT BEAM PROFILE * *ID !DISTANCE VS AMPLITUDE
| |
| -RANGE Bl SEARCH UNIT TEST EQUIPMENT TEST BLOCK REVIEWED & ACCEPTED BRAND SwfL -r.. SERIAL NO.
| |
| 'f STAINLESS STEEL WITH R_t;;C...T*
| |
| oo TYPE CASE STYLE ANGLE l/fJ INCH DIAMETER l
| |
| * 5 WAe.t: ::c. *CRYSTAL SIZE FREQ. MODEL SIOE DRILLED HOLE SIGNATURE GAIN dB' riq TESTED BY: DATE SERIAL NO. 0HQ9e '3, . i vht> f Soh "f '. 100 I 90 80 s !'I.. .. I ...... G 10 -N \. A ' L 60 A ' M ' p 60 L l ., I "" T ' u 40 I'll.. D '""" -E 30 ... 20 I"" 10 0 1/4 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-3/4 2 HOLE DEPTH IN STEEL SwRI FORM RD-4-2 * *
| |
| * **
| |
| * MANUFACTURER CASE STYLE CRYSTAL SIZE ATTENUATION DAMPING GATE DELAY FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND R.F. WAVEFORM ANALYSIS DATE I 3 J\..b u . OPERATOR s , '\, _ I (.
| |
| * I\..) I c:.....>rt.Q AJ SEARCH UNIT SW E..:t: SERIAL NO.
| |
| _________
| |
| _ 12..d....
| |
| TEST ANGLE ___ o=-0 ________ _ I Q_:,o" FREQUENCY s.o ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER ANAL VZER SETTINGS 3 GATEWIDTH ax I GAIN TRIM __ 026 _____ _ 555 MODE :t-t C!.L EXT. PULSER _D_OW_N ____ _ I REP. RATE 1 15 EXT. TRIGGER _D_O_W_N ____ _ SPECTRUM ANAL VZER R.F. SECTION INPUT ATTENUATION
| |
| __ c;>._o _______ SCANWIDTH
| |
| ____ 1_M_H_z ______ _ CENTER FREQUENCY
| |
| _______ TUNING STABILIZER
| |
| __ o_F_F __________
| |
| _ BAND WIDTH 30 KHz RANGE 0-11 SPECTRUM ANAL VZER -l.F. SECTION LOG REF. LEVEL __ ........_
| |
| __ MV /DIV DISPLAY ADJUST ___ O ________ _ VIDEO FILTER ___ OF_F __ TRIGGER _____ ,A_U_T_O_M_A_T1_c
| |
| ____ _ * " SCAN TIME/DIV.
| |
| __ 2 MILJSEC 0 0 0 TARGET REFLECTOR 3/32 INCH, 1/3 THOLE IN PT 300 BLOCK 3/16 INCH, 3/4T HOLE IN E.E.I. BLOCK OTHER SwRI SPEC PHOTOGRAPH DATA VOLTS/CM __ so_M_v ___ _ MINIMUM ___ '-f._._.1.S
| |
| ___ _ MAXIMUM ---=5..._l_,__.5
| |
| __ _ MHz/DIV --'--,,.-----
| |
| USEC/CM __ ._Z_iJ_:s
| |
| ___ _ S.3 MEASURED FREQUENCY REVIEWED AND ACCEPTED SIGNATURE DATE SwRI FORM RD-2-4 CERTIFICATION PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH Xll-RD-101 G-85 G"J I 00 °' _. 100 90 80 s I G 70 N A L 60 A M p 60 L I T u 40 D E 30 20 10 0 SwRI FORM RD-4-3 * . ! -. l . ' '. ; SEARCH UNIT BEAM PROFILE CDISTANCE VS AMPLITUDE
| |
| -RANGE DI SEARCH UNIT TEST EQUIPMENT TEST BLOCK REVIEWED & ACCEPTED BRAND e..-:r. SERIAL NO. o2t,, 58 CARBON STEEL WITH '2.d... oo TYPE LJhL CASE STYLE ANGLE 118 INCH DIAMETER I 2'5o II d1.<.o....I
| |
| ..5.o WI A e j!_ :S:. MODEL CRYSTAL SIZE '-f SIDE DRILLED HOLE GAIN dB DATE SERIAL ND. 0 HO<i IE. TESTED BY: s
| |
| * tJ ,'d..._o Is 13 0oc.J. DATE . I ' I ' I I'.. ' I\ I I ' " I r " ' " !"-... .... .... I'. ...... _ -.... 1/4 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-3/4 2 HOLE DEPTH IN STEEL '. *
| |
| * *---*
| |
| * FREQUENCY SPECTRUM AND R.F. WAVEFORM ANALYSIS Cf Oc.. +. e L.f OPERATOR s . '\ , L J . /\..) 1c n.a ..sio" DATE SEARCH UNIT MANUFACTURER
| |
| _
| |
| SERIAL NO. --=c2>-.;(e=-oJ
| |
| ..... 3 _______ _ CASE STYLE e..e c; .. :T. TEST ANGLE __ __,_,..__0 __ __; _____ _ CRYSTAL SIZE :=,.' " 11 FREQUENCY I. 5 ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER ANAL VZER SETTINGS ATTENUATION DAMPING GATE DELAY Ql GATEWIDTH (p(a,5 GAIN TRIM __ 026 _____ _ 555 MODE -no fl..l'Yl.
| |
| EXT. PULSER _D.-O_W_N_-
| |
| ----511 REP. RATE-115 EXT. TRIGGER DOWN SPECTRUM ANAL VZER -R.F. SECTION INPUT ATTENUATION CENTER FREQUENCY BANDWIDTH 2;o SCAN WIDTH ____ 1 M_Hz ______ _ S . 0 TUNING STABILIZER
| |
| __ o_F_F _______ _ 30KHz RANGE 0-11 SPECTRUM ANAL VZER -l.F. SECTION LOG REF. LEVEL MV/DIV DISPLAY ADJUST ___ o ________ _ VIDEO FILTER ___ OF_F __ TRIGGER _____ A_U_T_O_M_A_TI_c
| |
| ____ _ SCAN TIME/DIV.
| |
| 2 Mill SEC TARGET REFLECTOR SwRISPEC PHOTOGRAPH DATA MINIMUM L3 MHz/DIV I 0 3/32 INCH, 1 /3 T HOLE IN PT 300 L '7 l J..J.s BLOCK MAXIMUM USEC/CM MEASURED FREQUENCY 50MV -* 0 3/16 INCH, 3/4T HOLE IN E.E.I. VOLTS/CM BLOCK .g' PLASTIC BALL BLOCK S.D.H. 0 OTHER SIGNATURE DATE SwRI FORM RD-2-4 CERTIFICATION PERFORMED IN ACCORDANCE WITH Xll-AD-101 G-87 .
| |
| <;) I 00 00 ID 100 90 llO . s I G 70 N A L 60 A M p 50 L I T u 40 D E 30 20 10 0 SwRI FORM RD-4-2 * .. SEARCH UNIT BEAM PROFILE IDISTANCE VS AMPLITUDE
| |
| -RANGE Bl SEARCH UNIT TEST EQUIPMENT TEST BLOCK REVIEWED & ACCEPTED BRAND Swe :r. SERIAL NO.
| |
| STAINLESS STEEL WITH
| |
| ()0 TYPE tf..._JM CASE STYLE ANGLE -I/II INCH DIAMETER .3) &' II I. 6 mAtt..t. I. *CRYSTAL SIZE FREQ. MODEL SIDE DRILLED HOLE SIGNATURE GAIN dB er::, /P,#z./it/
| |
| TESTED BY: s DATE SERIAL NO. 0 ( f 09 e fl..Ji chc \ * \0 Oa;t. 84 l ' \ ' , ' \ l .... ' .... -... ' ....: -.... .... ------1/4 1/2 3/4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 1-3/4 2* HOLE DEPTH IN STEEL
| |
| * APPENDIX H CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION FORMS *--.. -. \ *
| |
| ** CNF 84-2-001 84-2-002 ** APPENDIX H CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION FORMS Findings One VT indication bolting for valve One UT indication flywheel No. 24 Table of Contents on 22 RH 4 on H-i Disposition Accepted "as is" after evaluation by PSE&G personnel Closed Yes One UT indication.
| |
| Indi-Yes cation was a lamination with no depth and no percent loss of backwall.
| |
| Indication was not ob-served with angle beam scan. Resolved as accept-able per guidelines of USNRC Regulatory Guide* 1.14 *
| |
| --* ./ Southwest Research Institute Serial N2. Site Uti Ii ty FORM NOTIFICATION CUSTOMER Part I -Sw RI Findings
| |
| * Examination Comments f-xamina.tion Reference
| |
| : -! R.t V5u Type of Examination o PS! )(rs:r Signature of SwR! Repre!entative
| |
| ,6 (l!otlficatlon Acknowledged by Signature of Customer Repre Comments Reexamination Reference Signature CNF Closed NOT Method OMT ORT P5Ei-e. ''r"V'\ 2... OUT OPT SwR! . Procedure I Rev. OET )(vT 900-J :So Oate ..3 /,.J
| |
| * Date SwRI. FORM N'OTR-CN'F-1,Rov*I Sou.th west Re search Institute CUSTOMER NOTIFICATION FORM Part I -S*,y RI Findings Project NQ.: 11 -115" S-Type of Examination OPSI )'.ltsI 0 SwRI NOT Method UT PT Procedure/
| |
| Rav: Examination Date' l'fJP.tJ OMT ORT OET OVT Comments .oev, Examination ftt Part II-Customer Notification Notification Ac:kno1fled9ed by ,( Part Ill -Indication Disposition Customer Comment a Si9natur; of Customer Representative Port IV Reexamination Reeaaminotion Referenctt Sl9natur11 Dote 2.-,...(/ CNF Closed SwRI: FORM NOT" -CNF -1, lte*-1 ***}}
| |
